Get documents about "Fort Bragg North Carolina - PDF
Shared by: wanghonghx
-
Stats
- views:
- 131
- posted:
- 7/25/2011
- language:
- English
- pages:
- 812
Document Sample
US Army Corps
Fort Bragg
of Engineers
Savannah District North Carolina
Solicitation Number
W912HN-11-R-0022
SOF C4 Facility
FY-11, PN 66362
Volume 2 of 3
Technical Provisions - Divisions 08 through 23
April 2011
THIS SOLICITATION IS UNRESTRICTED PURSUANT TO THE
"BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY DEVELOPMENT REFORM ACT OF 1988"
(PUBLIC LAW 100-656)
U.S. ARMY ENGINEER DISTRICT, SAVANNAH
CORPS OF ENGINEERS
100 WEST OGLETHORPE AVENUE
SAVANNAH, GEORGIA 31401-3640
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 00 60 JSOC SECURITY
01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE
01 33 00 SUBMITAL PROCEDURES
01 33 29 LEED(TM) DOCUMENTATION
01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL
01 45 00.10 10 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS)
01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTION FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS
01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 57 19.11 INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT
01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
01 58 00 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS
01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 83 16 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00 DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 15 13.00 10 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTRACTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS
03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 33 00 CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 20 00 MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 21 19 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING
05 21 23 STEEL JOIST GIRDER FRAMING
05 30 00 STEEL DECKS
05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
05 51 00 METAL STAIRS
05 51 33 METAL LADDERS
05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 41 16.00 10 LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK
06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
07 13 53 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS
07 21 13 BOARD AND BLOCK INSULATION
07 21 16 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
07 22 00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
07 26 60 BOARD STOCK AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07 81 00 *1 SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING
07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING
07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 12 16 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES AND STOREFRONT FRAMING
08 14 00 WOOD DOORS
08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08 34 01 FORCED ENTRY RESISTANT COMPONENTS
08 39 54 BLAST RESISTANT DOORS
08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08 44 00 GLAZED ASSEMBLIES
08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
08 81 00 GLAZING
08 91 00 METAL WALL LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE
09 22 00 SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
09 30 00 CERAMIC TILE, QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE
09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING
09 68 13 CARPET TILE
09 69 13 RIGID GRID ACCESS FLOORING
09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS
09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 10 00 VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES
10 14 02 INTERIOR SIGNAGE
10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 22 26.33 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
10 26 13 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES
10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 21 00 *1 WINDOW BLINDS
12 48 13.13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
14 24 00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
21 13 18.00 10 PREACTION AND DELUGE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS, FIRE PROTECTION
21 22 00.00 20 CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
23 05 15 COMMON PIPING FOR HVAC
23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
23 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
23 09 13.34 CONTROL VALVES, SELF-CONTAINED
23 09 23 LONWorks DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL
BUILDING SYSTEMS
23 11 25 FACILITY GAS PIPING
23 21 13.00 20 LOW TEMPERATURE WATER LTW HEATING SYSTEM
23 25 00 CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF WATER FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
23 31 13 METAL DUCTS
23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 37 13.00 40 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLS
23 41 13 PANEL FILTERS
23 52 43.00 20 LOW PRESSURE WATER HEATING BOILERS (UNDER 800,000 BTU/HR
OUTPUT)
23 64 10 WATER CHILLERS, VAPOR COMPRESSION TYPE
23 64 26 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
23 65 00 COOLING TOWERS
23 72 26.00 10 DESICCANT COOLING SYSTEMS
23 73 13 MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 81 23.00 20 COMPUTER ROOM AIR HANDLING UNITS
23 82 00.00 20 TERMINAL HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
23 82 16 AIR COILS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
26 05 71.00 40 LOW VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 09 23.00 40 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
26 14 50 MODULAR WIRING SYSTEM
26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
26 23 00.00 40 SWITCHGEAR
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
26 23 00.00 41 SWITCHBOARDS
26 26 53 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY POWER DISTRIBUTION
UNIT
26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION
26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS
26 32 15.00 10 DIESEL-GENERATOR SET STATIONARY WITH AUXILIARIES
26 33 53.00 20 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 28.36 40 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 05 26.00 40 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 00 00 EARTHWORK
31 05 19 GEOTEXTILE
31 05 23 GEOGRID REINFORCEMENT OF PAVEMENT BASE COURSE, AND/OR
SUBGRADE IMPROVEMENT
31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
31 31 16 SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT
32 12 17 HOT MIX BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT
32 13 13.06 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADS AND SITE
FACILITIES
32 16 13 SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS
32 17 24.00 10 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
32 31 13.53 HIGH-SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
32 92 19 SEEDING
32 92 23 SODDING
32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION
33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS
33 32 13.14 PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, GRINDER PUMP TYPE
33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE
33 51 00.00 20 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION
-- End of Project Table of Contents --
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 11 13
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 653/A 653M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 879/A 879M (2006) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, zinc Coated by the Electrolytic
Process for Applications Requiring
Designation of the Coating Mass on Each
Surface
ASTM A 924/A 924M (2010) Standard Specification for General
Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM C 578 (2010) Standard Specification for Rigid,
Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 591 (2009) Standard Specification for Unfaced
Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 612 (2010) Mineral Fiber Block and Board
Thermal Insulation
ASTM D 2863 (2009) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen
Concentration to Support Candle-Like
Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)
ANSI/BHMA A156.115 (2006) Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors
and Steel Frames
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 105 (2010) Installation of Smoke Door
SECTION 08 11 13 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Assemblies
NFPA 252 (2007) Standard Methods of Fire Tests of
Door Assemblies
NFPA 80 (2010; TIA 10-1) Standard for Fire Doors
and Other Opening Protectives
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)
SDI/DOOR 111 (2009) Recommended Selection and Usage
Guide for Standard Steel Doors, Frames and
Accessories
SDI/DOOR 113 (2001; R 2006) Determining the Steady
State Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door
and Frame Assemblies
SDI/DOOR A250.11 (2001) Recommended Erection Instructions
for Steel Frames
SDI/DOOR A250.4 (2001) Test Procedure and Acceptance
Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware
Reinforcings
SDI/DOOR A250.6 (2003) Hardware on Steel Doors
(Reinforcement - Application)
SDI/DOOR A250.8 (2003; R2008) Recommended Specifications
for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 10B (2008; Rev thru Apr 2009) Fire Tests of
Door Assemblies
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors; G
Frames; G
Accessories; G
Weatherstripping; G
Show elevations, construction details, metal gages, hardware
provisions, method of glazing, and installation details.
Schedule of doors; G
SECTION 08 11 13 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Schedule of frames; G
Submit door and frame locations.
SD-03 Product Data
Doors
Frames
Accessories
Weatherstripping
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for doors, frames,
and accessories. Include data and details on door construction,
panel (internal) reinforcement, insulation, and door edge
construction. When "custom hollow metal doors" are provided in
lieu of "standard steel doors," provide additional details and
data sufficient for comparison to SDI/DOOR A250.8 requirements.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver doors, frames, and accessories undamaged and with protective
wrappings or packaging. Strap knock-down frames in bundles. Provide
temporary steel spreaders securely fastened to the bottom of each welded
frame. Store doors and frames on platforms under cover in clean, dry,
ventilated, and accessible locations, with 1/4 inch airspace between
doors. Remove damp or wet packaging immediately and wipe affected surfaces
dry. Replace damaged materials with new.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
SDI/DOOR A250.8, except as specified otherwise. Prepare doors to receive
door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00. Undercut where indicated.
Exterior doors shall have top edge closed flush and sealed to prevent water
intrusion. Doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2.1.1 Classification - Level, Performance, Model
2.1.1.1 Standard Duty Doors
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, of size(s)
and design(s) indicated and core construction as required by the
manufacturer. Provide where shown.
2.1.1.2 Heavy Duty Doors
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, with core
construction as required by the manufacturer for exterior doors, of size(s)
and design(s) indicated. Where vertical stiffener cores are required, the
space between the stiffeners shall be filled with mineral board
insulation. Provide Level 2 where indicated.
SECTION 08 11 13 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2 INSULATED STEEL DOOR SYSTEMS
Insulated steel doors shall have a core of polyurethane foam and an R
factor of 10.0 or more (based on a k value of 0.16); face sheets, edges,
and frames of galvanized steel not lighter than 23 gage, 16 gage, and 16
gage respectively; magnetic weatherstripping; nonremovable-pin hinges;
thermal-break aluminum threshold; and vinyl door bottom. Doors and frames
shall receive phosphate treatment, rust-inhibitive primer, and baked
acrylic enamel finish. Doors shall have been tested in accordance with
SDI/DOOR A250.4 and shall have met the requirements for Level C. Prepare
doors to receive specified hardware.Doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick.
Provide insulated steel doors and frames where shown
2.3 SOUND RATED STEEL DOORS
Doors shall have a Sound Transmission Class (STC) as indicated on the
drawings.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
2.4.1 Astragals
For pairs of exterior steel doors which will not have aluminum astragals or
removable mullions, as specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE provide
overlapping steel astragals with the doors.
2.4 INSULATION CORES
Insulated cores shall be of type specified, and provide an apparent
U-factor of .48 in accordance with SDI/DOOR 113 and shall conform to:
a. Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Foam: ASTM C 591, Type I or II,
foamed-in-place or in board form, with oxygen index of not less
than 22 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2863; or
b. Rigid Polystyrene Foam Board: ASTM C 578, Type I or II; or
c. Mineral board: ASTM C 612, Type I.
2.5 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 2 or 3, except as otherwise specified. Form frames
to sizes and shapes indicated, with welded corners or knock-down
field-assembled corners. Provide steel frames for doors unless otherwise
indicated.
2.5.1 Welded Frames
Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints. Mechanically interlock or
continuously weld stops and rabbets. Grind welds smooth.
Weld frames in accordance with the recommended practice of the Structural
Welding Code Sections 1 through 6, AWS D1.1/D1.1M and in accordance with
the practice specified by the producer of the metal being welded.
All exterior frames are to be welded.
SECTION 08 11 13 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.5.2 Knock-Down Frames
Design corners for simple field assembly by concealed tenons, splice
plates, or interlocking joints that produce square, rigid corners and a
tight fit and maintain the alignment of adjoining members. Provide
locknuts for bolted connections.
2.5.3 Mullions and Transom Bars
Mullions and transom bars shall be closed or tubular construction and be a
member with heads and jambs butt-welded thereto or knock-down for field
assembly. Bottom of door mullions shall have adjustable floor anchors and
spreader connections.
2.5.4 Stops and Beads
Form stops and beads from 20 gage steel. Provide for glazed and other
openings in standard steel frames. Secure beads to frames with oval-head,
countersunk Phillips self-tapping sheet metal screws or concealed clips and
fasteners. Space fasteners approximately 12 to 16 inch on center. Miter
molded shapes at corners. Butt or miter square or rectangular beads at
corners.
2.5.5 Anchors
Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide
steel anchors, zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not
lighter than 18 gage.
2.5.5.1 Wall Anchors
Provide at least three anchors for each jamb. For frames which are more
than 7.5 feet in height, provide one additional anchor for each jamb for
each additional 2.5 feet or fraction thereof.
a. Masonry: Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps
or 3/16 inch diameter steel wire, adjustable or T-shaped;
b. Stud partitions: Weld or otherwise securely fasten anchors to
backs of frames. Design anchors to be fastened to wood studs with
nails, to closed steel studs with sheet metal screws, and to open
steel studs by wiring or welding;
c. Completed openings: Secure frames to previously placed concrete
or masonry with expansion bolts in accordance with SDI/DOOR 111;
and
2.5.5.2 Floor Anchors
Provide floor anchors drilled for 3/8 inch anchor bolts at bottom of each
jamb member. Where floor fill occurs, terminate bottom of frames at the
indicated finished floor levels and support by adjustable extension clips
resting on and anchored to the structural slabs.
2.6 FIRE DOORS AND FRAMES
NFPA 80 and this specification. The requirements of NFPA 80 shall take
precedence over details indicated or specified.
SECTION 08 11 13 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.6.1 Labels
Fire doors and frames shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories
(UL), Factory Mutual Engineering and Research (FM), or Warnock Hersey
International (WHI) attesting to the rating required. Testing shall be in
accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10B. Labels shall be metal with raised
letters, and shall bear the name or file number of the door and frame
manufacturer. Labels shall be permanently affixed at the factory to frames
and to the hinge edge of the door. Door labels shall not be painted.
2.6.2 Astragal on Fire Doors
On pairs of labeled fire doors, conform to NFPA 80 and UL requirements. On
smoke control doors, conform to NFPA 105.
2.7 WEATHERSTRIPPING
As specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.
2.8 HARDWARE PREPARATION
Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gages as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.6.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive finish hardware. Prepare doors
and frames for hardware in accordance with the applicable requirements of
SDI/DOOR A250.8 and SDI/DOOR A250.6. For additional requirements refer to
ANSI/BHMA A156.115. Drill and tap for surface-applied hardware at the
project site. Build additional reinforcing for surface-applied hardware
into the door at the factory. Locate hardware in accordance with the
requirements of SDI/DOOR A250.8, as applicable. Punch door frames, with
the exception of frames that will have weatherstripping to receive a
minimum of two rubber or vinyl door silencers on lock side of single doors
and one silencer for each leaf at heads of double doors. Set lock strikes
out to provide clearance for silencers.
2.9 FINISHES
2.9.1 Factory-Primed Finish
All surfaces of doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned, chemically
treated and factory primed with a rust inhibiting coating as specified in
SDI/DOOR A250.8, or paintable A25 galvannealed steel without primer. Where
coating is removed by welding, apply touchup of factory primer.
2.9.2 Hot-Dip Zinc-Coated and Factory-Primed Finish
Fabricate exterior doors and frames from hot dipped zinc coated steel,
alloyed type, that complies with ASTM A 924/A 924Mand ASTM A 653/A 653M.
The coating weight shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements for
coatings having 0.4 ounces per square foot, total both sides, i.e., A40.
Repair damaged zinc-coated surfaces by the application of zinc dust paint.
Thoroughly clean and chemically treat to insure maximum paint adhesion.
Factory prime as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.
2.9.3 Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Anchors and Accessories
Provide electrolytically deposited zinc-coated steel in accordance with
ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Quality, Coating Class A. Phosphate treat
and factory prime zinc-coated surfaces as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.
SECTION 08 11 13 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.10 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP
Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance,
and free from defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp,
and buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight, and true, with
joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Dress exposed
welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame sections for use with
the wall construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well formed and in
true alignment. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Design frames in
exposed masonry walls or partitions to allow sufficient space between the
inside back of trim and masonry to receive calking compound.
2.10.1 Grouted Frames
For frames to be installed in exterior walls and to be filled with mortar
or grout, fill the stops with strips of rigid insulation to keep the grout
out of the stops and to facilitate installation of stop-applied head and
jamb seals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Frames
Set frames in accordance with SDI/DOOR A250.11. Plumb, align, and brace
securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with
expansion bolts or powder-actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall
anchors to adjoining construction. Backfill frames with mortar. Coat
inside of frames with corrosion-inhibiting bituminous material. For frames
in exterior walls, ensure that stops are filled with rigid insulation
before grout is placed.
3.1.2 Doors
Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.
After erection and glazing, clean and adjust hardware.
3.1.3 Fire Doors and Frames
Install fire doors and frames, including hardware, in accordance with
NFPA 80.
3.2 PROTECTION
Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames
prior to completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as
directed. Wire brush rusted frames until rust is removed. Clean
thoroughly. Apply an all-over coat of rust-inhibitive paint of the same
type used for shop coat.
3.3 CLEANING
Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly.
Remove mastic smears and other unsightly marks.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 11 13 Page 7
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 12 16
INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES AND STOREFRONT FRAMING
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)
AAMA 2603 (2002) Voluntary Specification,
Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings
on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 36/A 36M (2008) Standard Specification for Carbon
Structural Steel
ASTM B 209 (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM B 221 (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Doors are specified in 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS, door hardware specified in
08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE and glazing is specified in 08 81 00 GLAZING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors, windows and frames; G
Show elevations of each window and frame type, opening
identification number, metal gages, details of frame construction,
methods of anchorage, glazing details, provisions for and location
of hardware, and details of installation. Use same reference
numbers for openings as contract drawings.
SD-03 Product Data
Factory finish, glazing gaskets, accessories
SECTION 08 12 16 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Color chart for finish indicating manufacturer's standard colors
SD-04 Samples
Finish sample
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Doors and frames
Submit detail specifications and instructions for installation,
adjustments, cleaning, and maintenance.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver frames and storefront in cartons to provide protection during
transit and storage at project site.
Inspect frames and glazing upon delivery for damage. Repair minor damage to
pre-finished products by means as recommended by manufacturer. Replace
frames that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
Store frames at project site under cover and as near as possible to final
installation location. Do not use covering material that will cause
discoloration of aluminum finish.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
1.5.1 Single Source Responsibility
Provide aluminum frames, aluminum and accessories produced by a single
manufacturer for each type of product indicated.
1.5.2 Manufacturer's Qualifications
Manufacturer shall demonstrate previous experience in manufacturing
of interior aluminum door and office fronts framing for a period of not
less than 10 years on comparable sized project.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not begin installation of frames or glazing until area of work has been
completely enclosed and interior is protected from the elements.
Maintain temperature and humidity in areas of installation within
reasonable limits, as close as possible to final occupancy. If necessary,
provide temperature control and ventilation to maintain required
environmental conditions.
1.7 WARRANTY
Warrant against defects in manufacturing of materials for a period of 2
years from date of substantial completion.
Warrant framing finish against defects, including cracking, flaking,
blistering, peeling, and excessive fading, chalking and non-uniformity
in color for a period of 5 years.
SECTION 08 12 16 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES
Aluminum door and window frames of size, design, and location indicated.
Provide frames, framing members, subframes, transoms, adjoining sidelights,
adjoining window wall, trim, and accessories.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Aluminum
Meeting requirements of ASTM B221, 6063T5 alloy, and as otherwise required
to assure compliance with dimensional tolerances and maintain color
uniformity. Billets shall be composed of at least 33% recycled aluminum.
2.2.2 Anchorage Devices, Clips and Fasteners
Manufacturer's standard type, compatible with materials being secured.
2.2.3 Accessories
As necessary for complete system.
2.2.4 Anchors
Stainless steel or steel with hot-dipped galvanized finish.
2.2.5 Aluminum Alloy for Frames
ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions. ASTM B 209, alloy and temper
best suited for aluminum sheets and strips.
2.2.6 Fasteners
Hard aluminum or stainless steel.
2.2.7 Structural Steel
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.2.8 Aluminum Paint
Aluminum frame manufacturer's standard aluminum paint.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
3.1.1 Aluminum Frames
Extruded aluminum shapes with contours approximately as indicated. Provide
removable glass stops and glazing beads for frames accommodating fixed
glass. Use countersunk stainless steel Phillips screws for exposed
fastenings, and space not more than 12 inches on center. Mill joints in
frame members to a hairline fit, reinforce, and secure mechanically.
SECTION 08 12 16 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.1.2 Extruded Aluminum Frame Fabrication
Utilize adjustable angle vertical mullion for segmented curved
OfficeFronts.
Utilize reduced profile corner section for 90 degree corners.
Assemble all door frames, sidelights, and window units with screws
utilizing internal screw spline system, insert into the drywall
rough opening, and then attach perimeter flanges.
Assemble all sidelights and windows without the use of clips.
Do not exceed maximum size of window or door to meet applicable
code requirements.
Factory pre-machine door frame jambs and prepare for hardware,
with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and tapped as
required, and fastened within frame with concealed screws.
3.1.3 Welding and Fastening
Where possible, locate welds on unexposed surfaces. Dress welds on exposed
surfaces smoothly. Select welding rods, filler wire, and flux to produce a
uniform texture and color in finished work. Remove flux and spatter from
surfaces immediately after welding. Exposed screws or bolts will be
permitted only in inconspicuous locations, and shall have countersunk
heads. Weld concealed reinforcements for hardware in place.
3.1.4 Anchors
On the backs of subframes, provide anchors of the sizes and shapes
indicated for securing subframes to adjacent construction. Anchor transom
bars at ends and mullions at head and sill. Reinforce vertical mullions
with structural steel members of sufficient length to extend up to the
overhead structural slab or framing and secure thereto in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation. Place anchors near top and bottom of each
jamb and at intermediate points not more than 25 inches apart.
3.1.5 Provisions for Hardware
Coordinate with Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE. Deliver hardware templates
and hardware (except field-applied hardware) to the door manufacturer for
use in fabrication of wood doors and aluminum frames. Cut, reinforce,
drill, and tap doors and frames at the factory to receive template
hardware. Provide doors to receive surface-applied hardware, except push
plates, kick plates, and mop plates, with reinforcing only; drill and tap
in the field. Provide hardware reinforcements of stainless steel or steel
with hot-dipped galvanized finish, and secure with stainless steel screws.
3.1.6 Provisions for Glazing
Provide extruded aluminum snap-in glazing beads on interior side of doors.
Provide extruded aluminum, theft-proof, snap-in glazing beads or fixed
glazing beads on exterior or security side of doors. Glazing beads shall
have vinyl insert glazing gaskets. Design glazing beads to receive glass
of thickness indicated or specified.
SECTION 08 12 16 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.1.7 Finishes
Provide exposed aluminum surfaces with factory finish of organic coating.
3.1.7.1 Factory Finish
Factory finish extruded frame and door components so that all parts exposed
to view upon completion of installation are uniform in finish and color.
Exposed surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious blemishes.
3.1.7.2 Factory Applied Paint Finish
Comply with AAMA(2603)603.8 and AA-DAF-45, factory applied backed enamel
coating.
Color: White, from manufacturer's standard colors.
3.1.7.3 Organic Coating
Clean and prime exposed aluminum surfaces. Provide a baked enamel finish
in accordance with AAMA 2603 with total dry film thickness not less than
0.8 mil.
3.2 EXAMINATION
Examine project conditions and verify that project is ready for work of
this section to proceed. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Verify wall thickness does not exceed manufacturer's recommended tolerances
of specified throat size.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Plumb, square, level, and align frames and framing members to receive
doors, transoms, adjoining sidelights, and, adjoining window walls. Anchor
frames to adjacent construction as indicated and in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions. Anchor bottom of each frame to rough
floor construction with 3/32 inch thick stainless steel angle clips secured
to back of each jamb and to floor construction; use stainless steel bolts
and expansion rivets for fastening clip anchors. After erection and
glazing and door installation, adjust doors and hardware to operate
properly.
Comply with frame manufacturer's printed installation instructions and
approved shop drawings. Do not attempt installation in areas where wall
thickness exceeds tolerances of specified throat size.
Install frames plumb and square, free from warp or twist, securely anchored
to substrates with fasteners recommended by frame manufacturer. Maintain
dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. Ensure joints are
hairline tight and surfaces flush with adjacent components.
Install glass in accordance with Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.
SECTION 08 12 16 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.4 PROTECTION FROM DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
3.4.1 Dissimilar Metals
Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless
steel, zinc, or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact to
dissimilar metals.
3.4.1.1 Protection
Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless
steel, zinc, or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact to
dissimilar metals.
a. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous
paint.
b. Apply a good quality elastomeric sealant between the aluminum and the
dissimilar metal.
c. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of
aluminum paint.
d. Use a nonabsorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Upon completion of installation, clean frame surfaces in accordance with
manufacturer's written recommended procedure. Do not use abrasive,
caustic, or acid cleaning agents.
Protect exposed portions of aluminum surfaces from damage by plaster, lime,
acid, cement, and other contaminants.
Touch up marred areas so that touch-up is not visible from a distance of 4
feet. Remove and replace frames that cannot be satisfactorily adjusted.
3.6 PROTECTION
Protect as required to assure that frames and doors will be without damage
until Substantial Completion. Protect doors and frames from damage and
from contamination by other materials such as cement mortar. Prior to
completion and acceptance of the work, restore damaged frames to original
condition, or replace with new ones.
3.7 EXAMINATION
Examine project conditions and verify that project is ready for work of
this section to proceed. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Verify wall thickness does not exceed manufacturer's recommended tolerances
of specified throat size.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 12 16 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 14 00
WOOD DOORS
07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)
AWI Qual Stds (8th Edition) AWI Quality Standards
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM E 283 (2004) Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen
ASTM E 90 (2009) Standard Test Method for Laboratory
Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 80 (2010; TIA 10-1) Standard for Fire Doors
and Other Opening Protectives
WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (WDMA)
WDMA I.S. 1-A (1997) Architectural Wood Flush Doors
WDMA I.S. 4 (2000) Water-Repellent Preservative
Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork
WDMA TM-5 (1990) Split Resistance Test Method
WDMA TM-7 (1990) Cycle Slam Test Method
WDMA TM-8 (1990) Hinge Loading Test Method
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors; G
Submit drawings or catalog data showing each type of door unit.
Drawings and data shall indicate door type and construction,
SECTION 08 14 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
sizes, thickness.
SD-03 Product Data
Doors;
Accessories
Sample warranty
Sound transmission class rating
Fire resistance rating
SD-04 Samples
Doors
Prior to the delivery of wood doors, submit a sample section of
each type of door which shows the stile, rail, veneer, finish, and
core construction.
Door finish colors
Refer to finish legend and door schedule for specific colors.
Submit a minimum of three color samples for approval by the
Contracting Officer.
SD-06 Test Reports
Split resistance
Cycle-slam
Hinge loading resistance
Submit split resistance test report for doors tested in accordance
with WDMA TM-5, cycle-slam test report for doors tested in
accordance with WDMA TM-7, and hinge loading resistance test
report for doors tested in accordance with WDMA TM-8.
1.3 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CERTIFICATION
Product shall be third party certified by GEI Greenguard Indoor Air Quality
Certified, SCS Scientific Certification Systems Indoor Advantage or equal.
Certfication shall be performed annually and shall be currrent.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver doors to the site in an undamaged condition and protect against
damage and dampness. Stack doors flat under cover. Support on blocking, a
minimum of 4 inch thick, located at each end and at the midpoint of the
door. Store doors in a well-ventilated building so that they will not be
exposed to excessive moisture, heat, dryness, direct sunlight, or extreme
changes of temperature and humidity. Do not store in a building under
construction until concrete, masonry work, and plaster are dry. Replace
defective or damaged doors with new ones.
SECTION 08 14 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.5 WARRANTY
Warrant doors free of defects as set forth in the door manufacturer's
standard door warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS
Provide doors of the types, sizes, and designs indicated. All wood veneer
surfaces and wood components shall be FSC Certified as requireed by project
LEED reuqirements.
2.1.1 Flush Doors
Conform to WDMA I.S. 1-A for flush doors. Provide hollow core doors with
lock blocks and 1 inch minimum thickness hinge stile. Hardwood stile edge
bands of doors receives a natural finish, compatible with face veneer.
Provide mill option for stile edge of doors scheduled to be painted. No
visible finger joints will be accepted in stile edge bands. When used,
locate finger-joints under hardware.
2.1.1.1 Interior Flush Doors
Provide particleboard core, Type II flush doors conforming to WDMA I.S. 1-A
with faces of good grade premium natural birch. Hardwood veneers shall be
rotary cut.
2.1.2 Acoustical Doors
WDMA I.S. 1-A, solid core, constructed to provide Sound Transmission Class
rating of 45 & 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 90.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
2.2.1 Weatherstripping
Provide weatherstripping that is a standard cataloged product of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of this specialized item.
Provide weatherstripping looped neoprene or vinyl held in an extruded
non-ferrous metal housing. Air leakage of weatherstripped doors not to
exceed 0.5 cubic feet per minute of air per square foot of door area when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
2.2.2 Additional Hardware Reinforcement
Provide the minimum lock blocks to secure the specified hardware. The
measurement of top, bottom, and intermediate rail blocks are a minimum 125
mm 5 inch by full core width. Comply with the manufacturer's labeling
requirements for reinforcement blocking, but not mineral material similar
to the core.
2.3 FABRICATION
2.3.1 Marking
Stamp each door with a brand, stamp, or other identifying mark indicating
quality and construction of the door.
SECTION 08 14 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.3.2 Quality and Construction
Identify the standard on which the construction of the door was based and
identify doors having a Type I glue bond.
2.3.3 Preservative Treatment
Treat doors scheduled for restrooms, janitor closets and other possible wet
locations including exterior doors with a water-repellent preservative
treatment and so marketed at the manufacturer's plant in accordance with
WDMA I.S. 4.
2.3.4 Adhesives and Bonds
WDMA I.S. 1-A. Use Type II bond for interior doors. Provide a nonstaining
adhesive on doors with a natural finish.
2.3.5 Prefitting
Provide factory prefinished and factory prefitted doors for the specified
hardware, door frame and door-swing indicated. Machine and size doors at
the factory by the door manufacturer in accordance with the standards under
which the doors are produced and manufactured. Provide the door
manufacturer with the necessary hardware samples, and frame and hardware
schedules to coordinate the work.
2.3.6 Finishes
2.3.6.1 Field Painting
Factory prime or seal doors, and field paint.
2.3.6.2 Factory Finish
Provide doors finished at the factory by the door manufacturer as follows:
AWI Qual Stds Section 1500, specification for System No. 4 Conversion
varnish alkyd urea or System No. 5 Vinyl catalyzed. The coating is
AWI Qual Stds premium, medium rubbed sheen, closed grain effect. Use stain
when required to produce the finish specified for color. Seal edges,
cutouts, trim, and wood accessories, and apply two coats of finish
compatible with the door face finish. Touch-up finishes that are scratched
or marred, or where exposed fastener holes are filled, in accordance with
the door manufacturer's instructions. Match color and sheen of factory
finish using materials compatible for field application.
2.3.6.3 Color
Provide door finish colors as indicated from the door and finish schedules.
2.3.7 Water-Resistant Sealer
Provide manufacturer's standard water-resistant sealer compatible with the
specified finishes.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Meet or exceed the following minimum performance criteria of stiles of "B"
and "C" label fire doors utilizing standard mortise leaf hinges:
SECTION 08 14 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
a. Split resistance: Averages of ten test samples not less than 500
pounds load when tested in accordance with WDMA TM-5.
b. Cycle-slam: 200,000 cycles with no loose hinge screws or other
visible signs of failure when tested in accordance with the
requirements of WDMA TM-7.
c. Hinge loading resistance: Averages of ten test samples not less
than 700 pounds load when tested for direct screw withdrawal in
accordance with WDMA TM-8 using a No. 12, 1-1/4 inch long, steel,
fully threaded wood screw. Drill 5/32 inch pilot hole, use 1-1/2
inch opening around screw for bearing surface, and engage screw
full, except for last 1/8 inch. Do not use a steel plate to
reinforce screw area.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Before installation, seal top and bottom edges of doors with the approved
water-resistant sealer. Seal cuts made on the job immediately after
cutting using approved water-resistant sealer. Fit, trim, and hang doors
with a 1/16 inch minimum, 1/8 inch maximum clearance at sides and top, and a
3/16 inch minimum, 1/4 inch maximum clearance over thresholds. Provide
3/8 inch minimum, 7/16 inch maximum clearance at bottom where no threshold
occurs. Bevel edges of doors at the rate of 1/8 inch in 2 inch. Door warp
shall not exceed1/4 inch when measured in accordance with WDMA I.S. 1-A.
3.1.1 Fire Doors
Install fire doors in accordance with NFPA 80. Do not paint over labels.
3.1.2 Weatherstripping
Install doors in strict accordance with the door manufacturer's printed
installation instructions and details. Weatherstrip exterior swing-type
doors at sills, heads and jambs to provide weathertight installation.
Apply weatherstripping at sills to bottom rails of doors and hold in place
with a brass or bronze plate. Apply weatherstripping to door frames at
jambs and head. Shape weatherstripping at sills to suit the threshold.
Meeting stiles of exterior double-doors shall be made weathertight by means
of a looped vinyl or neoprene strip in an extruded nonferrous metal housing
applied to the edge of one door leaf.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 14 00 Page 5
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 33 23
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
07/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)
ASCE 7-05 (2006; Errata 2007) Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B29.400 (2001; R 2008) Combination, "H" Type Mill
Chains, and Sprockets
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 153/A 153M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
ASTM A 27/A 27M (2008) Standard Specification for Steel
Castings, Carbon, for General Application
ASTM A 307 (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon
Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength
ASTM A 36/A 36M (2008) Standard Specification for Carbon
Structural Steel
ASTM A 48/A 48M (2003; R 2008) Standard Specification for
Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 653/A 653M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 780/A 780M (2009) Standard Practice for Repair of
Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A 924/A 924M (2010) Standard Specification for General
Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
SECTION 08 33 23 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
ASTM D 2000 (2008) Standard Classification System for
Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
ASTM E 330 (2002) Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain
Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference
ASTM F 568M (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon
and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric
Fasteners
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for
Industrial Control and Systems:
Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC
or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 - Disconnect
Devices for Use in Industrial Control
Equipment
NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2006) Standard for Industrial
Controls and Systems Enclosures
NEMA MG 1 (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors
and Generators
NEMA ST 1 (1988; R 1997) Standard for Specialty
Transformers (Except General Purpose Type)
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2011) National Electrical Code
1.2 DESCRIPTION
Overhead coiling doors to be counterbalanced doors by methods of
manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical
torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring
barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed or
self-lubricating bearings for rotating members. Doors to be coiling type,
with interlocking slats, complete with anchoring and door hardware, guides,
hood, and operating mechanisms, and designed for use on openings as
indicated.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 Wind Loading
Design and fabricate door assembly to withstand the wind loading pressure
of at least 20 pounds per square foot (for overhead door 625 series) with a
maximum deflection of 1/120 of the opening width. Provide test data
showing compliance with ASTM E 330. Sound engineering principles may be
used to interpolate or extrapolate test results to door sizes not
specifically tested Complete assembly must meet or exceed the requirements
of ASCE 7-05.
SECTION 08 33 23 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.3.2 Operational Cycle Life
All portions of the door, hardware and operating mechanism that are subject
to movement, wear, or stress fatigue must be designed to operate through a
minimum number of 10 cycles per day. One complete cycle of door operation
is defined as when the door is in the closed position, moves to the fully
open position, and returns to the closed position.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Provide fabrication drawings that show complete assembly with
hardware and framing details for the following items:
Overhead Coiling Doors; G
Counterbalancing Mechanism; G
Electric Door Operators; G
Bottom Bar; G
Guides; G
Mounting Brackets; G
Overhead Drum; G
Hood; G
Factory Finish; G
Submit Installation Drawings in accordance with paragraph
entitled, "Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies," of this section.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items listing
all accessories including supports, locks and latches, and weather
stripping.
Overhead Coiling Doors
Hardware
Counterbalancing Mechanism
Electric Door Operators
SD-05 Design Data
Submit equipment and performance data for the following items in
SECTION 08 33 23 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Performance
Requirements," of this section.
Overhead Coiling Doors
Hardware
Counterbalancing Mechanism
Electric Door Operators
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door
Assemblies , including the following items:
Materials
Devices
Procedures
Manufacture's Brochures
Parts Lists
Cleaning
1.5 OVERHEAD COILING DOOR DETAIL SHOP DRAWINGS
Provide installation drawings for overhead coiling door assemblies which
show elevations of each door type, shape and thickness of materials,
finishes, details of joints and connections, and details of guides and
fittings, rough opening dimensions, location and description of hardware,
anchorage locations, and counterbalancing mechanism and door operator
details. Show locations of replaceable fusible links wiring diagrams for
power, signal and controls. Include a schedule showing the location of
each door with the drawings.
Contractor must submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals 30
calendar days prior to testing the Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies.
Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days
prior to contract completion.
Provide operation and maintenance manuals which are consistent with
manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions,
general operating procedures, and safety precautions. Provide test data
that is legible and of good quality.
1.6 WARRANTY, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door
Assemblies, including the following items:
Materials
Devices
Electric Door Operators
SECTION 08 33 23 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Hood
Counterbalancing Mechanism
Factory Finish
Procedures
Manufacture's Brochures
Parts Lists
Contractor must furnish a written guarantee that the helical spring and
counterbalance mechanism are free from defects in material and workmanship
and that they will remain so for not less than two years after completion
and acceptance of the project.
Contractor must warrant that upon notification by the Government, he will
immediately make good any defects in material, workmanship, and door
operation within the same time period covered by the guarantee, at no cost
to the Government.
1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Delivered doors to the jobsite wrapped in a protective covering with the
brands and names clearly marked thereon. Store doors in a dry location
that is adequately ventilated and free from dirt and dust, water, and other
contaminants, and in a manner that permits easy access for inspection and
handling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
2.1.1 Curtain Materials and Construction
Provide curtain slats which are fabricated from steel sheets conforming to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, Grade A, with the additional requirement of a minimum
yield point of 33,000 psi. Provide sheets which are galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M.
Fabricate doors from interlocking cold-rolled slats, with section profiles
as specified, designed to withstand the specified wind loading. Provide
slats which are continuous without splices for the width of the door.
Provide slats filled with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation
complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and
450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enlose insulation completely
within slat faces on interior surface of slats.
2.1.2 Curtain Bottom Bar
Curtain bottom bars must be pairs of angles from the manufacturer's
standard steel, stainless and aluminum extrusions not less than 2.0 by 2.0
inches by 0.188 inch. Steel extrusions must conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Stainless steel extrusions conforming to ASTM A 666, Type 304. Aluminum
extrusions conforming to ASTM B 221 or(ASTM B 221M). Galvanize angles and
fasteners in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M.
Coat welds and abrasions with paint conforming to ASTM A 780/A 780M.
SECTION 08 33 23 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.3 Locks
Provide end and/or wind locks of cast steel conforming to ASTM A 27/A 27M,
Grade B; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, ASTM A 153/A 153M
and ASTM A 924/A 924M and secured at every other curtain slat.
2.1.4 Weather Stripping
Weather-stripping at the door-head and jamb must be 1/8-inch thick sheet
of natural or neoprene rubber with air baffles, secured to the insides of
hoods with galvanized-steel fasteners through continuous galvanized-steel
pressure bars at least 5/8-inch wide and 1/8-inch thick.
Threshold weather-stripping must be 1/8-inch thick sheet natural or
neoprene rubber secured to the bottom bars.
Provide weather-stripping of natural or neoprene rubber conforming to
ASTM D 2000.
2.1.5 Locking Devices
Slide Bolt to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock,
located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
2.1.6 Safety Interlock
Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power
supply when door is locked.
2.1.7 Overhead Drum
Fabricate drums from nominal 0.028-inch thick, hot-dip galvanized steel
sheet with G90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
2.2 HARDWARE
All hardware must conform to ASTM A 153/A 153M, ASTM A 307, ASTM F 568M,
and ASTM A 27/A 27M.
2.2.1 Guides
Fabricate curtain jamb guides from the manufacturer's standard angles or
channels of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise
indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow
curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for
track adjustment.
2.2.2 Equipment Supports
Fabricate door-operating equipment supports from the manufacturer's
standard steel shapes and plates conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, galvanized
in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M. Size the
shapes and plates in accordance with the industry standards for the size,
weight, and type of door installation..
2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an
SECTION 08 33 23 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel
shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with
barrel rings. Use grease-sealed or self-lubricating bearings for rotating
members.
2.3.1 Brackets
Provide the manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron
or cold-rolled steel with one located at each end of the counterbalance
barrel conforming to ASTM A 48/A 48M.
2.3.2 Counterbalance Barrels
Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed,
structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, conforming to
ASTM A 53/A 53M, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support
rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel
deflection to not more than 0.03 inch per foot of span under full load.
2.3.3 Spring Balance
One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs
installed within the barrel capable of producing sufficient torque to
assure easy operation of the door curtain. Provide and size springs to
counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from
outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel
barrel plugs.
2.3.4 Torsion Rod for Counter Balance
Fabricate rod from the manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to
hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.
2.5 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
Provide electrical wiring and door operating controls conforming to the
applicable requirements of NFPA 70.
Electric door-operator assemblies must be the sizes and capacities
recommended and provided by the door manufacturer for specified doors.
Assemblies must be complete with electric motors and factory-prewired motor
controls, starter, gear reduction units, solenoid-operated brakes, clutch,
remote-control stations, manual or automatic control devices, and
accessories as required for proper operation of the doors.
Design the operators so that motors may be removed without disturbing the
limit-switch adjustment and affecting the emergency auxiliary operators.
Provide a manual operator of crank-gear or chain-gear mechanisms with a
release clutch to permit manual operation of doors in case of power
failure. Arrange the emergency manual operator so that it may be put into
and out of operation from floor level, and its use will not affect the
adjustment of the limit switches. Provide an electrical or mechanical
device which will automatically disconnect the motor from the operating
mechanism when the emergency manual operating mechanism is engaged.
2.5.1 Door-Operator Types
Provide an operator which is mounted to the right or left door head plate
SECTION 08 33 23 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
with the operator on coil side of the door-hood assembly and connected to
the door drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Front clearance is
required for this type of mounting.
2.4 Electric Motors
Provide motors which are the high-starting-torque, reversible,
constant-duty electrical type with overload protection of sufficient torque
and horsepower to move the door in either direction from any position and
produce a door-travel speed of not less than 8 nor more than 12 inches per
second without exceeding thehorsepower rating.
Provide motors which conform to NEMA MG 1 designation, temperature rating,
service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency to the requirements
specified.
2.5 Motor Bearings
Bearings must be bronze-sleeve or heavy-duty ball or roller antifriction
type with full provisions for the type of thrust imposed by the specific
duty load.
Pre-lubricate and factory seal bearings in motors less than 1/2 horsepower.
Equip motors coupled to worm-gear reduction units with either ball or
roller bearings.
Equip bearings in motors 1/2 horsepower or larger with lubrication service
fittings. Fit lubrication fittings with color-coded plastic or metal dust
caps.
In any motor, bearings that are lubricated at the factory for extended duty
periods do not need to be lubricated for a given number of operating
hours. Display this information on an appropriate tag or label on the
motor with instructions for lubrication cycle maintenance.
2.6 Motor Starters, Controls, and Enclosures
Each door motor must have a factory-wired, unfused, disconnect switch; a
reversing, across-the-line magnetic starter with thermal overload
protection; 120-volt operating coils with a control transformer limit
switch; and a safety interlock assembled in a NEMA ICS 6 type enclosure as
specified herein. Control equipment must conform to NEMA ICS 2.
Provide adjustable switches, electrically interlocked with the motor
controls and set to stop the door automatically at the fully open and fully
closed position.
2.7 Control Enclosures
Provide control enclosures that conform to NEMA ICS 6 for general purpose
NEMA Type 1.
2.8 Transformer
Provide starters with 230/460 to 115 volt control transformers with one
secondary fuse when it is required to reduce the voltage on control
circuits to 120 volts or less. Provide transformer that conforms to
NEMA ST 1.
SECTION 08 33 23 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.9 Safety-Edge Device
Provide each door with a pneumatic safety device extending the full width
of the door and located within a U-section neoprene or rubber astragal
mounted on the bottom rail of the bottom door section. Device must
immediately stop and reverse the door upon contact with an obstruction in
the door opening during downward travel and cause the door to return to
full-open position. Safety device is not a substitute for a limit switch.
Connect safety device to the control circuit through a retracting safety
cord and reel.
2.10 Remote-Control Stations
Provide interior remote control stations which are full-guarded,
momentary-contact three-button, heavy-duty, surface-mounted NEMA ICS 6 type
enclosures as specified. Mark buttons "OPEN," "CLOSE," and "STOP." The
"CLOSE" button must be the type requiring a constant pressure to maintain
the closing motion of the door. When the door is in motion and the "STOP"
button is pressed, the door must stop instantly and remain in the stopped
position; from the stopped position, the door may then be operated in
either direction.
2.11 Speed-Reduction Units
Provide speed-reduction units consisting of hardened-steel worm and bronze
worm gear assemblies running in oil or grease and encased in a sealed
casing, coupled to the motor through a flexible coupling. Drive shafts
must rotate on ball- or roller-bearing assemblies that are integral with
the unit.
Provide minimum ratings of speed reduction units which are in accordance
with AGMA provisions for class of service.
Ground worm gears to provide accurate thread form; machine teeth for all
other types of gearing. Surface harden all gears.
Provide bearings which are the antifriction type equipped with oil seals.
2.12 Chain Drives
Provide roller chains that are power-transmission series steel roller type
conforming to ASME B29.400, with a minimum safety factor of 10 times the
design load.
Roller-chain side bars, rollers, pins, and bushings must be heat-treated or
otherwise hardened.
Provide chain sprockets that are high-carbon steel with machine-cut
hardened teeth, finished bore and keyseat, and hollow-head setscrews.
2.13 Brakes
Provide brakes which are 360-degree shoe brakes or shoe and drum brakes,
solenoid-operated and electrically interlocked to the control circuit to
set automatically when power is interrupted.
SECTION 08 33 23 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.14 Clutches
Clutches must be the 4-inch diameter, multiple face, externally adjustable
friction type or adjustable centrifugal type.
2.15 SURFACE FINISHING
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating factory applied
finishes. Noticeable variations in the same metal component are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Install overhead coiling door assembly, anchors and inserts for guides,
brackets, motors, switches, hardware, and other accessories in accordance
with approved detail drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
Upon completion of installation, doors must be free from all distortion.
Install overhead coiling doors, motors, hoods, and operators at the
mounting locations as indicated for each door in the contract documents and
as required by the manufacturer.
Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible
routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility and as
required by the manufacturer.
3.2 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
After installation, adjust hardware and moving parts. Lubricate bearings
and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer to provide smooth
operating functions for ease movement, free of warping, twisting, or
distortion of the door assembly.
Adjust seals to provide weather-tight fit around entire perimeter.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup
service and checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Test the door opening and closing operation when activated by controls or
alarm-connected fire-release system. Adjust controls and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Reset door-closing
mechanism after successful test.
Test and make final adjustment of new doors at no additional cost to the
Government.
3.2.1 Maintenance and Adjustment
Not more than 90 calendar days after completion and acceptance of the
project, the Contractor must examine, lubricate, test, and re-adjust doors
as required for proper operation.
SECTION 08 33 23 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.2.2 CLEANING
Clean aluminum doors in accordance with manufacturer's approved
instructions.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 33 23 Page 11
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 34 01
FORCED ENTRY RESISTANT COMPONENTS
08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C 1036 (2006) Standard Specification for Flat
Glass
ASTM C 1048 (2004) Standard Specification for
Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass
ASTM C 1172 (2009) Standard Specification for
Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
ASTM D 1003 (2007e1) Haze and Luminous Transmittance
of Transparent Plastics
ASTM D 1044 (2008) Resistance of Transparent Plastics
to Surface Abrasion
ASTM D 3951 (1998; R 2004) Commercial Packaging
ASTM D 4093 (1995; R 2005e1) Photoelastic Measurements
of Birefringence and Residual Strains in
Transparent or Translucent Plastic
Materials
ASTM D 905 (2008e1) Strength Properties of Adhesive
Bonds in Shear by Compression Loading
ASTM E 1300 (2009a) Determining Load Resistance of
Glass in Buildings
ASTM E 90 (2009) Standard Test Method for Laboratory
Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
ASTM F 428 (2009) Intensity of Scratches on Aerospace
Glass Enclosures
ASTM F 520 (1997; R 2004) Environmental Resistance of
Aerospace Transparencies
SECTION 08 34 01 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
ASTM F 521 (1983; R 2004) Bond Integrity of
Transparent Laminates
ASTM F 548 (2009) Intensity of Scratches on Aerospace
Transparent Plastics
ASTM F 735 (2006) Abrasion Resistance of Transparent
Plastics and Coatings Using the
Oscillating Sand Method
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)
ANSI/BHMA A156.1 (2006) Butts and Hinges
ANSI/BHMA A156.115 (2006) Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors
and Steel Frames
ANSI/BHMA A156.13 (2005) Mortise Locks & Latches, Series 1000
ANSI/BHMA A156.18 (2006) Materials and Finishes
ANSI/BHMA A156.4 (2008) Door Controls - Closers
ANSI/BHMA A156.5 (2001) Auxiliary Locks and Associated
Products
ANSI/BHMA A156.8 (2005) Door Controls - Overhead Stops and
Holders
GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)
GANA Glazing Manual (2004) Glazing Manual
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)
NAAMM HMMA 801 (2005) Glossary of Terms for Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames
NAAMM HMMA 802 (1992) Manufacturing of Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames
NAAMM HMMA 810 (1987) Hollow Metal Doors
NAAMM HMMA 820 (1987) Hollow Metal Frames
NAAMM HMMA 830 (2002) Hardware Selection for Hollow
Metal Doors and Frames
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 80 (2010; TIA 10-1) Standard for Fire Doors
and Other Opening Protectives
NFPA 80A (2007) Recommended Practice for Protection
of Buildings from Exterior Fire Exposures
SECTION 08 34 01 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 10B (2008; Rev thru Apr 2009) Fire Tests of
Door Assemblies
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 General Requirements
Components covered in this specification are designed to resist forced
entry attacks with increasing severity levels of hand, power, and thermal
tools and weapons and explosives. The components include forced entry
resistant personnel door/frame assemblies. Each type of forced entry
resistant component shall be a complete assembly produced by a single
manufacturer. Movable and operable components shall operate smoothly and
freely. Items for exterior installation shall be designed to resist water
and vapor penetration or entrapment. Submit manufacturer's descriptive
data, installation instructions, and certificate and test report showing
compliance with the specified forced entry test standard as specified in
paragraph COMPONENT TEST REQUIREMENTS for all components. Following
approval of manufacturer's descriptive data, submit a schedule listing the
items and components to be furnished. Manufacturer's certificate shall be
submitted indicating that compliance with the installation instructions and
drawings will provide the specified degree of forced entry resistance.
1.2.2 Other Submittal Requirements
The following shall be submitted:
a. Manufacturer's descriptive data and finish samples.
b. The forced entry resistant door lock functions, for selection by
the Contracting Officer.
c. Airflow calculations for louvers.
d. Manufacturer's certificates attesting that components conform to
the requirements on drawings and in specifications.
e. Testing reports from independent testing laboratories indicating
conformance to regulatory requirements.
f. Certificate, in lieu of a label, for fire rated doors.
g. Certificate indicating compliance with the requirements for doors
of the type and fire rating class.
h. Manufacturer certification that compliance with the installation
instructions and/or drawings will provide the specified degree of
forced entry resistance.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SECTION 08 34 01 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation; G
SD-03 Product Data
Forced Entry Resistant Components
Installation
Components
SD-07 Certificates
Forced Entry Resistant Components
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualify welding procedures, welders, and welding operators in accordance
with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Forced entry resistant components shall be certified
as resistant to the forced entry test standards indicated herein. Forced
entry resistant components shall be tested as specified below. The test
results and certification thereof shall be approved by the Contracting
Officer before delivery of the component to the job site.
Class 5-V- Vault Door: Shall be resistant to 20 man-hours surreptitious
entry, 30 man-minutes covert and 10 man-minutes forced entry.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver Components to the job site with the manufacturer's name, and model
number clearly marked thereon. Components shall be delivered, stored, and
handled so as not to be damaged or deformed and shall be in accordance with
ASTM D 3951. Components shall be handled carefully to prevent damage to
the faces, edges, corners, ends, and glazing where applicable. Abraded,
scarred, or rusty areas shall be cleaned, repaired, or replaced immediately
upon detection of the damage. Replace damaged components that cannot be
restored. Components and equipment shall be stored in a dry location on
platforms or pallets that are ventilated adequately, free of dust, water,
and other contaminants, and stored in a manner which permits easy access
for inspection and handling. Submit lists including schedule of components
to be incorporated in the work with manufacturer's model or catalog
numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty information,
threat level designated, and number of items provided. Listing of similar
products that have been satisfactorily in use for two years or more,
including name of purchasers, locations of installations, dates of
installations, and service organizations.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
When testing of a previously untested component is specified, allow
sufficient lead time so that testing will not delay construction. The test
results and component shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before
delivery of the component to the job site.
1.7 WARRANTY
Manufacturer's warranty for 5 years shall be furnished for glazing
materials. Warranty shall provide for replacement and installation of
glazing if delamination, discoloration, or cracking or crazing occurs.
SECTION 08 34 01 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
Each type of forced entry resistant component shall be the standard product
of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and
shall duplicate items that have been tested and approved in accordance with
the forced entry test standard specified in paragraph COMPONENT TEST
REQUIREMENTS.
2.2 FORCED ENTRY RESISTANT PERSONNEL DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES
Doors and frames shall be factory fabricated assemblies of indicated
sizes. Doors shall be of steel, hardened steel, or be reinforced
internally with steel shapes and clad with aluminum. Interior composition
and reinforcement shall be determined by the manufacturer. Rubber
silencers shall be installed on door frames. Exterior doors shall have top
edges closed flush and sealed against water penetration, be insulated, and
provided with weatherstripping and thresholds. Locks and hinges shall be
the same or equal in performance and number as the hardware used on the
tested door. Lock and hardware shall be provided by the manufacturer as a
complete assembly. Frames shall be furnished by the door fabricator, with
anchorage to wall construction completely specified as to number of
anchors, anchor size, material, and length.
2.2.1 Fire Rated Doors
Provide fire rated doors at locations indicated. Door assemblies shall
comply with the forced entry test standard specified and shall bear the
listing identification label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. or a
nationally recognized testing laboratory that is qualified to perform tests
of fire door assemblies in accordance with UL 10B, and that has a listing
service for the tested assemblies. Door assemblies include door, hardware,
frame, closers, and glazing. A certificate indicating that the units were
inspected in accordance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 80Amay be furnished in lieu
of label. For oversized doors, a certificate from Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. or a nationally recognized testing laboratory may be
furnished in lieu of label. The certificate shall state that oversized
doors are manufactured in compliance with the requirements for doors of the
type and fire rating class. Manufacturer's descriptive data shall be
submitted.
2.2.2 Sound Rated Doors
Provide sound rated doors at locations indicated. Door assemblies shall
comply with the forced entry test standard specified and shall consist of
door, hardware, frame, threshold, and adjustable gaskets. The assembly
shall have a laboratory Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating as indicated
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 90. Submit manufacturer's
descriptive data, test report, and certification of the test report showing
compliance with the specified requirements.
2.2.3 Door and Frame Fabrication
The subsurfaces shall be flat, parallel, and plumb after fabrication.
Doors shall be reinforced in accordance with manufacturer's design. Door
frames shall be anchored as specified by the door manufacturer. Coordinate
the door manufacturer's requirements for welding to wall reinforcement or
casting frame embedments into wall before wall is placed. Steel door
SECTION 08 34 01 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
frames shall be mitered or coped and welded at the corners with welds
ground smooth. Where structural channel frames are used the size, weight,
stops, welding, and anchorage into surrounding construction shall be
specified and tested along with the door as an assembly. Any necessary
reinforcements in the door and the frame shall be made in the factory.
Door and frame shall be drilled and tapped as required for the specified
hardware. Frame channels shall be mitered or coped and welded at corners
with full penetration groove welds. Exposed welds shall be dressed
smooth. Hollow metal doors and frames shall be manufactured in accordance
with NAAMM HMMA 801, NAAMM HMMA 802, NAAMM HMMA 810, and NAAMM HMMA 820 as
a standard of quality, and shall meet the specified forced entry testing
standard.
2.2.4 Door Glazing
For glazing in door, stop height and rabbet depth shall be as required to
accommodate the glazing material that is resistant to the forced entry test
standard specified. The assembly shall be tested with the specified
glazing and stops installed. Exterior (attack side) glazing stops shall be
welded or integral to the frame. Interior (protected side) glazing stops
shall be removable stops attached with high-strength alloy steel machine
screws with tamper-resistant heads or as required by the manufacturer.
Glazing is specified in paragraph Forced Entry Resistant Glazing Materials.
2.2.5 Preparation for Hardware
Prepare doors and frames for hardware in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 830.
Surface applied hardware shall be drilled and tapped in the field.
2.2.6 Hardware
Hardware for forced entry resistant door assemblies shall be provided by
the door assembly manufacturer to ensure a complete forced entry resistant
assembly. Where test standard requires hardware to be tested with the door
assembly, locks and hinges shall be included in the labeling and/or test
certification. Locks and hinges shall be the same or equal in performance,
quality, grade, and quantity as used on the successfully tested door
assembly in accordance with the specified forced entry testing standard.
Provide certification that the locks, latches, and hinges provide the same
degree of forced entry resistance as required by the specified forced entry
testing standard. Keying shall be as specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR
HARDWARE.
2.2.6.1 Locks and Latchsets
The door manufacturer shall submit available lock functions for selection
of function by the Contracting Officer. Mortise lock and latchsets shall
be, as a minimum, series 1000, operational Grade 1, Security Grade 1 or 1A,
and shall conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.13. Strikes for mortise locks and
latches (including deadbolt locks), as a minimum, shall conform to
ANSI/BHMA A156.115 except strikes shall be rectangular (without curved
lip). Mortise-type locks and latches for doors 1-3/4 inches thick and over
shall have adjustable bevel fronts or otherwise conform to the shape of the
door. Mortise locks shall have armored fronts. Mortise locks and latches
shall have full escutcheon, through-bolted, extruded stainless steel trim.
Lock finish shall be 630 in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.18.
SECTION 08 34 01 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.6.2 Hinges
Steel doors and frames required to resist the "very low" or "low" threat
severity level that are up to and including 7 feet 0 inches high shall, as
a minimum, be equipped with three Grade 1 hinges in accordance with
ANSI/BHMA A156.1, minimum size 5 inches high, heavy, double, or triple
weight as required for weight of door. For each additional 12 inches of
door height beyond 7 feet 0 inches, provide a minimum of one more hinge.
Hinges shall be full mortise, half mortise, full surface, or half surface
design as recommended by the manufacturer for frame and door design and
shall be tamperproof unless mounted on the protected side of the door.
Hinges shall have nonremovable pins. Spot welding of hinge pin will not be
acceptable. Provide hinge manufacturer's certification that the hinge
supplied meets applicable test requirements for ANSI/BHMA A156.1 type
number of hinge specified and that the hinge is suitable for the size and
weight of the door assembly on which it will be utilized. Continuous extra
heavy-duty piano-type hinge sized to carry the weight of the door without
sagging is permitted. If continuous piano-type hinges are provided with
the door, independent laboratory reports covering both the door weight
capacity and a 2,500,000 cycle testing to match the ANSI/BHMA A156.1 Grade
1 requirements shall be furnished by the Contractor. Interior door hinges
shall be furnished in prime coated steel. Exterior door hinges shall be
furnished in nonferrous metal or stainless steel.
2.2.6.3 Electric Strikes
Where required, provide electric strikes conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.5
Grade 1. Furnish strike boxes with deadbolt and latch strikes for Grade
1. Strikes shall be fail secure.
2.2.6.4 Door Closers
Closers shall be extra heavy duty of size and type recommended by the
manufacturer and shall be Grade 1 conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4. Door
closer finish shall be 600 in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.18.
2.2.6.5 Door Stops and Holders
Door stops and holders shall be extra heavy duty, conforming to
ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Type C08511 overhead surface mounted type.
2.2.7 Frame Anchors
Provide jamb and head anchors with door/frame assembly as specified by the
manufacturer and forced entry resistant to the same degree as the
component. Coordinate concrete work with component manufacturers when the
manufacturer specifies frame anchors to be embedded into a concrete or
concrete masonry unit surface during construction.
2.2.8 Weatherstripping
Provide head and jambs of exterior doors with compression-type neoprene
bulb or closed-cell neoprene adjustable type weatherstripping. Door stops
shall be weatherstripped with a surface-mounted sponge neoprene strip in
bronze housing not less than 0.070 inch thick installed to make contact
with the door. Install weatherstripping in conformance with the
manufacturer's directions after completion of finish painting.
SECTION 08 34 01 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.3 Forced Entry Resistant Glazing Material
Glazing material shall be glass, and shall conform to applicable
requirements ASTM C 1036, ASTM E 1300, and ASTM C 1048. Glazing materials
shall be tested in accordance with the applicable sections of the following
test procedures: ASTM D 905, ASTM D 1003, ASTM F 428, ASTM F 548,
ASTM D 4093, and ASTM F 520. Plastic glazing shall be acrylic plastic
sheets, polycarbonate plastic sheets, or approved equal. Plastic glazing
shall be smooth and clear on both sides. Glazing material shall be factory
installed. Factory-glazed components shall be covered to protect them from
damage during adjacent finish work.
2.3.1 Laminated Glass
Laminated glass shall be all glass laminated construction conforming to
applicable sections of ASTM C 1172. The adhesive interlayer material for
bonding glass to glass shall be chemically compatible with surfaces which
are to be bonded. Materials selected for lamination purposes shall be
tested in accordance with the following testing procedures: ASTM D 905,
ASTM D 1044, ASTM F 735, ASTM D 4093, ASTM F 521, ASTM F 520, and
ASTM D 1003. Glass plies used in the lamination shall be annealed float
glass conforming to Type I, quality q3, Class 1, ASTM C 1036 or
heat-strengthened or fully heat-tempered float glass, Condition A, Type I,
quality q3, Class 1, ASTM C 1048.
2.3.2 Glass/Plastic Laminate Glazing
Glass/plastic laminated glazing materials shall be glass/plastic laminated
construction or glass-clad plastic "sandwich" construction conforming to
applicable sections of ASTM C 1172.
2.3.3 Glass/Plastic Air-Gap Glazing
Forced entry resistant glass/plastic air-gap glazing shall consist of an
assembly in which glass forms the exterior and interior (protected side)
layer, separated by an air space from the laminated plastic plies. Glass
plies shall be annealed float glass conforming to Type I, quality q3, Class
1, ASTM C 1036 or heat-strengthened or fully heat-tempered float glass,
Condition A, Type I, quality q3, Class 1, ASTM C 1048. Plastic plies shall
consist of laminated ultraviolet stabilized polycarbonate sheets,
conforming to paragraph Polycarbonate Plastic Sheets and/or acrylic sheets
for use "as cast" and in stretching operations with improved moisture
absorption resistance conforming to paragraph Acrylic Plastic Sheets.
2.4 Adhesive Interlayer Materials
Adhesive interlayer material for bonding laminates (glass-glass,
glass-plastic, or plastic-plastic bonds) shall be chemically compatible
with the surfaces bonded. Interlayer materials may be polyvinyl butyral,
cast-in-place urethane, proprietary materials, sheet from urethane and
other materials. Polyvinyl butyral shall not be used to bond
polycarbonate. Adhesives shall conform to ASTM D 905 and the
manufacturer's recommendations.
2.5 Sealants
Sealants for glazings shall be chemically compatible with the glazing
materials they are in contact with and shall have no deleterious effects to
the glazing materials or to the adhesives used in glazing laminates.
SECTION 08 34 01 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Sealants shall conform to the glazing manufacturer's recommendations and
the requirements of GANA Glazing Manual.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
Provide accessories for the installation of components into the surrounding
structure. Anchorage shall be forced entry resistant to the same degree as
the component. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended instructions. Materials, parts, bolts, anchors, supports,
braces, fasteners, and connections necessary for completion of the work.
2.7 LABELING
Forced entry resistant components shall be plainly and permanently labeled
as to the applicable forced entry test standard and level within the test
standard under which the component was tested and approved. Label shall be
visible only from the protected side after component installation and shall
include the following information: (1) manufacturer's name or identifying
symbol; (2) model number, control number, or equivalent; (3) date of
manufacture with the week, month or quarter, and year (this may be
abbreviated or be in a traceable code such as the lot number); (4) correct
mounting position (by removable label); and (5) forced entry resistant
rating by indicating the test standard, level within the test standard (if
any), and minutes of attack time withstood (if variable in the standard).
2.8 SHOP/FACTORY FINISHING
Unless otherwise specified, all factory or manufactured components shall be
shop finished as indicated below.
2.8.1 Ferrous Metal
Surfaces of ferrous metal, except galvanized and stainless steel surfaces,
shall be cleaned and factory primed for painting. Finish painting shall be
in accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Prior to shop
painting, clean surfaces with solvents to remove grease and oil and with
power wire-brushing or sandblasting to remove loose rust, loose mill scale,
and other foreign substances. Surfaces of items to be embedded in concrete
shall not be shop painted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Field verify dimensions of rough openings for components and that surfaces
of openings are level, plumb, and provide required clearances. Components
shall be examined for racking, twisting, and other malformation and
corrected prior to installation. Replace damaged components that cannot be
corrected. Protect surrounding work prior to installation of forced entry
resistant components. Surrounding work, which is damaged as a result of
the installation of forced entry resistant components, shall be repaired in
an approved manner prior to acceptance. Protect glazed units from damage
during adjacent work.
3.2 FABRICATION
Components shall be constructed, assembled, welded, and equipped with all
hardware and accessories required to complete the assembly in the shop of a
competent fabricator.
SECTION 08 34 01 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.3 FASTENERS
Fasteners exposed to view shall match in color and finish and shall
harmonize with the material to which fasteners are applied. Holes for
bolts and screws shall be drilled or neatly punched. Poor matching of
holes shall be cause for rejection of the work. Fasteners shall be
concealed where practicable. Unless otherwise specified, fasteners shall
conform to Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.4 CORROSION PROTECTION - DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
Contact surfaces between dissimilar metals in contact with concrete,
masonry, pressure-treated wood, or absorptive materials subject to wetting
shall be given a protective coating in accordance with Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.5 INSTALLATION
The finished work shall be free from defects. Components shall be
installed plumb and level and secured rigidly in place. Components shall
be installed in accordance with approved manufacturer's recommended
instructions. Operable parts of components shall be tested for smooth
operation in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Coordinate frame
embedments into the construction where required by the component
manufacturer. Materials which incur damage as a result of adjacent finish
work shall be replaced or repaired as specified above. Window assemblies,
which are not specified as factory glazed, shall have glazing installed in
accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and the manufacturer's recommended
instructions. Field glazing shall occur only after concrete, masonry,
ceiling, electrical, mechanical, plumbing and adjacent finish work has been
completed. The Contractor is responsible for proper installation of forced
entry resistant door assemblies so that operating clearances and bearing
surfaces conform to the manufacturer's instructions. The bottom of door
frames shall be secured to the floor slab in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Weatherstripping and thresholds shall be
installed at exterior door openings to provide a weathertight
installation. Submit Drawings showing (1) anchorage of components and
appurtenances into the actual surrounding construction, (2) clearances for
operation, and (3) hardware location and installation details. Submit
complete drawings for forced entry resistant prefabricated guardhouses.
Submit a copy of installation instructions and recommended cleaning and
maintenance instructions.
3.6 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
The manufacturer shall provide the services of a manufacturer's
representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and
operation of the component specified. At the request of the Contracting
Officer, the representative shall supervise the installation, adjustment,
and operation (if operable) of the component. The representative shall be
onsite 1 working days.
3.7 ADJUSTING/CLEANING
Adjustments shall be made to assure smooth operation. Units shall be
weathertight when closed and locked. All Components shall be cleaned in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Only cleanser recommended by
the manufacturer shall be used to clean polycarbonate, plastic, and applied
SECTION 08 34 01 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
hardcoats.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 34 01 Page 11
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 39 54
BLAST RESISTANT DOORS
08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)
ABMA 11 (1990; R 1999) Load Ratings and Fatigue
Life for Roller Bearings
ABMA 9 (1990; R 2000) Load Ratings and Fatigue
Life for Ball Bearings
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A2.4 (2007) Standard Symbols for Welding,
Brazing and Nondestructive Examination
AWS A5.4/A5.4M (2006) Stainless Steel Electrodes for
Shielded Metal Arc Welding
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel
AWS D1.3/D1.3M (2008; Errata 2008) Structural Welding
Code - Sheet Steel
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 307 (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon
Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength
ASTM A 325 (2009) Standard Specification for
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A 354 (2007a) Standard Specification for
Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts,
Studs, and Other Externally Threaded
Fasteners
ASTM A 449 (2007b) Specification for Hex Cap Screws,
Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,
General Use
ASTM A 490 (2009) Standard Specification for
Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
ASTM A 534 (2004) Standard Specification for
Carburizing Steels for Anti-Friction
Bearings
ASTM A 563 (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon
and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A 574 (2008) Standard Specification for Alloy
Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws
ASTM A 606/A 606M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
ASTM A 653/A 653M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 792/A 792M (2010) Standard Specification for General
Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM E 283 (2004) Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen
ASTM F 436 (2009) Hardened Steel Washers
ASTM F 568M (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon
and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric
Fasteners
ASTM F 835 (2004e1) Alloy Steel Socket Button and
Flat Countersunk Head Cap Screws
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)
BHMA A156.13 (2005) Mortise Locks & Latches, Series 1000
BHMA A156.3 (2008) Exit Devices
BHMA A156.4 (2008) Door Controls - Closers
BHMA A156.8 (2005) Door Controls - Overhead Stops and
Holders
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide a blast resistant door which fits a Door Description as follows:
Hollow metal doors shall be flush mounted in frames. Doors shall be the
manually operated, side hinged, swinging type. Each door assembly shall
include the door, frame, anchors, hardware, and accessories and shall be
provided by a single manufacturer. Frames and anchors shall be capable of
transferring blast and rebound reactions to the adjacent supporting
structure. Resistance to blast shall be demonstrated either by design
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
calculations or tests on prototype door assemblies.
1.2.1 Design Requirements
1.2.1.1 Static Material Strength
Obtain the static values for minimum yield strength (or yield point) and
(ultimate) tensile strength for steel from the applicable material
specification. For tensile strength specified in terms of a tensile
strength range, the lowest tensile strength specified shall be selected for
design. The expected yield stress for steel sheet and strip used in design
shall be computed as 1.21 times the specified static yield point.
1.2.1.2 Dynamic Material Strength
Compute the dynamic material strength by applying a dynamic increase factor
that accounts for the increase in material strength due to strain rate
effects.
1.2.1.3 Dynamic Analysis and Deformation
Design the door using an equivalent single degree of freedom or other
approved dynamic analysis method. The maximum door deformation shall be
selected by the door manufacturer except that the maximum deformation in
flexure shall not exceed the deformation limits specified or indicated.
1.2.1.4 Rebound Resistance
Rebound resistance shall be the specified or indicated percentage of the
door resistance at initial peak response.
1.2.2 Blast Effects
1.2.2.1 Overpressure
The spatial distribution of overpressure shall be uniform unless otherwise
specified or indicated. For overpressure specified or indicated without
duration, the overpressure waveform shall have a zero rise time and
infinite duration.
1.2.2.2 Overpressure Direction
For overpressure identified as seating and for overpressure directions not
otherwise specified or indicated, the positive phase overpressure shall be
in the direction that causes the door to seat toward the frame.
1.2.2.3 Fragment Resistance
For doors specified or indicated to resist fragments, design the door and
the door and frame interface to prevent fragment perforation and the
latches and latching mechanism shall be shielded from fragment damage. The
fragment impact point shall be anywhere on the door and frame face exposed
to overpressure.
1.2.3 Blast Door Operation
Measure the force required to set the door in motion from the 90-degree
open position, and measure the force required to engage and release the
latches at the latch handle with the door in the normal closed position.
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation; G
Detailed fabrication and assembly drawings for special doors or
standard doors with appreciable modifications, indicating the door
location and showing dimensions, materials, fabrication methods,
hardware, and accessories in sufficient detail to enable the
Contracting Officer to check compliance with contract documents.
These drawings need not be submitted for standard doors for which
manufacturer's catalog data is submitted. Weld symbols used shall
conform to AWS A2.4.
SD-03 Product Data
Door Description
Data on standard blast doors consisting of catalog cuts,
brochures, circulars, specifications, and product data that show
complete dimensions and completely describe overpressure ratings,
rebound ratings, doors, frames, anchors, hardware, and
accessories. Manufacturer's instructions for installation and
field testing.
Design Requirements
Detailed structural analysis and design calculations
demonstrating resistance to blast when blast resistance is not
demonstrated by prototype tests. Design calculations shall
demonstrate adequacy under the blast effects specified or
indicated. Include in the design calculations a sketch of the
overpressure waveform; dimensioned sketches of blast resisting
elements such as door members, frame members, latches, and hinges;
section properties for blast resisting members including built-up
sections; the standard under which steel is produced; static and
dynamic material strength properties; the resistance, stiffness,
mass, elastic natural period, and elastic deflection for flexural
members; and the peak deflection, peak support rotation, and time
to peak deflection for door members in flexure. Design
calculations shall cover initial response, rebound, and all
secondary items such as shear, welds, local buckling, web
crippling, hinges, and latches.
Manufacturer's Field Service
Information describing training to be provided, training aids to
be used, and background data on the personnel conducting the
training.
SD-06 Test Reports
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Tests
Tests, Inspections, and Verifications
Shop and field operating test reports that include values for
opening and closing forces and times, forces required to operate
latches, and a description of all operating tests performed.
Fire Rating Test and Inspection
A letter may be submitted by the testing laboratory (in lieu of
a UL listing for fire door assemblies) which identifies the
submitted product by manufacturer and type or model and certifies
that it has tested a sample assembly and issued a current listing.
Prototype Static Test
Prototype Blast Test
Certified test reports demonstrating blast resistance. Include
in the test reports the name and location of the testing agency or
laboratory, a description of the testing apparatus, the date of
the tests, a description of the door specimen tested, descriptions
of loadings, the value of measured peak door deflection and peak
permanent set and analysis and interpretation of test results.
SD-07 Certificates
Materials
Steel mill reports covering the number, chemical composition,
and tension properties for structural quality steels. When blast
resistance is demonstrated by calculations, a certificate stating
that the door assembly provided was manufactured using the same
materials, dimensions, and tolerances shown in the calculations.
When blast resistance is demonstrated by prototype testing, a
certificate stating that door and frame provided was manufactured
using the same materials, dimensions, and tolerances as the tested
prototype and listing the hardware and frame anchors required to
achieve blast resistance. Each certificate shall be signed by an
official authorized to certify in behalf of the manufacturer and
shall identify the door assembly and date of shipment or delivery
to which the certificate applies.
Certification or test report for thermal insulated doors listing
the type of hardware used to achieve the rating.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Door Description
Information bound in manual form consisting of manufacturer's
safety precautions, preventative maintenance and schedules,
troubleshooting procedures, special tools, parts list, and spare
parts data. All material shall be cross referenced to the door
designations shown on the drawings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welders, welding operators, and weld inspectors shall be qualified in
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M except that welders performing arc welding
of steel sheet and strip shall be qualified in accordance with
AWS D1.3/D1.3M.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
Store door assemblies, delivered and placed in storage, with protection
from weather and dirt, dust, and contaminants.
1.6 WARRANTY
Furnish manufacturer's written warranty covering the blast door assembly
for 2 years after acceptance by the Government. Warranty shall provide for
repair and replacement of the blast door assembly and individual hardware
and accessory items in the event of malfunction due to defects in design,
materials, and workmanship except that the warranty need not cover finishes
provided by others.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Only structural quality steel materials, for which tension properties have
been obtained, shall be used to resist blast except that commercial quality
steel sheet and strip shall be permitted for prototype tested hollow metal
doors. Select steel used in the door, door frame, and door frame anchors,
and non stainless steel fasteners that resist blast, from the materials
specified.
2.1.1 Steel Sheet and Strip
Steel sheet and strip shall conform to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Type A, B, and C;
ASTM A 653/A 653M; ASTM A 606/A 606M; or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Grades 33, 37,
40, and 50.
2.1.2 Fasteners
Steel studs and bolts shall conform to ASTM A 307, ASTM A 325, ASTM A 354,
ASTM A 449, or ASTM A 490 as applicable. Steel nuts shall conform to
ASTM A 563. Hardened circular, beveled, and clipped washers shall conform
to ASTM F 436. Steel hex cap screws shall conform to ASTM F 568M. Steel
socket-headed cap screws shall conform to ASTM A 574. Steel button and
flat-headed countersunk cap screws shall conform to ASTM F 835.
2.2 HARDWARE
2.2.1 General Requirements
Hinges shall be specially manufactured to support the door and to resist
blast induced loading. The number of hinges shall be determined by the
blast door manufacturer. Welds used in hinges shall be continuous. Attach
hinges to the door and frame using mechanical fasteners, except that full
surface hinges for doors with locks shall be attached to the door and frame
by welding or approved tamper-resistant mechanical fasteners and hinges for
doors with locks shall have approved nonremovable pins. Load ratings and
fatigue life for ball and roller bearings shall be determined in accordance
with ABMA 9 and ABMA 11 as applicable and, unless otherwise approved, the
bearing steel shall conform to ASTM A 534. Hinges shall be capable of
operating for the minimum number of cycles specified without failure or
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
excessive wear under the door service loads where one cycle consists of
swinging the door back and forth between the normal closed position and the
90-degree open position, where failure or excessive wear means that the
latches do not seat properly or the door does not swing smoothly due to
hinge failure or wear, and where door service loads consist of the door
weight plus any loads produced by hardware. Rolling bearings shall be
factory grease lubricated and either sealed or provided with easily
accessible lubrication fittings.
2.2.1.1 Hinge Description
Hinge Type 1 shall be capable of smooth operation for a minimum of 250,000
cycles. This type of hinge shall be provided with structural quality steel
pins and leafs and either rolling bearings in both the thrust and radial
directions or hardened steel washer (disc) thrust bearings and rolling
radial bearings except that rolling thrust bearings and metallic journal
radial bearings shall be permitted for hollow metal doors when the
specified overpressure is less than 3 psi.
2.2.2 Latching System
2.2.2.1 Latching Points
The number of latching points shall be determined by the door
manufacturer.For jamb latching points, latching points shall be provided at
the jambs only.
2.2.2.2 Latching System Operation
Latching systems shall be capable of operating for the same number of
cycles specified for the door hinges where one latch operating cycle
consists of engaging and releasing using the handle. Latches shall remain
engaged until manually released and shall not release under blast loads or
rebound. Manually operated latches shall remain in the released position
until manually engaged. Self-latching latches shall provide
self-activating engagement when the door is swung to the normal closed
position. Handles shall release latches under a clockwise motion.
2.2.2.3 Latching Mechanism
Latching mechanisms for hollow metal doors shall be mounted on the seating
face of the door and safety covered.
2.2.2.4 Safety Cover
Safety covers shall consist of steel housings that enclose the latching
mechanism such that only the operating rods are exposed.
2.2.2.5 Latches
Latches (latch bolts) shall be manufactured of structural quality steel and
the latch bolt throw shall not be less than 3/4 inch. Latch bolts shall be
the sliding type in which the latch bolt slides into a matching strike in
the door frame or the lever type in which the latch bolt rotates into a
groove in the frame as specified or indicated except that latches for doors
with mortise lock and latch sets and exit devices shall be the sliding
type. Manually operated latches shall draw the door toward the frame
during latching.
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.2.6 Handle
Handles for doors with mortise lock and latch sets shall be manufactured of
steel castings or stainless steel. Latch handles shall be firmly fastened
to axles. Lever handles shall be perpendicular to the door edge when
latches are engaged. Single lever handles shall be located at the stile
opposite the hinges.
2.2.3 Mortise Lock and Latch Set
Lever handles shall release latches using a torque not exceeding 27 lb-inch.
Latches (latch bolts) shall be located at the stiles and operated from a
single lever handle. Only one deadbolt shall be provided. The deadbolt
shall be manufactured of structural quality steel and the deadbolt throw
shall not be less than 1 inch. Mortise locks shall be provided with
armored fronts. The function numbers for mortise locks shall be as defined
in BHMA A156.13.
2.2.4 Keying
Keying shall conform to Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE. Change keys for
locks shall be stamped with change number and the inscription "U.S.
Property - Do Not Duplicate." Unless otherwise specified, two change keys
shall be provided for each lock. Locks shall be furnished with the
manufacturer's standard construction key system.
2.2.5 Exit Device
Latches (latch bolts) shall release by depressing the actuation bar using a
force of not more than 15 lbf applied perpendicular to the door in the
swing direction. The exit device shall conform to the finish test values
specified in BHMA A156.3 and shall be of plain design with straight,
beveled, or smoothly rounded sides, corners, and edges. A touch bar may be
provided in lieu of a conventional actuation bar (cross bar). The function
numbers for exit devices shall be as defined in BHMA A156.3.
2.2.6 Door Stop
Door stops shall be designed to resist the impact of the door. The stop
shall not scratch or scar the door finish when the door is opened against
the stop.
2.2.7 Surface Door Closer
The surface door closer shall conform to BHMA A156.4. The size and grade
shall be selected by the door manufacturer.
2.2.8 Overhead Door Holder
Overhead door holder shall be surface mounted. The holder shall have a
spring or other device to cushion the door action and shall limit the door
swing at 110 degrees. The holder shall have a built-in, hold-open
capability at the swing limit specified. Overhead door holders for hollow
metal doors weighing less than 200 pounds shall conform to BHMA A156.8.
2.2.9 Door Silencer
Rubber door silencers shall cushion the impact of the door against the
frame so that steel-to-steel contact is not made during closing.
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.3 ACCESSORIES
2.3.1 Subframe
At the Contractor's option, a subframe can be provided and built into the
structure prior to installation of the frame. The subframe and subframe
anchors shall be capable of transferring blast and rebound reactions to the
adjacent structure, and the frame shall be capable of transferring these
reactions to the subframe. The subframe shall be fabricated in the same
manner specified for the frame.
2.3.2 Nameplate
Each door assembly shall have a permanently affixed nameplate that displays
the manufacturer's name, place and year of manufacture, and the applicable
peak overpressure, impulse, and rebound rating.
2.3.3 Removable Threshold
The sill shall be flush with the adjacent floor when the threshold is
removed. The removable threshold shall be attached using approved
countersunk mechanical fasteners.
2.3.4 Self-Rescue Kit
Self-rescue kits shall contain illustrated instructions, nonadjustable
wrenches, screwdrivers, jacks, and all other tools required to open the
blast door from the seating face to a width of at least 12 inches. The
jack capacity shall not be less than 75,000 lbf. Tools shall be securely
mounted in a steel frame using wing nuts or other approved fasteners. The
self-rescue kit frame shall be fabricated in the same manner specified for
the door frame and shall be securely anchored to the wall at the location
indicated or as directed.
2.4 FABRICATION
2.4.1 Shop Assembly
Welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M except that arc welding
of steel sheet and strip shall be in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M.
Stainless steel shall be welded using electrodes conforming to
AWS A5.4/A5.4M. Fabricated steel shall be well-formed to shape and size,
with sharp lines and angles. Intermediate and corner joints shall be coped
or mitered. Exposed welds shall be dressed smooth. Hollow metal door
frames shall be pressed steel or structural steel with welded joints.
Steel frames or subframes installed in masonry walls shall be provided with
adjustable anchors. Hollow metal doors shall be of unitized grid
construction with welded grid junctions and shall have flat, one-piece face
sheets spot welded to each face of the grid system. The edges of hollow
metal doors shall be closed with seams continuously welded. Hollow metal
doors shall be neat in appearance, free from warpage and buckle, and
suitable reinforcing shall be provided for hardware.
2.4.2 Thermal Insulation
The interior cells between the unitized grid shall be completely filled
with thermal insulation material. The U value through the door (panel)
shall not exceed 0.24 Btu per square foot per hour per degree F.
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.4.3 Shop Finishing
Shop priming of steel surfaces shall conform to Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND
COATINGS, except that surfaces that will be embedded in concrete need not
be primed and hollow metal doors shall be either dipped in primer after
welding is completed, or exposed surfaces shall be primed and interior
surfaces coated with an approved rust inhibitor.
2.4.4 Clearance
The lateral clearance between hollow metal doors and frames shall not exceed
1/8 inch at the head and jambs and the clearance between the meeting edges
of pairs of doors shall not exceed 1/4 inch. The clearance between the
door bottom and threshold shall not exceed 3/4 inch.
2.5 BLAST DOOR ASSEMBLIES
2.5.1 Door Metal
2.5.1.1 Type
Type shall be hollow metal.
2.5.1.2 Overpressure
Overpressure shall be 2 psi in the seating direction.
2.5.1.3 Rebound
Rebound resistance shall be 50 percent.
2.5.1.4 Vision Panel
Openings marked on the door schedule to contain a vision panel shall be
equipped with a blast resistant 24 inch x 4 inch (clear opening) vision
lite with reflective film on exterior. The door leaf will have factory
prepared cutouts and reinforcements. Suitable glass and glazing materials,
either wire or laminated glass shall be included, with the glass composite
and thickness determined by the blast door manufacturer.
2.6 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS
2.6.1 Prototype Static Test
Static tests on prototype door assemblies shall demonstrate that the door
will resist the blast overpressure. Static tests will be accepted only if
the door and frame proposed are manufactured using the same materials,
dimensions, and tolerances as those in the prototype static test and the
static overpressure used in the test is at least two times the blast
overpressure. Static test reports shall be supplemented with calculations
that demonstrate rebound resistance when rebound is not tested.
2.6.2 Prototype Blast Test
Blast tests on the prototype door assembly shall demonstrate that the door
will resist the overpressure waveform. Blast tests will be accepted only
if the door and frame proposed are manufactured using the same materials,
dimensions, and tolerances as those in the prototype blast tests. The rise
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
time of the test waveform shall be zero or subject to approval. For
overpressure with finite duration, the overpressure waveform used in the
test shall exceed the overpressure waveform in both peak overpressure and
impulse and the blast test report shall be supplemented with calculations
that demonstrate the specified or indicated rebound resistance when the
positive phase waveform duration in the test exceeds the positive phase
duration specified or indicated.
2.6.3 Shop Operating Test
Prior to shipment, each door assembly shall be fully erected in a
supporting structure and tested for proper operation. Such testing shall
include opening, closing, and operating all moving parts to ensure smooth
operation and proper clearance, fit, and seating. Determine the operating
forces and opening and closing times. Notify the Contracting Officer at
least 7 calendar days prior to the start of testing and all doors.
2.6.4 Air Leakage Test
Factory test each door assembly for which thermal insulation is specified
for air leakage rate in accordance with ASTM E 283. The rate of air
leakage per unit length of crack shall not exceed 0.20 cfm using a pressure
difference of 1.57 psf. Prototype tests can be substituted for door
assembly tests when the prototype door, frame, and hardware tested are
equivalent to that provided or when otherwise approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install doors and frames in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions. Pressed steel frames for hollow metal doors shall be fully
grouted. Exposed surfaces shall be finish painted in accordance with
Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2 TESTS
After installation is completed, field test each door for operation,
clearance, fit, and seating by operating the door and hardware through at
least 10 operating cycles. Test door and hardware operation using the
forces specified. Provide personnel and equipment required to perform
field testing. Unless waived, perform all field tests in the presence of
the Contracting Officer. After testing is completed, prepare test reports
and furnish three copies.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE
Perform installation and testing of door assemblies under the supervision
of the door manufacturer's erection engineer. Upon completion of the work,
and at a time designated by the Contracting Officer, provide the services
of one engineer and other technical personnel, as required, for a period of
not less than 4 hours to instruct Government personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the blast doors and all other items furnished under this
specification. Include in the instructions videotapes and use of the
operation and maintenance manual. Submit an instruction outline and
procedure for approval prior to scheduling the instruction. Provide one
copy of all instruction material at the time of instruction.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 11
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 39 54 Page 12
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 41 13
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Specification includes aluminum entrances, glass and glazing, door
hardware, and components.
Type of Aluminum Entrance includes:
Impact Resistance Entrances; medium stile, 3-1/2 inch vertical face
dimension, 1-3/4 inch depth, interior structural silicone glazed, high
traffic/impact resistant applications.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)
AAMA 503 (2008) Voluntary Specification for Field
Testing of Newly Installed Storefronts,
Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems
AAMA 800 (2010) Voluntary Specifications and Test
Methods for Sealants
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI Z97.1 (2009) Safety Glazing Materials Used in
Buildings - Safety Performance
Specifications and Methods of Test
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)
ASCE/SEI 7-05 (2005; R 2006) Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B 221 (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM B 221M (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric)
ASTM E 330 (2002) Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain
Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference
SECTION 08 41 13 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
ASTM E 331 (2000; R 2009) Water Penetration of
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)
GANA Glazing Manual (2004) Glazing Manual
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
Materials
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 325 (2002; R 2010) Door, Drapery, Gate,
Louver, and Window Operators and Systems
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Within 30 days of the Contract Award, submit the following for review and
approval by the Contracting Officer:
Listing of Product Installations
Sample Warranty
Finish and Color Samples
Manufacturer's Catalog Data
Installation Drawings
Fabrication Drawings for custom fabrications
Concurrently submit certified test reports showing compliance with
specified performance characteristics and UL 325 for the following:
1.3.1 Deflection
Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics as follows:
The maximum allowable deflection in any member when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 330 with allowable stress in accordance with AA
Specifications for Aluminum Structures is L/175 or 3/4 inches maximum.
1.3.2 Structural
Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics as follows:
a. Corner strength per dual moment load test procedure and obtain
certification by an independent testing laboratory to ensure weld
compliance and corner integrity.
b. Test and certify test results per AAMA 503, ASTM E 1105, ASTM E 783,
SECTION 08 41 13 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
ASTM E 331, and make available upon request.
1.3.2.1 Uniform Load
Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics as follows:
a. Apply a static air design load of 4.07 kilopascal 65 psf for 9/16 inch
laminated infill in the positive and negative direction in accordance
with AAMA 501, and ASTM E 330.
b. No deflections are allowed to exceed l/180 of the span of any framing
member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified
design load, no glass breakage is allowed.
1.3.2.2 Impact Resistance
Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics as follows:
Large Missile, tested in accordance with ASTM E 1886 at a door opening
of 7 foot - 0 inch by 8 foot - 0 inch.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Sample Warranty;
Listing of Product Installations;
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings
Fabrication Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's Catalog Data
SD-04 Samples
Finish and Color Samples
SD-06 Test Reports
Certified Test Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Manufacturer's Product Warranty
SECTION 08 41 13 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Qualifications
1.5.1.1 Installer Qualifications
Provide documentation of Installer experience as determined by Contractor
to perform work of this section, who has specialized in the installation of
work similar to that required for this project, and who is acceptable to
product manufacturer.
1.5.1.2 Manufacturer Qualifications
Ensure manufacturer is capable of providing field service representation
during construction, approving acceptable installer and approving
application method.
1.5.2 Pre-Installation Meetings
Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate
conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's
warranty requirements.
1.5.3 Single Source Responsibility
Provide design, structural engineering, and custom fabrication for door
portal system and supply of all components, materials, and products based
on a single manufacturer of sole responsibility. Provision of products
from numerous sources for site assembly without complete single source
design and supply responsibility is not acceptable. Work items and
components to be fabricated or supplied by single source are:
a. Door assemblies to be installed in door portal as specified in Section
08 14 00 WOOD DOORS.
b. Glazed wall to be constructed around door portal as specified in
Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.
c. Door operating hardware to be installed on or within door portal as
specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.
d. Glass as specified in Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.6.1 Ordering
Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements
to avoid construction delays.
1.6.2 Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading
Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged
containers with identification labels intact.
1.6.3 Storage and Protection
Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.
Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect
SECTION 08 41 13 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities,
and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS/ SITE CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Field Measurements
Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before
fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field
measurements, fabrication scheduled with construction progress to avoid
construction delays.
1.8 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Design, size components, and install door portal system to withstand these
loads without breakage, loss, failure of seals, product deterioration, and
other defects.
a. Dead and Live Loads: Determined by ASCE/SEI 7-05 and calculated in
accordance with applicable codes.
b. Seismic loads: Design and install system to comply with applicable
seismic requirements for project location as defined by of ICC IBC.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Aluminum (Entrances and Components)
2.1.1.1 Material Standard
ASTM B 221 ASTM B 221M; 6063-T5 alloy and tempered
Provide door stile and rail face dimensions of the entrance doors as
follows:
Vertical Stile Top Rail Bottom Rail
3-1/2 inches 3-1/2 inches 6-1/2 inches
Provide major portions of the door members at .125 inches nominal in
thickness and glazing molding to be .050 inches thick.
2.1.1.2 Tolerances
Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional
dimensions of entrance members are nominal and in compliance with Aluminum
Standards and Data, published by The Aluminum Association.
Provide either EPDM elastomeric extrusions or thermoplastic elastomer
glazing gaskets. Structural silicone sealant is required.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers are acceptable providing they meet the requirements specified
in this section and project drawings.
SECTION 08 41 13 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.3 ACCESSORIES
2.3.1 Fasteners
Provide stainless steel where exposed.
2.3.2 Perimeter Anchors
When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and
aluminum material to prevent galvanic action.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
2.4.1 Sealants
Refer to Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. Ensure all sealants conform to
AAMA 800.
2.4.2 Glass
Refer to Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Site Verification of Conditions
Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under
other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
Verify openings are sized to receive storefront system and sill plate is
level in accordance with manufacturer's acceptable tolerances.
3.1.2 Field Measurements
Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before
fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field
measurements, fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
construction delays.
3.2 Preparation
Field verify dimensions prior to fabricating door portal assembly
components.
Coordinate requirements for locations of blockouts for anchorage of door
portal columns and other embedded components with Section 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
Coordinate erection of door portal with installation of surrounding glass
wall and door assemblies. Ensure adequate provision is made for support
and anchorage of assembly components.
3.2.1 Adjacent Surfaces Protection
Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product
installation.
SECTION 08 41 13 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.2.2 Aluminum Surface Protection
Protect aluminum surfaces from contact with lime, mortar, cement, acids,
and other harmful contaminants.
3.3 Adjusting
Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation, and as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.4 Related Products Installation Requirements
3.4.1 Sealants (Perimeter)
Refer to Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.4.2 Glass
Refer to Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.
3.4.3 Reference
ANSI Z97.1, 16 CFR 1201 and GANA Glazing Manual.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
3.5.1 Protection
Protect installed product's finish surfaces from damage during
construction. Protect aluminum storefront system from damage from grinding
and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful
contaminants.
3.5.2 Cleaning
Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance.
Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.
3.6 WARRANTY
Submit three signed copies of Manufacturer's Product Warranty for entrance
system as follows:
Warranty Period: Two years from Date of Substantial Completion of the
project, provided that the Limited Warranty begins in no event later
than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer. In addition,
support welded door corner construction with a limited lifetime
warranty for the life of the door under normal use.
Ensure Warranty language is identical to "As Approved" version of the
sample warranty submitted and returned from the Contracting Officer.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 41 13 Page 7
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 44 00
GLAZED ASSEMBLIES
04/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)
AA ADM-105 (2005; Errata 2005) Aluminum Design Manual
AA ASD1 (2009) Aluminum Standards and Data
AA DAF-45 (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System
for Aluminum Finishes
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)
AAMA 609 & 610 (2009) Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for
Architecturally Finished Aluminum
AAMA 611 (1998; R 2004) Voluntary Specification for
Anodized Architectural Aluminum
AAMA 800 (2010) Voluntary Specifications and Test
Methods for Sealants
AAMA CW-10 (2004) Care and Handling of Architectural
Aluminum from Shop to Site
AAMA MCWM-1 (1989) Metal Curtain Wall Manual
AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)
AISC/AISI 121 (2004) Standard Definitions for Use in the
Design of Steel Structures
AISI SG03-3 (2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)
Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual Set
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)
ASCE 7-10 (2010) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.10/A5.10M (1999; R 2007) Specification for Bare
Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Welding
Electrodes and Rods
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M (2010) Standard Specification for Steel,
Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability and Ultra-High Strength
ASTM A 123/A 123M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
ASTM A 153/A 153M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
ASTM A 167 (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip
ASTM A 242/A 242M (2004; R 2009) Standard Specification for
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
ASTM A 36/A 36M (2008) Standard Specification for Carbon
Structural Steel
ASTM A 424/A 424M (2009) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet for Porcelain Enameling
ASTM A 501 (2007) Standard Specification for
Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing
ASTM A 572/A 572M (2007) Standard Specification for
High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel
ASTM A 588/A 588M (2005) Standard Specification for
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point,
with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
ASTM A 606/A 606M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
ASTM A 611 (1997) Standard Specification for
Structural Steel (SS), Sheet, Carbon,
Cold-Rolled
ASTM A 653/A 653M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B 108/B 108M (2008) Standard Specification for
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings
ASTM B 136 (1984; R 2008e1) Standard Method for
Measurement of Stain Resistance of Anodic
Coatings on Aluminum
ASTM B 137 (1995; R 2009) Standard Test Method for
Measurement of Coating Mass Per Unit Area
on Anodically Coated Aluminum
ASTM B 152/B 152M (2009) Standard Specification for Copper
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar
ASTM B 209 (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM B 211 (2003) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire
ASTM B 221 (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM B 244 (2009) Standard Method for Measurement of
Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum
and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on
Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy-Current
Instruments
ASTM B 26/B 26M (2009) Standard Specification for
Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings
ASTM B 316/B 316M (2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Rivet and Cold-Heading
Wire and Rods
ASTM B 85/B 85M (2009) Standard Specification for
Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings
ASTM C 1036 (2006) Standard Specification for Flat
Glass
ASTM C 1048 (2004) Standard Specification for
Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass
ASTM C 542 (2005) Lock-Strip Gaskets
ASTM C 864 (2005) Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal
Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers
ASTM C 920 (2010) Standard Specification for
Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D 1037 (2006a) Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base
Fiber and Particle Panel Materials
ASTM D 1730 (2009) Standard Practices for Preparation
of Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Surfaces
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
for Painting
ASTM E 34 (1994; R 2002) Chemical Analysis of
Aluminum and Aluminum-Base Alloys
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)
NAAMM MFM (1988) Metal Finishes Manual
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC SP 1 (1982; E 2004) Solvent Cleaning
SSPC SP 3 (2004; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 7/NACE No.4 (2007) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
CID A-A-344 (Rev B; Notice 1) Lacquer (Clear Gloss)
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
Materials
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings; G
Shop-Painting Aluminum
Shop-Painting Steel
SD-03 Product Data
Preventive Maintenance and Inspection
Metals For Fabrication
Nonskinning Sealing Compound
Metal Accessories
Sealants and Calkings
Canopy Assembly
Masonry Anchorage Devices
Sample warranties
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SD-05 Design Data
Calculations; G
Finish; G
Exposed-to-View Aluminum Finish; G
Porcelain-Enamel; G
Seismic Calculations; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
WARRANTY
1.3 REQUIREMENT FOR DESIGN DATA
Submit structural for canopy assembly.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Testing Requirements
The components listed below shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements below, and meet performance requirements specified.
a. Joint and Glazing Sealants: Perform tests as required by applicable
publications referenced.
b. Preformed Compression Gaskets and Seals: ASTM C 864.
c. Preformed Lock-strip Gaskets: ASTM C 542, modified as follows: Heat
age specimens seven days at 158 degrees F, in zipped or locked position
under full design compression. Unzip, cool for one hour, re-zip, and
test lip seal pressure, which must be minimum 2.5 pounds per linear inch
on any extruded or corner specimen.
d. Anodized Finishes: Stain resistance, coating weight, and coating
thickness tests, ASTM B 136, ASTM B 137, and ASTM B 244, respectively.
1.4.2 Mockup
1.4.2.1 Construction
Construct at manufacturer's plant full size wall unit which incorporates
horizontal and vertical joints, framing, glazing, and other accessories as
detailed and specified. Mock-up unit size and design shall be as indicated.
1.4.2.2 Performance Test
Conduct after approval of visual aspects has been obtained. Finished work
shall match approved mock-up.
1.4.2.3 Approved Mock-Up
After completion and approval of test results transport mock-up to job site
and install, where directed, for reference during construction.
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.4.3 Deflection and Structural Tests
No framing member shall have a permanent deformation in excess of 0.2
percent of its clear span when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 for a
minimum test period of 10 seconds at 1.5 times the design wind pressures
specified.
1.4.4 Delamination Test
Adhesively bonded metal-faced panels shall show no evidence of
delamination, warpage or other deterioration or damage when subjected to
the six "Accelerated Aging Cycles" specified in ASTM D 1037.
1.5 Tolerances
Design and erect canopy to accommodate tolerances in building frame and
other contiguous work as indicated or specified. Provide with the
following tolerances:
a. Maximum variation from plane or location shown on approved shop
drawings: 1/8 inch per 12 feet of length up to not more than 1/2 inch
in any total length.
b. Maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members
abutting end to end in line: 1/16 inch.
1.6 Structural Requirements
No member shall deflect in a direction parallel to the plane of the wall,
when carrying its full design load, more than an amount which will reduce
the edge cover or glass bite below 75 percent of the design dimension. No
member after deflection under full design load, shall have a clearance
between itself and the top of the panel, glass, sash, or other part
immediately below it less than 1/8 inch; the clearance between the member
and an operable window or door shall be minimum 1/16 inch.
1.7 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Welding shall be performed by certified welders qualified in accordance
with AWS D1.1/D1.1M using procedures, materials, and equipment of the type
required for the work.
1.8 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage; unload and store with a
minimum of handling in accordance with recommendations contained in
AAMA CW-10. Storage spaces shall be dry locations with adequate
ventilation, free from heavy dust, not subject to combustion products or
sources of water, and shall permit easy access for inspection and handling.
Deliver calking and sealing compounds to the job site in sealed containers
labeled to show the designated name, formula or specifications number; lot
number; color; date of manufacturer; shelf life; and curing time when
applicable.
1.8.1 Protective Covering
Prior to shipment from the factory, place knocked-down lineal members in
cardboard containers and cover finished surfaces of aluminum with
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
protective covering of adhesive paper, waterproof tape, or strippable
plastic. Covering shall not chip, peel, or flake due to temperature or
weather, shall protect against discoloration and surface damage from
transportation, and storage, and shall be resistant to alkaline mortar and
plaster. Do not cover aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with
sealants after installation.
1.8.2 Identification
Prior to delivery, mark wall components to correspond with shop and
erection drawings placement location and erection.
1.9 WARRANTY
Guarantee insulating glass units not to develop material obstruction of
vision as a result of dust or film formation on the inner glass surface
caused by failure of the seal, other than through glass breakage, within a
period of 5 years from date of acceptance of work by the Government.
Replace units failing to comply with the terms of this guarantee with new
units without additional cost to the Government. The Contractor shall
require the manufacturer to execute their warranties in writing directly to
the Government.
1.9.1 Sample Warranties
Provide glazing assemblies material and workmanship warranties meeting
specified requirements. Provide revision or amendment to standard membrane
manufacturer warranty to comply with the specified requirements.
a. Project Warranty: Refer to Section 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK and
Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES for project warranty provisions.
b. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance,
Manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized
company official manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a
limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents.
c. Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within
specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering. Determine warranty on finish by type of finish selected.
d. Beneficiary: Issue warranty in the legal name of the project Owner.
e. Warranty Period: 5 years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion,
covering complete canopy system for failure to meet specified
requirements.
f. Warranty Acceptance: Owner is sole authority who will determine
acceptability of manufacturer's warranty documents.
1.10 INTERPRETATION OF AWS CODE
Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL applies to work specified in this
section.
AWS code, when referred to herein, shall mean AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel" with the following modification:
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Revise AWS code Section 1, "General Provisions," Paragraph 1.1 as follows:
References to the need for approval shall mean "Approval by the Contracting
Officer" and references to the "Building Commissioner" shall mean the
"Contracting Officer."
1.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.11.1 Allowable Design Stresses
Aluminum-alloy framing member allowable design stresses shall be in
accordance with the requirements of AA ADM-105 pertaining to building type
structures made of the specified aluminum alloy.
Hot-rolled structural-steel member allowable design stresses and design
rules shall be in accordance with the requirements of AISC/AISI 121
pertaining to the specified structural steel.
Cold-formed light-gage steel structural member allowable design stresses
and design rules shall be in accordance with the requirements of AISI SG03-3
SG570 pertaining to structural members formed from the specified
structural-steel sheet or strip.
1.11.2 Design Wind Load
Design windload shall be 45 pounds per square foot. Design windload shall
be in accordance with ASCE 7-10.
1.12 DRAWINGS
Installation Drawings shall include the following information for canopy
assemblies.
Location and details of anchorage devices that are to be cast-in-place in
concrete and masonry construction.
Panel dimensions, thicknesses and kinds of materials, edge details, details
of installation in canopy framing, and other pertinent construction and
erection details.
1.13 MANUFACTURER'S INFORMATION
Preventive Maintenance and Inspection shall consist of the aluminum
manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials and application methods,
including detrimental effects to the aluminum finish when improperly
applied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Aluminum
Shall be free from defects impairing strength or durability of surface
finish. Provide standard alloys shall conform to standards and
designations of AA ASD1. Special alloys, not covered by the following ASTM
specifications, shall conform to standards and designations recommended by
the manufacturer for the purpose intended.
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.1.1 Wrought Aluminum Alloys
Shall be those which include aluminum alloying elements not exceeding the
following maximum limits when tested and additional in accordance with
ASTM E 34. These limits apply to both bare products and the core of clad
products. The cladding of clad products shall be within the same limits
except that the maximum zinc limit may be 2.5 percent in order to assure
that the cladding is anodic to the core. Special wrought alloys with a
silicon content not more than 7.0 percent will be acceptable for limited
structural uses where special appearance is required:
ALLOY PERCENT
Silicon 1.5
Magnesium, Manganese, and
Chromium combined 6.0
Iron 1.0
Copper 0.4
Zinc 1.0
Within the chemical composition limits set forth above, wrought aluminum
alloys shall conform to the following:
a. Extruded bars, rods, shapes and tubes: ASTM B 221.
b. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2.1.1.2 Cast Aluminum Alloys
Provide those in which the alloying elements are silicon, magnesium,
manganese, or a combination of these. Other elements shall not exceed the
following limits:
ELEMENT PERCENT
Iron 1.2
Copper 0.4
Nickel 0.4
Titanium 0.2
Others (total) 0.5
Within the chemical composition limits set forth above, cast aluminum
alloys shall conform to the following:
a. Sand castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.
b. Die casting: ASTM B 85/B 85M.
c. Permanent mold castings: ASTM B 108/B 108M.
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.1.3 Welding Rods and Electrodes
Provide welding rods and bare electrodes shall conform to AWS A5.10/A5.10M
as recommended by the manufacturer of the aluminum base metal alloy being
used.
2.1.1.4 Finish
Anodized finish on aluminum surfaces shall match in appearance or fall
within the two extremes of color range of the approved samples. The
following designation of finishes refer to standard finishes as defined in
the NAAMM MFM. Aluminum used for framing shall have a color anodized
finish designation AA-MIO-C22-A34 and AA-MIOC22-A44, meeting the
requirements of AAMA 611.
2.1.1.5 Strength
Aluminum extrusions for framing members used in canopy shall have a minimum
ultimate tensile strength of 22,000 psi and a minimum yield strength of
16,000 psi.
2.1.2 Bronze
Bronze sheets, tubes, and drawn shapes shall be commercial bronze, alloy
No. 220. Extruded shapes shall be architectural bronze, alloy No. 385.
Rolled or drawn rods shall be commercial bronze, alloy No. 220 or
architectural bronze, alloy No. 385.
2.1.3 Copper
Conform to ASTM B 152/B 152M, hot or cold-rolled of the temper suitable for
the respective forming operations.
2.1.4 Carbon Steel
Conform to the following specifications:
a. Rolled shapes, plates, and bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
b. Galvanized sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M.
c. Sheets for porcelain enameling: ASTM A 424/A 424M.
d. Other sheets: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 611.
2.1.5 Stainless Steel
Conform to ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304, and finish in accordance with the
NAAMM MFM conform to Metal Finishes Manual as follows:
a. Concealed flashings: Dead soft fully annealed, 2 D finish.
b. Exposed work: No. 4 finish to match approved sample.
2.1.6 Weathering High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel
Weathering steel shall be a high-strength, low-alloy steel conforming to
ASTM A 242/A 242M, ASTM A 588/A 588M, ASTM A 606/A 606M, and
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M as applicable to the shapes and thicknesses required.
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
In addition, the steel shall be capable of developing a tightly adhered
protective oxide coating when left unpainted and subjected to atmospheric
exposure. Provide steel that conforms to the manufacturer's published
mechanical properties and chemical composition. Perform cleaning, surface
preparation, handling, bolting, riveting, and welding of weathering steel
in strict accordance with the specification and recommendations of the
steel manufacturer.
2.1.7 High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel
Conform to ASTM A 572/A 572M for structural shapes, plates, and bars.
2.1.8 Metal Fasteners
Provide fasteners as specified in paragraph entitled "Fastener Metals for
Joining Various Metal Combinations" in "Part 2 - Products" of the
AAMA MCWM-1. Fastener metals used in connection with weathering steel
shall be of type recommended by the weathering steel manufacturer. Use
metals for fasteners shall be chemically and galvanically compatible with
contiguous materials.
2.1.9 Joint Sealants and Accessories
Provide manufacturer's standard colors as closely matching the adjacent
surfaces as possible.
2.1.9.1 Elastomeric, Single or Multiple Component
ASTM C 920, Type S, single component or Type M, multiple component. Use
Grade NS, nonsag type in joints on vertical surfaces and use Grade P,
self-leveling or flow type, in joints on horizontal surfaces.
2.1.9.2 Single Component Silicone Rubber Base
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS (Silicone).
2.1.9.3 Solvents and Primers
Provide material which is quick drying, colorless, nonstaining, compatible
with compound used, as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Where primer
is specified or recommended by sealant manufacturer, tests related to that
material shall include primer.
2.1.9.4 Backing Material
Provide material which is nonstaining, nonabsorbent, and compatible with
sealing compound. Closed cell resilient urethane, polyvinylchloride or
polyethylene foam; closed-cell sponge of vinyl or rubber; closed cell
neoprene or butyl rod; or polychloroprene tubes or beads.
2.1.9.5 Bond Preventive Materials
Provide polyethylene tape with pressure-sensitive adhesive; aluminum foil
or waxed paper.
2.1.9.6 Preformed Sealing Compound
Provide nonskinning type conforming to AAMA 800. Tapes, beads, ribbons or
other shapes as required.
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 11
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.10 Glass and Glazing
Materials are specified under Section 08 81 00 GLAZING. Conform to
ASTM C 1036, except ASTM C 1048. All glazing material must be certified as
meeting 16 CFR 1201.
2.1.10.1 Glass Sizes and Clearances
Sizes indicated are nominal. Verify actual sizes required by measuring
frames. Coordinate dimensions for glass and glass holding members to meet
applicable minimum clearances as recommended by glass manufacturer. Do not
nip to remove flares or to reduce oversized dimensions.
2.1.10.2 Clear Primary Float Glass
Provide Type I, Class I, quality q3, 1/2 inch thick.
2.1.10.3 Heat-Absorbing Glass
Clean cut, Type I, Class 2, style A in color, as indicated.
2.1.10.4 Glass Setting Materials
a. Sealants and preformed sealing compounds: Shall be as specified under
paragraph entitled "Joint Sealant and Accessories."
b. Preformed compression gaskets and seals: ASTM C 864, color indicated.
Gaskets shall have durable compatible, and colorfast coating.
c. Preformed lock-strip type gaskets: ASTM C 542, factory formed, color
indicated. Provide separate filler or locking strips, approximately 10
Shore "A" Durometer points harder than gasket body, and insure
permanent and continuous pressure of sealing lips.Butt or miter grooves
45 degrees.
d. Setting blocks, edge blocks, and spacer shims: Fabricate from neoprene
or other materials recommended by glass manufacturer compatible with
compounds, sealants, or gaskets used. Unless otherwise recommended by
the glass manufacturer, shore "A" Durometer hardness for setting and
edge blocks shall be 90 plus or minus 5; for spacer shims, 50 plus or
minus 5.
2.1.11 Paint and Finishes
2.1.11.1 Primer
Zinc-molydate, alkyd type.
2.2 METALS FOR FABRICATION
2.2.1 Aluminum-Alloy Extrusions
Extrusions shall conform to ASTM B 221.
Extrusions to receive an integral-color anodic coating shall be the alloy
and temper recommended by the aluminum producer for the specified finish
with integral-color anodic coating and have mechanical properties equal to
or exceeding those of 6063-T5.
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 12
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.2 Aluminum-Alloy Sheets and Plates
Unless otherwise specified, sheets and plates shall conform to ASTM B 209,
Alloy 3003-H16.
Sheets and plates to receive a clear anodic coating shall conform to
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5005-H16.
Sheets and plates to receive an integral-color anodic coating shall be the
alloy and temper recommended by the aluminum producer for the specified
coating and have mechanical properties equal to or exceeding those of
5005-H16.
2.2.3 Structural Steel
Hot-rolled shapes, plates, and bars shall conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Hot-formed tubing shall conform to ASTM A 501.
Sheet and strip for cold-formed, light-gage, structural members shall
conform to ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.2.4 Metals for Fasteners
Provide aluminum-alloy bolts and screws made from rod conforming to
ASTM B 211, Alloy 2024-T351.
Provide aluminum-alloy nuts made from rod conforming to ASTM B 211, Alloy
6061-T6.
Provide aluminum-alloy washers made from sheet conforming to ASTM B 209,
Alloy 2024-T4.
Provide aluminum-alloy rivets made from rod or wire conforming to
ASTM B 316/B 316M, Alloy 6053-T61.
Provide steel fasteners made from corrosion-resistant chromium-nickel Type
302, 303, 304, 305, or 316 with the form and condition best suited for the
work.
2.3 NONSKINNING SEALING COMPOUND
Sealing compound shall be nonskinning, gun-grade type conforming to AAMA 800.
2.4 FABRICATION
2.4.1 Workmanship
Metal Accessories shall be accurately formed; joints, except those designed
to accommodate movement, accurately fitted and rigidly assembled.
Insofar as practical, fitting and assembly of the work shall be done in the
manufacturer's plant. Mark work that cannot be permanently
factory-assembled before shipment to ensure proper assembly at the site.
2.4.2 Shop-Painting Aluminum
Shop prime aluminum surfaces that will come in contact with dissimilar
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 13
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
metals, masonry, concrete, or wood.
Prepare aluminum surfaces for painting in accordance with ASTM D 1730, Type
B, Method 2 or 3.
Give aluminum surfaces one shop coat of paint applied to dry, clean,
surfaces to provide a continuous minimum dry-film thickness of 1.5 mils.
2.4.3 Shop-Painting Steel
Shop prime surfaces of concealed steel.
Remove scale, rust, and other deleterious materials. Remove heavy rust and
loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP 3 or SSPC SP 7/NACE No.4.
Remove oil, grease, and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP 1.
Give steel surfaces two coats of paint; the second coat shall have a color
different from the first coat. Apply paint to dry, clean, surfaces to
provide a continuous minimum dry-film thickness of 1.5 mils for the first
coat and 1 mil for the second coat.
2.4.4 Depth of Glazing Rabbets
Depth of glazing rabbets for openings to receive glass materials or panels
shall be as follows:
MINIMUM
NOMINAL RABBET
MATERIAL THICKNESS MAXIMUM SIZE DEPTH
Single- Double strength Up to 5 square feet 3/8 inch
glass
lights Double strength Over 5 square feet 1/2 inch
1/8 inch Up to 5 square feet 3/8 inch
1/8 inch 5 to 25 square feet 1/2 inch
1/8 inch 25 to 70 square feet 5/8 inch
3/16 inch Up to 25 square feet 1/2 inch
3/16 inch Over 25 square feet 5/8 inch
7/32 inch All sizes 5/8 inch
1/4 inch Up to 100 square feet 5/8 inch
1/4 inch Over 100 square feet 3/4 inch
5/16 inch All sizes 3/4 inch
3/8 inch All sizes 7/8 inch
1/2 inch All sizes 7/8 inch
3/4 inch All sizes 7/8 inch
Double- All thicknesses Up to 25 square feet 5/8 inch
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 14
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
MINIMUM
NOMINAL RABBET
MATERIAL THICKNESS MAXIMUM SIZE DEPTH
glazing
units All thicknesses 25 to 70 square feet 3/4 inch
Panels Up to 1 inch All sizes 5/8 inch
1 to 1-1/2 All sizes 3/4 inch
inches
2.4.5 Finish
Exposed-to-View Aluminum Finish of surfaces must be:
Frosted finish with lacquer coating: Medium-matte chemical etch and a
clear methacrylate lacquer coating applied in two coats with interim drying
to provide a continuous minimum dry-film thickness of 0.6 mil. Lacquer
shall be nonyellowing and conform to CID A-A-344. Finish shall be AA
C22-RIX, in accordance with AA DAF-45.
Frosted finish with Class II clear anodic coating: Medium-matte chemical
etch and Architectural Class II (0.4- to 0.7-mil thickness) anodic coating
producing a natural aluminum color. Finish shall be AA C22-A31 in
accordance with AA DAF-45.
Frosted finish with Class I clear anodic coating: Medium-matte chemical
etch and Architectural Class I (0.7-mil and greater thickness) anodic
coating producing a natural aluminum color. Finish shall be AA C22-A41 in
accordance with AA DAF-45.
Polished frosted finish with Class II clear anodic coating: Smooth
specular-buffed mechanical, followed by a medium-matte chemical etch and
Architectural Class II (0.4- to 0.7-mil thickness) anodic coating producing
a natural aluminum color. Finish shall be AA M21-C22-A31 in accordance
with AA DAF-45.
Polished frosted finish with integral-color anodic coating: Smooth
specular buffed mechanical, followed by nonetching inhibitive alkaline
cleaning, medium-matte chemical etch, and Architectural Class I ( 0.7-mil
and greater thickness) anodic coating producing an integral-color finish.
Color shall be: FS 20059 - Brown
Match aluminum-finish color and appearance to that of the sample approved
for use in the project within the aluminum producer's standard color range.
Test the anodic coating on aluminum for thickness in accordance with
ASTM B 244.
Test anodically coated aluminum for the weight of the coating in accordance
with ASTM B 137.
Test the resistance of anodically coated aluminum to staining by dyes in
accordance with ASTM B 136.
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 15
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Install canopy and accessories in accordance with the approved drawings and
as specified.
3.2 FABRICATION
Provide canopy components of the materials and thickness indicated or
specified. The details indicated are representative of the required design
and profiles. Acceptable designs may differ from that shown if the
proposed system components conform to the limiting dimensions indicated and
the requirements specified herein. Unless specifically indicated or
specified otherwise, the methods of fabrication and assembly shall be at
the discretion of the canopy manufacturer. Perform fitting and assembling
of components in the shop to the maximum extent practicable. Provide
anchorage devices shall permit adjustment in three directions. Exposed
fastenings used on finished surfaces shall be truss head, flat head, or
oval head screws or bolts.
3.2.1 Joints
Provide welded or mechanical fasteners as indicated or specified. Match
joints in exposed work to produce continuity of line and design. Bed-joints
or rabbets receiving calking or sealing material shall be minimum 3/4 inch
deep and 3/8 inch wide at mid ambient temperature range.
3.2.2 Welding
Conform to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use methods and electrodes recommended by
manufacturers of base metal alloys. Provide welding rods of an alloy that
matches the color of the metal being welded. Protect glass and other
finish from exposure to welding spatter. Ground and finish weld beads on
exposed metal surfaces to minimize mismatch and to blend with finish on
adjacent parent metal. If flux is used in welding aluminum, completely
remove it immediately upon completion of welding operations. Do not use
exposed welds on aluminum surfaces.
3.2.3 Soldering and Brazing
Provide as recommended by suppliers. Solder only for filling or sealing
joints.
3.2.4 Ventilation and Drainage
Provide internal ventilation drainage system of weeps or based on
principles of pressure equalization to ventilate the wall internally and to
discharge condensation and water leakage to exterior as inconspicuously as
possible. Flashings and other materials used internally shall be
nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nonbleeding.
3.2.5 Protection and Treatment of Metals
3.2.5.1 General
Remove from metal surfaces lubricants used in fabrication and clean off
other extraneous material before leaving the shop.
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 16
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.2.5.2 Galvanic Action
Provide protection against galvanic action wherever dissimilar metals are
in contact, except in the case of aluminum in permanent contact with zinc,
stainless steel, or relatively small areas of white bronze. Paint contact
surfaces with one coat bituminous paint or apply appropriate calking
material or nonabsorptive, noncorrosive, and nonstaining tape or gasket
between contact surfaces.
3.2.5.3 Protection for Aluminum
Protect aluminum which is placed in contact with, built into, or which will
receive drainage from masonry, lime mortar, concrete, or plaster with one
coat of alkali-resistant bituminous paint. Where aluminum is contacted by
absorptive materials subject to repeated wetting or treated with
preservative noncompatible with aluminum, apply two coats of aluminum
paint, to such materials and seal joints with approved calking compound.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Installation and erection of glazed wall system and all components shall be
performed under direct supervision of and in accordance with approved
recommendations and instructions of wall system manufacturer or fabricator.
3.3.1 Bench Marks and Reference Points
Establish and permanently mark bench marks for elevations and building line
offsets for alignment at convenient points on each floor level. Should any
error or discrepancy be discovered in location of the marks, stop erection
work in that area until discrepancies have been corrected.
3.3.2 Verifying Conditions and Adjacent Surfaces
After establishment of lines and grades and prior to system installation
examine supporting structural elements. Verify governing dimensions,
including floor elevations, floor to floor heights, minimum clearances
between canopy and structural frames, and other permissible dimensional
tolerances in the building frame.
3.3.3 Sealing
Seal exterior metal to metal joints between members of windows, frames,
mullions, and mullion covers. Remove excess sealant.
3.3.4 Joint Sealants
3.3.4.1 Surface Preparation
Surfaces to be primed and sealed shall be clean, dry to the touch, free
from frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, or other foreign
matter. Enclose joints on three sides. Clean out grooves to proper depth.
Joint dimensions shall conform to approved detail drawings with a tolerance
of plus 1/8 inch. Do not apply compound unless ambient temperature is
between 40 and 90 degrees F. Clean out loose particles and mortar just
before sealing. Remove protective coatings or coverings from surfaces in
contact with sealants before applying sealants or tapes. Solvents used to
remove coatings shall be of type that leave no residue on metals.
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 17
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.3.4.2 Applications
Match approved sample. Force compound into grooves with sufficient
pressure to fill grooves solidly. Sealing compound shall be uniformly
smooth and free of wrinkles and, unless indicated otherwise, tooled and
left sufficiently convex to result in a flush joint when dry. Do not trim
edges of sealing material after joints are tooled. Mix only amount of
multi-component sealant which can be installed within four hours, but at no
time shall this amount exceed 5 gallons.
3.3.4.3 Primer
Apply to masonry, concrete, wood, and other surfaces as recommended by
sealant manufacturer. Do not apply primer to surfaces which will be
exposed after calking is completed.
3.3.4.4 Backing
Tightly pack in bottom of joints which are over 1/2 inch in depth with
specified backing material to depth indicated or specified. Roll backing
material of hose or rod stock into joints to prevent lengthwise stretching.
3.3.4.5 Bond Prevention
Install bond preventive material at back or bottom of joint cavities in
which no backstop material is required, covering full width and length of
joint cavities.
3.3.4.6 Protection and Cleaning
Remove compound smears from surfaces of materials adjacent to sealed joints
as the work progresses. Use masking tape on each side of joint where
texture of adjacent material will be difficult to clean. Remove masking
tape immediately after filling joint. Scrape off fresh compound from
adjacent surfaces immediately and rub clean with approved solvent. Upon
completion of calking and sealing, remove remaining smears, stains, and
other soiling, and leave the work in clean neat condition.
3.3.5 Glass
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as modified
herein.
3.3.5.1 Inspection of Sash and Frames
Before installing glass, inspect sash and frames to receive glass for
defects such as dimensional variations, glass clearances, open joints, or
other conditions that will prevent satisfactory glass installation. Do not
proceed with installation until defects have been corrected.
3.3.5.2 Preparation of Glass and Rabbets
Clean sealing surfaces at perimeter of glass and sealing surfaces of
rabbets and stop beads before applying glazing compound, sealing compound,
glazing tape, or gaskets. Use only approved solvents and cleaning agents
recommended by compound or gasket manufacturer.
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 18
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.3.5.3 Positioning Glass
Set glass from inside the building unless otherwise indicated or specified.
Maintain specified edge clearances and glass bite at perimeter. Maintain
position of glass in rabbet and provide required sealant thickness on both
sides of glass. For glass dimensions larger than 50 united inches, provide
setting blocks at sill and spacer shims on all four sides; locate setting
blocks one quarter way in from each jamb edge of glass. Where setting
blocks and spacer shims are set into glazing compound or sealant, butter
with compound or sealant, place in position, and allow to firmly set prior
to installation of glass.
3.3.5.4 Setting Methods
Apply glazing compound, glazing sealant, glazing tape, and gaskets
uniformly with accurately formed corners and bevels. Remove excess
compound from glass and sash. Use only recommended thinners, cleaners, and
solvents. Strip surplus compound from both sides of glass and tool at
slight angle to shed water and provide clean sight lines. Secure stop
beads in place with suitable fastenings. Do not apply compound or sealant
at temperatures lower than 40 degrees F, or on damp, dirty, or dusty
surfaces. After glazing, fix ventilators in sash so they cannot be
operated until compound or sealant has set.
a. Use sealant glazing to completely fill channel on edges and on both
sides of glass.
b. Use lock-strip gasket glazing, with lock-strip glazing gaskets .
Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using
special tools and lubricants. When lock-strip type gaskets are used
for glazing insulating glass units, follow glass manufacturer's
recommendations regarding horizontal wall supports between vertical
units, setting blocks, weep holes, and the use of supplementary wet
sealants.
3.3.5.5 Void Space
Heat absorbing, insulating, spandrel, and tempered glass, and glass of
other types that exceed 100 united inches in size: Provide void space at
head and jamb to allow glass to expand or move without exuding the sealant.
3.4 FINISHES
3.4.1 Galvanizing
Conform to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, and ASTM A 653/A 653M, as
applicable.
3.4.1.1 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces
Repair zinc coated surfaces damaged by welding or other means with
galvanizing repair paint or by application of stick or thick paste material
specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved.
3.4.2 Shop Cleaning and Painting
3.4.2.1 Cleaning
Clean steel and iron work by power wire brushing or other approved manual
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 19
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
or mechanical means, for removal of rust, loose paint, scale, and
deleterious substances. Wash cleaned surfaces which become contaminated
with rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other foreign matter, with solvents until
thoroughly clean. Cleaning steel embedded in concrete is not required.
3.4.2.2 Painting Steel or Iron Surfaces
Apply primer to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Apply additional
shop coat of specified paint, to which a small amount of tinting material
has been added, on surfaces that will be concealed in the finished
construction or that will not be accessible for finish painting. Accomplish
painting in dry weather or under cover, and on steel or iron surfaces that
are free from moisture and frost. Do not paint surfaces of items to be
embedded in concrete. Recoat damaged surfaces upon completion of work.
Prime coat steel immediately after cleaning. Do not apply bituminous
protective coatings to items to be finish painted.
3.4.2.3 Painting Weathering Steel
Clean and paint surfaces which will not be exposed to the weather with one
shop or field coat of specified primer, or other approved rust-inhibitive
primer. Clean and strip-paint weathering steel contact surface to be
covered by structural or compression gaskets or sealants with one coat to
insure positive seal.
3.5 FIELD TESTS
Conduct field check test for water leakage on designated wall areas after
erection.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.6.1 General
At the completion of the installation, clean the work to remove mastic
smears and other foreign materials.
3.6.2 Glass
Upon completion of wall system installation, thoroughly wash glass surfaces
on both sides and remove labels, paint spots, putty, compounds, and other
defacements. Replace cracked, broken, and defective glass with new glass
at no additional cost to the Government.
3.6.3 Aluminum Surfaces
Protection methods, cleaning, and maintenance shall be in accordance with
AAMA 609 & 610.
3.6.4 Other Metal Surfaces
After installation, protect windows, panels, and other exposed surfaces
from disfiguration, contamination, contact with harmful materials, and from
other construction hazards that will interfere with their operation, or
damage their appearance or finish. Protection methods must be in
accordance with recommendations of product manufacturers or of the
respective trade association. Remove paper or tape factory applied
protection immediately after installation. Clean surfaces of mortar,
plaster, paint, smears of sealants, and other foreign matter to present
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 20
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
neat appearance and prevent fouling of operation. In addition, wash with a
stiff fiber brush, soap and water, and thoroughly rinse. Where surfaces
become stained or discolored, clean or restore finish in accordance with
recommendations of product manufacturer or the respective trade association.
3.6.5 Porcelain-Enamel Surfaces
Wash surfaces with clean water and soap and rinsed with clean water. Do
not use acid solutions, steel wool, or other harsh abrasives.
3.7 SCHEDULE
Some metric measurements in this section are based on mathematical
conversion of inch-pound measurements, and not on metric measurement
commonly agreed to by the manufacturers or other parties. The inch-pound
and metric measurements are as follows:
PRODUCTS INCH-POUND METRIC
Glass 1/4 inch 6 mm
3.8 MATERIALS EMBEDDED IN OTHER CONSTRUCTION
Install materials to be embedded in precast concrete and panels prior to
the installation of the canopy. Provide setting drawings, templates, and
instructions for installation.
3.9 FASTENING TO CONSTRUCTION-IN-PLACE
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for fastening work to
construction-in-place. Provide fasteners as specified.
3.10 SETTING MASONRY ANCHORAGE DEVICES
Set devices in masonry or concrete-in-place construction in accordance with
the manufacturer's printed instructions. Leave drilled holes rough and
free of drill dust.
3.11 FIELD-WELDING STEEL AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
Procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, the appearance and quality
of the welds made, and the methods used in correcting welding work shall
conform to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
After completion of welding, clean and paint field welds and scarred
surfaces on steel work and on adjacent ferrous-metal surfaces. Paint shall
be the same as that used for shop painting.
3.12 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
Install canopy within the following tolerances:
Deviation in location from that Plus or minus 1/4 inch
indicated on the drawings
Deviation from the plumb or
horizontal
In 12 feet of length Not more than 1/8 inch
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 21
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
In any total length Not more than 1/2 inch
Offset from true alignment at Not more than 1/16 inch
joints between abutting members
in line
3.13 PLACING CANOPY FRAMING MEMBERS
Install members plumb, level, and within the limits of the installation
tolerances specified.
Connect members to building framing. Provide supporting brackets
adjustments for the accurate location of canopy components. Adjustable
connections shall be rigidly fixed after members have been positioned.
3.14 PANEL INSTALLATION
Panels shall be set with a glazing-tape back bed, two-component elastomeric
sealing-compound heel bead, glazing-tape bedding of the stop, and
two-component elastomeric sealing-compound topping bead on both sides of
the panel. Face and edge clearances shall not be less than 1/8 inch.
Remove excess sealing compound on both sides of the canopy opening with a
glazing knife at a slight angle over the rabbet leg or applied stop.
Install applied stops on the top side of the canopy and secured with screws.
3.15 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
3.15.1 Finished Canopy Requirements
Canopy work shall be rejected for any of the following deficiencies:
Finish of exposed-to-view aluminum having color and appearance that are
outside the color and appearance range of the approved samples.
Installed canopy components having stained, discolored, abraded, or
otherwise damaged exposed-to-view surfaces that cannot be cleaned or
repaired.
Aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials that are not
protected as specified.
3.15.2 Repair of Defective Work
Remove and replace defective work with canopy materials that meet the
specifications at no expense to the Government.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 44 00 Page 22
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM E 283 (2004) Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)
ANSI/BHMA A156.13 (2005) Mortise Locks & Latches, Series 1000
ANSI/BHMA A156.15 (2006) Release Devices -- Closer Holder,
Electromagnetic and Electromechanical
ANSI/BHMA A156.21 (2009) American National Standard for
Thresholds
ANSI/BHMA A156.3 (2008) Exit Devices
ANSI/BHMA A156.4 (2008) Door Controls - Closers
ANSI/BHMA A156.5 (2001) Auxiliary Locks and Associated
Products
ANSI/BHMA A156.7 (2009) Template Hinge Dimensions
ANSI/BHMA A156.8 (2005) Door Controls - Overhead Stops and
Holders
BHMA A156.1 (2006) Butts and Hinges
BHMA A156.16 (2008) Auxiliary Hardware
BHMA A156.18 (2006) Materials and Finishes
BHMA A156.22 (2005) Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems
BHMA A156.6 (2005) Architectural Door Trim
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 101 (2009; TIA 09-1; TIA 09-2) Life Safety Code
NFPA 80 (2010; TIA 10-1) Standard for Fire Doors
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
and Other Opening Protectives
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)
SDI/DOOR A250.8 (2003; R2008) Recommended Specifications
for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 14C (2006; R 2008) Standard for Swinging
Hardware for Standard Tin-Clad Fire Doors
Mounted Singly and in Pairs
UL Bld Mat Dir (2009) Building Materials Directory
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Hardware schedule;G
Keying system; G
SD-03 Product Data
Hardware items
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Installation
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Hardware Schedule items, Data Package 1
Submit data package in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Key Bitting
1.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Manufacturer's Abbreviations:
1. CR - Corbin Russwin
2. MC - McKinney
3. NO - Norton
4. PE - Pemko
5. RO - Rockwood
6. RX - Rixson
7. SN - Securitron
Hardware Set 1 Not Used
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Doors: S2-41
3 Hinges A5111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D
1 Storeroom Lock F07 Less Outside Trim (Locked Inside) 630
1 Closer/Stop C02061 PT 4G 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW CSK B4E US32D
1 Door Position Switch GFGI
1 Raindrip R3Y035 x Door width + 4"
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
1 Threshold J36130 x LAR
Hardware Set 2
Doors: 101B, 101C, 101D
3 Hinges A5111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D
1 Closer C02021 689
1 Concealed OH Stop C01541 630
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Door Position Switch GFGI
1 Rain Drip R3Y035 x Door Width + 4"
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
1 Door Bottom Sweep R3B435 x LAR
1 Threshold J32130 x LAR
Note: Sound gasket by door manufacturer to comply with STC rating.
Hardware Set 3
Doors: S1-12, S2-12F
3 Hinges A5111 5 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D
1 Alarmed Exit Device Type 1, Function 01 w/Local Alarm 630
1 Closer C02021 689
1 Concealed OH Stop C01541 630
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Door Position Switch GFGI
1 Raindrip R3Y035 Door width + 4"
1 Door Bottom Sweep R3B435 x LAR
1 Threshold J32130 x LAR
Note: Sound gasket by door manufacturer to comply with STC rating.
Hardware Set 4
Doors: S3-01
3 Hinges A5111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D
1 Alarmed Exit Device Type 1, Function 01 w/Local Alarm 630
1 Closer C02021 689
1 Concealed OH Stop C01541 630
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Door Position Switch GFGI
1 Raindrip R3Y035 Door width + 4"
1 Door Bottom Sweep R3B435 x LAR
1 Threshold J32130 x LAR
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Note: Sound gasket by door manufacturer to comply with STC rating.
Hardware Set 5
Doors: 031-A, 041-A, 043-C
3 Hinges A5111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630
1 Closer/Stop C02061 PT 4G 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW CSK B4E US32D
1 Door Position Switch GFGI
1 Raindrip R3Y035 x Door width + 4"
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
1 Threshold J36130 x LAR
Hardware Set 6
Doors: 101-A
3 Butt Hinge A8111 5 X 4 1/2 26D MC
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630 CR
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D RO
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D RO
3 Door Silencers L03011 MC
Hardware Set 7
Doors: 104-A
6 Butt Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
2 Push/Pull Bar Set J504 630
2 Closer C02041 689
2 Protection Plate J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E US32D
2 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
2 Door Silencers L03011
Note: Perimeter gasket by doo/frame manufacturer.
Hardware Set 8
Doors: 104-B
6 Butt Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
2 Door Pull J302 630
2 Push Plate J405 630
2 Closer C02021 689
2 Protection Plate J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E US32D
2 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
2 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 9
Doors: S2-11
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3 Butt Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Fire Exit Device Type 1, Function 14 Fire Rated 630
1 Closer/Stop C02061 PT 4G 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR PE
Hardware Set 10
Doors: S2-21, S1-21
3 Butt Hinges A8111 5 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Fire Exit Device Type 1, Function 14 Fire Rated 630
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
Hardware Set 11
Doors: S2-01, S1-11, S2-21, S1-21, S2-31, S1-31
3 Butt Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Fire Exit Device Type 1, Function 14 Fire Rated 630
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
Hardware Set 11-A
Doors: S3-02
3 Butt Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 ½ NRP 26D
1 Fire Exit Device Type 1, Func 01 w/Local Alarm x Fire Rated
630
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Door Position Switch GFGI
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
1 Raindrip R3Y035 x Door width + 4"
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
1 Threshold J36130 x LAR
Hardware Set 12 Not Used
Hardware Set 13
Doors: 039A
6 Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D
2 Flush Bolts L04251 US26D
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630
2 Protection Plate J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E US32D
2 Closer C02021 689
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2 Protection Plate J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E US32D
2 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
2 Door Position Switch GFGI
Note: Sound gasketing including threshold by Acoustic door manufacturer to
comply with STC rating and applicable fire label.
Hardware Set 14
Doors: 208, 310
3 Butt Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Door Pull J302 630
1 Push Plate J405 630
1 Closer/Stop C02061 PT 4G 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
1 Sound Seal 322 CSN x LAR
1 Auto Door Bottom 4301 CNBL x LAR
1 Threshold 154 A x LAR
Note: SCIF entrance. High security lock and associated security equipment
by government/security section. Sound gasketing by Acoustic door
manufacturer to comply with STC rating.
Hardware Set 15
Doors: 001
6 Butt Hinge A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
2 Flush Bolts L04251 US26D
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630
2 Protection Plate J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E US32D
1 Concealed OH Stop C01541 630
1 Dust Proof Strike L04021 US26D
2 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 16
Doors: 006
6 Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC
1 Exit Device Type 7, Function 04 630
1 Exit Device Type 7, Function 01 630
2 Closer C02011 689 NO
2 Protection Plate J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E US32D RO
2 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D RO
2 Door Silencers L03011 MC
2 Door Position Switch GFGI SN
Hardware Set 16-A
Doors: 002, 004
6 Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2 Flush Bolts L04251 US26D
1 Electrified Lock A156.13 Series 1000 x Fail Secure 630
2 Closer C02011/C02021 as req'd 689
1 Coordinator A156.3, Type 21 PC
2 Protection Plate J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E US32D
2 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
1 Dust Proof Strike L04021 US26D
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
2 Astragal ROE155 x LAR
2 Auto Door Bottom R3C335 x LAR
1 Threshold J32330
2 Door Position Switch GFGI SN
Note: Card reade, power transfer, power supply and associated equipment by
government/security section.
Hardware Set 17
Doors: 231, 131, 331
6 Butt Hinge A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630
2 Closer C02011 689
2 Protection Plate J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E US32D
2 OH Stop C01541 US26D
1 Dust Proof Strike L04021 US26D
2 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 18
Doors: 202, 302, 309-B, 327, 213, 127, 227
3 Butt Hinge A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
3 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 19
Doors: 036
3 Butt Hinge A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
3 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 20
Doors: 053, 224, 242, 205
6 Butt Hinge A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
2 Flush Bolts L04251/557 as req'd US26D
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630
1 Coordinator A156.3, Type 21 PC
2 Closer C02011/C02021 as req'd 689
2 Protection Plate J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E US32D
2 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
1 Dust Proof Strike L04021 US26D
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
2 Astragal ROE155 x LAR
Hardware Set 21
Doors: 147, 219, 309-A, 320, 333, 338, 339
3 Butt Hinge A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
Hardware Set 22
Doors: Not Used
Hardware Set 23
Doors: 218-A, 236
6 Butt Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
2 Flush Bolts L04251 US26D
1 Office Lock F04 630
1 Core Per Facility Key System 630
1 Closer C02011 689
2 Protection Plate J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E US32D
2 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D
2 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 24
Doors: 047, 055, 102, 106, 107, 108, 110, 111, 112, 117, 118, 120, 121,
124, 135, 139, 143, 145, 214, 216, 220, 222, 233, 235, 238, 240, 243, 245,
247, 249, 305, 307, 313, 314, 316, 324, 335, 343, 345, 347, 353, 355, 357
3 Butt Hinge A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Office Lock F04 630
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
3 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 25
Doors: 033, 051, 113, 119, 122, 210, 218-B, 237, 239, 308, 309-C, 309-D,
312, 318, 337, 341, 351
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3 Butt Hinge A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Office Lock F04 630
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
3 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 26
Doors: 137, 141, 153, 241
3 Butt Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Office Lock F04 630
1 Closer C02021 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
3 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 27
Doors: 026, 126, 133, 138, 215, 226, 253, 317, 326, 359
3 Butt Hinge A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Passage Set F01 630
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
3 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 28
Doors: 032, 130, 230, 330
3 Butt Hinge A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Privacy Set F22 x Occupanct Indicator 630
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
3 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 29
Doors: Not Used
Hardware Set 30
Doors: 034, 132, 134, 232, 234, 332, 334
3 Butt Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Door Pull J405 US32D
1 Push Plate J302 US32D
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Protection Plate J102 6" x 1" LDW 4BE CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 31
Doors: Not Used
Hardware Set 32
Doors: Not Used
Hardware Set 32-A
Doors: 115, 125, 225, 325
3 Hinges A8111 5 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
Hardware Set 33
Doors: 123, 128, 223, 228, 319, 323, 328
3 Hinges A8111 5 X 4 1/2 26D
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630
1 Closer C02021 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
3 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 34
Doors: 028
3 Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 ½ NRP 26D
1 Storeroom Lock F07 630
1 Closer/Stop C02021 PT 4G 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW CSK B4E US32D
1 Door Position Switch GFGI
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
1 Door Sweep R3A155
Hardware Set 34-A
Doors: 103, 109, 129, 203, 229, 303, 329
3 Hinges A8111 5 X 4 ½ NRP 26D
1 Office Lock F04 630
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW CSK B4E US32D
1 Gasket ROE154 x LAR
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Hardware Set 35
Doors: Not Used
Hardware Set 36
Doors: 103, 109, 129, 203, 229, 303, 329
3 Hinges A8111 5 X 4 ½ 26D
1 Classroom Lock F05 630
1 Closer C02011 689
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW CSK B4E US32D
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D
3 Door Silencers L03011
Hardware Set 37
Doors: Not Used
Hardware Set 38
Doors: Not Used
Hardware Set 39
Doors: Not Used
Hardware Set 40
Doors: Not Used
Hardware Set 41
Doors: Not Used
Hardware Set 42
Doors: 105, 136-A, 136-B, 207, 209, 211, 217-A, 217-B, 251, 315-A,
315-B, 336-A, 336-B
3 Butt Hinges A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC
1 Office Lock F04 630 CR
1 Closer Co2011/c02021 as req'd 689 NO
1 Protection Plate J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK US32D RO
1 Wall Bumper L02251 US26D RO
Note: Door, frame, threshold, door bottom, hinges (if required) and sound
gasketing by Acoustic door manufacturer to comply with STC rating.
Hardware Set 43
Doors: Roof Hatch Stair 1
1 Padlock As required 630
1 Door Position Switch GFGI
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 11
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Hardware Set 44
Doors: 031-B, 043-A, 043-B, 041-B
1 Door Position Switch GFGI
Note: All hardware by door manufacturer.
1.4 KEY BITTING CHART REQUIREMENTS
Submit key bitting charts to the Contracting Officer prior to completion of
the work. Include:
a. Complete listing of all keys (AA1, AA2, etc.).
b. Complete listing of all key cuts (AA1-123456, AA2-123458).
c. Tabulation showing which key fits which door.
d. Copy of floor plan showing doors and door numbers.
e. Listing of 20 percent more key cuts than are presently required in
each master system.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Hardware Manufacturers and Modifications
Provide, as far as feasible, locks, hinges, and closers of one lock, hinge,
or closer manufacturer's make. Modify hardware as necessary to provide
features indicated or specified.
1.5.1 Key Shop Drawings Coordination Meeting
Prior to the submission of the key shop drawing, the
Contracting Officer, Contractor, Door Hardware subcontractor, using
Activity and Base Locksmith shall meet to discuss key requirements for the
facility.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver hardware in original individual containers, complete with necessary
appurtenances including fasteners and instructions. Mark each individual
container with item number as shown in hardware schedule. Deliver
permanent keys and removable cores to the Contracting Officer, either
directly or by certified mail. Deliver construction master keys with the
locks.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPLATE HARDWARE
Provide hardware to be applied to metal or to prefinished doors
manufactured to template. Promptly furnish template information or
templates to door and frame manufacturers. Conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.7 for
template hinges. Coordinate hardware items to prevent interference with
other hardware.
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 12
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2 HARDWARE FOR FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS
Provide all hardware necessary to meet the requirements of NFPA 80 for fire
doors and NFPA 101 for exit doors, as well as to other requirements
indicated, even if such hardware is not specifically mentioned under
paragraph entitled "Hardware Schedule." Conform to UL 14C for swinging
hardware for the tin-clad fire doors. Provide the label of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. for such hardware listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or labeled
and listed by another testing laboratory acceptable to the Contracting
Officer.
2.3 HARDWARE ITEMS
Clearly and permanently mark with the manufacturer's name or trademark,
hinges, pivots, locks, latches, exit devices, bolts and closers where the
identifying mark will be visible after the item is installed. For closers
with covers, the name or trademark may be beneath the cover.
2.3.1 Hinges
BHMA A156.1, 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated. Construct
loose pin hinges for exterior doors and reverse-bevel interior doors so
that pins will be nonremovable when door is closed. Other antifriction
bearing hinges may be provided in lieu of ball-bearing hinges.
2.3.4 Locks and Latches
2.3.4.1 Mortise Locks and Latches
ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1, Security Grade 2.
Install knobs and roses of mortise locks with screwless shanks and no
exposed screws.
2.3.4.6 Auxiliary Locks
ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
2.3.2 Exit Devices
ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Provide adjustable strikes for rim type and
vertical rod devices. Provide open back strikes for pairs of doors with
mortise and vertical rod devices. Provide touch bars in lieu of
conventional crossbars and arms.
2.3.7 Lock Cylinders (Mortise, Rim and Bored)
Lock cylinders shall comply with BEMA A156.5. Lock cylinder shall have
not less than seven pins. Cylinders shall have key removable type cores.
An extension of the existing keying system shall be provided. Keyway "D".
The existing locks were manufactured by Best and have interchangeable
cores, construction interchangeable cores shall be provided. Disassembly of
knob or lockset shall not be required to remove core from lockset. All
locks, exit devices and padlocks shall accept interchangeable
cores.
2.3.8 Keying System
Locks shall be keyed in sets or subsets as schedule. Locks shall be
furnished with ma nufacturers standard construction key system. Change keys
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 13
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
for locks shall be stamped with the change number and the inscription "US
Property - Do Not Duplicate." Keys shall be supplied as follows:
Locks: 2 change keys each lock.
Master keyed sets: 2 keys each set.
Grand master keys: 2 total.
Construction keys: 2 total.
Blank keys: 15 total.
2.3.3 Lock Trim
Cast, forged, or heavy wrought construction and commercial plain design.
2.3.3.1 Lever Handles
Provide lever handles in lieu of knobs where indicated in paragraph
entitled "Hardware Schedule". Conform to the minimum requirements of
ANSI/BHMA A156.13 for mortise locks of lever handles for exit devices.
Provide lever handle locks with a breakaway feature (such as a weakened
spindle or a shear key) to prevent irreparable damage to the lock when
force in excess of that specified in ANSI/BHMA A156.13 is applied to the
lever handle. Provide lever handles return to within 1/2 inch of the door
face.
2.3.3.2 Texture
Provide knurled or abrasive coated knobs or lever handles where specified
in paragraph entitled "Hardware Schedule" for doors which are accessible to
blind persons and which lead to dangerous areas.
2.3.4 Door Bolts
BHMA A156.16. Provide dustproof strikes for bottom bolts, except for doors
having metal thresholds. Automatic latching flush bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3,
Type 25.
2.3.5 Closers
ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Series C02000, Grade 1, with PT 4C. Provide with
brackets, arms, mounting devices, fasteners, full size covers, except at
storefront mounting, and other features necessary for the particular
application. Size closers in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, or provide multi-size closers, Sizes 1 through 6, and list
sizes in the Hardware Schedule. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty.
2.3.5.1 Identification Marking
Engrave each closer with manufacturer's name or trademark, date of
manufacture, and manufacturer's size designation located to be visible
after installation.
2.3.6 Overhead Holders
ANSI/BHMA A156.8.
2.3.7 Closer Holder-Release Devices
ANSI/BHMA A156.15.
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 14
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.3.8 Door Protection Plates
BHMA A156.6.
2.3.8.1 Sizes of Mop and Kick Plates
2 inch less than door width for single doors; one inch less than door
width for pairs of doors. Provide 10 inch kick plates for flush doors and
one inch less than height of bottom rail for panel doors. Provide a minimum
36 inch armor plates for flush doors and completely cover lower panels of
panel doors, except 16 inch high armor plates on fire doors. Provide 6 inch
mop plates.
2.3.17 Door Stops and Silencers
BHMA A156.16. Silencers Type L03011. Provide three silencers for each
single door, two for each pair.
2.3.19 Thresholds
ANSI/BHMA A156.21. Use J35100, with vinyl or silicone rubber insert in
face of stop, for exterior doors opening out, unless specified otherwise.
2.3.9 Weather Stripping Gasketing
BHMA A156.22. Provide the type and function designation where specified in
paragraph entitled "Hardware Schedule". Provide a set to include head and
jamb seals, sweep strips, and, for pairs of doors, astragals. Air leakage
of weather stripped doors not to exceed 0.5 cubic feet per minute of air
per square foot of door area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
Provide weather stripping with one of the following:
2.3.9.1 Extruded Aluminum Retainers
Extruded aluminum retainers not less than 0.050 inch wall thickness with
vinyl, neoprene, silicone rubber, or polyurethane inserts. Provide bronze
anodized aluminum.
2.3.9.2 Interlocking Type
Zinc or bronze not less than 0.018 inch thick.
2.3.9.3 Spring Tension Type
Spring bronze or stainless steel not less than 0.008 inch thick.
2.3.22 Rain Drips
Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.08 inch thick, bronze anodized. Set
drips in sealant and fasten with stainless steel screws.
2.3.10 Door Rain Drips
Approximately 1-1/2 inch high by 5/8 inch projection. Align bottom with
bottom edge of door.
2.3.11 Overhead Rain Drips
Approximately 1-1/2 inch high by 2-1/2 inch projection, with length equal
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 15
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
to overall width of door frame. Align bottom with door frame rabbet.
2.3.12 Special Tools
Provide special tools, such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging
keys, required to service and adjust hardware items.
2.4 FASTENERS
Provide fasteners of proper type, quality, size, quantity, and finish with
hardware. Provide stainless steel or nonferrous metal fasteners that are
exposed to weather. Provide fasteners of type necessary to accomplish a
permanent installation.
2.5 FINISHES
BHMA A156.18. Provide hardware in BHMA 630 finish (satin stainless steel),
unless specified otherwise. Provide items not manufactured in stainless
steel in BHMA 626 finish (satin chromium plated) over brass or bronze,
except aluminum paint finish for surface door closers. Provide hinges for
exterior doors in stainless steel with BHMA 630 finish or chromium plated
brass or bronze with BHMA 626 finish. Furnish exit devices in BHMA 626
finish in lieu of BHMA 630 finish except where BHMA 630 is specified under
paragraph entitled "Hardware Sets". Match exposed parts of concealed
closers to lock and door trim. Match hardware finish for aluminum doors to
the doors.
2.6 KEY CABINET AND CONTROL SYSTEM
ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Type required to yield a capacity (number of hooks) 50
percent greater than the number of key changes used for door locks.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers' printed installation
instructions. Fasten hardware to wood surfaces with full-threaded wood
screws or sheet metal screws. Provide machine screws set in expansion
shields for fastening hardware to solid concrete and masonry surfaces.
Provide toggle bolts where required for fastening to hollow core
construction. Provide through bolts where necessary for satisfactory
installation.
3.1.1 Weather Stripping Installation
Handle and install weather stripping to prevent damage. Provide full
contact, weather-tight seals. Operate doors without binding.
3.1.1.1 Stop-Applied Weather Stripping
Fasten in place with color-matched sheet metal screws not more than 9 inch
on center after doors and frames have been finish painted.
3.1.1.2 Interlocking Type Weather Stripping
Provide interlocking, self-adjusting type on heads and jambs and flexible
hook type at sills. Nail weather stripping to door one inch on center and
to heads and jambs at 4 inch on center
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 16
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.1.2 Soundproofing Installation
Install as specified for stop-applied weather stripping.
3.1.2 Threshold Installation
Extend thresholds the full width of the opening and notch end for jamb
stops. Set thresholds in a full bed of sealant and anchor to floor with
cadmium-plated, countersunk, steel screws in expansion sleeves.
3.2 FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS
Install hardware in accordance with NFPA 80 for fire doors, NFPA 101 for
exit doors.
3.3 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
SDI/DOOR A250.8, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
a. Kick and Armor Plates: Push side of single-acting doors. Both
sides of double-acting doors.
b. Mop Plates: Bottom flush with bottom of door.
3.4 KEY CABINET AND CONTROL SYSTEM
Locate where indicated. Tag one set of file keys and one set of duplicate
keys. Place other keys in appropriately marked envelopes, or tag each
key. Furnish complete instructions for setup and use of key control
system. On tags and envelopes, indicate door and room numbers or master or
grand master key.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
After installation, protect hardware from paint, stains, blemishes, and
other damage until acceptance of work. Submit notice of testing 15 days
before scheduled, so that testing can be witnessed by the Contracting
Officer. Adjust hinges, locks, latches, bolts, holders, closers, and other
items to operate properly. Demonstrate that permanent keys operate
respective locks, and give keys to the Contracting Officer. Correct,
repair, and finish, as directed, errors in cutting and fitting and damage
to adjoining work.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 71 00 Page 17
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 81 00
GLAZING
02/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C 1036 (2006) Standard Specification for Flat
Glass
ASTM C 509 (2006) Elastomeric Cellular Preformed
Gasket and Sealing Material
ASTM D 2287 (1996; R 2010) Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride
Polymer and Copolymer Molding and
Extrusion Compounds
ASTM D 395 (2003; R 2008) Standard Test Methods for
Rubber Property - Compression Set
GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)
GANA Glazing Manual (2004) Glazing Manual
GANA Sealant Manual (2008) Sealant Manual
INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ALLIANCE (IGMA)
IGMA TB-3001 (1990) Guidelines for Sloped Glazing
IGMA TM-3000 (1997) Glazing Guidelines for Sealed
Insulating Glass Units
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
Rating System for New Construction
(LEED-NC) v3.0
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
Materials
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
SECTION 08 81 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation; G
Drawings showing complete details of the proposed setting
methods, mullion details, edge blocking, size of openings, frame
details, materials, and types and thickness of glass.
SD-03 Product Data
Glazing Accessories
Manufacturer's descriptive product data, handling and storage
recommendations, installation instructions, and cleaning
instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Glazing Tape
Sealant
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Setting and sealing materials
Glass setting
Submit glass manufacturer's recommendations for setting and
sealing materials and for installation of each type of glazing
material specified.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Local/Regional Materials; LEED
LEED (tm) documentation relative to local/regional materials
credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver products to the site in unopened containers, labeled plainly with
manufacturers' names and brands. Store glass and setting materials in
safe, enclosed dry locations and do not unpack until needed for
installation. Handle and install materials in a manner that will protect
them from damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS
ASTM C 1036, unless specified otherwise. In doors and sidelights, provide
safety glazing material conforming to 16 CFR 1201.
SECTION 08 81 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.1 Clear Glass
For interior glazing 3/8 inch thick laminated glass should be used.
Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality q4 (A).
2.1.2 Mirrors
2.1.2.1 Glass Mirrors
Glass for mirrors shall be Type I transparent flat type, Class 1-clear,
Glazing Quality q1 1/4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C 1036. Glass shall
be coated on one surface with silver coating, copper protective coating,
and mirror backing paint. Silver coating shall be highly adhesive pure
silver coating of a thickness which shall provide reflectivity of 83
percent or more of incident light when viewed through 1/4 inch thick glass,
and shall be free of pinholes or other defects. Copper protective coating
shall be pure bright reflective copper, homogeneous without sludge,
pinholes or other defects, and shall be of proper thickness to prevent
"adhesion pull" by mirror backing paint. Mirror backing paint shall
consist of two coats of special scratch and abrasion-resistant paint , and
shall be baked in uniform thickness to provide a protection for silver and
copper coatings which will permit normal cutting and edge fabrication.
2.2 Sealants
Provide elastomeric sealants.
2.3 Preformed Channels
Neoprene, vinyl, or rubber, as recommended by the glass manufacturer for
the particular condition.
2.4 Sealing Tapes
Preformed, semisolid, PVC-based material of proper size and compressibility
for the particular condition, complying with ASTM D 2287. Use only where
glazing rabbet is designed for tape and tape is recommended by the glass or
sealant manufacturer. Provide spacer shims for use with compressible
tapes. Tapes shall be chemically compatible with the product being set.
2.5 Setting Blocks and Edge Blocks
Closed-cell neoprene setting blocks shall be dense extruded type conforming
to ASTM C 509 and ASTM D 395, Method B, Shore A durometer between 70 and
90. Edge blocking shall be Shore A durometer of 50 (+ or - 5). Silicone
setting blocks shall be required when blocks are in contact with silicone
sealant. Profiles, lengths and locations shall be as required and
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Block color shall be black.
2.6 Silicone Caulk Joints
Where indicated, provide 1/4" wide clear silicone butt glazing joints.
2.7 Accessories
Provide as required for a complete installation, including glazing points,
clips, shims, angles, beads, and spacer strips. Provide noncorroding metal
accessories. Provide primer-sealers and cleaners as recommended by the
SECTION 08 81 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
glass and sealant manufacturers.
2.8 MIRROR ACCESSORIES
2.8.1 Mirror Frames
Mirrors shall be provided with mirror frames (J-mold channels) fabricated
of one-piece roll-formed Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 brushed satin
finish and concealed fasteners which will keep mirrors snug to wall.
Frames shall be 1-1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4 inch continuous at top and bottom of
mirrors. Concealed fasteners of type to suit wall construction material
shall be provided with mirror frames.
2.8.2 Mirror Clips
Concealed fasteners of type to suit wall construction material shall be
provided with clips.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Preparation, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall conform to
applicable recommendations in the GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual,
IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and manufacturer's recommendations. Determine
the sizes to provide the required edge clearances by measuring the actual
opening to receive the glass. Grind smooth in the shop glass edges that
will be exposed in finish work. Leave labels in place until the
installation is approved, except remove applied labels on heat-absorbing
glass and on insulating glass units as soon as glass is installed. Securely
fix movable items or keep in a closed and locked position until glazing
compound has thoroughly set.
3.2 GLASS SETTING
Shop glaze or field glaze items to be glazed using glass of the quality and
thickness specified or indicated. Glazing, unless otherwise specified or
approved, shall conform to applicable recommendations in the
GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and
manufacturer's recommendations. Handle and install glazing materials in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use beads or stops which are
furnished with items to be glazed to secure the glass in place. Verify
products are properly installed, connected, and adjusted.
3.2.1 Sheet Glass
Cut and set with the visible lines or waves horizontal.
3.3 PROTECTION
Glass work shall be protected immediately after installation. Glazed
openings shall be identified with suitable warning tapes, cloth or paper
flags, attached with non-staining adhesives.
3.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Disposal and recycling of waste materials, including corrugated cardboard
recycling, shall be in accordance with the Waste Management Plan.
SECTION 08 81 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.5 SCHEDULE
Some metric measurements in this section are based on mathematical
conversion of inch-pound measurements, and not on metric measurement
commonly agreed to by the manufacturers or other parties. The inch-pound
and metric measurements are as follows:
PRODUCTS INCH-POUND METRIC
Glass 1/8 inch 3 mm
3/16 inch 4.5 mm
7/32 inch 6 mm
1/4 inch 6 mm
3/8 inch 10 mm
Interlayer 0.015 inch 0.38 mm
Glazing Channels 1/4 inch 6 mm
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 81 00 Page 5
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 08 91 00
METAL WALL LOUVERS
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)
AMCA 500-D (1998) Laboratory Methods of Testing
Dampers for Rating
AMCA 511 (1999; R 2004) Certified Ratings Program
for Air Control Devices
ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)
AA DAF-45 (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System
for Aluminum Finishes
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)
AAMA 611 (1998; R 2004) Voluntary Specification for
Anodized Architectural Aluminum
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B 221 (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Wall louvers; G
SD-03 Product Data
Metal Wall Louvers
SD-04 Samples
Wall louvers
SECTION 08 91 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Carefully store
materials off the ground to provide proper ventilation, drainage, and
protection against dampness. Louvers shall be free from nicks, scratches,
and blemishes. Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
1.4 DETAIL DRAWINGS
Show all information necessary for fabrication and installation of wall
louvers. Indicate materials, sizes, thicknesses, fastenings, and profiles.
1.5 COLOR SAMPLES
Colors of finishes for wall louvers and door louvers shall closely
approximate colors indicated. Where color is not indicated, submit the
manufacturer's standard colors to the Contracting Officer for selection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Extruded Aluminum
ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or -T52.
2.2 METAL WALL LOUVERS
Weather resistant type, with bird screens and made to withstand a wind load
of not less than 30 pounds per square foot. Wall louvers shall bear the
AMCA certified ratings program seal for air performance and water
penetration in accordance with AMCA 500-D and AMCA 511. The rating shall
show a water penetration of 0.20 or less ounce per square foot of free area
at a free velocity of 800 feet per minute. The louver must handle 5000cfm
with a maximum velocity of 650fpm, and a maximum pressure drop of 0.10" wc.
There must be a minimum of 8 s.f. of open free area on the louver.
2.2.1 Extruded Aluminum Louvers
Fabricated of extruded 6063-T5 or -T52 aluminum with a wall thickness of
not less than 0.081 inch.
2.2.2 Formed Metal Louvers
Formed of zinc-coated steel sheet not thinner than 16 U.S. gage, or
aluminum sheet not less than 0.08 inch thick.
2.2.3 Mullions and Mullion Covers
Same material and finish as louvers. Provide mullions for all louvers more
than 5 feet in width at not more than 5 feet on centers. Provide mullions
covers on both faces of joints between louvers.
2.2.4 Screens and Frames
For aluminum louvers, provide 1/2 inch square mesh, 14 or 16 gage aluminum
or 1/4 inch square mesh, 16 gage aluminum bird screening. For steel
louvers, provide 1/2 inch square mesh, 12 or 16 gage zinc-coated steel; 1/2
inch square mesh, 16 gage copper; or 1/4 inch square mesh, 16 gage
SECTION 08 91 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
zinc-coated steel or copper bird screening. Mount screens in removable,
rewirable frames of same material and finish as the louvers.
2.3 BLANK OFF PANELS
Provide blank off panels at any and all unused portions of a louver.
2.4 FINISHES
2.4.1 Aluminum
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be factory finished with an anodic
coating. Color shall be as indicated. Louvers shall have the same finish.
2.4.1.1 Anodic Coating
Clean exposed aluminum surfaces and provide an anodized finish conforming
to AA DAF-45 and AAMA 611. Finish shall be:
a. Architectural Class II (0.4 mil to 0.7 mil), designation
AA-M10-C22-A34, electrolytically deposited color anodized.
2.4.2 Steel
Provide factory-applied coating. Clean and phosphate treat exposed
surfaces and apply rust-inhibitive primer and baked enamel finish coat, one
mil minimum total dry film thickness, color as indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Wall Louvers
Install using stops or moldings, flanges, strap anchors, or jamb fasteners
as appropriate for the wall construction and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 PROTECTION FROM CONTACT OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
3.2.1 Aluminum
Where aluminum contacts metal other than zinc, paint the dissimilar metal
with a primer and two coats of aluminum paint.
3.2.2 Metal
Paint metal in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials
with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 91 00 Page 3
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 09 06 90
COLOR SCHEDULE
05/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section covers only the color of the exterior and interior materials
and products that are exposed to view in the finished construction. The
word "color", as used herein, includes surface color and pattern.
Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other
appropriate sections of the specifications. Specific locations where the
various materials are required are shown on the drawings. Items not
designated for color in this section may be specified in other sections.
When color is not designated for items, the Contractor shall propose a
color for approval.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-04 Samples
Color Schedule; G
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REFERENCE TO MANUFACTURER'S COLOR
Where color is shown as being specific to one manufacturer, an equivalent
color by another manufacturer may be submitted for approval. Manufacturers
and materials specified are not intended to limit the selection of equal
colors from other manufacturers.
2.2 COLOR SCHEDULE
The color schedule lists the colors, patterns and textures required for
exterior and interior finishes, including both factory applied and field
applied colors. Submit 3 sets of color boards, 120 days after the
Contractor is given Notice to proceed, complying with the following
requirements:
a. Color boards shall reflect all actual finish textures, patterns,
and colors required for this contract.
b. Materials shall be labeled with the finish type, manufacturer's
name, pattern, and color reference.
c. Samples shall be on size 8-1/2 by 11 inch boards with a maximum
spread of size 25-1/2 by 33 inches for foldouts.
SECTION 09 06 90 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
d. Samples for this color board are required in addition to samples
requested in other specification sections.
e. Color boards shall be submitted to the following address(es):
Robert Flemming
Fort Bragg DPW
Building 3-1634, Butner Road
Ft. Bragg, NC 28307-0069
2.2.1 Exterior Walls
Exterior wall colors shall apply to exterior wall surfaces including
recesses at entrances and projecting vestibules. Conduit shall be painted
to closely match the adjacent surface color. Wall color shall be provided
to match the colors listed below.
2.2.1.1 Precast Concrete: White sand mix to match existing JSOC precast
structures. Submit sample for Fort Bragg DPW approval.
2.2.2 Exterior Trim
Exterior trim shall be provided to match the colors listed below.
2.2.2.1 Steel Doors and Door Frames: FS-26173 Medium Gray
2.2.2.2 Coping: Clear aluminum
2.2.2.3 Precast Concrete : white sand custom mix to match existing JSOC
precast structures. Submit sample for Fort Bragg DPW approval.
2.2.2.4 Caulking and Sealants: Match adjacent finish color
2.2.2.5 Stringers and Stair Framing: Clear galvanized steel
2.2.2.6 Control Joints: Match adjacent finish color
2.2.2.7 Handrails: FS-20059 Bragg Brown
2.2.2.8 Signage: As indicated on signage drawings
2.2.3 Metal: FS-20059 Bragg Brown
2.2.4 Interior Floor Finishes
Provide flooring materials to match the colors listed below.
SECTION 09 06 90 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.4.1 Carpet Tile
a. Shaw, Prisma 59463, Opaque Black 63500
b. Shaw, Portland 59449, Urchin 49305
c. Shaw, Glitz 59360, Black Cashmere 60505
d. Shaw, TruColors 59368, Ebony 68500
2.2.4.2 Resilient Floor:
a. Forbo, Marmoleum Real, Lava 139
b. Forbo, Marmoleum Real, Slate Grey 3137
2.2.4.3 Stair Treads, Kick Strips, and Risers: Roppe, #123 Charcoal
2.2.4.4 Porcelain Tile: Crossville, Color Blox EC, I See the Moon E1117
2.2.4.5 Grout:
a. Mapei, #47 Charcoal
2.2.4.6 High Pressure Plastic Laminate: Nevamar, Gray Graphite GA 6001 FT
2.2.4.7 Industrial Floor Coating: Clear Sealed Concrete
2.2.5 Interior Base Finishes
Provide base materials to match the colors listed below.
2.2.5.1 Resilient Base and Moldings: Roppe, #123 Charcoal
2.2.5.2 Porcelain Tile: Crossville, Color Blox EC, Slinky E1103
2.2.5.3 Grout: Mapei, #01 Alabaster
2.2.6 Interior Wall Finishes
Interior wall color shall apply to the entire wall surface, including
reveals, vertical furred spaces, grilles, diffusers, electrical and access
panels, and piping and conduit adjacent to wall surfaces unless otherwise
specified. Items not specified in other paragraphs shall be painted to
match adjacent wall surface. Provide wall materials to match the colors
listed below.
SECTION 09 06 90 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.6.1 Paint:
a. Benjamin Moore, Cloud White, OC-130
b. Sherwin Williams, Web Gray, SW7075
2.2.6.2 Fabric Wall Covering
a. Maharam, 398460 Expression, 102 Gossamerz
b. Maharam, 399381 Inox Texture, 027 Gunsmoke
2.2.6.3 Porcelain Tile:
a. Crossville, Color Blox EC, Slinky E1103
b. Crossville, Color Blox EC, I See the Moon, E1117
2.2.6.4 Tile Grout: Mapei, #01 Alabaster
2.2.6.5 Dry-Erase Paint: DesignTex, Write-Up H2O, Clear
2.2.7 Interior Ceiling Finishes
Ceiling colors shall apply to ceiling surfaces including soffits, furred
down areas, grilles, diffusers, registers, and access panels. Ceiling
color shall also apply to joist, underside of roof deck, and conduit and
piping where joists and deck are exposed and required to be painted.
Provide ceiling materials to match the colors listed below.
2.2.7.1 Acoustical Tile and Grid: White
2.2.7.2 Paint: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66
2.2.7.3 Metal Deck: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66
2.2.7.4 Structural Framing: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66
2.2.8 Interior Trim
Provide interior trim to match the colors listed below.
SECTION 09 06 90 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.8.1 Steel Doors: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66
2.2.8.2 Steel Door Frames: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66
2.2.8.3 Wood Doors: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66
2.2.8.4 Wood Stain: Clear Ash Maple
2.2.8.5 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Factory Finish White
2.2.8.6 Handrails: Dark gray, to match stairtreads
2.2.8.7 Ladders: Dark gray, to match stairtreads
2.2.8.8 Metal Stairs: Clear galvanized steel
2.2.8.9 Exposed Ductwork: White
2.2.8.10 Closet Shelving: White
2.2.9 Interior Miscellaneous
Provide miscellaneous items to match the colors listed below.
2.2.9.1 Toilet Partitions and Urinal Screens: Alabaster
2.2.9.2 Plastic Laminate:
a. Formica, 912-58 Storm
b. Formica, 923-58 Surf
2.2.9.3 Solid Surfacing Material
a. Corian, Silverite
b. Corian, Terra Collection
2.2.9.4 Casework: White Melanine Interior
2.2.9.5 Signage Message Color: As indicated on signage drawings
2.2.9.6 Signage Background Color: As indicated on signage drawings
2.2.9.7 Operable Partitions: Fabric: Maharam, 399381 Inox Texture, 028
Pavement
2.2.9.8 Corner Guards: Clear
2.2.9.9 Wall Switch Handles and Standard Receptacle Bodies: White
2.2.9.10 Electrical Device Cover Plates: White
2.2.9.11 Electrical Panels: White
2.2.9.12 Shower Curtain: White
2.2.9.13 Metal Lockers: Standard Manufacturer's Gray
Text
SECTION 09 06 90 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.3 PLACEMENT SCHEDULE
Placement of color shall be in accordance with the following schedule:
Refer to plan.
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 06 90 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 09 22 00
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD
02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 463/A 463M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process
ASTM A 653/A 653M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM C 645 (2009a) Nonstructural Steel Framing Members
ASTM C 754 (2009a) Installation of Steel Framing
Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum
Panel Products
ASTM C 841 (2003; R 2008e1) Installation of Interior
Lathing and Furring
ASTM C 847 (2010) Standard Specification for Metal
Lath
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)
NAAMM ML/SFA 920 (1991) Metal Lathing and Furring
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL Fire Resistance (2010) Fire Resistance Directory
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Metal support systems; G
Submit for the erection of metal framing, furring, and ceiling
suspension systems. Indicate materials, sizes, thicknesses, and
SECTION 09 22 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
fastenings.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the job site and store in ventilated dry locations.
Storage area shall permit easy access for inspection and handling. If
materials are stored outdoors, stack materials off the ground, supported on
a level platform, and fully protected from the weather. Handle materials
carefully to prevent damage. Remove damaged items and provide new items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Provide steel materials for metal support systems with galvanized coating
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G-60; aluminum coating ASTM A 463/A 463M, T1-25; or a
55-percent aluminum-zinc coating. Provide support systems and attachments
per UFC 3-310-04, "Seismic Design for Buildings" in seismic zones.
2.1.1 Materials for Attachment of Lath
2.1.1.1 Wall Furring
ASTM C 841, and ASTM C 847.
2.1.1.2 Non-loadbearing Wall Framing
NAAMM ML/SFA 920.
2.1.2 Materials for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard
2.1.2.1 Nonload-Bearing Wall Framing and Furring
ASTM C 645, but not thinner than 0.0179 inch thickness, with 0.0329 inch
minimum thickness supporting wall hung items such as cabinetwork, equipment
and fixtures 0.0329 inch thickness. The ASTM certified third party testing
statement for equivalent thicknesses shall not apply.
2.1.2.2 Furring Structural Steel Columns
ASTM C 645. Steel (furring) clips and support angles listed in
UL Fire Resistance may be provided in lieu of steel studs for erection of
gypsum wallboard around structural steel columns.
2.1.2.3 Z-Furring Channels with Wall Insulation
Not lighter than 26 gage galvanized steel, Z-shaped, with 1-1/4 inch and
3/4 inch flanges and depth as required by the insulation thickness provided.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Systems for Attachment of Lath
3.1.1.1 Wall Furring
ASTM C 841, except as indicated otherwise.
SECTION 09 22 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.1.1.2 Non-loadbearing Wall Framing
NAAMM ML/SFA 920, except provide framing members 16 inches o.c. unless
indicated otherwise.
3.1.2 Systems for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard
3.1.2.1 Non-loadbearing Wall Framing and Furring
ASTM C 754, except as indicated otherwise.
3.1.2.2 Furring Structural Steel Columns
Install studs or galvanized steel clips and support angles for erection of
gypsum wallboard around structural steel columns in accordance with the
UL Fire Resistance, design number(s) of the fire resistance rating
indicated.
3.1.2.3 Z-Furring Channels with Wall Insulation
Install Z-furring channels vertically spaced not more than 24 inches o.c.
Locate Z-furring channels at interior and exterior corners in accordance
with manufacturer's printed erection instructions. Fasten furring channels
to masonry and concrete walls with powder-driven fasteners or hardened
concrete steel nails through narrow flange of channel. Space fasteners not
more than 24 inches o.c.
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
Provide framing members which will be covered by finish materials such as
wallboard, plaster, or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed, within the
following limits:
a. Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position;
b. Plates and runners: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;
c. Studs: 1/4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
d. Face of framing members: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.
Provide framing members which will be covered by ceramic tile set in
dry-set mortar, latex-portland cement mortar, or organic adhesive within
the following limits:
a. Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position;
b. Plates and runners: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;
c. Studs: 1/8 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
d. Face of framing members: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 22 00 Page 3
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A108.11 (1992) Interior Installation of
Cementitious Backer Units
ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1 (2005) Specification for the Installation
of Ceramic Tile
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C 1002 (2007) Standard Specification for Steel
Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or
Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel
Studs
ASTM C 1047 (2009) Standard Specification for
Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and
Gypsum Veneer Base
ASTM C 1177/C 1177M (2008) Standard Specification for Glass
Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing
ASTM C 1178/C 1178M (2008) Standard Specification for Glass
Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M (2009a) Standard Specification for Gypsum
Board
ASTM C 36/C 36M (2003e1) Gypsum Wallboard
ASTM C 442/C 442M (2004e1) Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum
Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board
ASTM C 475/C 475M (2002; R 2007) Joint Compound and Joint
Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board
ASTM C 840 (2008) Application and Finishing of Gypsum
Board
ASTM C 954 (2007) Steel Drill Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or
Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from
0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)
SECTION 09 29 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
in Thickness
ASTM D 1037 (2006a) Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base
Fiber and Particle Panel Materials
ASTM D 1149 (2007) Standard Test Method for Rubber
Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in
a Chamber
ASTM D 226/D 226M (2009) Standard Specification for
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D 2394 (2005e1) Simulated Service Testing of Wood
and Wood-Base Finish Flooring
ASTM D 412 (2006ae2) Standard Test Methods for
Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers - Tension
ASTM D 5420 (2004) Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid
Plastic Specimen by Means of a Strike
Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner
Impact)
ASTM D 624 (2000; R 2007) Tear Strength of
Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers
ASTM E 695 (2003; R 2009) Measuring Relative
Resistance of Wall, Floor, and Roof
Construction to Impact Loading
ASTM E 84 (2010) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)
GA 214 (2007) Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board
Finish
GA 216 (2007) Application and Finishing of Gypsum
Board
GA 253 (2007) Application of Gypsum Sheathing
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL Fire Resistance (2010) Fire Resistance Directory
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SECTION 09 29 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SD-03 Product Data
Cementitious backer units
Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Tile Backing Board
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board
Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing
Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing Sealant
Impact Resistant Gypsum Board
Accessories
Submit for each type of gypsum board and for cementitious backer
units.
SD-07 Certificates
Asbestos Free Materials
Certify that gypsum board types, gypsum backing board types,
cementitious backer units, and joint treating materials do not
contain asbestos.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Material Safety Data Sheets
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Manufacturer maintenance instructions
Waste Management
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit
in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
Gypsum Board; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
Adhesives; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to low emitting materials credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
SECTION 09 29 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.3.1 Delivery
Deliver materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles with
each bearing the brand name, applicable standard designation, and name of
manufacturer, or supplier.
1.3.2 Storage
Keep materials dry by storing inside a sheltered building. Where necessary
to store gypsum board and cementitious backer units outside, store off the
ground, properly supported on a level platform, and protected from direct
exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme weather conditions.
Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. Store per
manufacturer's recommendations for allowable temperature and humidity
range. Do not store panels near materials that may offgas or emit
harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or adhesives.
1.3.3 Handling
Neatly stack gypsum board and cementitious backer units flat to prevent
sagging or damage to the edges, ends, and surfaces.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.4.1 Temperature
Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 50 degrees F in the
structure for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and following the
application of gypsum board, cementitious backer units, and joint treatment
materials, or the bonding of adhesives.
1.4.2 Exposure to Weather
Protect gypsum board and cementitious backer unit products from direct
exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme weather conditions.
1.5 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1 Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Gypsum
board materials may be locally available.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
Furnish type of gypsum board work specialized by the installer with a
minimum of 3 years of documented successful experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Conform to specifications, standards and requirements specified. Provide
gypsum board types, gypsum backing board types, cementitious backing units,
SECTION 09 29 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
and joint treating materials manufactured from asbestos free materials only.
2.1.1 Gypsum Board
ASTM C 36/C 36M and ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Gypsum board shall contain a
minimum of 10 percent post-consumer recycled content, or a minimum of 40
percent post-industrial recycled content. Paper facings shall contain 100
percent post-consumer recycled paper content. Gypsum cores shall contain a
minimum of 95 percent post-industrial recycled gypsum content. See Section
01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content
requirements. Gypsum board may contain post-consumer or post-industrial
recycled content.
2.1.1.1 Regular
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered.
2.1.1.2 Foil-Backed
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.
2.1.1.3 Type X (Special Fire-Resistant)
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.
2.1.2 Gypsum Backing Board
ASTM C 442/C 442M, gypsum backing board shall be used as a base in a
multilayer system.
2.1.2.1 Regular
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, square edges.
2.1.2.2 Foil-Backed
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, square edges.
2.1.2.3 Type X (Special Fire-Resistant)
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, square edges.
2.1.3 Regular Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M
2.1.3.1 Regular
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.
2.1.3.2 Type X (Special Fire-Resistant)
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.
2.1.4 Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Tile Backing Board
ASTM C 1178/C 1178M
SECTION 09 29 00 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.4.1 Regular
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, square edges.
2.1.5 Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing
Exceeds physical properties of ASTM C 1396/C 1396M and ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
Provide 5/8 inch, gypsum sheathing. Provide gypsum board of with a
noncombustible water-resistant core, with glass mat surfaces embedded to
the gypsum core or reinforcing embedded throughout the gypsum core. Warrant
gypsum sheathing board for at least six months against delamination due to
direct weather exposure. Provide continuous, asphalt impregnated, building
felt to cover exterior face of sheathing. Seal all joints, seams, and
penetrations with compatible sealant.
2.1.5.1 Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing Sealant
Provide sealant compatible with gypsum sheathing, rubber washers for
masonry veneer anchors, and other associated cavity wall components such as
anchors and through wall flashing. Provide sealants for gypsum sheathing
board edge seams and veneer anchor penetrations recommended by the gypsum
sheathing manufacturer and have the following performance requirements:
a. ASTM D 412: Tensile Strength, 80 psi
b. ASTM D 412: Ultimate Tensile Strength (maximum elongation), 170 psi
c. ASTM D 624: Tear Strength, dieB, 27 ppi
d. ASTM D 1149: Joint Movement Capability after 14 Days cure, plus or
minus 50 percent.
2.1.6 Impact Resistant Gypsum Board
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.
Reinforced gypsum panel with imbedded fiber mesh or lexan backing testing
in accordance with the following tests. Provide fasteners that meet
manufacturer requirements and specifications stated within this section.
Impact resistant gypsum board, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84,
have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50
or less for a flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed
rating of 100 or less for all construction applications.
2.1.6.1 Structural Failure Test
ASTM E 695 or ASTM D 2394 for structural failure (drop penetration).
ASTM E 695 using a 60 lb sand filled leather bag, resisting no less than
300 ft. lb. cumulative impact energy before failure or ASTM D 2394 using
5.5 inch hemispherical projectile resisting no less than 264 ft. lb. before
failure. Provide test specimen stud spacing a minimum 16 inch on center.
2.1.6.2 Indentation Test
ASTM D 5420 or ASTM D 1037 for indentation resistance. ASTM D 5420 using a
32 oz weight with a 5/8 inch hemispherical impacting head dropped once 3
feet creating not more than 0.137 inch indentation or ASTM D 1037 using no
less than 470 lb weight applied to the 0.438 inch diameter ball to create
not more than a 0.0197 inch indentation depth.
2.1.7 Cementitious Backer Units
ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1.
SECTION 09 29 00 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.8 Joint Treatment Materials
ASTM C 475/C 475M. Use all purpose joint and containing inert fillers and
natural binders, including lime compound. Pre-mixed compounds shall be
free of antifreeze, vinyl adhesives, preservatives, biocides and other slow
releasing compounds.
2.1.8.1 All-Purpose Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured to serve as both a taping and a
finishing compound and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.
2.1.8.2 Setting or Hardening Type Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use with fiber glass mesh tape.
2.1.8.3 Joint Tape
Use cross-laminated, tapered edge, reinforced paper, or fiber glass mesh
tape recommended by the manufacturer.
2.1.9 Screws
ASTM C 1002, Type "G", Type "S" or Type "W" steel drill screws for
fastening gypsum board to gypsum board, wood framing members and steel
framing members less than 0.033 inch thick. ASTM C 954 steel drill screws
for fastening gypsum board to steel framing members 0.033 to 0.112 inch
thick. Provide cementitious backer unit screws with a polymer coating.
2.1.10 Staples
No. 16 USS gage flattened galvanized wire staples with 7/16 inch wide crown
outside measurement and divergent point for base ply of two-ply gypsum
board application. Use as follows:
Length of Legs (inch) Thickness of Gypsum Board (inch)
1 1/4 5/8
2.1.11 Adhesives
Do not use adhesive containing benzene, carbon tetrachloride, or
trichloroethylene. Adhesive shall contain a maximum VOC content of 50
grams per liter. Adhesive must meet the requirements of LEED low emitting
materials credit.
2.1.11.1 Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Board to Metal Framing
Type recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.
2.1.11.2 Adhesive for Laminating
Adhesive attachment is not permitted for multi-layer gypsum boards. For
laminating gypsum studs to face panels, provide adhesive recommended by
gypsum board manufacturer.
SECTION 09 29 00 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.12 Accessories
ASTM C 1047. Fabricate from corrosion protected steel or plastic designed
for intended use. Accessories manufactured with paper flanges are not
acceptable. Flanges shall be free of dirt, grease, and other materials
that may adversely affect bond of joint treatment. Provide prefinished or
job decorated materials.
2.1.13 Asphalt Impregnated Building Felt
Provide a 15 lb asphalt moisture barrier over gypsum sheathing. Conforming
to ASTM D 226/D 226M Type 1 (No. 15) for asphalt impregnated building felt.
2.1.14 Water
Provide clean, fresh, and potable water.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Framing and Furring
Verify that framing and furring are securely attached and of sizes and
spacing to provide a suitable substrate to receive gypsum board and
cementitious backer units. Verify that all blocking, headers and supports
are in place to support plumbing fixtures and to receive soap dishes, grab
bars, towel racks, and similar items. Do not proceed with work until
framing and furring are acceptable for application of gypsum board and
cementitious backer units.
3.1.2 Gypsum Board and Framing
Verify that surfaces of gypsum board and framing to be bonded with an
adhesive are free of dust, dirt, grease, and any other foreign matter. Do
not proceed with work until surfaces are acceptable for application of
gypsum board with adhesive.
3.1.3 Masonry and Concrete Walls
Verify that surfaces of masonry and concrete walls to receive gypsum board
applied with adhesive are dry, free of dust, oil, form release agents,
protrusions and voids, and any other foreign matter. Do not proceed with
work until surfaces are acceptable for application of gypsum board with
adhesive.
3.2 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members in accordance with
ASTM C 840 or GA 216 and the requirements specified. Apply gypsum board
with separate panels in moderate contact; do not force in place. Stagger
end joints of adjoining panels. Neatly fit abutting end and edge joints.
Use gypsum board of maximum practical length; select panel sizes to
minimize waste. Cut out gypsum board to make neat, close, and tight joints
around openings. In vertical application of gypsum board, provide panels
in lengths required to reach full height of vertical surfaces in one
continuous piece. Lay out panels to minimize waste; reuse cutoffs whenever
feasible. Surfaces of gypsum board and substrate members may be bonded
together with an adhesive, except where prohibited by fire rating(s).
SECTION 09 29 00 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Treat edges of cutouts for plumbing pipes, screwheads, and joints with
water-resistant compound as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer.
Provide type of gypsum board for use in each system specified herein as
indicated.
3.2.1 Adhesive Application to Interior Masonry or Concrete Walls
Apply in accordance with ASTM C 840, System VI or GA 216.
3.2.2 Application of Gypsum Board to Steel Framing and Furring
Apply in accordance with ASTM C 840, System VIII or GA 216.
3.2.3 Gypsum Board for Wall Tile or Tile Base Applied with Adhesive
In dry areas (areas other than shower enclosures, apply glass mat
water-resistant gypsum tile backing board or water-resistant gypsum backing
board in accordance with ASTM C 840, System X or GA 216.
3.2.4 Glass Mat Covered or Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing
Apply gypsum sheathing in accordance to gypsum association publications
GA 253. Follow gypsum sheathing manufacturer's requirements of design
details for joints and fasteners and be properly installed to protect the
substrate from moisture intrusion. Do not leave exposed surfaces of the
gypsum sheathing beyond the manufacturer's recommendation without a weather
barrier cladding. Provide continuous asphalt impregnated building felt
over sheathing surface in single fashion with edges and ends lapped a
minimum of 6 inch. Property flash the openings. Seal all joints, seams,
and penetrations with a compatible silicone sealant.
3.2.5 Control Joints
Install expansion and contraction joints in ceilings and walls in
accordance with ASTM C 840, System XIII or GA 216. Fill control joints
between studs in fire-rated construction with firesafing insulation to
match the fire-rating of construction.
3.2.6 Application of Foil-Backed Gypsum Board
Apply foil-backed gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840, System XIV or
GA 216.
3.2.7 Application of Impact Resistant Gypsum Board
Apply in accordance with applicable system of ASTM C 840 as specified or
GA 216. Follow manufacturers written instructions on how to cut, drill and
attach board.
3.3 APPLICATION OF CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS
3.3.1 Application
In wet areas (shower enclosures) apply cementitious backer units in
accordance with ANSI A108.11. Place a 15 lb asphalt impregnated,
continuous felt paper membrane behind cementitious backer units, between
backer units and studs or base layer of gypsum board. Place membrane with
a minimum 6 inch overlap of sheets laid shingle style.
SECTION 09 29 00 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.3.2 Joint Treatment
ANSI A108.11.
3.4 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD
Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840, GA 214 and
GA 216. Finish plenum areas above ceilings to Level 1 in accordance with
GA 214. Finish water resistant gypsum backing board, ASTM C 1396/C 1396M,
to receive ceramic tile to Level 2 in accordance with GA 214. Finish walls
and ceilings to receive a heavy-grade wall covering or heave textured
finish before painting to Level 3 in accordance with GA 214. Finish walls
and ceilings without critical lighting to receive flat paints, light
textures, or wall coverings to Level 4 in accordance with GA 214. Finish
all gypsum board walls, partitions and ceilings to Level 5 in accordance
with GA 214. Provide joint, fastener depression, and corner treatment.
Tool joints as smoothly as possible to minimize sanding and dust. Do not
use fiber glass mesh tape with conventional drying type joint compounds;
use setting or hardening type compounds only. Provide treatment for
water-resistant gypsum board as recommended by the gypsum board
manufacturer. Protect workers, building occupants, and HVAC systems from
gypsum dust.
3.4.1 Uniform Surface
Wherever gypsum board is to receive eggshell, semigloss or gloss paint
finish, or where severe, up or down lighting conditions occur, finish
gypsum wall surface in accordance to GA 214 Level 5. In accordance with
GA 214 Level 5, apply a thin skim coat of joint compound to the entire
gypsum board surface, after the two-coat joint and fastener treatment is
complete and dry.
3.5 SEALING
Seal openings around pipes, fixtures, and other items projecting through
gypsum board and cementitious backer units as specified in Section 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS Apply material with exposed surface flush with gypsum board
or cementitious backer units.
3.5.1 Sealing for Glass Mat or Reinforced Gypsum Board Sheathing
Apply silicone sealant in a 3/8 inch bead to all joints and trowel flat.
Apply enough of the same sealant to all fasteners penetrating through the
glass mat gypsum board surface to completely cover the penetration when
troweled flat. Do not place construction and materials behind sheathing
until a visual inspection of sealed joints during daylight hours has been
completed by Contracting Officer.
3.6 FIRE-RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES
Wherever fire-rated construction is indicated, provide materials and
application methods, including types and spacing of fasteners, wall and
ceiling framing in accordance with the specifications contained in
UL Fire Resistance for the Design Number(s) indicated. Joints of
fire-rated gypsum board enclosures shall be closed and sealed in accordance
with UL test requirements or GA requirements. Seal penetrations through
rated partitions and ceilings tight in accordance with tested systems.
SECTION 09 29 00 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.7 PATCHING
Patch surface defects in gypsum board to a smooth, uniform appearance,
ready to receive finishes.
3.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT
As specified in Waste Management Plan.
Identify manufacturer's policy for collection or return of remaining
construction scrap, unused material, and packaging material. Institute
demolition and construction recycling to take advantage of manufacturer's
programs. When such a service is not available, seek local recyclers to
reclaim the materials.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 29 00 Page 11
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 09 30 00
CERAMIC TILE, QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE
01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C 1026 (1987; R 2002) Standard Test Method for
Measuring the Resistance of Ceramic Tile
to Freeze-Thaw Cycling
ASTM C 1027 (1999; R 2004) Standard Test Method for
Determining Visible Abrasion Resistance of
Glazed Ceramic Tile
ASTM C 1028 (2007) Standard Test Method for
Determining the Static Coefficient of
Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like
Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer
Pull-Meter Method
ASTM C 373 (1988; R 2006) Water Absorption, Bulk
Density, Apparent Porosity, and Apparent
Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware
Products
ASTM C 482 (2002; R 2009) Bond Strength of Ceramic
Tile to Portland Cement
ASTM C 501 (1984; R 2002) Relative Resistance to Wear
of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber
Abraser
ASTM C 648 (2004; R 2009) Breaking Strength of
Ceramic Tile
ASTM D 2103 (2008) Standard Specification for
Polyethylene Film and Sheeting
ASTM D 226/D 226M (2009) Standard Specification for
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing
TILE COUNCIL OF NORTH AMERICA (TCNA)
TCA Hdbk (2007) Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation
SECTION 09 30 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 General Requirements
1.2.2 Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Tile
materials may be locally available.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings
Drawings showing ceramic tile pattern elevations and floor plans.
SD-03 Product Data
Tile
Setting-Bed
Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive
Manufacturer's catalog data and preprinted installation and
cleaning instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Tile
Accessories
Marble Thresholds
Grout
Samples of sufficient size to show color range, pattern, type
and joints.
SD-07 Certificates
Tile
Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive
Certificates indicating conformance with specified
requirements. Furnish a master grade certificate for tile.
SECTION 09 30 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit
in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
Tile; (LEED)
Reinforcing Wire Fabric; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
Adhesives; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to low-emitting materials credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Dimension and draw detail drawings at a minimum scale of 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
Include drawings of pattern at inside corners, outside corners, termination
points and location of all equipment items such as thermostats, switch
plates, mirrors and toilet accessories mounted on surface.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's original unopened
containers with seals unbroken and labels and hallmarks intact. Protect
materials from weather, and store them under cover in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not perform ceramic tile work unless the substrate and ambient
temperature is at least 50 degrees F and rising. Maintain temperature above
50 degrees F while the work is being performed and for at least 7 days
after completion of the work. When temporary heaters are used, ventilate
the area to the outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new tilework.
1.7 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
extend beyond a 1-year period.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Supply an extra two percent of each type tile used in clean and marked
cartons.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE
Conform to TCA Hdbk for standard grade tile. Provide grade sealed
SECTION 09 30 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
containers. Mark seals with the marks on the signed master grade
certificate. Provide an impact resistant tile with a minimum floor
breaking strength for wall tile of 90 pound and for floor tile of 250 pound
in accordance with ASTM C 648. The manufacturer will provide a frost
resistant rating for tile used in cold climate projects as determined by
ASTM C 1026. Provide a 0.50 maximum percent water absorption in accordance
with ASTM C 373. Provide a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50 wet and
dry in accordance with ASTM C 1028. Identify floor tile as Class
III-Medium Heavy Traffic, durability classification as rated by the
manufacturer when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1027 for abrasion
resistance as related to foot traffic. Coordinate the color with Section
09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE. Tile shall contain a minimum of 5 percent
post-consumer recycled content, or a minimum of 20 percent post-industrial
recycled content, unless specified otherwise. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Tile may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
2.1 Porcelain Tile
Furnish an unglazed porcelain tile and trim with the color extending
uniformly through the body of the tile. Porcelain tile shall contain a
minimum of 70 percent post-industrial feldspar recycled content. Provide a
nominal size varies as indicated on drawings by 5/16 inch thick. Criteria
for tile to meet or exceed is as follows: Abrasive wear in accordance with
ASTM C 501 and bonding strength in accordance with ASTM C 482. Comply with
36 CFR 1191 for coefficient of friction for interior tiled floors.
Coordinate color with Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE.
2.2 MORTAR, GROUT, AND ADHESIVE
Interior adhesives, sealants, primers and sealants used as filler must meet
the requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit. Conform to the
following for mortar, grout, adhesive, and sealant:
2.2.1 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
TCA Hdbk.
2.2.2 Ceramic Tile Grout
TCA Hdbk; petroleum-free and plastic-free sand portland cement grout.
2.2.3 Organic Adhesive
TCA Hdbk, Type I. Water-resistant. Comply with applicable regulations
regarding toxic and hazardous materials and as specified.
2.2.4 Sealants
Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials
and as specified.
2.3 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
Conform to ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type 1 for 15 pound waterproofing membrane,
asphalt-saturated building felt. Conform to ASTM D 2103 4 mil for
polyethylene film.
SECTION 09 30 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATORY WORK AND WORKMANSHIP
Inspect surface to receive tile in conformance to the requirements of
TCA Hdbk for surface conditions for the type setting bed specified and for
workmanship. Provide variations of tiled surfaces that fall within maximum
values shown below:
TYPE WALLS FLOORS
Dry-Set Mortar 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
Organic Adhesives 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/16 inch in 3 ft.
Latex Portland Cement Mortar 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
Epoxy 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Do not start tile work until roughing in for mechanical and electrical work
has been completed and tested, and built-in items requiring membrane
waterproofing have been installed and tested. Do not start floor tile
installation in spaces requiring wall tile until after wall tile has been
installed. Apply tile in colors and patterns indicated in the area shown
on the drawings. Install tile with the respective surfaces in true even
planes to the elevations and grades shown. Provide special shapes as
required for sills, jambs, recesses, offsets, external corners, and other
conditions to provide a complete and neatly finished installation. Solidly
back tile bases and coves with mortar.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF WALL TILE
Install wall tile in accordance with the TCA Hdbk. Method for wall to be W
244 C-09.
3.3.1 Dry-Set Mortar and Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
Use Dry-set or Latex-Portland Cement to install tile in accordance with
TCA Hdbk. Use Latex Portland Cement when installing porcelain ceramic tile.
3.3.2 Organic Adhesive
Conform to TCA Hdbk for the organic adhesive installation of ceramic tile.
3.3.3 Furan Mortar and Grout
Conform to TCA Hdbk for furan mortar and grout installation.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILE
Install floor tile in accordance with TCA Hdbk. Method for floor tile to
be F 122-09. Install shower receptors in accordance with TCA Hdbk method
B414.
3.4.1 Dry-Set and Latex-Portland Cement
Use dry-set or Latex-Portland cement mortar to install tile directly over
properly cured, plane, clean concrete slabs in accordance with TCA Hdbk.
Use Latex Portland cement when installing porcelain ceramic tile.
SECTION 09 30 00 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.4.2 Ceramic Tile Grout
Prepare and install ceramic tile grout in accordance with TCA Hdbk.
3.4.3 Waterproofing
Shower pans are specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS
Form and seal joints as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.5.1 Walls
Provide expansion joints at control joints in backing material. Wherever
backing material changes, install an expansion joint to separate the
different materials.
3.5.2 Floors
Provide expansion joints over construction joints, control joints, and
expansion joints in concrete slabs. Provide expansion joints where tile
abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, curbs and columns and
at intervals of 24 to 36 feet each way in large interior floor areas and 12
to 16 feet each way in large exterior areas or areas exposed to direct
sunlight or moisture. Extend expansion joints through setting-beds and
fill.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
Upon completion, thoroughly clean tile surfaces in accordance with
manufacturer's approved cleaning instructions. Do not use acid for
cleaning glazed tile. Clean floor tile with resinous grout or with factory
mixed grout in accordance with printed instructions of the grout
manufacturer. After the grout has set, provide a protective coat of a
noncorrosive soap or other approved method of protection for tile wall
surfaces. Cover tiled floor areas with building paper before foot traffic
is permitted over the finished tile floors. Provide board walkways on
tiled floors that are to be continuously used as passageways by workmen.
Replace damaged or defective tiles.
3.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Separate waste, including metal and cardboard, in accordance with the Waste
Management Plan and recycle or reuse. Place materials defined as hazardous
or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers,
in designated containers and areas. Close and seal tightly partly used
sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated,
fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place materials defined as
hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and
containers, in designated containers and areas and dispose of properly.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 30 00 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 09 51 00
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
10/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel,
Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened
ASTM A 489 (2004e1) Standard Specification for Carbon
Steel Lifting Eyes
ASTM A 641/A 641M (2009a) Standard Specification for
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
ASTM A 653/A 653M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B 633 (2007) Standard Specification for
Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron
and Steel
ASTM C 423 (2008a) Sound Absorption and Sound
Absorption Coefficients by the
Reverberation Room Method
ASTM C 635/C 635M (2007) Manufacture, Performance, and
Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings
ASTM C 636/C 636M (2008) Standard Practice for Installation
of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels
ASTM C 834 (2005) Latex Sealants
ASTM E 1264 (2008) Acoustical Ceiling Products
ASTM E 1477 (1998a; R 2008) Luminous Reflectance
Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of
Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers
ASTM E 580/E 580M (2009a) Application of Ceiling Suspension
SECTION 09 51 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In
Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic
Restraint
ASTM E 795 (2005) Mounting Test Specimens During
Sound Absorption Tests
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
UFC 3-310-04 (2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for
Buildings
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide sound controlling units mechanically mounted on a ceiling
suspension system for acoustical treatment. The unit size, texture,
finish, and color must be as specified. The location and extent of
acoustical treatment shall be as shown on the approved detail drawings.
Coordinate with paragraph RECLAMATION PROCEDURES for reclamation of mineral
fiber acoustical ceiling panels to be removed from the job site.
1.2.1 Ceiling Sound Absorption
Determine the Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) in accordance with
ASTM C 423 Test Method.
1.2.2 Light Reflectance
Determine light reflectance factor in accordance with ASTM E 1477 Test
Method.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Approved Detail Drawings
Drawings showing suspension system, method of anchoring and
fastening, details, and reflected ceiling plan.
SD-03 Product Data
Acoustical Ceiling Systems
a. Manufacturer's data indicating percentage of recycle material
in acoustic ceiling tiles to verify affirmative procurement
compliance.
b. Total weight and volume quantities of acoustic ceiling tiles
with recycle material.
SD-04 Samples
SECTION 09 51 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Acoustical Units
Acoustic Ceiling Tiles
Two samples of each type of acoustical unit and each type of
suspension grid tee section showing texture, finish, and color.
SD-06 Test Reports
Ceiling Attenuation Class and Test
Reports by an independent testing laboratory attesting that
acoustical ceiling systems meet specified sound transmission
requirements.
SD-07 Certificates
Acoustical Units
Acoustic Ceiling Tiles
Certificate attesting that the mineral based acoustical units
furnished for the project contain recycled material and showing an
estimated percent of such material.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original unopened
containers with brand name and type clearly marked. Carefully handle and
store materials in dry, watertight enclosures. Immediately before
installation, store acoustical units for not less than 24 hours at the same
temperature and relative humidity as the space where they will be installed
in order to assure proper temperature and moisture acclimation.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 60 degrees F nor more than
85 degrees F and a relative humidity of not more than 70 percent for 24
hours before, during, and 24 hours after installation of acoustical units.
1.6 SCHEDULING
Complete and dry interior finish work such as plastering, concrete and
terrazzo work before ceiling installation. Complete mechanical,
electrical, and other work above the ceiling line; install and start
operating heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in order to
maintain temperature and humidity requirements.
1.7 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
extend beyond a one year period. Include an agreement to repair or replace
acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period in the standard
performance guarantee or warranty. Failures include, but are not limited
to, sagging and warping of panels; rusting and manufacturers defects of
grid system.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish spare tiles, from the same lot as those installed, of each color at
the rate of 5 tiles for each 1000 tiles installed.
SECTION 09 51 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
Comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED /
RECOVERED MATERIALS. Conform acoustical units to ASTM E 1264, Class A, and
the following requirements:
2.1.1 Affirmative Procurement
Mineral Wool, Cellulose, and Laminated Paperboard used in acoustic ceiling
tiles are materials listed in the EPA's Comprehensive Procurement
Guidelines (CPG) (http://www.epa.gov/cpg/). EPA's recommended Recovered
Materials Content Levels for Mineral Wool, Cellulose, Structural Fiberboard
and Laminated Paperboard are:
Product Material Percent of Post Percent of Total
Consumer Materials Recovered Materials
Laminate Post Consumer Paper 100 100
Paperboard
Rock Wool Slag 75
Cellulose Post Consumer Paper 75 75
a. The recommended recovered materials content levels are based on the
weight (not volume) of materials in the insulating core only.
b. For informational purposes, a list of known sources for acoustical
ceiling tiles using recycled material is provided in the EPA/CPG
Supplier database at
http://www.ergweb2.com/cpg4review/user/cpg_search.cfm.
c. Note that the Contractor is not limited to these sources. A
product meeting CPG recycle requirements from other sources may be
submitted for the Government's approval.
d. Submit recycled material content data for acoustic ceiling tiles
indicating compliance with affirmative procurement.
e. Submit total weight and volume quantities of acoustic ceiling tiles
with recycle material.
2.1.2 Units for Exposed-Grid System
a. Type: I (cellulose composition)
b. Flame Spread: Class A, 25 or less
c. Pattern: A
d. Minimum NRC: 0.90 in open office areas; 0.70 in conference rooms,
executive offices, teleconferencing rooms, and other rooms as
designated; 0.70 in all other rooms and areas when tested on mounting
Type E-400 of ASTM E 795. See finish schedule and reflected ceiling
plans for specific locations.
SECTION 09 51 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
e. Minimum Light Reflectance Coefficient: LR-1, 0.75 or greater.
f. Nominal size: 24 by 24 inch.
g. Edge detail: Square lay-in.
h. Finish: Factory-applied standard finish.
i. Minimum CAC: 35.
2.1.3 Unit Acoustical Absorbers
Absorbers shall be individually mounted sound absorbing plaques composed of
glass fibers or non-asbestos mineral fibers and having a NRC range of not
less than 0.60 - 0.70 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 423 and
reported as a 4 frequency average.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Provide standard exposed-grid narrow width slotted flange suspension system
conforming to ASTM C 635/C 635M for intermediate-duty systems. Provide
surfaces exposed to view of white baked-enamel finish. Provide wall
molding having a flange of not less than 15/16 inch. Provide inside and
outside corner caps standard corners. Suspended ceiling framing system
must have the capability to support the finished ceiling, light fixtures,
air diffusers, and accessories, as shown. Provide a suspension system with
a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span length. Conform seismic details
to the guidance in UFC 3-310-04 and ASTM E 580/E 580M.
2.3 HANGERS
Provide hangers and attachment capable of supporting a minimum 300 pound
ultimate vertical load without failure of supporting material or attachment.
2.3.1 Wires
Conform wires to ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, 0.11 inch in diameter.
2.3.2 Straps
Provide straps of 1 by 3/16 inch galvanized steel conforming to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, with a light commercial zinc coating or
ASTM A 1008/A 1008Mwith an electrodeposited zinc coating conforming to
ASTM B 633, Type RS.
2.3.3 Rods
Provide 3/16 inch diameter threaded steel rods, zinc or cadmium coated.
2.3.4 Eyebolts
Provide eyebolts of weldless, forged-carbon-steel, with a straight-shank in
accordance with ASTM A 489. Eyebolt size must be a minimum 1/4 inch, zinc
coated.
2.3.5 Masonry Anchorage Devices
Comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M for anchorage devices for machine screws.
SECTION 09 51 00 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.4 ACCESS PANELS
Provide access panels that match adjacent acoustical units, designed and
equipped with suitable framing and fastenings for removal and replacement
without damage. Size panel to be not less than 12 by 12 inch or more than
12 by 24 inch.
a. Attach an identification plate of 0.032 inch thick aluminum, 3/4
inch in diameter, stamped with the letters "AP" and finished the same
as the unit, near one corner on the face of each access panel.
b. Identify ceiling access panel by a number utilizing white
identification plates or plastic buttons with contrasting numerals.
Provide plates or buttons of minimum 1 inch diameter and securely
attached to one corner of each access unit. Provide a typewritten card
framed under glass listing the code identification numbers and
corresponding system descriptions listed above. Mount the framed card
where directed and furnish a duplicate card to the Contracting
Officer. Code identification system is as follows:
1 Fire detection/alarm system
2 Air conditioning controls
3 Plumbing system
4 Heating and steam systems
5 Air conditioning duct system
6 Sprinkler system
7 Intercommunication system
8 Telephone junction boxes
2.5 ADHESIVE
Use adhesive as recommended by tile manufacturer, with a VOC content of
less than 50 g/L less water.
2.6 FINISHES
Use manufacturer's standard textures, patterns and finishes as specified
for acoustical units and suspension system members. Treat ceiling
suspension system components to inhibit corrosion.
2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
Conform acoustical sealant to ASTM C 834, nonstaining, with a VOC content
equal to or less than required by LEED 2009 credit IEQ 4.1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Examine surfaces to receive directly attached acoustical units for
uneveness, irregularities, and dampness that would affect quality and
execution of the work. Rid areas, where acoustical units will be cemented,
SECTION 09 51 00 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
of oils, form residue, or other materials that reduce bonding capabilities
of the adhesive. Complete and dry interior finish work such as plastering,
concrete, and terrazzo work before installation. Complete and approve
mechanical, electrical, and other work above the ceiling line prior to the
start of acoustical ceiling installation. Provide acoustical work complete
with necessary fastenings, clips, and other accessories required for a
complete installation. Do not expose mechanical fastenings in the finished
work. Lay out hangers for each individual room or space. Provide hangers
to support framing around beams, ducts, columns, grilles, and other
penetrations through ceilings. Keep main runners and carrying channels
clear of abutting walls and partitions. Provide at least two main runners
for each ceiling span. Wherever required to bypass an object with the
hanger wires, install a subsuspension system so that all hanger wires will
be plumb.
3.1.1 Suspension System
Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636/C 636M and as
specified herein. Do not suspend hanger wires or other loads from
underside of steel decking.
3.1.1.1 Plumb Hangers
Install hangers plumb and not pressing against insulation covering ducts
and pipes. Where lighting fixtures are supported from the suspended
ceiling system, provide hangers at a minimum of four hangers per fixture
and located not more than 6 inch from each corner of each fixture.
3.1.1.2 Splayed Hangers
Where hangers must be splayed (sloped or slanted) around obstructions,
offset the resulting horizontal force by bracing, countersplaying, or other
acceptable means.
3.1.2 Acoustical Units
Install acoustical units in accordance with the approved installation
instructions of the manufacturer. Ensure that edges of acoustical units
are in close contact with metal supports, with each other, and in true
alignment. Arrange acoustical units so that units less than one-half width
are minimized. Hold units in exposed-grid system in place with
manufacturer's standard hold-down clips, if units weigh less than 1 psf or
if required for fire resistance rating.
3.1.3 Caulking
Seal all joints around pipes, ducts or electrical outlets penetrating the
ceiling. Apply a continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant on vertical web
of wall or edge moldings.
3.1.4 Adhesive Application
Wipe back of tile to remove accumulated dust. Daub acoustical units on
back side with four equal daubs of adhesive. Apply daubs near corners of
tiles. Ensure that contact area of each daub is at least 2 inch diameter
in final position. Press units into place, aligning joints and abutting
units tight and uniform without differences in joint widths.
SECTION 09 51 00 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.2 CEILING ACCESS PANELS
Locate ceiling access panels directly under the items which require access.
3.3 CLEANING
Following installation, clean dirty or discolored surfaces of acoustical
units and leave them free from defects. Remove units that are damaged or
improperly installed and provide new units as directed.
3.4 RECLAMATION PROCEDURES
Discard of leftover or extra material in accordance with the Waste
Management Plan.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 51 00 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
02/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 4078 (2002; R 2008) Water Emulsion Floor Polish
ASTM E 648 (2009a) Standard Test Method for Critical
Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
ASTM F 1482 (2004e1; R 2009) Installation and
Preparation of Panel Type Underlayments to
Receive Resilient Flooring
ASTM F 1859 (2004e1; R 2009) Rubber Sheet Floor
Covering Without Backing
ASTM F 1861 (2008) Resilient Wall Base
ASTM F 1869 (2004) Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission
Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
Calcium Chloride
ASTM F 2169 (2002; R 2008) Resilient Stair Treads
ASTM F 2170 (2009) Determining Relative Humidity in
Concrete Floor Slabs in situ Probes
ASTM F 710 (2008) Standard Practice for Preparing
Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient
Flooring
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
Rating System for New Construction
(LEED-NC) v3.0
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
SECTION 09 65 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local/recycled material requirements.
Flooring materials may be locally available. Flooring and accessories may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
1.2.2 Fire Resistance Requirements
Provide a minimum average critical radiant flux of 0.22 watts per square
centimeter for flooring in corridors and exits when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 648.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Resilient Flooring and Accessories
Scaled drawings indicating patterns (including location of
patterns and colors) and dimensions.
SD-03 Product Data
Resilient Flooring and Accessories
Manufacturer's descriptive data.
Adhesives
Manufacturer's descriptive data, documentation stating physical
characteristics, and mildew and germicidal characteristics.
Provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all primers and
adhesives to the Contracting Officer. Highlight VOC emissions.
SD-04 Samples
Resilient Flooring and Accessories
Three samples of each indicated color and type of flooring, base,
mouldings, and accessories. Provide a minimum 2-1/2 by 4 inch
sample.
SD-06 Test Reports
Moisture, Alkalinity and Bond Tests
Copy of test reports for moisture and alkalinity content of
concrete slab, and bond test stating date of test, person
conducting the test, and the area tested.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Surface Preparation
Installation
SECTION 09 65 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for all
flooring materials and accessories, including preparation of
substrate, seaming techniques, and recommended adhesives.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Resilient Flooring and Accessories
Data Package 1 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
Sustainable Submittals
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Local/Regional Materials
LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit
in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
Resilient Flooring and Accessories
LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
Adhesives
LEED documentation relative to low-emitting materials credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
LEED documentation relative to rapidly renewable materials
credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the building site in original unopened containers
bearing the manufacturer's name, style name, pattern color name and number,
production run, project identification, and handling instructions. Store
materials in a clean, dry, secure, and well-ventilated area with ambient
air temperature maintained above 68 degrees F and below 85 degrees F,
stacked according to manufacturer's recommendations. Protect materials
from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators and other
heating fixtures and appliances. Observe ventilation and safety procedures
specified in the MSDS. Do not store near materials that may offgas or
emit harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or adhesives.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Maintain areas to receive resilient flooring at a temperature above 68
degrees F and below 85 degrees F for 3 days before application, during
application and 2 days after application, unless otherwise directed by the
flooring manufacturer for the flooring being installed. Maintain a minimum
temperature of 55 degrees F thereafter. Provide adequate ventilation to
remove moisture from area and to comply with regulations limiting
concentrations of hazardous vapors.
SECTION 09 65 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.6 SCHEDULING
Schedule resilient flooring application after the completion of other work
which would damage the finished surface of the flooring.
1.7 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
extend beyond a five year period.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide extra flooring material of each color and pattern at the rate of 5
tiles for each 1000 tiles and 5 square feet for each 1000 square feet of
sheet flooring installed. Provide extra wall base material composed of 20
linear feet of each type, color and pattern. Package all extra materials
in original properly marked containers bearing the manufacturer's name,
brand name, pattern color name and number, production run, and handling
instructions. Provide extra materials from the same lot as those
installed. Leave extra stock at the site in location assigned by
Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING
A. Sustainable Submittals
1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Construction Waste
Management as required by Division 01.
2. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products
having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by
weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content.
i. Include statement indicating costs for each product having
recycled content.
3. Product Data for Credit MR 6: For products having Rapidly Renewable
content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of Rapidly
Renewable content as required by Division 01.
i. Include statement indicating costs for each product having
Rapidly Renewable content.
4. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants,
including printed statement of VOC content as required by Division
01.
5. Confirm that each flooring product complies with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services
Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers, including
2004 Addenda. If a product specified has not been tested as noted
provide a substitution to the Architect for review and approval of
an equal product meeting the noted California Department of Health
standard.
SECTION 09 65 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
6. Product Data and Certification of SMaRT sustainable Product
Certification pursuant to LEED innovation Credit.
2.2 RUBBER SHEET FLOORING TYPE A
Rubber sheet flooring shall conform to ASTM F 1859 (flooring without
backing), Type I homogeneous minimum 36 inch wide. Provide smooth
surface. Provide 0.118 inch overall thickness. Rubber sheet flooring
shall contain a minimum of 100 percent post-consumer recycled material.
2.3 WALL BASE
Conform to ASTM F 1861, Type TS (vulcanized thermoset rubber). Style A
(straight - installed with carpet), and Style B (coved - installed with
resilient flooring). Provide 4 inch high and a minimum 1/8 inch thick wall
base. Provide preformed corners in matching height, shape, and color.
Rubber shall contain a minimum of 90 percent post-consumer recycled
material. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total
recycled content requirements. Rubber sheet flooring may contain
post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
2.4 STAIR TREADS, RISERS AND STRINGERS
Conform to ASTM F 2169, Type TS (vulcanized thermoset rubber). Conform to
ASTM F 2169 for surface of treads Class 2 raised diamond stud pattern and
have Group 1 abrasive non-slip strip abrasive material. Provide square
nosing. Provide either a one piece nosing/tread/riser or a two piece
nosing/tread design with a matching coved riser. Rubber shall contain a
minimum of 100 percent post-consumer recycled material. Provide stair
nosing markings of contrasting color or photoluminescent material as
required by NFPA 101, A.7.2.2.5.4.3. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Rubber
may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
2.5 ADHESIVES
Provide adhesives for flooring, base and accessories as recommended by the
manufacturer and comply with local indoor air quality standards. Interior
adhesives shall meet the requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit.
2.6 SURFACE PREPARATION MATERIALS
Provide surface preparation materials, such as panel type underlayment,
lining felt, and floor crack fillers as recommended by the flooring
manufacturer for the subfloor conditions. Comply with ASTM F 1482 for
panel type underlayment products.
2.7 POLISH/FINISH
Provide polish finish as recommended by the manufacturer and conform to
ASTM D 4078 for polish.
2.8 CAULKING AND SEALANTS
Provide caulking and sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT
SEALANTS.
SECTION 09 65 00 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.9 MANUFACTURER'S COLOR, PATTERN AND TEXTURE
Provide color, pattern and texture for resilient flooring and accessories
as indicated on the drawings. Color listed is not intended to limit the
selection of equal colors from other manufacturers. Provide flooring in
any one continuous area or replacement of damaged flooring in continuous
area from same production run with same shade and pattern.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine and verify that site conditions are in agreement with the design
package. Report all conditions that will prevent a proper installation.
Do not take any corrective action without written permission from the
Government. Work will proceed only when conditions have been corrected and
accepted by the installer.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
Provide a smooth, true, level plane for surface preparation of the
flooring, except where indicated as sloped. Floor to be flat to within
3/16 inch in 10 feet. Prepare subfloor in accordance with flooring
manufacturer's recommended instructions. Prepare the surfaces of
lightweight concrete slabs (as defined by the flooring manufacturer) as
recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Comply with ASTM F 710 for
concrete subfloor preparation. Floor fills or toppings may be required as
recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Install underlayments, when
required by the flooring manufacturer, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended printed installation instructions. Comply with ASTM F 1482 for
panel type underlayments. Before any work under this section is begun,
correct all defects such as rough or scaling concrete, chalk and dust,
cracks, low spots, high spots, and uneven surfaces. Repair all damaged
portions of concrete slabs as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
Remove concrete curing and sealer compounds from the slabs, other than the
type that does not adversely affect adhesion. Remove paint, varnish, oils,
release agents, sealers, waxes, and adhesives, as required by the flooring
product in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
3.3 MOISTURE, ALKALINITY AND BOND TESTS
Determine the suitability of the concrete subfloor for receiving the
resilient flooring with regard to moisture content and pH level by moisture
and alkalinity tests. Conduct moisture testing in accordance with
ASTM F 1869 or ASTM F 2170, unless otherwise recommended by the flooring
manufacturer. Conduct alkalinity testing as recommended by the flooring
manufacturer. Determine the compatibility of the resilient flooring
adhesives to the concrete floors by a bond test in accordance with the
flooring manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4 PLACING LINOLEUM TILES
Install tile flooring and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
printed installation instructions. Prepare and apply adhesives in
accordance with manufacturer's directions. Keep tile lines and joints
square, symmetrical, tight, and even. Keep each floor in true, level
plane, except where slope is indicated. Vary edge width as necessary to
maintain full-size tiles in the field, no edge tile to be less than
one-half the field tile size, except where irregular shaped rooms make it
SECTION 09 65 00 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
impossible. Cut flooring to fit around all permanent fixtures, built-in
furniture and cabinets, pipes, and outlets. Cut, fit, and scribe edge tile
to walls and partitions after field flooring has been applied.
3.5 PLACING RUBBER SHEET FLOORING
Install rubber sheet flooring and accessories in accordance with
manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Prepare and apply
adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Provide
square, symmetrical, tight, and even flooring lines and joints. Keep each
floor in true, level plane, except where slope is indicated. Cut seams by
overlapping or underscribing as recommended by the manufacturer. Lay out
sheets to minimize waste. Cut flooring to fit around all permanent
fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, and outlets. Cut, fit,
and scribe flooring to walls and partitions after field flooring has been
applied.
3.6 PLACING WALL BASE
Install wall base in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation
instructions. Prepare and apply adhesives in accordance with
manufacturer's printed directions. Tighten base joints and make even with
adjacent resilient flooring. Fill voids along the top edge of base at
masonry walls with caulk. Roll entire vertical surface of base with hand
roller, and press toe of base with a straight piece of wood to ensure
proper alignment. Avoid excess adhesive in corners.
3.7 PLACING STAIR TREADS, RISERS, AND STRINGERS
Secure and install stair treads, risers, and stringers in accordance with
manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Cover the surface of
treads and risers the full width of the stairs. Provide equal length
pieces butted together to cover the treads and risers for stairs wider than
manufacturer's standard lengths. Provide stringer angles on both the wall
and banister sides of the stairs, and landing trim. Provide two-part epoxy
compound as required by the resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing
substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
3.8 CLEANING
Immediately upon completion of installation of flooring in a room or an
area, dry/clean the flooring and adjacent surfaces to remove all surplus
adhesive. Clean flooring as recommended in accordance with manufacturer's
printed maintenance instructions. No sooner than 5 days after
installation, wash flooring with a nonalkaline cleaning solution, rinse
thoroughly with clear cold water, and, except for rubber flooring and stair
treads, risers and stringers, vinyl and other flooring not requiring polish
finish by manufacturer, apply the number of coats of polish in accordance
with manufacturer's written instructions. Clean and maintain all other
flooring as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.9 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Separate offcuts and waste materials and reuse or recycle in accordance
with the Waste Management Plan, keeping sheet materials larger than 2
square feet and tiles larger than 1/2 tiles separate for reuse. Identify
manufacturer's policy for collection or return of construction scrap,
unused material, demolition scrap, and/or packaging material. Place
materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers and
SECTION 09 65 00 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
dispose of properly. Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and
adhesive containers and store protected in a well ventilated fire-safe area
at moderate temperature.
3.10 PROTECTION
From the time of installation until acceptance, protect flooring from
damage as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove and replace
flooring which becomes damaged, loose, broken, or curled and wall base
which is not tight to wall or securely adhered.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 65 00 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 09 68 13
CARPET TILE
01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF TEXTILE CHEMISTS AND COLORISTS (AATCC)
AATCC 107 (2002; E 2008) Colorfastness to Water
AATCC 134 (2006; E 2008) Standard Test Method for
Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets
AATCC 16 (2004) Colorfastness to Light
AATCC 165 (2008) Colorfastness to Crocking: Textile
Floor Coverings - AATCC Crockmeter Method
AATCC 174 (1998; R 2007) Antimicrobial Activity
Assessment of Carpets
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 1423 (2002; R 2008) Twist in Yarns by
Direct-Counting
ASTM D 3278 (1996; R 2004e1) Flash Point of Liquids
by Small Scale Closed-Cup Apparatus
ASTM D 5252 (2005) Operation of the Hexapod Drum Tester
ASTM D 5417 (2005) Operation of the Vettermann Drum
Tester
ASTM D 5793 (2005) Binding Sites Per Unit Length or
Width of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings
ASTM D 5848 (2007) Mass Per Unit Area of Pile Yarn
Floor Coverings
ASTM E 648 (2009a) Standard Test Method for Critical
Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE (CRI)
CRI 104 (2002) Standard for Installation
Specification of Commercial Carpet
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
ISO 2551 (1981) Machine-made Textile Floor
Coverings - Determination of Dimensional
Changes Due to the Effects of Varied Water
and Heat Conditions
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS SS-W-40 (Rev A; Int Am 1, Notice 1) Wall Base:
Rubber, and Vinyl Plastic
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
Rating System for New Construction
(LEED-NC) v3.0
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
16 CFR 1630 Standard for the Surface Flammability of
Carpets and Rugs (FF 1-70)
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Carpet
materials may be locally available.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation
Molding
Three copies of drawings indicating areas receiving carpet,
carpet types, textures and patterns, direction of pile, location
of seams, and locations of edge molding. Installation drawings
for the following items diagramming the location of seams, edge
moldings, and carpet direction for approval prior to installation.
1) Carpet Moldings
2) Base
NSF 140-2007 CERTIFICATION
Carpet must be certified to NSF 140-2007, the Sustainable Carpet
Assessment Standard (SCAS), at the Platinum Level. Product
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
certification must be conducted by an independent, third party
organization such as Scientific Certification Systems. Provide
documentation.
SD-03 Product Data
Carpet
Carpet Moldings
Base
Manufacturer's catalog data and printed documentation stating
physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and
flame resistance characteristics for each type of carpet tile
material and installation accessory. Submit manufacturer's
catalog data for the following items:
1) Carpet Moldings
2) Base
Surface Preparation
Installation
Three copies of the manufacturer's printed installation
instructions for the carpet tile, including preparation of
substrate, seaming techniques, and recommended adhesives and tapes.
Regulatory Requirements
Three copies of report stating that carpet and carpet components
contain recycled materials and/or involvement in a recycling or
reuse program. Include in the report percentage of
post-industrial and post-consumer recycled material. Include
manufacturer's certification of compliance with Carpet and Rug
Institute's Green Label Indoor Air Quality program, NSF 140-2007
SD-04 Samples
Carpet Tile
Molding
a. Carpet: Two "Production Quality" samples 24 by 24 inches of
each carpet proposed for use, showing quality, pattern, and color
specified.
b. Vinyl or Aluminum Moldings: Two pieces of each type at least
12 inches long.
SD-06 Test Reports
Moisture and Alkalinity Tests
Three copies of test reports of moisture and alkalinity content
of concrete slab stating date of test, person conducting the test,
and the area tested.
The maximum amount of moisture evactuation from the floor is 3.0
pounds per 1,000 square feet in 24 hours. The acceptable pH level
of the substrate is between 7.0 and 9.0. Flooring contractor is
responsible for floor testing.
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Maintain minimum 65 degrees F ambient temperature and 65% Relative
humidity for 72 hours prior to, during, and 48 hours installation.
SD-07 Certificates
Carpet Tile
Certificates of compliance from a laboratory accredited by the
National Laboratory Accreditation Program of the National
Institute of Standards and Technology attesting that each type of
carpet and carpet with cushion material conforms to the standards
specified.
Regulatory Requirements
Report stating that the carpet contains recycled materials and
indicating the actual percentage of recycled material.
Certificates, showing conformance with the referenced standards
contained in this section, for the following:
1) Moldings
2) Base
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Carpet
Cleaning and Protection
Three copies of carpet manufacturer's maintenance instructions
describing recommended type of cleaning equipment and material,
spotting and cleaning methods, and cleaning cycles.
Maintenance Service
Documentation of manufacturer's maintenance agreement, and
take-back program for carpet. Include contact information,
summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions
applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to
reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Local/Regional Materialss; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit
in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
Carpet Tile; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
Carpet Tile; (LEED)
Adhesives and Concrete Primer; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to low-emitting materials credit in
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
Carpet Tile; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to rapidly renewable credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Provide the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) label
for carpet tile, carpet backing and adhesives or demonstrate compliance
space with testing criteria and frequencies through independent laboratory
test results. Carpet, carpet backing and adhesives bearing the label will
indicate that the carpet tile has been tested and meets the Regulatory
Requirements and criteria of the CRI IAQ Carpet Testing Program, and
minimizes the impact on indoor air quality.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original wrappings and
packages clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, brand name, size,
dye lot number, and related information. Remove materials from packaging
and store them in a clean, dry, well ventilated area protected from damage,
soiling, and moisture, and maintain at a temperature above 60 degrees F for
2 days prior to installation. Do not store carpet near materials that
may offgas or emit harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or
adhesives.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Maintain areas in which carpeting is to be installed at a minimum
temperature of 65 degrees F and below 90 degrees F for 2 days before
installation, during installation, and for 2 days after installation.
Provide temporary ventilation during work of this section. Maintain a
minimum temperature of 55 degrees F thereafter for the duration of the
contract. Do not permit traffic or movement of furniture or equipment in
carpeted area for 24 hours after installation. Complete other work which
would damage the carpet prior to installation of carpet.
1.7 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties
including minimum fifteen (15) year wear warranty, two (2) year material
and workmanship and ten (10) year tuft bind and delamination.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
1.8.1 Extra Materials
Provide extra material from same dye lot for future maintenance. Provide a
minimum of 1 percent of total square yards of each carpet tile type,
pattern, and color.
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
Furnish first quality carpet tile; free of visual blemishes, streaks,
poorly dyed areas, fuzzing of pile yarn, spots or stains, and other
physical and manufacturing defects. Provide carpet tile materials and
treatments as reasonably nonallergenic and free of other recognized health
hazards. Provide a static control construction on all grade carpet tiles
which gives adequate durability and performance. Provide the Carpet and
Rug Institute (CRI) Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Label. Carpet tile type
bearing the label will indicate that the carpet tile has been tested and
meets the criteria of the CRI Green Label Requirements for Indoor Air
Quality Test Criteria. Carpet tiles shall have Carpet Component
Identification Codes as established by the CRI for future recycling. The
labels shall be permanently printed or attached to the carpet backing. The
codes shall identify, at minimum, the carpet's face fiber, primary backing,
and secondary backing. The secondary backing shall be 100% recycled content.
2.1.1 Physical Characteristics
2.1.1 Modular Tile Carpet CPT-1
Carpet shall comply with the following:
a. Carpet Construction: Tufted.
b. Type: Modular tile 24 by 24 inch square with 0.15 percent
growth/shrink rate in accordance with ISO 2551.
c. Pile Type: Multilevel loop.
d. Pile Fiber: Commercial 100 percent branded (federally registered
trademark) nylon staple, minimum 12 percent post-consumer or 28 percent
post-consumer recycled content with 40 percent minimum total combined
recycled content. Chemical treatments, including moth treatment, are
not permitted. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for
cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet pile fiber may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
e. Yarn Ply: Minimum 2.
f. Gauge or Pitch: Minimum 1/12 inch in accordance with ASTM D 5793.
g. Stitches or Rows/Wires: Minimum 10 per square inch.
h. Finished Pile Yarn Weight: Minimum 19 ounces per square yard.
This does not include weight of backings. Determine weight in
accordance with ASTM D 5848.
i. Pile Density: Minimum 4993.
j. Dye Method: Solution dyed.
k. Backing Materials: Provide primary backing materials like
synthetic material. Provide secondary backing to suit project
requirements of those customarily used and accepted by the trade for
each type of carpet, except when a special unitary back designed for
gluedown is needed. Backing system shall contain a minimum of 40
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
percent recycled content. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION
for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet backing may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
l. Recycle Efforts: 100% recyclable carpet.
m. Environmental Certifications:
i. NSF 140 2007 Platinum certified
ii. Green Label Plus
iii. Cradle to Cradle certified
2.1.2.2 Modular Tile Carpet CPT-2
Comply with the following carpet requirements:
a. Carpet Construction: Tufted.
b. Type: Modular tile 24 by 24 inches square with 0.15 percent
growth/shrink rate in accordance with ISO 2551.
c. Pile Type: Random sheared.
d. Pile Fiber: Commercial 100 percent branded (federally registered
trademark) nylon staple, minimum 20 percent pre-consumer or 11 percent
post-consumer recycled content with 31 percent minimum total combined
recycled content. Chemical treatments, including moth treatment, are
not permitted. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for
cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet pile fiber may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
e. Yarn Ply: Minimum 2 in accordance with ASTM D 1423.
f. Gauge or Pitch: Minimum 1/10 inch in accordance with ASTM D 5793.
g. Stitches or Rows/Wires: Minimum 11.0 per square inch.
h. Finished Pile Yarn Weight: Minimum 30.0 ounces per square yard.
This does not include weight of backings. Determine weight in
accordance with ASTM D 5848.
i. Pile Density: Minimum 7248.
j. Dye Method: Piece dyed.
k. Backing Materials: Provide primary backing materials like
synthetic material. Provide secondary backing to suit project
requirements of those customarily used and accepted by the trade for
each type of carpet, except when a special unitary back designed for
gluedown is needed. Backing system shall contain a minimum of 40
percent recycled content. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION
for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet backing may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
l. Recycle Efforts: 100% recyclable carpet.
m. Environmental Certifications:
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
i. NSF 140 2007 Platinum certified
ii. Green Label Plus
iii. Cradle to Cradle certified
2.1.2 Modular Tile Carpet CPT-3
Comply with the following carpet requirements:
a. Carpet Construction: Tufted.
b. Type: Modular tile 24 by 24 inch square with 0.15 percent
growth/shrink rate in accordance with ISO 2551.
c. Pile Type: Level-loop.
d. Pile Fiber: Commercial 100 percent branded (federally registered
trademark) nylon staple, minimum 11 percent post-consumer or 27 percent
pre-consumer recycled content with 38 percent minimum total combined
recycled content. Chemical treatments, including moth treatment, are
not permitted. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for
cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet pile fiber may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
e. Yarn Ply: Minimum 2 in accordance with ASTM D 1423.
f. Gauge or Pitch: Minimum 1/10 inch in accordance with ASTM D 5793.
g. Stitches or Rows/Wires: Minimum 10 per square inch.
h. Finished Pile Yarn Weight: Minimum 30 ounces per square yard.
This does not include weight of backings. Determine weight in
accordance with ASTM D 5848.
i. Pile Density: Minimum 8120.
j. Dye Method: Solution dyed.
k. Backing Materials: Provide primary backing materials of synthetic
material. Provide secondary backing to suit project requirements of
those customarily used and accepted by the trade for each type of
carpet, except when a special unitary back designed for gluedown is
needed. Backing system shall contain a minimum of 40 percent recycled
content. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative
total recycled content requirements. Carpet backing may contain
post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
l. Recycle Efforts: 100% recyclable carpet.
m. Environmental Certifications:
i. NSF 140 2007 Platinum certified
ii. Green Label Plus
iii. Cradle to Cradle certified
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.2.1 Modular Tile Carpet CPT-4
Comply with the following carpet requirements:
a. Carpet Construction: Tufted.
b. Type: Modular tile 24 by 24 inch square with 0.15 percent
growth/shrink rate in accordance with ISO 2551.
c. Pile Type: Level-loop.
d. Pile Fiber: Commercial 100 percent branded (federally registered
trademark) nylon staple, minimum 11 percent post-consumer or 27 percent
pre-consumer recycled content with 38 percent minimum total combined
recycled content. Chemical treatments, including moth treatment, are
not permitted. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for
cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet pile fiber may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
e. Yarn Ply: Minimum 2.
f. Gauge or Pitch: Minimum 1/10 inch in accordance with ASTM D 5793.
g. Stitches or Rows/Wires: Minimum 11.5 per square inch.
h. Surface Pile Weight: Minimum 30 ounces per square yard. This does
not include weight of backings. Determine weight in accordance with
ASTM D 5848.
i. Pile Density: Minimum 11613.
j. Dye Method: Solution dyed.
k. Backing Materials: Provide primary backing materials like
synthetic material. Provide secondary backing to suit project
requirements of those customarily used and accepted by the trade for
each type of carpet, except when a special unitary back designed for
gluedown is needed. Backing system shall contain a minimum of 40
percent recycled content. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION
for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet backing may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
l. Recycle Efforts: 100% recyclable carpet.
m. Environmental Certifications:
i. NSF 140 2007 Platinum certified
ii. Green Label Plus
iii. Cradle to Cradle certified
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
a. ARR (Appearance Retention Rating): Test carpet with the minimum 3.5
ARR in accordance with either the ASTM D 5252(Hexapod) or ASTM D 5417
(Vettermann) test methods using the number of cycles for short and long
term tests as specified.
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
b. Static Control: Provide static control to permanently regulate
static buildup to less than 3.0 kV when tested at 20 percent relative
humidity and 70 degrees F in accordance with AATCC 134.
c. Flammability and Critical Radiant Flux Requirements: Comply carpet
with 16 CFR 1630. Provide carpet in corridors and exits with a minimum
average critical radiant flux of 0.45 watts per square centimeter when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 648.
d. Tuft Bind: Provide tuft bind force required to pull a tuft or loop
free from carpet backing with a minimum 10 pound average force for loop
pile.
e. Colorfastness to Crocking: Comply dry and wet crocking with
AATCC 165 and with a Class 4 minimum rating on the AATCC Color
Transference Chart for all colors.
f. Colorfastness to Light: Comply colorfastness to light with AATCC 16,
Test Option E "Water-Cooled Xenon-Arc Lamp, Continuous Light" and with
a minimum 4 grey scale rating after 40 hours.
g. Colorfastness to Water: Comply colorfastness to water with
AATCC 107 and with a minimum 4.0 gray scale rating and a minimum 4.0
transfer scale rating.
h. Delamination Strength: No delamination in accordance with ASTM
D-3936.
i. Antimicrobial: Nontoxic antimicrobial treatment in accordance with
AATCC 174 Part I (qualitatiave), guaranteed by the carpet manufacturer
to last the life of the carpet.
2.3 CARPET MOLDINGS
Install carpet moldings, either vinyl or aluminum, where floor covering
material changes or carpet edge does not abut a vertical surface.
2.4 BASE
Conform to FS SS-W-40 for rubber base. Provide minimum overall thickness
of base not less than 0.125 inch, color as selected from manufacturer's
full line. Straight style, 4 inch high. Furnish base in rolls not less
than 96 feet long. Premold corners with wings not less than 2 inch long.
2.5 ADHESIVES AND CONCRETE PRIMER
Adhesives and concrete primers shall comply with applicable regulations
regarding toxic and hazardous materials. Use peel and stick dry adhesive.
Provide release adhesive for modular tile carpet as recommended by the
carpet manufacturer. Provide adhesives flashpoint of minimum 140 degrees F
in accordance with ASTM D 3278.
2.6 COLOR, TEXTURE, AND PATTERN
Provide color, texture, and pattern in accordance with Drawings.
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
Do not install carpet tile on surfaces that are unsuitable and will prevent
a proper installation. Repair holes, cracks, depressions, or rough areas
using material recommended by the carpet or adhesive manufacturer. Free
floor of any foreign materials and sweep clean. Before beginning work,
test subfloor with glue and carpet to determine "open time" and bond.
3.2 MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY TESTS
Test concrete slab for moisture content and excessive alkalinity in
accordance with CRI 104.
3.3 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SUBFLOOR
Do not commence installation of the carpeting until concrete substrate is
at least 90 days old. Prepare the concrete surfaces in accordance with
instructions of the carpet manufacturer. Match carpet, when required, and
adhesives to prevent off-gassing to a type of curing compounds, leveling
agents, and concrete sealer.
3.4 INSTALLATION
Perform all work by installers who are CFI certified (International
Certified Floorcovering Installer Association), or manufacturer's approved
installers. Conduct installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions and CRI 104. Protect edges of carpet meeting hard
surface flooring with molding and install in accordance with the molding
manufacturer's printed instructions. Follow ventilation, personal
protection, and other safety precautions recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer. Continue ventilation during installation and for at least 72
hours following installation.
3.4.1 Modular Tile Installation
Install modular tiles with permanent vinyl-compatible adhesive and snugly
jointed together. Lay tiles in the direction as indicated on the drawings
with accessibility to the subfloor where required.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.5.1 Cleaning
As specified in Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. After installation
of the carpet tile, remove debris, scraps, and other foreign matter.
Remove soiled spots and adhesive from the face of the carpet with
appropriate spot remover. Cut off and remove protruding face yarn. Vacuum
carpet clean.
3.5.2 Protection
Protect the installed carpet from soiling and damage with heavy,
reinforced, nonstaining kraft paper, plywood, or hardboard sheets. Lap and
secure edges of kraft paper protection to provide a continuous cover.
Restrict traffic for at least 48 hours. Remove protective covering when
directed by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 11
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.6 REMNANTS
Collect information from manufacturer about maintenance agreement and
take-back program options, and provide to Contracting Officer. Manage
waste as specified in the Waste Management Plan. Non-retained scraps shall
be set aside and returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product.
Remove non-retained scraps from site and recycle appropriately.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 68 13 Page 12
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 09 69 13
RIGID GRID ACCESS FLOORING
04/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 780/A 780M (2009) Standard Practice for Repair of
Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Coatings
CEILINGS & INTERIOR SYSTEMS CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATION (CISCA)
CISCA Access Floors (2004) Test Procedures for Access Floors
ICC EVALUATION SERVICE, INC. (ICC-ES)
ICC-ES AC300 (2005) Acceptance Criteria for Access
Floors
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA LD 3 (2005) Standard for High-Pressure
Decorative Laminates
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 75 (2009) Standard for the Protection of
Information Technology Equipment
NFPA 99 (2005; Errata 2005; AMD 2009) Health Care
Facilities
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS TT-C-490 (1990; Am 2) Cleaning Methods for Ferrous
Surfaces and Pretreatments for Organic
Coatings
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Install access flooring at the location and elevation and in the
arrangement shown on the drawings. The floor system shall be complete with
all supplemental items, and be the standard product of a manufacturer
specializing in the manufacture of access flooring systems.
a. Provide for self-alignment of floor panels, adjustable pedestals
and readily removable floor panels covered as specified.
SECTION 09 69 13 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
b. Lateral stability of floor support system shall be independent of
panels. Provide a finished assembly that is rigid and free of
vibration, noises, and rocking panels.
c. Submit Certificates for the complete Access Flooring System
including, but not limited to the following:
1) Compliance with ICC-ES AC300. Submit design data
substantiating compliance with International Building Code
Acceptance Criteria for Access Floors.
2) Load-bearing capabilities of pedestals, floor panels, and
pedestal adhesive resisting force.
3) Supporting independent laboratory test reports. For panel
loads, test results include concentrated loads at center of panel,
panel edge midpoint, and uniform loads.
4) Floor electrical characteristics.
5) Material requirements
6) An elevated floor system free of defects in materials,
fabrication, finish, and installation, that will remain so for a
period of not less than 1 years after completion.
d. Warrant that, upon notification by the Government, defective work
will be immediately replaced with new work at no additional cost to the
Government.
e. Submit manufacturer's descriptive data, catalog cuts, and
installation instructions. Include in the data information about any
design and production techniques, total system including all
accessories and finish coatings of under-floor components, procedures
and policies used to conserve energy, reduce material, improve waste
management or incorporate green building/recycled products into the
manufacturer of their components or products. Incliude cleaning and
maintenance instructions. Systems which contain zinc electroplated
anti-corrosion coatings are prohibited.
1.2.1 Allowable Tolerances
a. Floor Panel Flatness: Plus or minus 0.02 inches on diagonal on top
of panel or underneath edge.
b. Floor Panel Length: Plus or minus 0.015 inch.
c. Floor Panel Squareness: Plus or minus 0.02 inch in panel length.
d. Finish Floor: Level within plus or minus 0.062 inch in 10 feet,
and plus or minus 0.10 inch for entire floor.
1.2.2 Floor Panels
Conduct floor panel testing in accordance with CISCA Access Floors. When
tested as specified, make all deflection and deformation measurements at
the point of load application on the top surface of the panel. Floor
panels shall be capable of supporting the following loads:
SECTION 09 69 13 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
a. Concentrated load of 1250 pounds on Type 1 (office) panel and
2000 pounds on type 2 (equipment rooms and corridor panels) on one
square inch, at any point on panel, without deflecting more than .100
inch, with a safety factor of 2 based on concentrated load.
b. Uniform live load of 300 psf, without deflecting more than 0.04 inch.
c. A rolling load of 800 pounds on type 1 and 1250 pounds on type 2
panels applied through hard rubber surfaced wheel 6 inch diameter by 1
1/2 inch wide for 10,000 cycles over the same path. Permanent set at
conclusion of test shall not exceed 0.010 inch.
d. A rolling load of 1000 pounds on type 1 panels and 1500 pounds on
type 2 panels applied through a 3 inch diameter by 1-13/16 inch wide
caster for 10 cycles over the same path, without deflecting more than
0.04 inch and without permanent deformation in excess of 0.02 inch. In
accordance with CISCA Access Floors, the permanent deformation limit
under rolling load shall be satisfied in all of the specified tests.
In the specified tests, the permanent deformation shall be measured
after 10 passes with Wheel 1 and after 10,000 passes with Wheel 2.
e. An impact load of 150 pounds on one square inch from a height of
12 inches with permanent set not to exceed 0.060 inch.
1.2.3 Stringers
Provide stringers capable of supporting a 450 pound concentrated load at
midspan without permanent deformation in excess of 0.010 inch. Stringers in
areas where 2000 lb panels are located.
1.2.4 Pedestals
Pedestals shall be capable of supporting a5000 pound axial load without
permanent deformation.
1.2.5 Bonding Strength of Pedestal Adhesive
Adhesive for anchoring pedestal bases shall have a bonding strength capable
of resisting an overturning moment of 1,000 lbf-in min. when a force is
applied to the top of the pedestal in any direction.
1.2.6 Bond Strength of Factory Installed Covering
Bond strength of floor covering shall be sufficient to permit handling of
the panels by use of the panel lifting device, and to withstand moving
caster loads up to 1000 pounds, without separation of the covering from the
panel.
1.2.7 Seismic Calculations
1.2.7.1 Army Requirements
Submit calculations for special bracing to resist the effects of seismic or
other forces in accordance with UFC 3-310-04, ICC IBC and ICC-ES AC300.
Submit design calculations which demonstrate that the proposed floor system
meets requirements for seismic loading. Certified copies of test reports
may be submitted in lieu of calculations.
SECTION 09 69 13 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.2.8 Grounding
Ground the access flooring system for safety hazard and static
suppression. Provide positive contact between components for safe,
continuous electrical grounding of entire floor system. Total system
resistance from wearing surface of floor to building grounding electrode
shall be within range of 0.5 to 20,000 megohms.
1.2.8.1 Joint Resistance
Electrical joint resistance between individual stringer and pedestal
junctions shall be less than 0.1 milliohms. Electrical resistance between
stringers and floor panels, as mounted in normal use, shall be less than 3
ohms.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detailed Installation Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Access Flooring System
SD-04 Samples
Floor Panels
Finish Flooring
Panel Support System
Accessories
SD-05 Design Data
Compliance with ICC-ES AC300
Seismic Calculations
SD-06 Test Reports
Factory Tests
Electrical Resistance
Field Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Access Flooring System
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Submit drawings showing location, details at floor perimeter, method of
anchorage to structural subfloor, grounding, description of factory
coating, installation height above structural floor, stairs, ramps,
accessories and other details as specified. Take measurements from
SECTION 09 69 13 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
finished areas at site and submit Detailed Installation Drawings indicating:
a. Location of panels
b. Layout of supports, panels, and cutout locations
c. Stair, handrail, and ramp framing
d. Sizes and details of components
e. Lateral bracing
f. Typical cutout details
g. Gasketing, return air grilles, supply air registers, and perforated
panels. Include air transfer capacity of grilles, registers and panels
h. Floor finishes
i. Location of connection to building grounding electrode
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.5.1 Delivery
Deliver materials to site in undamaged condition, in original containers or
packages, complete with accessories and instructions. Label packages with
manufacturer's name and brand designations. Package materials covered by
specific references bearing specification number, type and class as
applicable.
1.5.2 Storage
Store all materials in original protective packaging in a safe, dry, and
clean location. Store panels at temperatures between 40 and 90 degrees F,
and between 20 and 70 percent humidity. Replace defective or damaged
materials.
1.5.3 Handling
Materials shall be handled and protected in a manner to prevent damage
during the entire construction period.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
a. ARMY: Furnish spare floor panels, complete pedestal assemblies,
and stringers at the rate of one for each 100 or fraction thereof
required.
b. Submit three separate samples of the specified finish flooring.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLOOR PANELS
2.1.1 Floor System Drawings And Planer Quality
a. Submit Fabrication Drawings for elevated floor systems consisting
of fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the factory.
SECTION 09 69 13 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
b. Indicate on Location Drawings exact location of pedestals,
ventilation openings, cable cutouts, and the panel installation pattern.
c. Provide Detail Drawings showing details of the pedestals,
pedestal-floor interlocks, floor panels, panel edging, floor openings,
floor opening edging, floor registers, floor grilles, cable cutout
treatment, perimeter base, expansion joints, and peripheral support
facilities.
d. Design and workmanship of the floor, as installed, shall be
completely planar within plus or minus 0.060 inch in 10 feet, 0.100
inch for the entire floor, and 0.030 inch across panel joints.
e. Floor-panel joint-width tolerances shall be an average of 0.008 inch
as measured with a feeler gage at any point in any joint when the
panels re in the pressure contact required in final nstallation.
Submit three complete samples of floor panels.
2.1.2 Panel Construction
a. Base access floor system on a 24 by 24 inch square module providing
minimum of 24 inch clearance or as specified between structural floor
and bottom of finished floor. Fabricate so accurate job cutting and
fitting may be done using standard sizes for perimeters and around
columns.
b. Do not expose metal on finished top surface of panels. Provide
cutouts and cutout closures to accommodate utility systems and
equipment intercabling. Reinforce cutouts to meet design load
requirements. Provide extra support pedestals at each corner of cutout
for cutout panels that do not meet specified design load requirements.
c. Panel design shall provide for convenient panel removal for
underfloor servicing and for openings for new equipment. Use panels of
uniform dimensions within specified tolerances. Permanently mark
panels to indicate load rating and model number.
d. Machine square floor panels to within plus or minus 0.005 inch with
edge straightness plus or minus 0.0025 inch. Tolerances apply to the
panel before the plastic edging is applied.
2.1.2.1 Metal-Clad Cementitious Fill (Composite Panels)
a. Provide composite panels of die-formed steel construction totally
enclosing the panel, including the top surface. Top and bottom sheets
to be fully welded. Adhesive not acceptable. The void spaces between
the top sheet and the formed steel bottom sheet shall be completely
filled with an incombustible cementitious or concrete material. Seal
cut edges in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
b. Grid supported panels shall be further tested by supporting them at
two opposite edges and applying a 500-pound load at the center of a
panel selected; the panel shall be similarly tested while supported at
the other two edges. Weld failure at any point under this loading is
not acceptable. This additional test shall be applied to one panel per
500 square feet of floor in the system, but in no case less than two
panels. When any weld fails, the number of panels designated by the
Contracting Officer shall be similarly tested; replace those panels
SECTION 09 69 13 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
that have a weld failure at no cost to the Government.
2.1.3 Floor Covering
Surface floor panels with materials firmly bonded in place with waterproof
adhesive. The electrical resistance shall remain stable over the life
expectancy of the floor covering. Any anti-static agent used in the
manufacturing process shall be an integral part of the material, not
surface applied. Bolt heads or similar attachments shall not rise above
the traffic surface.
2.1.3.1 High Pressure Laminate
Provide high pressure laminate surfacing conforming to NEMA LD 3, Grade HDS
160. Total system electrical resistance from the wearing surface of the
floor to the ground connection shall be between 150,000 ohms and
20,000,000,000 ohms.
2.1.3.2 Linoleum Sheet Flooring
Provide linoleum sheet goods as specified in the finish schedule. Tiles
shall be the full size of the floor panel and shall be factory applied with
a monolithic edge per manufacturer's recommendation.
2.1.4 Edge Strip (where required)
Edge panels with extruded vinyl edge strips secured in place with
mechanical interlock or adhesive bond, or use replaceable type. Top of
strip shall be approximately 1/8 inch wide, and flush with the floor
surfacing. Metal edge strips exposed at finish floor surface will be
rejected.
2.1.5 Resilient Base
Base shall be continuous rolled goods,straight style (installed with
carpet) coved style (installed with resilient flooring), 4 inches high and
a minimum 1/8 inch thick. Furnish Job Formed corners with no seams or
joints less than 6 inches from the corner.
2.1.6 Lifting Device
Provide a minimum of four floor panel lifting devices standard with the
floor manufacturer for each floor level of the facility.
2.2 PANEL SUPPORT SYSTEM
Design support system to allow for 360 degree clearance in laying out cable
and cutouts for service to machines and so that panel and stringer together
take up maximum of 2 inches. Submit one sample of each panel type and
suspension system proposed for use.
2.2.1 Pedestals
Provide pedestals made of steel or aluminum or a combination thereof.
Ferrous materials shall have a factory-applied corrosion-resistant finish.
Provide pedestal base plates with a minimum of 16 square inches of bearing
surface and a minimum of 1/8 inch thickness. Pedestal shafts shall be
threaded to permit height adjustment within a range of approximately 2
inches, to permit overall floor adjustment within plus or minus 0.10 inch
SECTION 09 69 13 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
of the required elevation, and to permit leveling of the finished floor
surface within 0.062 inch in 10 feet in all directions. Provide locking
devices to positively lock the final pedestal vertical adjustments in
place. Pedestal caps shall interlock with panels to preclude tilting or
rocking of the panels.
2.2.2 Stringers
Provide stringers of rolled steel or extruded aluminum, to interlock with
the pedestal heads to prevent lateral movement. Provide stringers that can
be added or removed after floor is in place.
2.3 FASCIA
Provide aluminum or steel fascia plates at open ends of floor, at sides of
ramps and steps, and elsewhere as required to enclose the free area under
the raised floor. Steel plates shall have a factory applied baked enamel
finish. Finish on aluminum plates shall be standard with the floor system
manufacturer. Fascia plates shall be reinforced on the back, and supported
using the manufacturer's standard lateral bracing at maximum 4 feet on
center. Provide trim, angles, and fasteners as required.
2.4 FACTORY TESTS
Factory test access flooring, using an independent laboratory, at the same
position and maximum design elevation and in the same arrangement as shown
on the drawings for installation so as to duplicate service conditions as
much as possible.
2.4.1 Load Tests
Conduct floor panel, stringer, and pedestal testing in accordance with
CISCA Access Floors.
2.4.2 Bond Strength of Covering
Support The test panel on pedestals and stringers as specified for the
installed floor. Brace the supports as necessary to prevent sideways
movement during the test. Impose a test load of 1000 pounds on the test
assembly through a hard plastic caster 3 inches in diameter and 1 inch
wide. Roll the caster completely across the center of the panel. The
panel shall withstand 20 passes of the caster with no delamination or
separation of the covering.
2.5 COLOR
Color shall be as indicated on the drawings. Color listed is not intended
to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers.
2.6 CUT OUTS
Provide cable cutouts finished with rigid polyvinylchloride or molded
polypropylene edging to conform to the appearance level of the floor
surface and to cover raw edges of the cutout panel. Extrusion shall be of
a configuration to permit its effective and convenient use when new cable
openings are required. Provide at least 24 feet of additional extrusion
for future use.
a. Provide non-metallic adapter for openings less than 4 inches wide.
SECTION 09 69 13 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Secure adapter adhesively in cutout to preclude removal from panel.
Provide at least four adapters per 1000 square feet for future use.
b. Openings larger than 4 inches wide shall use rigid
polyvinylchloride or molded polypropylene edging. Perform cutting of
panels, including cutouts, outside of the building.
c. When size of cutout reduces the performance requirement of panel,
provide intermediate stringers adjacent to cutouts.
2.7 EDGE CLOSURE
Provide 1/16 inch aluminum closure plate and extruded aluminum nosing at
exposed edge of floor. Back up the closure plates with aluminum or steel
framing braced diagonally, or anchor at bottom to continuous angle.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install the floor system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
and with the approved detail drawings. Open ends of the floor, where the
floor system does not abut wall or other construction, shall have positive
anchorage and rigid support. Maintain areas to receive access flooring
between 60 and 90 degrees F, and between 20 and 70 percent humidity for 24
hours prior to and during installation.
3.1.1 Preparation for Installation
Clear of all debris the area in which the floor system is to be installed.
Thoroughly clean structural floor surfaces and remove all dust. Install
floor coatings, required for dust or vapor control, prior to installation
of pedestals, only if the pedestal adhesive will not damage the coating.
If the coating and adhesive are not compatible, apply the coating after the
pedestals have been installed and the adhesive has cured.
3.1.2 Pedestals
Pedestals shall be accurately spaced, and set plumb and in true alignment.
Set base plates in full and firm contact with the structural floor, and
secured to the structural floor.
3.1.3 Stringers
Interlock stringers with the pedestal caps to preclude lateral movement,
spaced uniformly in parallel lines at the indicated elevation.
3.1.4 Auxiliary Framing
Provide auxiliary framing or pedestals around columns and other permanent
construction, at sides of ramps, at open ends of the floor, and beneath
panels that are substantially cut to accommodate utility systems. Use
special framing for additional lateral support as shown on the approved
detail drawings. Provide additional pedestals and stringers designed to
specific heights and lengths to meet structural irregularities and design
loads. Connect auxiliary framing to main framing.
SECTION 09 69 13 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.1.5 Panels
Interlock panels with supports in a manner that will preclude lateral
movement. Fasten perimeter panels, cutout panels, and panels adjoining
columns, stairs, and ramps to the supporting components to form a rigid
boundary for the interior panels. Floors shall be level within the
specified tolerances. Cut edges of panels shall be finished as
recommended by the panel manufacturer. Secure extruded vinyl edging in
place at all cut edges of all panel cut-outs to prevent abrasion of
cables. Where the space below the floor is a plenum, close cutouts for
conduit and similar penetrations using self-extinguishing sponge rubber.
3.1.6 Resilient Base
Provide base at vertical wall intersections. Cracks and voids in walls and
other vertical surfaces to receive base shall be filled with an approved
filler. Apply the base after the floor system has been completely
installed with adhesive, in accordance with the base manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1.7 Fascia Plates
Cover exposed floor ends and exposed openings of ramps and stairs with
steel closures.
3.1.8 Repair of Zinc Coating
Repair zinc coating that has been damaged, and cut edges of zinc-coated
components and accessories, by the application of a galvanizing repair
paint conforming to ASTM A 780/A 780M. Areas to be repaired shall be
thoroughly cleaned prior to application of the paint.
3.2 FIELD TESTS
Submit certified copies of test reports from an approved testing
laboratory, attesting that the proposed floor system components meet the
performance requirements specified.
3.2.1 Acceptance Tests
Conduct acceptance tests after installation of floor system. Make at least
one test for each 400 square feet of floor area. Conduct tests in presence
of Contracting Officer and representatives of manufacturer and installer.
3.2.2 Electrical Resistance
Conduct testing of electrical resistance, in the completed installation, in
the presence of the Contracting Officer in accordance with NFPA 99,
modified by placing one electrode on the center of the panel surface and
connecting the other electrode to the metal flooring support. Take
measurements at five or more locations. Each measurement shall be the
average of five readings of 15 seconds duration at each location. During
the tests, relative humidity shall be 45 to 55 percent and temperature set
at 69 to 75 degrees F. Select panels used in the testing at random and
include two panels most distant from the ground connection. Measure
electrical resistance with instruments that are accurate within 2 percent
and that have been calibrated within 60 days prior to the performance of
the resistance tests. The metal-to-metal resistance from panel to
supporting pedestal shall not exceed 10 ohms. The resistance between the
SECTION 09 69 13 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
wearing surface of the floor covering and the ground connection, as
measured on the completed installation, shall be in accordance with
paragraph FLOOR COVERING.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.3.1 Cleaning
Free all debris from the space below the completed floor. Broom clean
completely below floor.Before any traffic or other work on the completed
raised floor is started, clean the completed floor in accordance with the
floor covering manufacturer's instructions. Do not permit seepage of
cleaner between individual panels. Cleaning of ferrous surfaces shall
conform to FS TT-C-490.
3.3.2 Protection
Protect traffic areas of raised floor systems with a covering of building
paper, fiberboard, or other suitable material to prevent damage to the
surface. Cover cutouts with material of sufficient strength to support the
loads to be encountered. Place plywood or similar material on the floor to
serve as runways for installation of heavy equipment not in excess of
design load capacity. Maintain protection until the raised floor system
is accepted.
3.3.3 Surplus Material Removal
Clean surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of the
work. Remove all installation equipment, surplus materials, and rubbish
from the work site.
3.4 FIRE SAFETY
Install an automatic detection system below the raised floor meeting the
requirements of NFPA 75 paragraph 5-2.1 to sound an audible and visual
alarm. Air space below the raised floor shall be subdivided into areas not
exceeding 10,000 square feet by tight, noncombustible bulkheads. Seal all
penetrations for piping and cables to maintain bulkhead properties.
3.5 SEISMIC SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING
Perform special inspections and testing for seismic-resisting systems and
components in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and Section 01 45 35 SPECIAL
INSPECTION FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS.
3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Submit maintenance instructions for proper care of the floor panel
surface. When conductive flooring is specified, also submit maintenance
instructions to identify special cleaning and maintenance requirements to
maintain "conductivity" properties of the panel finish.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 69 13 Page 11
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 09 72 00
WALL COVERINGS
08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 1308 (2002; R 2007) Effect of Household
Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic
Finishes
ASTM D 751 (2006) Coated Fabrics
ASTM E 84 (2010) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
CHEMICAL FABRICS & FILM ASSOCIATION (CFFA)
CFFA-W-101-D (2002) Vinyl Coated Fabric Wallcovering
GREENGUARD ENVIRONMENTAL INSTITUTE (GEI)
GEI Greenguard Standards for Low Emitting
Products
GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)
GA 214 (2007) Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board
Finish
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
ICC IBC (2009; Errata First Printing)
International Building Code
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 265 (2007) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for
Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution
of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels
and Walls
NFPA 286 (2006) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for
Evaluating Contribution of Wall and
Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth
SECTION 09 72 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)
SCS Scientific Certification Systems
(SCS)Indoor Advantage
SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD)
SCAQMD Rule 1168 (1989; R 2005) Adhesive and Sealant
Applications
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS CCC-W-408 (Rev C) Wallcovering, Vinyl Coated
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Wall Coverings and Accessories; G
Primer and Adhesive
Wall Covering
Certification
SD-04 Samples
Wall Coverings and Accessories;
Wall Coverings;
SD-07 Certificates
Wall Coverings and Accessories
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Wall Coverings and Accessories
Wall Covering;
1.3 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CERTIFICATION
Product shall be third party certified by GEI Greenguard Indoor Air Quality
Certified, SCS Scientific Certification Systems Indoor Advantage or equal.
Certification shall be performed annually and shall be current.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver the material to the site in manufacturer's original wrappings and
packages and clearly label with the manufacturer's name, brand name,
pattern and color name and number, dye lot number, size, and other related
information. Store in a safe, dry, clean, and well-ventilated area at
temperatures not less than 50 degrees F and within a relative humidity
range of 30 to 60 percent. Store wall covering material in a flat position
and protected from damage, soiling, and moisture. Do not open containers
until needed for installation, unless verification inspection is required.
SECTION 09 72 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Comply with wall covering manufacturer's printed installation instructions
for minimum temperature of area to receive requirements for conditioning
adhesive and wall covering. Provide a minimum 50 degrees F area
temperature, 72 hours prior to installation, during installation, and until
the adhesive dries. Observe ventilation and safety procedures.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
extend beyond a one-year period.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide one linear foot of full-width wall covering of each pattern and
color for each 100 linear feet of wall covering installed. Provide the
same manufacturer, type, pattern, color, and lot number of extra stock as
the installed wall covering. Provide full rolls, packed for storage and
marked with content, manufacturer's name, pattern and color name and number
and dye lot number. Leave extra stock at the site at a location as
directed by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL COVERINGS
Provide Wall coverings and accessories material designed specifically for
the specified use. Furnish wall covering and borders with a mercury,
cadmium, lead, and chromium free base. Protect wall coverings with
bactericides and mildew inhibitors against microbiological and mildew
growth.
Provide a medium-duty type wall covering, finish as specified, conforming
to FS CCC-W-408, Type II, and the following modifications:
Supporting material for wall covering may be mildew-resistant treated
at the option of the wall covering manufacturer.
Provide the following physical properties:
REQUIREMENT TEST METHOD VALUE
Coating weight, CFFA-W-101-D, Not less than
exclusive of fabric Test 5041 240 gram 7 ounces
backing per square
meter yard
Adhesion of coating ASTM D 751 Not less than
to fabric backing 13 newton 3 pounds
pull per 25mm inch
of width
Provide a heavy duty type wall covering, finish as specified, conforming to
FS CCC-W-408, Type III, and the following modifications:
Supporting material for wall covering may be mildew-resistant treated
at the option of the wall covering manufacturer.
SECTION 09 72 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Provide the following physical properties:
REQUIREMENT TEST METHOD VALUE
Coating weight, CFFA-W-101-D, Not less than
exclusive of fabric Test 5041 407 gram 12 ounces
backing per square
meter yard
Adhesion of coating ASTM D 751 Not less than
to fabric backing 13 newton 3 pounds
pull per 25mm inch
of width
Provide a stain-resistant wall covering of medium duty type, finish as
specified, with a polyvinylfluoride film top coating, conforming to
FS CCC-W-408, Type II, and the following modifications:
Supporting material for wall covering may be mildew-resistant treated
at the option of the wall covering manufacturer.
Use a clear polyvinylfluoride film, not less than 0.13mm 0.005-inch
thick as a top coating.
Provide the following physical properties:
REQUIREMENT TEST METHOD VALUE
Coating weight, CFFA-W-101-D, Not less than
exclusive of fabric Test 5041 240 gram 7 ounces
backing per square
meter yard
Adhesion of coating ASTM D 751 Not less than
to fabric backing 13 newton 3 pounds
pull per 25mm inch
of width
Stain-resistance, ASTM D 1308 No perceptible
covered spot test, staining or
24-hour exposure, using bleaching of coat-
the household chemical ing; stains
reagents and staining readily removed
agents specified in with solvent or
ASTM D 1308 and the cleaning agent
following:
ballpoint pen ink
lipstick
nicotine
shoe polish
stamp-pad ink
rubber scuff marks
crayon
merthiolate
Match color and grain of wall covering of the sample approved. Provide a
53 to 54 inch width wall covering.
SECTION 09 72 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.1 Textile Wall covering Type A
Provide textile wall covering with a woven fabric with paper or acrylic
backing of colorfast, stain, and soil resistant. Test in accordance with
NFPA 286 or have a Class A flame spread rating of 0-25 and smoke
development rating of 0-450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Meet
or exceed the following for textile wall covering :
a. Face fiber content: 65% Polyolefin, 35% Post-Consumer Recycled
Polyester; 54% Polyolefin, 46% Polyethylene
b. Weave: Plain
c. Total weight: 9.9 and 14.8 ounces/square yard
d. Width: 54 inch
2.2 PRIMER AND ADHESIVE
Provide a type primer and adhesive recommended by the wall covering
manufacturer, containing a non-mercury based mildewcide, and complying with
local indoor air quality standards. VOC content shall be less than the
current VOC content limits of SCAQMD Rule 1168. Primer shall permit
removal of the wall covering and protect the wall surface during removal.
Do not damage gypsum wallboard facing paper during removal of wall
covering. Provide a strippable type adhesive. When substrate color
variations show through vinyl wall covering, provide a white pigmented
primer as recommended by the wall covering manufacturer used to conceal the
variations. Provide a recommended type adhesive to install corner guards
and wainscot cap by the manufacturer of the corner guards and wainscot cap.
2.3 COLOR, TEXTURE, AND PATTERN
Provide color as indicated on the drawings. Color listed is not intended
to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Inspect all areas and conditions under which wall coverings are to be
installed. Notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, of any conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the installation. Work
will proceed only when conditions have been corrected and accepted by the
installer.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
Do not apply wall covering to surfaces that are rough, that contain stains
which will bleed through the wall covering, or that are otherwise
unsuitable for proper installation. Fill cracks and holes; sand rough
spots smooth. Finish walls to receive presentation dry erase wall covering
to a Level 4 gypsum wallboard finish in accordance with GA 214 unless Level
5 is recommended by the wall covering manufacturer. Thoroughly dry
surfaces at least 30 days prior to installation of vinyl wall covering.
Provide interior surfaces of new and existing gypsum wallboard with a wall
covering primer in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions. As required, use white primer when substrate color
SECTION 09 72 00 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
variations are visible through thin or light color wall covering. Seal
interior surfaces of exterior masonry walls to prevent moisture
penetration, then prime with a wall covering primer in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide masonry walls with flush
joints. Test moisture content of plaster, concrete, and masonry with an
electric moisture meter of a maximum five percent reading. Apply a thin
coat of joint compound or cement plaster, as recommended by the wall
covering manufacturer, to the concrete and masonry walls as a substrate
preparation. To promote adequate adhesion of wall lining over masonry
walls, prime the walls as recommended by the wall lining manufacturer.
Prime the surfaces of walls as required by the manufacturer's printed
instructions to permit ultimate removal of wall covering from the wall
surfaces. Allow primer to completely dry before adhesive application.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Wall Covering
Install wall covering in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
installation instructions. Remove glue and adhesive spillage from wall
covering face and seams with a remover recommended by the manufacturer.
After the installation is complete, vacuum the fabric with a ceiling to
floor motion. Upon completion of presentation dry erase wall covering
installation, clean the wall covering surface as recommended by the
manufacturer prior to first use. When frame and tray are required for
presentation dry erase wall covering, install them in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.3.1.1 Textile Wall Covering
When textile wall coverings are specified to comply with NFPA 265 or ICC IBC
(Section 803.5.1 Textile Wall Coverings) testing, install the wall
covering in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation
instructions for compliance with the testing using the same product
mounting system, including adhesive.
3.3.2 Corner Guards and Wainscot Cap
Install corner guards where shown on drawings sheet and in accordance with
the manufacturer's printed instructions. Run corner guards from top of
base to ceiling in a continuous length.
3.4 CLEAN-UP
Upon completion of the work, clean wall covering free of dirt, soiling,
stain, or residual film. Remove and clean surplus materials, rubbish, and
debris resulting from the wall covering installation.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 72 00 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)
ACGIH 0100Doc (2005) Documentation of the Threshold
Limit Values and Biological Exposure
Indices
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D 2092 (1995; R 2001e1) Standard Guide for
Preparation of Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Steel Surfaces for Painting
ASTM D 235 (2002; R 2008) Mineral Spirits (Petroleum
Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent)
ASTM D 4263 (1983; R 2005) Indicating Moisture in
Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
ASTM D 4444 (2008) Use and Calibration of Hand-Held
Moisture Meters
ASTM D 523 (2008) Standard Test Method for Specular
Gloss
ASTM F 1869 (2004) Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission
Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
Calcium Chloride
MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)
MPI 10 (Oct 2009) Exterior Latex, Flat, MPI Gloss
Level 1
MPI 107 (Oct 2009) Rust Inhibitive Primer
(Water-Based)
MPI 11 (Oct 2009) Exterior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI
Gloss Level 5
MPI 134 (Oct 2009) Galvanized Primer (Waterbased)
MPI 138 (Oct 2009) Interior High Performance
Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2
MPI 139 (Oct 2009) Interior High Performance
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3
MPI 141 (Oct 2009) Interior High Performance Latex
MPI Gloss Level 5
MPI 161 (Oct 2009) Exterior W.B. Light Industrial
Coating, MPI Gloss Level 3
MPI 163 (Oct 2009) Exterior W.B. Light Industrial
Coating, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5
MPI 23 (Oct 2009) Surface Tolerant Metal Primer
MPI 26 (Oct 2009) Cementitious Galvanized Metal
Primer
MPI 4 (Oct 2009) Interior/Exterior Latex Block
Filler
MPI 42 (Oct 2009) Latex Stucco and Masonry
Textured Coating
MPI 44 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level
2
MPI 50 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex Primer Sealer
MPI 52 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level
3
MPI 57 (Oct 2009) Interior Oil Modified Urethane
Clear Satin
MPI 79 (Oct 2009) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal
Primer
MPI 8 (Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd, Flat, MPI Gloss
Level I
MPI 90 (Oct 2009) Interior Wood Stain,
Semi-Transparent
MPI 94 (Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI
Gloss Level 5
MPI 95 (Oct 2009) Quick Drying Primer for Aluminum
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC PA 1 (2000; E 2004) Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting
SSPC PA Guide 3 (1982; E 1995) A Guide to Safety in Paint
Application
SSPC QP 1 (1998; E 2004) Standard Procedure for
Evaluating Painting Contractors (Field
Application to Complex Industrial
Structures)
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SSPC SP 1 (1982; E 2004) Solvent Cleaning
SSPC SP 10 (2007) Near-White Blast Cleaning
SSPC SP 12 (2002) Surface Preparation and Cleaning of
Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating
SSPC SP 2 (1982; E 2004) Hand Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 3 (2004; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 6 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning
SSPC SP 7 (2007) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
SSPC VIS 1 (2002; E 2004) Guide and Reference
Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by
Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning
SSPC VIS 3 (2004) Visual Standard for Power-and
Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel
SSPC VIS 4 (1998; E 2000; E 2004) Guide and Reference
Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by
Waterjetting
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1 (2008) Safety and Health Requirements
Manual
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL-STD-101 (Rev B) Color Code for Pipelines & for
Compressed Gas Cylinders
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA Method 24 (2000) Determination of Volatile Matter
Content, Water Content, Density, Volume
Solids, and Weight Solids of Surface
Coatings
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FED-STD-313 (Rev D; Am 1) Material Safety Data,
Transportation Data and Disposal Data for
Hazardous Materials Furnished to
Government Activities
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.1000 Air Contaminants
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
The current MPI, "Approved Product List" which lists paint by brand, label,
product name and product code as of the date of contract award, will be
used to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this
specification. The Contractor may choose to use a subsequent MPI "Approved
Product List", however, only one list may be used for the entire contract
and each coating system is to be from a single manufacturer. All coats on
a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer. No variation
from the MPI Approved Products List is acceptable.
Samples of specified materials may be taken and tested for compliance with
specification requirements.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Piping identification
Submit color stencil codes
SD-03 Product Data
Coating
Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheets
Sealant
SD-04 Samples
Color;
Submit manufacturer's samples of paint colors. Cross reference
color samples to color scheme as indicated.
SD-07 Certificates
Applicator's qualifications
Qualification Testing laboratory for coatings;
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Application instructions
Mixing
Detailed mixing instructions, minimum and maximum application
temperature and humidity, potlife, and curing and drying times
between coats.
Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets
Submit manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets for coatings,
solvents, and other potentially hazardous materials, as defined in
FED-STD-313.
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Coatings;
Preprinted cleaning and maintenance instructions for all coating
systems shall be provided.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
Materials; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
LEED documentation relative to low emitting materials credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
1.3 APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
1.3.1 Contractor Qualification
Submit the name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address
of the contractor that will be performing all surface preparation and
coating application. Submit evidence that key personnel have successfully
performed surface preparation and application of coatings on a minimum of
three similar projects within the past three years. List information by
individual and include the following:
a. Name of individual and proposed position for this work.
b. Information about each previous assignment including:
Position or responsibility
Employer (if other than the Contractor)
Name of facility owner
Mailing address, telephone number, and telex number (if non-US) of
facility owner
Name of individual in facility owner's organization who can be
contacted as a reference
Location, size and description of structure
Dates work was carried out
Description of work carried out on structure
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.3.2 SSPC QP 1 Certification
All contractors and subcontractors that perform surface preparation or
coating application shall be certified by the Society for Protective
Coatings (formerly Steel Structures Painting Council) (SSPC) to the
requirements of SSPC QP 1 prior to contract award, and shall remain
certified while accomplishing any surface preparation or coating
application. The painting contractors and painting subcontractors must
remain so certified for the duration of the project. If a contractor's or
subcontractor's certification expires, the firm will not be allowed to
perform any work until the certification is reissued. Requests for
extension of time for any delay to the completion of the project due to an
inactive certification will not be considered and liquidated damages will
apply. Notify the Contracting Officer of any change in contractor
certification status.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Field Samples and Tests
The Contracting Officer may choose up to two coatings that have been
delivered to the site to be tested at no cost to the Government. Take
samples of each chosen product as specified in the paragraph "Sampling
Procedures." Test each chosen product as specified in the paragraph
"Testing Procedure." Products which do not conform, shall be removed from
the job site and replaced with new products that conform to the referenced
specification. Testing of replacement products that failed initial testing
shall be at no cost to the Government.
1.4.1.1 Sampling Procedure
The Contracting Officer will select paint at random from the products that
have been delivered to the job site for sample testing. The Contractor
shall provide one quart samples of the selected paint materials. The
samples shall be taken in the presence of the Contracting Officer, and
labeled, identifying each sample. Provide labels in accordance with the
paragraph "Packaging, Labeling, and Storage" of this specification.
1.4.1.2 Testing Procedure
Provide Batch Quality Conformance Testing for specified products, as
defined by and performed by MPI. As an alternative to Batch Quality
Conformance Testing, the Contractor may provide Qualification Testing for
specified products above to the appropriate MPI product specification,
using the third-party laboratory approved under the paragraph
"Qualification Testing" laboratory for coatings. The qualification testing
lab report shall include the backup data and summary of the test results.
The summary shall list all of the reference specification requirements and
the result of each test. The summary shall clearly indicate whether the
tested paint meets each test requirement. Note that Qualification Testing
may take 4 to 6 weeks to perform, due to the extent of testing required.
Submit name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address of
the independent third party laboratory selected to perform testing of
coating samples for compliance with specification requirements. Submit
documentation that laboratory is regularly engaged in testing of paint
samples for conformance with specifications, and that employees performing
testing are qualified. If the Contractor chooses MPI to perform the Batch
Quality Conformance testing, the above submittal information is not
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
required, only a letter is required from the Contractor stating that MPI
will perform the testing.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1 Environmental Protection
In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental
protection, provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of
the local Air Pollution Control District and regional jurisdiction.
Notify Contracting Officer of any paint specified herein which fails to
conform.
1.5.2 Lead Content
Do not use coatings having a lead content over 0.06 percent by weight of
nonvolatile content.
1.5.3 Chromate Content
Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate.
1.5.4 Asbestos Content
Materials shall not contain asbestos.
1.5.5 Mercury Content
Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.
1.5.6 Silica
Abrasive blast media shall not contain free crystalline silica.
1.5.7 Human Carcinogens
Materials shall not contain ACGIH 0100Doc and ACGIH 0100Doc confirmed human
carcinogens (A1) or suspected human carcinogens (A2).
1.6 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORAGE
Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract
specification number, designation name, formula or specification number,
batch number, color, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's
formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any warnings and
special precautions, and name and address of manufacturer. Pigmented
paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons. Paints
and thinners shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written
directions, and as a minimum, stored off the ground, under cover, with
sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors, and at
temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F.
1.7 SAFETY AND HEALTH
Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance
with the following:
Work shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and local laws and
regulations, and with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including the Activity
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Hazard Analysis as specified in Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS and in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1. The Activity Hazard Analysis
shall include analyses of the potential impact of painting operations on
painting personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the work zone.
1.7.1 Safety Methods Used During Coating Application
Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA Guide 3.
1.7.2 Toxic Materials
To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials, conform to the
most stringent guidance of:
a. The applicable manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
or local regulation.
b. 29 CFR 1910.1000.
c. ACGIH 0100Doc, threshold limit values.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Comply, at minimum, with manufacturer recommendations for space ventilation
during and after installation. Isolate area of application from rest of
building when applying high-emission paints or coatings.
1.8.1 Coatings
Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:
a. Less than 5 degrees F above dew point;
b. Below 50 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless specifically
pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product
manufacturer. Under no circumstances shall application conditions
exceed manufacturer recommendations.
1.9 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.9.1 Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Paint and
coating materials may be locally available.
1.10 COLOR SELECTION
Colors of finish coats shall be as indicated or specified on the Drawings.
Manufacturers' names and color identification are used for the purpose of
color identification only. Named products are acceptable for use only if
they conform to specified requirements. Products of other manufacturers
are acceptable if the colors approximate colors indicated and the product
conforms to specified requirements.
Tint each coat progressively darker to enable confirmation of the number of
coats.
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Color, texture, and pattern of wall coating systems shall be as indicated
on the Drawings.
1.11 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED
1.11.1 Painting Included
Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following
unless indicated otherwise.
a. Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles
readily detachable by removal of fasteners, such as screws and
bolts.
b. New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color
coding and factory finished surfaces that are damaged during
performance of the work.
c. Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of
the work.
1.11.1.1 Exterior Painting
Includes new surfaces of the building and appurtenances. Also included are
existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations.
1.11.1.2 Interior Painting
Includes new surfaces of the building and appurtenances as indicated and
existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations. Where a space
or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items, unless
indicated otherwise.
a. Exposed columns, girders, beams, joists, and metal deck; and
b. Other contiguous surfaces.
1.11.2 Painting Excluded
Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise.
a. Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards, fixed
ductwork, machinery, and equipment fixed in place.
b. Surfaces in concealed spaces. Concealed spaces are defined as
enclosed spaces above suspended ceilings, furred spaces, attic
spaces, crawl spaces, elevator shafts and chases.
c. Steel to be embedded in concrete.
d. Copper, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, and lead except existing
coated surfaces.
e. Hardware, fittings, and other factory finished items.
1.11.3 Mechanical and Electrical Painting
Includes field coating of interior and exterior new surfaces.
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
a. Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the
following items unless indicated otherwise.
(1) Exposed piping, conduit, and ductwork;
(2) Supports, hangers, air grilles, and registers;
(3) Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings.
b. Do not paint the following, unless indicated otherwise:
(1) New zinc-coated, aluminum, and copper surfaces under
insulation
(2) New aluminum jacket on piping
(3) New interior ferrous piping under insulation.
1.11.3.1 Fire Extinguishing Sprinkler Systems
Clean, pretreat, prime, and paint new fire extinguishing sprinkler systems
including valves, piping, conduit, hangers, supports, miscellaneous
metalwork, and accessories. Apply coatings to clean, dry surfaces, using
clean brushes. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, and loose
mill scale. Immediately after cleaning, provide the metal surfaces with
one coat primer per schedules. Shield sprinkler heads with protective
covering while painting is in progress. Upon completion of painting,
remove protective covering from sprinkler heads. Remove sprinkler heads
which have been painted and replace with new sprinkler heads. Provide
primed surfaces with the following:
a. Piping in Unfinished Areas: Provide primed surfaces with one coat
of red alkyd gloss enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.0 mil in attic spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl
spaces, pipe chases, mechanical equipment room, and spaces where
walls or ceiling are not painted or not constructed of a
prefinished material. In lieu of red enamel finish coat, provide
piping with 2 inch wide red enamel bands or self-adhering red
plastic bands spaced at maximum of 20 foot intervals.
b. Piping in Finished Areas: Provide primed surfaces with two coats
of paint to match adjacent surfaces, except provide valves and
operating accessories with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel
applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Provide
piping with 2 inch wide red enamel bands or self-adhering red
plastic bands spaced at maximum of 20 foot intervals throughout
the piping systems.
1.11.4 Definitions and Abbreviations
1.11.4.1 Qualification Testing
Qualification testing is the performance of all test requirements listed in
the product specification. This testing is accomplished by MPI to qualify
each product for the MPI Approved Product List, and may also be
accomplished by Contractor's third party testing lab if an alternative to
Batch Quality Conformance Testing by MPI is desired.
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.11.4.2 Batch Quality Conformance Testing
Batch quality conformance testing determines that the product provided is
the same as the product qualified to the appropriate product
specification. This testing shall only be accomplished by MPI testing lab.
1.11.4.3 Coating
A film or thin layer applied to a base material called a substrate. A
coating may be a metal, alloy, paint, or solid/liquid suspensions on
various substrates (metals, plastics, wood, paper, leather, cloth, etc.).
They may be applied by electrolysis, vapor deposition, vacuum, or
mechanical means such as brushing, spraying, calendaring, and roller
coating. A coating may be applied for aesthetic or protective purposes or
both. The term "coating" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels,
stains, varnishes, sealers, epoxies, and other coatings, whether used as
primer, intermediate, or finish coat. The terms paint and coating are used
interchangeably.
1.11.4.4 DFT or dft
Dry film thickness, the film thickness of the fully cured, dry paint or
coating.
1.11.4.5 DSD
Degree of Surface Degradation, the MPI system of defining degree of surface
degradation. Five (5) levels are generically defined under the Assessment
sections in the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual.
1.11.4.6 EPP
Environmentally Preferred Products, a standard for determining
environmental preferability in support of Executive Order 13101.
1.11.4.7 EXT
MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system.
1.11.4.8 INT
MPI short term designation for an interior coating system.
1.11.4.9 micron / microns
The metric measurement for 0.001 mm or one/one-thousandth of a millimeter.
1.11.4.10 mil / mils
The English measurement for 0.001 in or one/one-thousandth of an inch,
equal to 25.4 microns or 0.0254 mm.
1.11.4.11 mm
The metric measurement for millimeter, 0.001 meter or one/one-thousandth of
a meter.
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 11
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.11.4.12 MPI Gloss Levels
MPI system of defining gloss. Seven (7) gloss levels (G1 to G7) are
generically defined under the Evaluation sections of the MPI Manuals.
Traditionally, Flat refers to G1/G2, Eggshell refers to G3, Semigloss
refers to G5, and Gloss refers to G6.
Gloss levels are defined by MPI as follows:
Gloss Description Units Units
Level @ 60 degrees @ 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat 0 to 5 10 max
G2 Velvet 0 to 10 10 to 35
G3 Eggshell 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin 20 to 35 35 min
G5 Semi-Gloss 35 to 70
G6 Gloss 70 to 85
G7 High Gloss
Gloss is tested in accordance with ASTM D 523. Historically, the
Government has used Flat (G1 / G2), Eggshell (G3), Semi-Gloss (G5), and
Gloss (G6).
1.11.4.13 MPI System Number
The MPI coating system number in each Division found in either the MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the Maintenance Repainting
Manual and defined as an exterior (EXT/REX) or interior system (INT/RIN).
The Division number follows the CSI Master Format.
1.11.4.14 Paint
See Coating definition.
1.11.4.15 REX
MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system used in
repainting projects or over existing coating systems.
1.11.4.16 RIN
MPI short term designation for an interior coating system used in
repainting projects or over existing coating systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3.
Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for specified coatings and
solvents. All consolidated latex paints shall contain a minimum of 100
percent post-consumer recycled content. Comply with applicable regulations
regarding toxic and hazardous materials.
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 12
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or
otherwise protect, hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces,
radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures, public and private property,
and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to
be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in the trades
involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces contaminated by
coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged items.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, and other foreign
matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for
each substrate before application of paint or surface treatments. Oil and
grease shall be removed prior to mechanical cleaning. Cleaning shall be
programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly
painted surfaces. Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in
contact with surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paints, shall be
spot-primed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of
preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for the
adjacent areas.
3.3 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
3.3.1 New Ferrous Surfaces
a. Ferrous Surfaces including Shop-coated Surfaces and Small Areas
That Contain Rust, Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances:
Solvent clean or detergent wash in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to
remove oil and grease. Where shop coat is missing or damaged,
clean according to SSPC SP 2. Brush-off blast remaining surface
in accordance with SSPC SP 7; Water jetting to SSPC SP 12 WJ-4 may
be used to remove loose coating and other loose materials. Use
inhibitor as recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent
premature rusting. Shop-coated ferrous surfaces shall be
protected from corrosion by treating and touching up corroded
areas immediately upon detection.
b. Surfaces With More Than 20 Percent Rust, Mill Scale, and Other
Foreign Substances: Clean entire surface in accordance with
SSPC SP 6/SSPC SP 12 WJ-3.
3.3.2 Final Ferrous Surface Condition:
For tool cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 2 and
SSPC SP 3. As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to
photographs in SSPC VIS 3.
For abrasive blast cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in
SSPC SP 7, SSPC SP 6, and SSPC SP 10. As a visual reference, cleaned
surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 1.
For waterjet cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 12.
As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in
SSPC VIS 4.
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 13
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.3.3 Galvanized Surfaces
a. New Galvanized Surfaces With Only Dirt and Zinc Oxidation
Products: Clean with solvent, or non-alkaline detergent solution
in accordance with SSPC SP 1. If the galvanized metal has been
passivated or stabilized, the coating shall be completely removed
by brush-off abrasive blast. New galvanized steel to be coated
shall not be "passivated" or "stabilized" If the absence of
hexavalent stain inhibitors is not documented, test as described
in ASTM D 2092, Appendix X2, and remove by one of the methods
described therein.
b. Galvanized with Slight Coating Deterioration or with Little or No
Rusting: Water jetting to SSPC SP 12 WJ3 to remove loose coating
from surfaces with less than 20 percent coating deterioration and
no blistering, peeling, or cracking. Use inhibitor as recommended
by the coating manufacturer to prevent rusting.
3.3.4 Non-Ferrous Metallic Surfaces
Aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead, copper, and other nonferrous metal
surfaces.
a. Surface Cleaning: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and
wash with mild non-alkaline detergent to remove dirt and water
soluble contaminants.
3.3.5 Terne-Coated Metal Surfaces
Solvent clean surfaces with mineral spirits, ASTM D 235. Wipe dry with
clean, dry cloths.
3.3.6 Existing Surfaces with a Bituminous or Mastic-Type Coating
Remove chalk, mildew, and other loose material by washing with a solution
of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, one quart 5
percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water.
3.4 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE
3.4.1 Concrete and Masonry
a. Curing: Concrete, stucco and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to
cure at least 30 days before painting, except concrete slab on
grade, which shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting.
b. Surface Cleaning: Remove the following deleterious substances.
(1) Dirt, Chalking, Grease, and Oil: Wash new surfaces with a
solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cuphousehold
detergent, and 4 quarts of warm water. Then rinse thoroughly
with fresh water. For large areas, water blasting may be used.
(2) Fungus and Mold: Wash new surfaces with a solution composed
of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, 1
quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm
water. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.
(3) Paint and Loose Particles: Remove by wire brushing.
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 14
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
(4) Efflorescence: Remove by scraping or wire brushing followed
by washing with a 5 to 10 percent by weight aqueous solution of
hydrochloric (muriatic) acid. Do not allow acid to remain on the
surface for more than five minutes before rinsing with fresh
water. Do not acid clean more than 4 square feet of surface, per
workman, at one time.
c. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects: Repair or fill mortar joints
and minor defects, including but not limited to spalls, in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and prior to
coating application.
d. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp
surfaces, but not to surfaces with droplets of water. Do not
apply epoxies to damp vertical surfaces as determined by
ASTM D 4263 or horizontal surfaces that exceed 3 lbs of moisture
per 1000 square feet in 24 hours as determined by ASTM F 1869. In
all cases follow manufacturers recommendations. Allow surfaces to
cure a minimum of 30 days before painting.
3.4.2 Gypsum Board, Plaster, and Stucco
a. Surface Cleaning: Plaster and stucco shall be clean and free from
loose matter; gypsum board shall be dry. Remove loose dirt and
dust by brushing with a soft brush, rubbing with a dry cloth, or
vacuum-cleaning prior to application of the first coat material.
A damp cloth or sponge may be used if paint will be water-based.
b. Repair of Minor Defects: Prior to painting, repair joints,
cracks, holes, surface irregularities, and other minor defects
with patching plaster or spackling compound and sand smooth.
c. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp
surfaces, but not surfaces with droplets of water. Do not apply
epoxies to damp surfaces as determined by ASTM D 4263. New
plaster to be coated shall have a maximum moisture content of 8
percent, when measured in accordance with ASTM D 4444, Method A,
unless otherwise authorized. In addition to moisture content
requirements, allow new plaster to age a minimum of 30 days before
preparation for painting.
3.5 PREPARATION OF WOOD AND PLYWOOD SURFACES
3.5.1 New Plywood and Wood Surfaces, Except Floors:
a. Wood surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign matter.
Surface Cleaning: Surfaces shall be free from dust and other
deleterious substances and in a condition approved by the
Contracting Officer prior to receiving paint or other finish. Do
not use water to clean uncoated wood.
b. Removal of Fungus and Mold: Wash existing coated surfaces with a
solution composed of 3 ounces (2/3 cup) trisodium phosphate, 1
ounce (1/3 cup) household detergent, 1 quart 5 percent sodium
hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water. Rinse
thoroughly with fresh water.
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 15
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
c. Moisture content of the wood shall not exceed 12 percent as
measured by a moisture meter in accordance with ASTM D 4444,
Method A, unless otherwise authorized.
d. Wood surfaces adjacent to surfaces to receive water-thinned paints
shall be primed and/or touched up before applying water-thinned
paints.
e. Cracks and Nailheads: Set and putty stop nailheads and putty
cracks after the prime coat has dried.
f. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects:
(1) Knots and Resinous Wood : Prior to application of coating,
cover knots and stains with two or more coats of 3-pound-cut
shellac varnish, plasticized with 5 ounces of castor oil per gallon.
Scrape away existing coatings from knotty areas, and sand before
treating. Prime before applying any putty over shellacked area.
(2) Open Joints and Other Openings: Fill with whiting putty,
linseed oil putty. Sand smooth after putty has dried.
(3) Checking: Where checking of the wood is present, sand the
surface, wipe and apply a coat of pigmented orange shellac. Allow
to dry before paint is applied.
3.6 APPLICATION
3.6.1 Coating Application
Painting practices shall comply with applicable federal, state and local
laws enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Apply
coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are
applicable to all substrates, except as modified herein.
At the time of application, paint shall show no signs of deterioration.
Uniform suspension of pigments shall be maintained during application.
Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint manufacturer, paint
may be applied by brush, roller, or spray. Use trigger operated spray
nozzles for water hoses. Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be
of a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be
coated. Wear protective clothing and respirators when applying oil-based
paints or using spray equipment with any paints.
Paints, except water-thinned types, shall be applied only to surfaces that
are completely free of moisture as determined by sight or touch.
Thoroughly work coating materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces.
Special attention shall be given to insure that all edges, corners,
crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equal to that of
adjacent painted surfaces.
Each coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform
thickness and free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pinholes or other
voids, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish.
Hiding shall be complete.
Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats. Interior areas
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 16
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
shall be broom clean and dust free before and during the application of
coating material.
Apply paint to new fire extinguishing sprinkler systems including valves,
piping, conduit, hangers, supports, miscellaneous metal work, and
accessories. Shield sprinkler heads with protective coverings while
painting is in progress. Remove sprinkler heads which have been painted
and replace with new sprinkler heads. For piping in unfinished spaces,
provide primed surfaces with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel to a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Unfinished spaces include attic
spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl spaces, pipe chases,
mechanical equipment room, and space where walls or ceiling are not painted
or not constructed of a prefinished material. For piping in finished
areas, provide prime surfaces with two coats of paint to match adjacent
surfaces, except provide valves and operating accessories with one coat of
red alkyd gloss enamel. Upon completion of painting, remove protective
covering from sprinkler heads.
a. Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the
coating manufacturer, to permit thorough drying, but not to
present topcoat adhesion problems. Provide each coat in specified
condition to receive next coat.
b. Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or
intermediate coats to dry more than 30 days, or longer than
recommended by manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats.
Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation if
primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than
recommended by manufacturers of subsequent coatings. Each coat
shall cover surface of preceding coat or surface completely, and
there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of
successive coats.
c. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs,
drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in colors.
d. Thermosetting Paints: Topcoats over thermosetting paints (epoxies
and urethanes) should be applied within the overcoating window
recommended by the manufacturer.
3.6.2 Mixing and Thinning of Paints
Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when
thinning is mandatory to suit surface, temperature, weather conditions,
application methods, or for the type of paint being used. Obtain written
permission from the Contracting Officer to use thinners. The written
permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use.
When thinning is allowed, paints shall be thinned immediately prior to
application with not more than 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon. The
use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete
hiding, full film thickness, or required gloss. Thinning shall not cause
the paint to exceed limits on volatile organic compounds. Paints of
different manufacturers shall not be mixed.
3.6.3 Two-Component Systems
Two-component systems shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Any thinning of the first coat to ensure proper penetration
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 17
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
and sealing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of
substrate.
3.6.4 Coating Systems
a. Systems by Substrates: Apply coatings that conform to the
respective specifications listed in the following Tables:
Table
Division 3. Exterior Concrete Paint Table
Division 5. Exterior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table
Division 9: Exterior Stucco Paint Table
Division 3. Interior Concrete Paint Table
Division 4. Interior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table
Division 5. Interior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table
Division 6. Interior Wood Paint Table
Division 9: Interior Plaster, Gypsum Board, Textured Surfaces
Paint Table
b. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers,
varnishes, enamels, undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum
dry film thickness of 1.5 mil each coat unless specified otherwise
in the Tables. Coating thickness where specified, refers to the
minimum dry film thickness.
c. Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise: Coat surfaces
which have not been specified, the same as surfaces having similar
conditions of exposure.
d. Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work,
Including New Patches In Existing Surfaces: Coat surfaces with
the following:
(1) One coat of primer.
(2) One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat.
(3) One topcoat to match adjacent surfaces.
3.7 COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL
Apply coatings of Tables in Division 5 for Exterior and Interior.
a. Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface
is cleaned, to surfaces that meet all specified surface
preparation requirements at time of application.
b. Inaccessible Surfaces: Prior to erection, use one coat of
specified primer on metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after
erection.
c. Shop-primed Surfaces: Touch up exposed substrates and damaged
coatings to protect from rusting prior to applying field primer.
d. Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane: Apply MPI 101,
1.5 mils DFT immediately prior to application of epoxy or urethane
coatings.
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 18
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
e. Pipes and Tubing: The semitransparent film applied to some pipes
and tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat, but
shall be overcoated with the specified ferrous-metal primer prior
to application of finish coats.
f. Exposed Nails, Screws, Fasteners, and Miscellaneous Ferrous
Surfaces. On surfaces to be coated with water thinned coatings,
spot prime exposed nails and other ferrous metal with latex primer
MPI 107.
3.8 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES
Apply coatings of Tables in Division 3, 4 and 9 for Exterior and Interior.
3.9 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
Piping Identification, Including Surfaces In Concealed Spaces: Provide in
accordance with MIL-STD-101. Place stenciling in clearly visible
locations. On piping not covered by MIL-STD-101, stencil approved names or
code letters, in letters a minimum of 1/2 inch high for piping and a
minimum of 2 inches high elsewhere. Stencil arrow-shaped markings on
piping to indicate direction of flow using black stencil paint.
3.10 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
In addition to meeting previously specified requirements, demonstrate
mobility of moving components, including swinging and sliding doors,
cabinets, and windows with operable sash, for inspection by the Contracting
Officer. Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing and drying
times of coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing for final payment.
3.11 WASTE MANAGEMENT
As specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows. Do not use
kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water based paints.
Properly dispose of paints or solvents in designated containers. Close and
seal partially used containers of paint to maintain quality as necessary
for reuse. Store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate
temperature. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in
designated containers. Coordinate with manufacturer for take-back
program. Set aside scrap to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into
new product. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall
be sought after to reclaim the materials. Set aside extra paint for future
color matches or reuse by the Government. Where local options exist for
leftover paint recycling, collect all waste paint by type and provide for
delivery to recycling or collection facility for reuse by local
organizations.
3.12 PAINT TABLES
All DFT's are minimum values. Use only materials with a GPS green check
mark having a minimum MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E1 rating based on VOC
(EPA Method 24) content levels. Use only interior paints and coatings that
meet VOC requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit. Acceptable
products are listed in the MPI Green Approved Products List, available at
http://www.specifygreen.com/APL/ProductIdxByMPInum.asp.
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 19
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.12.1 EXTERIOR PAINT TABLES
DIVISION 3: EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAINT TABLE
A. New and uncoated existing concrete;
vertical surfaces, including undersides of balconies and soffits but
excluding tops of slabs:
1. Latex
New; MPI EXT 3.1A-G2 (Flat)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 10 MPI 10 MPI 10
System DFT: 3.5 mils
Primer as recommended by manufacturer. Topcoat: Coating to match adjacent
surfaces.
DIVISION 5: EXTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES
A. New Steel that has been hand or power tool cleaned to SSPC SP 2 or
SSPC SP 3
1. Alkyd
New; MPI EXT 5.1Q-G5 (Semigloss)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 23 MPI 94 MPI 94
System DFT: 5.25 mils
B. New Steel that has been blast-cleaned to SSPC SP 6:
1. Alkyd
New; MPI EXT 5.1D-G5 (Semigloss)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 79 MPI 94 MPI 94
System DFT: 5.25 mils
EXTERIOR GALVANIZED SURFACES
C. New Galvanized surfaces:
1. MPI EXT 5.3A-G5 (Semigloss)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 26 MPI 11 MPI 11
System DFT: 4.5 mils
2. Waterborne Primer / Latex
MPI EXT 5.3H-G1 (Flat)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 134 MPI 10 MPI 10
System DFT: 4.5 mils
MPI EXT 5.3H-G5 (Semigloss)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 134 MPI 11 MPI 11
System DFT: 4.5 mils
EXTERIOR SURFACES, OTHER METALS (NON-FERROUS)
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 20
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
EXTERIOR SURFACES, OTHER METALS (NON-FERROUS)
D. Aluminum, aluminum alloy and other miscellaneous non-ferrous metal items
not otherwise specified except hot metal surfaces, roof surfaces, and new
prefinished equipment. Match surrounding finish:
1. Waterborne Light Industrial Coating
MPI EXT 5.4G-G3(Eggshell)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 95 MPI 161 MPI 161
System DFT: 5 mils
MPI EXT 5.4G-G5(Semigloss)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 95 MPI 163 MPI 163
System DFT: 5 mils
E. Surfaces adjacent to painted surfaces; Mechanical, Electrical, Fire
extinguishing sprinkler systems including valves, conduit, hangers,
supports, exposed copper piping, and miscellaneous metal items not
otherwise specified except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new prefinished
equipment. Match surrounding finish:
1. Alkyd
MPI EXT 5.1D-G1 (Flat)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 79 MPI 8 MPI 8
System DFT: 5.25 mils
MPI EXT 5.1D-G5 (Semigloss)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 79 MPI 94 MPI 94
System DFT: 5.25 mils
3.12.2 INTERIOR PAINT TABLES
DIVISION 3: INTERIOR CONCRETE PAINT TABLE
A. New Concrete, vertical surfaces, not specified otherwise:
1. Latex
New; MPI INT 3.1A-G2 (Flat)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 50 MPI 44 MPI 44
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 3.1A-G3 (Eggshell)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 50 MPI 52 MPI 52
System DFT: 4 mils
B. Concrete ceilings, uncoated:
1. Latex Aggregate
MPI INT 3.1N
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
N/A N/A MPI 42
System DFT: Per Manufacturer
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 21
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
DIVISION 3: INTERIOR CONCRETE PAINT TABLE
Texture - Fine. Surface preparation, number of
coats, and primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Topcoat: Coating to match adjacent surfaces.
DIVISION 4: INTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE
A. New Concrete masonry:
1. High Performance Architectural Latex
MPI INT 4.2D-G2 (Flat)
Filler Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 4 N/A MPI 138 MPI 138
System DFT: 11 mils
MPI INT 4.2D-G3 (Eggshell)
Filler Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 4 N/A MPI 139 MPI 139
System DFT: 11 mils
DIVISION 5: INTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
INTERIOR STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES
A. Metal, Mechanical, Electrical, Fire extinguishing sprinkler systems
including valves, conduit, hangers, supports, Surfaces adjacent to
painted surfaces (Match surrounding finish), and miscellaneous metal
items not otherwise specified except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new
prefinished equipment:
1. MPI INT 5.1R-G5 (Semigloss)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 79 MPI 141 MPI 141
System DFT: 5 mils
DIVISION 6: INTERIOR WOOD PAINT TABLE
B. New and Existing, previously finished or stained Wood Doors; Natural
Finish or Stained:
1. Stained, oil-modified polyurethane
New; MPI INT 6.3E-G4 / Existing; MPI RIN 6.3E-G4
Stain: Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 90 MPI 57 MPI 57 MPI 57
System DFT: 4 mils
Note: Sand between all coats per manufacturers recommendations.
DIVISION 9: INTERIOR, GYPSUM BOARD, TEXTURED SURFACES PAINT TABLE
A. New Wallboard not otherwise specified:
1. New; MPI INT 9.2A-G3 (Eggshell)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 50 MPI 52 MPI 52
System DFT: 4 mils
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 22
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
DIVISION 9: INTERIOR, GYPSUM BOARD, TEXTURED SURFACES PAINT TABLE
2. New; Dry Erase Paint (Eggshell)
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
Water Based Premium Satin Write Up h20
Stain Killing Enamel Paint Clear Finish
Primer
System DFT: 4 mils
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 90 00 Page 23
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 10 10 00
VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES
02/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B 221 (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM E 84 (2010) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The term visual display board when used herein includes presentation
boards, marker boards, tackboards, board cases, display track system and
horizontal sliding units. Visual display boards shall be from
manufacturer's standard product line.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Visual Display Board
Manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog cuts.
Manufacturer's installation instructions, and cleaning and
maintenance instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Aluminum;
Sections of frame, map rail, and chalktray, and two map hooks.
Porcelain Enamel;
Section showing porcelain enamel coating, steel, core material
and backing.
SECTION 10 10 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Materials;
Section of core material showing the lamination of colored cork,
natural cork, woven fabric, non-woven fabric, and vinyl wall
covering. Sample of hardwood and plastic laminate finish, and
glass type. Samples shall be minimum 4 by 4 inches and show range
of color.
SD-07 Certificates
Visual Display Board
Certificate of compliance signed by Contractor attesting that
visual display board conform to the requirements specified.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the building site in the manufacturer's original
unopened containers and store them in a clean dry area with temperature
maintained above 50 degrees F. Stack materials according to manufacturer's
recommendations. Visual display boards shall be allowed to acclimate to
the building temperature for 24 hours prior to installation.
1.5 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
extend beyond a one year period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Porcelain Enamel
Provide marker board writing surface composed of porcelain enamel fused to
a nominal 28 gauge thick steel, laminated to a minimum 1/4 inch thick core
material with a steel or foil backing sheet. Writing surface shall be
capable of supporting paper by means of magnets. Marker board surface for
display track system may be a powder paint dry erase surface adhered to a
nominal 18 gauge thick steel.
2.1.2 Cork
Cork shall be a continuous resilient sheet made from soft, clean,
granulated cork relatively free from hardback and dust and bonded with a
binder suitable for the purpose intended. The wearing surface shall be
free from streaks, spots, cracks or other imperfections that would impair
its usefulness or appearance. The material shall be seasoned, and a clean
cut made not less than 1/2 inch from the edge shall show no evidence of
soft sticky binder.
2.1.3 Woven Fabric
Provide plain weave fabric. Fiber content shall be 100 percent polyester.
Minimum total weight shall be 16 oz. plus or minus 0.5 oz. per lineal yard.
Fabric shall have a Class A flame spread rating of 0-50 and smoke
development rating of 0-450 in accordance with ASTM E 84.
SECTION 10 10 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.4 Aluminum
Aluminum frame extrusions shall be alloy 6063-T5 or 6063-T6, conform to
ASTM B 221, and be a minimum 0.06 inches thick. Exposed aluminum shall
have an anodized, satin finish. Straight, single lengths shall be used
wherever possible. Joints shall be kept to a minimum. Corners shall be
mitered and shall have a hairline closure.
2.1.5 Hardwood
Exposed hardwood for frames, cabinets, and cases shall be oak, walnut or
mahogany. Provide hardwood with a durable factory-applied stain and
lacquer finish of a type standard with the manufacturer.
2.2 PRESENTATION BOARD
The presentation board shall be a wall hung cabinet with lockable double
doors and shall not have a projection screen that pulls down over the
marker board writing surface in the cabinet interior. The doors shall be
attached to cabinet with piano hinges and have a catch or closure to keep
doors closed when not in use. The interior of the cabinet shall contain a
porcelain enamel markerboard writing surface with chalktray, a flip chart
that can be hung on an interior door panel, and fabric covered tacksurface
on the interior door panels. The cabinet shall be oak hardwood. The edge
detailing shall be rectilinear. Dry erase markings shall be removable with
a felt eraser or dry cloth without ghosting. Each unit shall come complete
with an eraser and four different color compatible dry erase markers. Two
keys shall be provided for each unit. The size shall be as shown in the
drawings.
2.3 MARKERBOARD
Markerboard shall have a porcelain enamel writing surface and a chalktray.
Markerboard shall be a factory assembled unit complete in one piece,
without joints whenever possible. When markerboard dimensions require
delivery in separate sections, components shall be prefit at the factory,
disassembled for delivery and jointed at the site. Frame shall be oak.
Chalktray shall be the same material as the frame and extend the full
length of the liquid markerboard. The markerboard shall have a map rail.
The map rail with a tackable insert shall extend the full length of the
liquid chalkboard, and shall have map hooks with clips for holding sheets
of paper. Two map hooks shall be provided for each 4 foot of map rail.
Dry erase markings shall be removable with a felt eraser or dry cloth
without ghosting. Each unit shall come complete with an eraser and four
different color compatible dry erase markers. The size shall be as shown
in the drawings.
2.4 TACKBOARDS
2.4.1 Cork
Tackboard shall consist of a minimum 1/4 inch thick colored cork with
burlap backing laminated to a minimum 1/4 inch thick hardboard, and shall
have an oak frame. The size shall be as shown in the drawings.
2.4.2 Fabric Covered
Tackboard shall have a woven fabric covering laminated to a minimum 1/4
inch thick cork laminated to a minimum 1/4 inch thick hardboard or
SECTION 10 10 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
particleboard, and shall have an oak frame. The size shall be as shown on
the drawings.
2.5 PROJECTION SCREEN
Recessed mount motorized projection screen shall have 120V motor that is
lubricated for life, quick reversal type, has overload protector, integral
gears, and preset accessible limit switches. Recessed mount projection
screens shall have an operable closure door and access panel. Screen shall
be flame retardant, mildew resistant, and white matte with black masking
borders tab tensioned. Tab tensioned screens shall have a vinyl surface
that is stretchable. Bottom of screen fabric shall be weighted with metal
rod. Roller shall be a rigid metal at least 3 inches in diameter mounted
on sound absorbing supports. Motor will be end mounted design. Screen
shall have a 3 position control switch to stop or reverse screen at any
point. The switch shall be installed in a flush electrical box with cover
plate, location(s) as shown on the electrical drawings. All conduit and
wiring from the control switch to the projection screen shall be furnished
and installed by the Contractor. Ceiling recessed case shall be wood with
metal lined motor compartment. Ceiling mounted case shall be wood. Wood
case shall be finished in medium oak screen shall be UL listed. The size
shall be as shown in the drawings.
2.6 COLOR
Finish colors for required items shall be as specified in the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PLACEMENT SCHEDULE
Location and mounting height of visual display boards shall be as shown on
the drawings.
Mounting height is defined as distance from finished floor to top of the
display board frame.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Perform installation and assembly in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions. Use concealed fasteners. Visual display boards shall be
attached to the walls with suitable devices to anchor each unit. furnish
and install trim items, accessories and miscellaneous items in total,
including but not limited to hardware, grounds, clips, backing materials,
adhesives, brackets, and anchorages incidental to or necessary for a sound,
secure, complete and finished installation. Installation shall not be
initiated until completion of room painting and finishing operations.
Visual display boards shall be installed in locations and at mounting
heights indicated. Visual display boards shall be installed level and
plumb, and if applicable doors shall be aligned and hardware shall be
adjusted. Damaged units shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the
Contracting Officer.
3.3 CLEANING
Writing surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 10 10 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 10 10 00 Page 5
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 10 14 02
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
02/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
designation only.
ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)
AA DAF-45 (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System
for Aluminum Finishes
AA PK-1 (2008) Pink Sheets: Designations and
Chemical Composition Limits for Aluminum
Alloys in the Form of Castings and Ingot
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)
AAMA 2604 (2005) Voluntary Specification,
Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for High Performance Organic
Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI Z97.1 (2009) Safety Glazing Materials Used in
Buildings - Safety Performance
Specifications and Methods of Test
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS D1.2/D1.2M (2008) Structural Welding Code - Aluminum
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B 209 (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM B 221 (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide interior signage of the design, detail, sizes, types, and message
SECTION 10 14 02 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
content shown on the drawings/attachments/signage placement schedule (as
applicable), conforming to the requirements specified, and placed at the
locations indicated. Signs shall be complete with lettering, framing as
detailed, and related components for a complete installation. Signage
shall be obtained from a single manufacturer with edges and corners of
finished letterforms and graphics true and clean. Recyclable materials
shall conform to EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35
RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings; G
Drawings showing elevations of each type of sign, dimensions,
details and methods of mounting or anchoring, mounting height,
shape and thickness of materials, and details of construction. A
schedule showing the location, each sign type, and message shall
be included.
SD-03 Product Data
Installation;
Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalogs cuts, installation and
cleaning instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Interior Signage;
One sample of each of the following sign types showing typical
quality, workmanship and color. The samples may be installed in
the work, provided each sample is identified and location recorded.
a. Directional sign.
b. Standard Room sign.
c. Changeable message strip sign.
Software;
One copy of the software for user produced signs
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Approved Manufacturer's Instructions;
Protection and Cleaning;
Six copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step
SECTION 10 14 02 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
procedures required for system operation. The instructions shall
include simplified diagrams for the system as installed. Six
copies of maintenance instructions listing routine procedures,
repairs, and guides. The instructions shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and
brief description of all equipment and their basic operating
features. Each set shall be permanently bound and shall have a
hard cover. The following identification shall be inscribed on
the covers: the words "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS",
name and location of the facility, name of the Contractor, and
contract number.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Materials shall be packaged to prevent damage and deterioration during
shipment, handling, storage and installation. Product shall be delivered
to the jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging and stored in a clean,
dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide 24 extra frames and extra stock of the following: 100 blank plates
of each color and size for sign types. 100 pressure-sensitive letters in
each color and size for sign type. 100 changeable message strips for sign
type. Provide 100 paper inserts and software for creating text and
symbols for PC compatible computers for Owner production of paper inserts
after project completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Signs, plaques, and dimensional letters shall be the standard product of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products that
essentially duplicate signs that have been in satisfactory use at least 2
years prior to bid opening.
2.2 ROOM IDENTIFICATION/DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE SYSTEM
2.2.1 Standard Room Signs - See Drawings for further details.
Signs shall consist of acrylic plastic 0.080 inch thickness minimum
conforming to ANSI Z97.1 and shall conform to the following:
a. Frames shall be aluminum 1/8 inch wide.
b. End caps shall be aluminum with square style corners.
2.2.2 Changeable Message Strip Signs
Changeable message strip signs shall be of same construction as standard
room signs to include a clear sleeve that will accept a paper or plastic
insert identifying changeable text. The insert shall be prepared die-cut
vinyl letters applied to 0.015 inch rigid vinyl film. Provide paper and
software for creating text and symbols for PC compatible Macintosh
computers for Owner production of paper inserts after project completion.
Sliding inserts or slide knobs that slide horizontally exposing different
graphic information shall be provided as identified in the signage
placement schedule and drawings.
SECTION 10 14 02 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.3 Type of Mounting For Signs
Provide extruded aluminum brackets for hanging, projecting, and
double-sided signs. Mounting for framed, hanging, and projecting signs
shall be by mechanical fasteners. Surface mounted signs shall be mounted
with countersunk mounting holes in plaques and mounting screws.
2.2.4 Graphics
Signage graphics for modular signs shall conform to the following:
a. Surface Applied Photopolymer: Integral graphics and braille
achieved by photomechanical stratification processes. Photopolymer
used for ADA compliant graphics shall be of the type that has a minimum
durometer reading of 90. Tactile graphics shall be raised 1/32 inch
from the first surface of plaque by photomechanical stratification
process.
2.2.5 Character Proportions and Heights
Letters and numbers on signs conform to 36 CFR 1191.
2.2.6 Raised and Braille Characters and Pictorial Symbol Signs (Pictograms)
Raised letters and numbers on signs shall conform to 36 CFR 1191.
2.3 BUILDING DIRECTORIES
Building directories shall be lobby directories or floor directories, and
shall be provided with a changeable directory listing consisting of the
areas, offices and personnel located within the facility. Dimensions,
details, and materials of sign and message content shall be as shown on the
drawings.
2.3.1 Header Panel
Header panel shall have background metal to match frame and shall have
raised letters.
2.3.2 Changeable Letter/Message Strip Directory System
Directory shall consist of an internally illuminated unit with step or
groove, laser or rotary engraved removable name strips. Design of unit
shall be as shown in the drawings.
2.3.2.1 Construction
The directory shall be constructed of an aluminum 2 inch deep frame with
satin dark bronze anodized finish. Unit shall be fully recessed mounted.
Unit shall have a 3 inch high header with lettering as shown. Unit shall
have a 3/8 inch face concealed hinge door and locking system with tempered
safety glassfixed frame. Door frame shall be aluminum with satin dark
bronze.
2.3.2.2 Message Strips
Namestrips shall be updatable by user. Namestrips shall be acrylic sized
in accordance with manufacturer's standard. Namestrips shall be felt
SECTION 10 14 02 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
grooved background with changeable upper and lower case Helvetica Medium
letters. Tabbed vinyl letters and numbers shall be provided in accordance
with the drawings and schedule.
2.4 METAL PLAQUES
2.4.1 Cast Metal Plaques
2.4.1.1 Fabrication
Cast metal plaques shall have the logo, emblem and artwork cast in the flat
relief technique. Plaques shall be fabricated from prime aluminum.
2.4.1.2 Border
Border shall be flat band.
2.4.1.3 Background
Background texture shall be leather.
2.4.1.4 Mounting
Mounting shall be concealed.
2.4.1.5 Finish
Finishes shall consist of aluminum light colored sandblasted background.
Letters shall be satin polished and entire plaque shall be sprayed with two
coats of clear lacquer. Letters shall be satin polished.
2.4.2 Chemically Etched Metal Plaques
2.4.2.1 Fabrication
Plaque shall be chemically single-etched one-piece brass 0.032 inch thick.
2.4.2.2 Finish
Single-etched raised areas shall be in bronze-tone finish and recessed
areas shall be colorfilled.
2.4.3 Frost and Surface Oxidized Plaques
2.4.3.1 Fabrication
Plaque shall be frosted and surface oxidized one-piece anodized aluminum
bronze 0.040 inch thick.
2.4.3.2 Finish
Material finish shall be satin. Frosted areas shall be oxidized black or
brown, for brass or bronze.
2.5 DIMENSIONAL BUILDING LETTERS
2.5.1 Fabrication
Letters shall be fabricated from cast aluminum 0.090 inch aluminum sheet.
SECTION 10 14 02 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Letters shall be cleaned by chemical etching or cleaned ultrasonically in a
special degreasing bath. Letters shall be packaged for protection until
installation.
2.5.2 Typeface
Typeface shall be helvetica medium.
2.5.3 Size
Letter size shall be as indicated.
2.5.4 Finish
Anodized aluminum finish shall be provided.
2.5.5 Mounting
Threaded studs of number and size recommended by manufacturer, shall be
supplied for concealed anchorage. Letters which project from the mounting
surface shall have stud spacer sleeves. Letters, studs, and sleeves shall
be of the same material. Templates for mounting shall be supplied.
2.6 PRESSURE SENSITIVE LETTERS
Ensure that edges and corners of finished letterforms and graphics are true
and clean. Do not use letterforms and graphics with rounded positive or
negative corners, nicked, cut, or ragged edges.
2.6.1 Typeface
Helvetica medium.
2.6.2 Size
As indicated.
2.7 ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS
Aluminum extrusions shall be at least 1/8 inch thick, and aluminum plate or
sheet shall be at least 0.0508 inch thick. Extrusions shall conform to
ASTM B 221; plate and sheet shall conform to ASTM B 209. Where anodic
coatings are specified, alloy shall conform to AA PK-1 alloy designation
514.0. Exposed anodized aluminum finishes shall be as shown. Welding for
aluminum products shall conform to AWS D1.2/D1.2M.
2.8 ANODIC COATING
Anodized finish shall conform to AA DAF-45 as follows:
a. Clear (natural) designation AA-M10-C22-A31, Architectural Class II
0.4 mil or thicker.
b. Integral color anodized designation AA-M10-C22-A32, Architectural
Class 0.4 to 0.7 mil.
c. Electrolytically deposited color-anodized designation
AA-M10-C22-A34, Architectural Class II 0.4 to 0.7 mil.
SECTION 10 14 02 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.9 ORGANIC COATING
Organic coating shall conform to AAMA 2604, with total dry film thickness
not less than 1.2 mils.
2.10 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
2.10.1 Factory Workmanship
Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled or punched. Drilling and
punching shall produce clean, true lines and surfaces. Exposed surfaces of
work shall have a smooth finish and exposed riveting shall be flush.
Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable.
2.10.2 Dissimilar Materials
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, the surfaces will be protected to
prevent galvanic or corrosive action.
2.11 COLOR, FINISH, AND CONTRAST
Color shall be as indicated on the drawings. Finish of all signs shall be
eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish as required in
handicapped-accessible buildings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Signs shall be installed plumb and true and in accordance with approved
manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on the detail drawings.
Mounting height and mounting location shall conform to 36 CFR 1191.
Required blocking shall be installed. Signs on doors or other surfaces
shall not be installed until finishes on such surfaces have been
installed. Signs installed on glass surfaces shall be installed with
matching blank back-up plates in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.1.1 Anchorage
Anchorage shall be in accordance with approved manufacturer's
instructions. Anchorage not otherwise specified or shown shall include
slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners when
approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine
carriage bolts for steel; lag bolts and screws for wood. Exposed anchor
and fastener materials shall be compatible with metal to which applied and
shall have matching color and finish. Where recommended by signage
manufacturer, foam tape pads may be used for anchorage. Foam tape pads
shall be minimum 1/16 inch thick closed cell vinyl foam with adhesive
backing. Adhesive shall be transparent, long aging, high tech formulation
on two sides of the vinyl foam. Adhesive surfaces shall be protected with a
5 mil green flatstock treated with silicone. Foam pads shall be sized for
the signage in accordance with signage manufacturer's recommendations.
Signs mounted to painted gypsum board surfaces shall be removable for
painting maintenance. Signs mounted to lay-in ceiling grids shall be
mounted with clip connections to ceiling tees.
SECTION 10 14 02 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.1.2 Protection and Cleaning
Protect the work against damage during construction. Hardware and
electrical equipment shall be adjusted for proper operation. Glass,
frames, and other sign surfaces shall be cleaned at completion of sign
installation in accordance with the manufacturer's approved instructions.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 10 14 02 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 10 21 13
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)
AA DAF-45 (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System
for Aluminum Finishes
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 123/A 123M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
ASTM A 385/A 385M (2009) Standard Practice for Providing
High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)
ASTM B 456 (2003) Standard Specification for
Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus
Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus
Chromium
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
ICC A117.1 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Accessible and
Usable Buildings and Facilities
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
SAE AMS-QQ-C-320 (2000) Chromium Plating
(Electrodeposited)-FSC MFFP
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
CID A-A-60003 (Basic) Partitions, Toilet, Complete
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide a complete and usable toilet partition system, including toilet
enclosures, system of panels, hardware, and support components. and
Affirmative Procurement guidelines. Furnish the partition system from a
SECTION 10 21 13 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
single manufacturer, with a standard product as shown in the most recent
catalog data. Submit Fabrication Drawings for metal toilet partitions
consisting of fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the
factory. Submit manufacturer's Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions with
Fabrication Drawings for review.
1.2.1 Sustainable Design Requirements
1.2.1.1 Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Toilet
partition materials may be locally available.
1.2.2 Plastic Identification
Verify that plastic products to be incorporated into the project are
labeled in accordance with ASTM D 1972. Where products are not labeled,
provide product data indicating polymeric information in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
a. Type 1: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).
b. Type 2: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).
c. Type 3: Polypropylene (PP).
d. Type 4: Polystyrene (PS).
e. Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is
made with a resin other than those listed above, or is made of more
than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings
Installation Drawings; G
Drawings showing plans, elevations, details of construction,
hardware, reinforcing, fittings, mountings, and anchorings for
metal partitions. Installation drawings as specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Toilet Partition System;
Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions
Colors And Finishes
Partition Panels and Doors
Anchoring Devices and Fasteners
SECTION 10 21 13 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Hardware and Fittings
Brackets
Door Hardware
Floor-Anchored Partitions
Manufacturer's technical data and catalog cuts including
installation and cleaning instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Colors and Finishes;
Sample of Toilet Partition
Hardware and Fittings
Anchoring Devices and Fasteners
Three samples of each item. Approved hardware samples may be
installed in the work if properly identified.
SD-07 Certificates
Warranty
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Waste Management
Plastic Identification
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Local/Regional Materials Documentaion; (LEED)
Toilet Enclosures; (LEED)
Include in LEED Documentation Notebook
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to ICC A117.1 code for access for the handicapped operation of
toilet compartment door and hardware.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original unopened packages with the
brand, item identification, and project reference clearly marked. Store
components in a dry location that is adequately ventilated; free from dust,
water, other contaminants, and damage during delivery, storage, and
construction.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide Certification or warranties that metal toilet partitions will be
free of defects in materials, fabrication, finish, and installation and
will remain so for a period of not less than 25 years after completion.
SECTION 10 21 13 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Anchoring Devices and Fasteners
Provide steel anchoring devices and fasteners hot-dipped galvanized after
fabrication, in conformance with ASTM A 385/A 385M and ASTM A 123/A 123M.
Conceal all galvanized anchoring devices.
2.1.2 Brackets
Wall brackets shall be two-ear panel brackets, T-style, 1-inch stock.
Provide stirrup style panel-to-pilaster brackets.
2.1.3 Hardware and Fittings
2.1.3.1 General Requirements
Conform hardware for the toilet partition system to CID A-A-60003 for the
specified type and style of partitions. Provide hardware finish highly
resistant to alkalies, urine, and other common toilet room acids. Comply
latching devices and hinges for handicap compartments with 36 CFR 1191;
provide chrome-plated steel or stainless steel devices and hinges with door
latches that operate without either tight grasping or twisting of the wrist
of the operator.
2.1.3.2 Finishes
a. Chrome plating shall conform to ASTM B 456.
b. Finish shall conform to SAE AMS-QQ-C-320, Class I, Type I.
c. Exposed fasteners shall match the hardware and fittings.
2.1.4 Door Hardware
2.1.4.1 Hinges
Hinges shall be adjustable to hold in-swinging doors open at any angle up
to 90 degrees and outswinging doors to 10 degrees. Provide
self-lubricating hinges with the indicated swing. Hinges shall be the
cutout-insert type and have the following type of return movement:
a. Gravity return movement
2.1.4.2 Latch and Pull
Latch and pull shall be a combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper
equipped with emergency access.
2.1.4.3 Coat Hooks
Coat hooks shall be combination units with hooks and rubber tipped pins.
2.2 PARTITION PANELS AND DOORS
Provide partition panels and doors not less than 1 inch thick with face
sheets not less than 0.0396 inch thick.
SECTION 10 21 13 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.1 Toilet Enclosures
Conform toilet enclosures to CID A-A-60003, Type I, Style A, floor
supported, B, overhead braced. Furnish width, length, and height of toilet
enclosures as shown. Provide a width of 1 inch. Finish surface of panels
shall be solid polyethylene, Finish 5; water resistant; graffiti resistant;
non-absorbent. Enclosures shall contain a minimum of 100 percent
post-consumer recycled plastic. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. This
item may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
Reinforce panels indicated to receive toilet paper holders or grab bars for
mounting of the items required. Provide grab bars to withstand a bending
stress, shear stress, shear force, and a tensile force induced by 250 lbf.
Grab bars shall not rotate within their fittings.
2.3 FLOOR-ANCHORED PARTITIONS
Pilasters shall be not less than 1-1/4 inch thick with face sheets not less
than 0.0635 inch thick. Provide anchoring device at the bottom of the
pilaster consisting of a steel bar not less than 1/2 by 7/8 inch welded to
the reinforced face sheets and having not less than two 3/8 inch round
anchorage devices for securing to the floor slab. Provide anchorage
devices complete with threaded rods, expansion shields, lock washers, and
leveling-adjustment nuts. Trim piece at the floor shall be 3 inch high and
fabricated from not less than 0.030 inch thick corrosion-resistant steel.
2.4 OVERHEAD-BRACED PARTITIONS
Pilasters shall be not less than 1-1/4 inch thick with face sheets not less
than 0.0393 inch thick. Provide anchoring device at the bottom of the
pilaster consistingof a channel-shaped floor stirrup fabricated from not
less than 0.0635 inch thick material and a leveling bolt. Secure the
stirrup to the pilaster with not less than a 3/16 inch bolt and nut after
the pilaster is leveled. Secure the stirrup to the floor with not less
than two lead expansion shields and sheetmetal screws. Fabricate overhead
brace from a continuous extruded aluminum tube not less than 1 inchwide by
1-1/2 inch high, 0.125-inch wall thickness. Finish shall be AA-C22A31 in
accordance with AA DAF-45. Set and secure brace into the top of each
pilaster. Fabricate 3 inch high trim piece at the floor from not less than
0.030 inch thick corrosion-resistant steel.
2.5 PILASTER SHOES
Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal floor-mounted anchorage. Pilaster
shoes shall be one piece molded HDPE. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Pilaster
shoes may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
Height shall be 3 inches.
2.6 HARDWARE
Hardware for the toilet partition system shall conform to CID A-A-60003 for
the specified type and style of partitions. Hardware shall be pre-drilled
by manufacturer. Hardware finish shall be highly resistant to alkalies,
urine, and other common toilet room acids. Hardware shall include: chrome
plated non ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door
close positioning; nylon bearings; black anodized aluminum door latch; door
strike and keeper with rubber bumper; and cast alloy chrome plated coat
SECTION 10 21 13 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
hook and bumper. Latching devices and hinges for handicap compartments
shall comply with 36 CFR 1191 and shall be chrome-plated steel or stainless
steel door latches that operate without either tight grasping or twisting
of the wrist of the operator. Screws and bolts shall be stainless steel,
tamper proof type. Wall mounting brackets shall be continuous, full
height, heavy duty plastic in accordance with toilet compartment
manufacturer's instructions. Floor-mounted anchorage shall consist of
corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with threaded rods, lock washers,
and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to
floor.
2.7 COLORS AND FINISHES
2.7.1 Colors
Provide manufacturer's standard color charts for color of finishes for
toilet partition system components.
2.7.2 Finishes No.4 and No. 5
Provide solid plastic fabricated of polymer resins (polyethylene) formed
under high pressure rendering a single component section not less than one
inch thick. Colors shall extend throughout the panel thickness. Provide
exposed finish surfaces: smooth, waterproof, non-absorbant, and resistant
to staining and marking with pens, pencils, or other writing devices.
Solid plastic partitions shall not show any sign of deterioration when
immersed in the following chemicals and maintained at a temperature of 80
degrees F for a minimum of 30 days:
a. Acetic Acid (80 percent) Hydrochloric Acid (40 percent)
b. Acetone Hydrogen Peroxide (30 percent)
c. Ammonia (liquid) Isopropyl Alcohol
d. Ammonia Phosphate Lactic Acid (25 percent)
e. Bleach (12 percent) Lime Sulfur
f. Borax Nicotine
g. Brine Potassium Bromide
h. Caustic Soda Soaps
i. Chlorine Water Sodium Bicarbonate
j. Citric Acid Trisodium Phosphate
k. Copper Chloride Urea; Urine
l. Core Oils Vinegar
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Take field measurements prior to the preparation of drawing and fabrication
to ensure proper fits. Verify that field measurements, surfaces,
substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive work.
Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. Verify correct location of
built in framing, anchorage, and bracing. Report in writing to Contracting
Officer prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory
execution of the work of this section. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level, with the panels
centered between the fixtures. Provide a panel clearance of not more than
SECTION 10 21 13 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1/2 inch and secure the panels to walls and pilasters with not less than
two wall brackets attached near the top and bottom of the panel. Locate
wall brackets so that holes for wall bolts occur in masonry or tile
joints. Secure Panels to pilasters with brackets matching the wall
brackets. Provide for adjustment due to minor floor variations. Locate
head rail joints at pilaster center lines. Install adjacent components for
consistency of line and plane. Equip each door with hinges, one door
latch, and one coat hook and bumper. Align hardware to uniform clearance
at vertical edges of doors.
a. Secure panels to ceramic tile on hollow plastered walls or hollow
concrete-masonry walls with toggle bolts using not less than 1/4-20
screws of the length required for the wall thickness. Toggle bolts
shall have a load-carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per
anchor.
b. Submit Installation Drawings for toilet partitions showing plans,
elevations, details of construction, hardware, reinforcing and
blocking, fittings, mountings and escutcheons. Indicate on drawingsthe
type of partition, location, mounting height, cutouts, and
reinforcement required for toilet-room accessories.
3.3 FLOOR-ANCHORED PARTITIONS
Secure pilasters to the floor with the anchorage device specified. Make
all leveling devices readily accessible for leveling, plumbing, and
tightening the installation. Level tops of doors with tops of pilasters
when doors are in a closed position. Expansion shields shall have a minimum
2-inch penetration into the concrete slab.
3.4 OVERHEAD-BRACED PARTITIONS
Secure pilasters to the floor with the anchorage device specified. Make
all leveling devices readily accessible for leveling, plumbing, and
tightening the installation. Secure overhead brace to the pilaster face
with not less than two fasteners per face. Expansion shields shall have a
minimum 2-inch penetration into the concrete slab. Make tops of doors
parallel with the overhead brace when doors are in a closed position.
3.5 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
After completion of the installation, make final adjustments to the
pilaster-leveling devices, door hardware, and other working parts of the
partition assembly. Doors shall have a uniform vertical edge clearance of
approximately 3/16 inch and shall rest open at approximately 30 degrees
when unlatched.
3.6 CLEANING
Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of
the work, in an approved manner compliant.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 10 21 13 Page 7
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 10 22 26.33
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 653/A 653M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM E 336 (2009) Measurement of Airborne Sound
Insulation in Buildings
ASTM E 413 (2004) Rating Sound Insulation
ASTM E 557 (2000; R 2006e1) Installation of Operable
Partitions
ASTM E 84 (2010) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
ASTM E 90 (2009) Standard Test Method for Laboratory
Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
GREENGUARD ENVIRONMENTAL INSTITUTE (GEI)
GEI Greenguard Standards for Low Emitting
Products
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 101 (2009; TIA 09-1; TIA 09-2) Life Safety Code
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)
SCS Scientific Certification Systems
(SCS)Indoor Advantage
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
a. No less than 30 calendar days prior to the scheduled commencement
of installation, submit the following to the Contracting Officer:
Manufacturer's Qualifications
Manufacturer's Sample Warranty
SECTION 10 22 26.33 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Statement of Code Compliance
Statement of Standards Conformity
Verification of Field Measurements
Existing Electrical Data
Fabrication Drawings
Installation Instructions
b. Supply and install manual operation, acoustical folding panel
partitions, factory finished, supported from overhead track without
floor guides, as shown on the drawings including all hardware, seals,
track and rollers as needed to close the specified opening.
1.2.1 Manual Operation
The manual operation shall be a force no greater than 20 lbf to start
movement at the rate of 3.33 ft/s (200 ft/min). Use a removable handle to
extend and retract the bottom operable seals; vertical movement of seals
shall be 2 inches. Closure to the lead wall shall be by use of a flexible
bulb; accomplish final closing by means of a lever exerting pressure
against the wall.
1.2.2 Performance Requirements
1.2.2.1 Fire Endurance
For partitions more than 60 square feet in area, provide covering and
lining with flame spread rating of 25 or less, fuel contribution rating of
15 or less, smoke generation of 50 or less in accordance with NFPA 101 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Submit flame and smoke development
tests reports. Provide door and partition finishes with a Class A rating
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
1.2.2.2 Laboratory Acoustical Requirements
Provide partitions tested in accordance with ASTM E 90, by a laboratory
accredited by the U.S. Bureau of Standards, that have attained a sound
transmission class (STC) of not less than 50 in a fully extended position.
Partition tested shall be of the same construction, materials, and model
number as the partition to be provided and be fully operable. Test
specimen shall be not less than 126 square feet in area. Panel weight
shall be a minimum of 41 kg/square meter 8.5 psf for STC up to 50. Design
panel thickness (4 inch nominal) and composition to provide the required
STC rating in accordance with ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation; G
Layouts;
Drawings to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and
will properly function as a unit. Show layout of the work; track
SECTION 10 22 26.33 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
and jamb fastening methods; seal and installation details; and
equipment relationship to other parts of the work including
clearances for maintenance and operation.
SD-03 Product Data
Folding Panel Partitions;
Installation Instructions;
Certification
SD-04 Samples
Folding Panel Partitions;
Three Color samples of specified surfaces and finishes to match
those specified. Finish and color requirements are not limited to
manufacturer's standard selections in order to meet these
requirements.
SD-06 Test Reports
Acoustical Test;
Flame and Smoke Development Tests;
SD-07 Certificates
Materials;
Folding Panel Partitions;
Certificate attesting that partitions have specified acoustical
and flame retardant properties, as determined by test.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Folding Panel Partitions
Data Package 1 for folding panel partitions.
1.4 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CERTIFICATION
Product shall be third party certified by GEI Greenguard Indoor Air Quality
Certified, SCS Scientific Certification Systems Indoor Advantage or equal.
Certification shall be performed annually and shall be current.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original, unopened,
and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. Provide labels to
indicate the manufacturer, brand name, size, finish, and placement
location. Store partitions and accessories in unopened packages in a
manner that will prevent damage. Handle partition materials in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions. Protect materials from the weather,
humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
extend beyond a 1 year period. In addition, provide guarantee of the
pantographs, trolleys and tracks for 10 years from date of acceptance for
SECTION 10 22 26.33 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
beneficial use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Provide material and equipment which are the standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and
essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
2 year prior to bid opening. Submit Certificate attesting that the
materials meet the requirements specified. Equipment shall be supported by
a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer,
reasonably convenient to the site. Provide heavy-duty type hardware
standard with the manufacturer. Provide pulls and latches for all
partitions. Provide finish hardware.
2.2 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
Provide folding panel partitions using top hung ball bearing carriers which
support modular panels.
a. Provide partitions made up of a series of rigid panels, each panel
being a one-piece assembly. Unless otherwise specified, use the least
number of panels. The mechanical seal of the panel shall actuate with
a single operating action.
b. Provide panels continuously hinged type as indicated.
c. Submit six complete copies of maintenance instructions explaining
routine maintenance procedures including inspection, adjustments,
lubrication, and cleaning. List possible breakdown, methods of repair,
and a troubleshooting guide. Include instructions for equipment layout
and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed
and also the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts
list, and brief description of all equipment and operating features.
Include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices
and source of supply, and a list of the parts recommended by the
manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of service.
2.2.1 Panels
Provide panels of steel skin, laminated to appropriate structural
acoustical backing, mounted in full perimeter protective frame. Steel for
the panel frames shall be a minimum of 18 gauge formed steel with minimum
22 gauge thick face panels spot welded to the frame. Frame shall enclose
and protect all edges of the surface material. Panels shall be not more
than 4 feet wide, except for end closure panels, and be full height to
track. Panels shall lock in place to form a stable, rigid partition; low
profile hinges may not project more than 1/4 inch maximum from panel edge.
Panel surfacing shall wrap around the vertical panel edges without vertical
trim.
2.2.2 Finish Covering
Finish material shall be minimum 54 inches wide, acrylic backed fabric of
100 percent polyolefin. Provide non-allergenic stain and mildew resistant
fabric which will not rot or support growth of bacteria.
SECTION 10 22 26.33 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.3 Track
Provide recess enamel finish steel track as shown. Steel shall conform to
ASTM A 653/A 653M. Provide track that is the manufacturer's standard
product designed for the weight of the finished partition, including door.
Provide track sections in the maximum lengths practicable, and not less than
6 feet long except for narrow doors and at ends of runs where short length
is required. Provide suitable joint devices such as interlocking keys at
each joint to provide permanent alignment of track.
2.2.4 Suspension System
Provide a suspension system consisting of steel track connected to the
structural support by threaded rods, and trolleys designed to support the
weight of the partition. Provide steel track of 7 gage minimum, phosphate
treated or painted. Provide center hung panel with 1 trolley with four
ball bearing nylon or steel tired wheels per panel.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
2.3.1 Ceiling Guards
Furnish partitions with ceiling guards or integral track and ceiling guards
as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.4 SEALS AND SWEEPSTRIPS
Provide perimeter seals or sound insulation, of manufacturer's standard
product, to achieve the sound transmission class specified, without crack
or craze when subjected to severe usage. Provide mechanical bottom seal
that can be raised or lowered for positive control. Provide manufacturer's
vertical seals between panels to ensure acoustical rating. Bottom seals
shall consist of a vinyl sweep mechanical seal which will expand in place,
or provide panels which can be lowered by a removable operating device.
Provide vertical seal between panels which is anodized, architectural
grade, aluminum extrusion with vinyl sound seal. Sweep strips shall be
vinyl or other material that will not crack or craze with severe usage.
Provide sweep strip STC to the specified rating.
2.5 COLOR
Color: in accordance with Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE and as indicated
on the drawings. Color listed is not intended to limit selection of equal
colors from other manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with the manufacturer's approved instructions.
3.1.1 Preparation Work
Verify dimensions and condition of openings scheduled to receive folding
panel partitions. Install partitions in accordance with the approved
partition layouts, manufacturer's directions, and ASTM E 557. Provide
structural support for the track support elements as indicated.
SECTION 10 22 26.33 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.1.2 Adjustment
Adjust manually operated partitions to open and close from any position
with a maximum horizontal force as specified in paragraph Manual Operation
applied to pendant pull, box or handle.
3.2 FIELD TESTS
3.2.1 Operational Test
In the presence of the Contracting Officer, operate partition at least
three times to demonstrate that partition is capable of being moved from
the stored position to the fully extended position smoothly and quietly.
Activate the emergency release mechanism and demonstrate proper operation
of the partition in the manual mode. Adjust partitions which do not
operate properly and retest.
3.2.2 Acoustical Test
Field sound performance: provide partition testing by an independent
certified acoustical consultant in accordance with ASTM E 336, and achieve
a Noise Isolation Class (NIC) of 41 plus or minus two. Adjust and/or
modify partitions which do not comply, and retest. Submit test reports.
3.3 CLEANING
Clean any soiled parts of the partition in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 10 22 26.33 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 10 26 13
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
05/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)
AA DAF-45 (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System
for Aluminum Finishes
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 167 (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip
ASTM B 221 (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM D 256 (2006e1) Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics
ASTM D 543 (2006) Standard Practices for Evaluating
the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical
Reagents
ASTM D 635 (2006) Standard Test Method for Rate of
Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning
of Self-Supporting Plastics in a
Horizontal Position
ASTM E 84 (2010) Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
ASTM G 21 (1996; R 2002) Determining Resistance of
Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 80 (2010; TIA 10-1) Standard for Fire Doors
and Other Opening Protectives
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
SAE J1545 (2005) Instrumental Color Difference
Measurement for Exterior Finishes,
SECTION 10 26 13 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Textiles and Colored Trim
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G"
designationinformation only. When used, a designation following the "G"
designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the
Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Corner Guards;
Drawings indicating locations and typical elevations of each
type of item. Show on the drawings vertical and horizontal
dimensions, full size sections, thickness of materials, and
fastening details.
SD-03 Product Data
Corner Guards;
Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalog cuts, installation
instructions, and recommended cleaning instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Finish;
Three samples indicating color and texture of materials
requiring color and finish.
SD-06 Test Reports
Corner Guards
Fire rating and extinguishing test results for resilient
material.
SD-07 Certificates
Corner Guards
Statements attesting that the items comply with specified fire
and safety code requirements.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's original unopened
containers with seals unbroken and labels and trademarks intact. Keep
materials dry, protected from weather and damage, and stored under cover.
Materials shall be stored at approximately 70 degrees F for at least 48
hours prior to installation.
1.4 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
extend beyond a 1 year period.
SECTION 10 26 13 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODCUCTS
To the maximum extent possible, corner guards shall be the standard
products of a single manufacturer and shall be furnished as detailed.
Drawings show general configuration of products required, and items
differing in minor details from those shown will be acceptable.
2.1.1 Resilient Material
Provide resilient material consisting of high impact resistant extruded
acrylic vinyl, polyvinyl chloride, or injection molded thermal plastic
conforming to the following:
2.1.1.1 Minimum Impact Resistance
Minimum impact resistance shall be 18 ft-lbs/sq. inch when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 256, (Izod impact, ft-lbs per sq inch notched).
2.1.1.2 Fire Rating
Fire rating shall be Class 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84,
having a maximum flame spread of 25 and a smoke developed rating of 450 or
less. Material shall be rated self extinguishing when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 635. Material shall be labeled and tested by an approved
nationally known testing laboratory. Resilient material used for
protection on fire rated doors and frames shall be listed by the testing
laboratory performing the tests. Resilient material installed on fire
rated wood/steel door and frame assemblies shall have been tested on
similar type assemblies. Test results of material tested on any other
combination of door/frame assembly will not be acceptable.
2.1.1.3 Integral Color
Colored components shall have integral color and shall be matched in
accordance with SAE J1545 to within plus or minus 1.0 on the CIE-LCH scales.
2.1.1.4 Chemical and Stain Resistance
Materials shall be resistant to chemicals and stains reagents in accordance
with ASTM D 543.
2.1.1.5 Fungal and Bacterial Resistance
Materials shall be resistant to fungi and bacteria in accordance with
ASTM G 21, as applicable.
2.2 CORNER GUARDS
2.2.1 Resilient Corner Guards
Corner guard units shall be surface mounted type, radius formed to profile
shown. Corner guards shall extend from floor to ceiling. Mounting
hardware, cushions, and base plates shall be furnished. Assembly shall
consist of a snap-on corner guard formed from high impact resistant
resilient material, minimum 0.078 inch thick, mounted on a continuous
aluminum retainer. Extruded aluminum retainer shall conform to ASTM B 221,
SECTION 10 26 13 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
alloy 6063, temper T5 or T6. Flush mounted type guards shall act as a stop
for adjacent wall finish material. Factory fabricated end closure caps
shall be furnished for top and bottom of surface mounted corner guards.
Flush mounted corner guards installed in fire rated wall shall maintain the
rating of the wall. Insulating materials that are an integral part of the
corner guard system shall be provided by the manufacturer of the corner
guard system. Exposed metal portions of fire rated assemblies shall have a
paintable surface.
2.2.2 Stainless Steel Corner Guards
Stainless steel corner guards shall be fabricated of 0.0625 inch thick
material conforming to ASTM A 167, type 302 or 304. Corner guards shall
extend from floor to ceiling. Corner guard shall be formed to dimensions
shown.
2.3 TRIM, FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
Provide vinyl trim, fasteners and anchors for each specific installation as
shown.
2.4 FINISH
2.4.1 Aluminum Finish
Finish for aluminum shall be in accordance with AA DAF-45. Exposed
aluminum shall be designation AA-C22A31 chemically etched medium matte,
with clear anodic coating class II architectural coating 0.4 mil thick.
Concealed aluminum shall be mill finish as fabricated, uniform in natural
color and free from surface blemishes.
2.4.2 Stainless Steel Finish
Finish for stainless steel shall be in accordance with ASTM A 167, Type 302
or 304, finish number 4.
2.4.3 Resilient Material Finish
Finish for resilient material shall be embossed texture with colors in
accordance with SAE J1545.
2.5 ADHESIVES
Adhesive for resilient material shall be in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
2.6 COLOR
Color shall be as indicated on the drawings. Color listed is not intended
to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Corner Guards
Material shall be mounted at location indicated in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
SECTION 10 26 13 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.1.2 Door, Door Frame Protectors, and Wall Panels
Surfaces to receive protection shall be clean, smooth, and free of
obstructions. Protectors shall be installed after frames are in place, but
prior to hanging of doors, in accordance with manufacturer's specific
instructions. Adhesives shall be applied in controlled environment in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protection for fire doors
and frames shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 80.
3.1.3 Stainless Steel Guards
a. Mount guards on external corners of interior walls, partitions and
columns as shown.
b. Where corner guards are installed on walls, partitions or columns
finished with plaster or ceramic tile, anchor corner guards as
indicated.
c. Where corner guards are installed on gypsum board, clean surfaces
and anchor guards with a neoprene solvent-type contact adhesive
specifically manufactured for use on gypsum board construction. Remove
excess adhesive from the guard edges and allow to cure undisturbed for
24 hours.
d. For wall guards, space brackets at no more than 3 feet on centers
and anchor to the wall in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 10 26 13 Page 5
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 10 28 13
TOILET ACCESSORIES
07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C 1036 (2006) Standard Specification for Flat
Glass
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Finishes
Accessory Items
Manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog cuts indicating
materials of construction, fasteners proposed for use for each
type of wall construction, mounting instructions, operation
instructions, and cleaning instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Finishes
Accessory Items
One sample of each accessory proposed for use. Incorporate
approved samples into the finished work, provided they are
identified and their locations noted.
SD-07 Certificates
Accessory Items
Certificate for each type of accessory specified, attesting that
the items meet the specified requirements.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Four complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine
maintenance procedures and possible breakdowns. Include repair
instructions for simplified wiring and control diagrams and other
SECTION 10 28 13 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
information necessary for unit maintenance.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Wrap toilet accessories for shipment and storage, then deliver to the
jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging, and store in a clean, dry
area protected from construction damage and vandalism.
1.4 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
extend beyond a 1 year period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
Provide toilet accessories where indicated in accordance with paragraph
SCHEDULE. Porcelain type, tile-wall accessories are specified in Section
09 30 00 CERAMIC TILE QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE. Provide each accessory
item complete with the necessary mounting plates of sturdy construction
with corrosion resistant surface.
2.1.1 Anchors and Fasteners
Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a restraining force
commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be mounted and suited
for use with the supporting construction. Provide tamperproof design
exposed fasteners with finish to match the accessory.
2.1.2 Finishes
Except where noted otherwise, provide the following finishes on metal:
Metal Finish
_____ ______
Stainless steel No. 4 satin finish
Carbon steel, copper alloy, Chromium plated, bright
and brass
2.2 ACCESSORY ITEMS
Conform to the requirements for accessory items specified below.
2.2.1 Grab Bar (GB)
Provide an 18 gauge, 1-1/4 inch grab bar OD Type 304 stainless steel.
Provide form and length for grab bar as indicated. Provide concealed
exposed mounting flange. Provide grab with satin finish. Furnish
installed bars capable of withstanding a 500 pound vertical load without
coming loose from the fastenings and without obvious permanent
deformation. Allow 1-1/2 inch space between wall and grab bar.
2.2.2 Mirrors, Glass (MG)
Provide Type I transparent flat type, Class 1-clear glass for mirrors.
Glazing Quality q1 1/4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C 1036. Coat glass on
SECTION 10 28 13 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
one surface with silver coating, copper protective coating, and mirror
backing paint. Provide highly adhesive pure silver coating of a thickness
which provides reflectivity of 83 percent or more of incident light when
viewed through 1/4 inch thick glass, free of pinholes or other defects.
Provide copper protective coating with pure bright reflective copper,
homogeneous without sludge, pinholes or other defects, of proper thickness
to prevent "adhesion pull" by mirror backing paint. Provide mirror backing
paint with two coats of special scratch and abrasion-resistant paint and
baked in uniform thickness to provide a protection for silver and copper
coatings which will permit normal cutting and edge fabrication.
2.2.3 Mirror, Tilt (MT)
Provide surface mounted tilt mirror with full visibility for persons in a
wheelchair. Furnish fixed tilt mirror, extending at least 4 inch from the
wall at the top and tapering to 1 inch at the bottom. Provide size in
accordance with the drawings. Conform to ASTM C 1036 and paragraph Glass
Mirrors.
2.2.4 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle (PTDWR)
Provide recessed dispenser/receptacle with a capacity of 600 sheets of
C-fold, single-fold, or quarter-fold towel. Design waste receptacle to be
locked in unit and removable for service. Provide tumbler key locking
mechanism. Provide waste receptacle capacity of 18 gallons. Fabricate a
minimum 0.03 inch stainless steel welded construction unit with all exposed
surfaces having a satin finish. Provide waste receptacle that accepts
reusable liner standard for unit manufacturer.
2.2.5 Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Dispenser (SNTD)
Provide sanitary napkin and tampon dispenser recessed. Dispenser,
including door of Type 304 stainless steel that dispense both napkins and
tampons with a minimum capacity of 20 each. Furnish dispensing mechanism
for complimentary operation. Hang doors with a full-length
corrosion-resistant steel piano hinge and secure with a tumbler lock.
Provide keys for coin box different from the door keys.
2.2.6 Shower Curtain (SC)
Provide shower curtain, size to suit conditions. Provide anti-bacterial
nylon/vinyl fabric curtain. Furnish color as shown on Drawings.
2.2.7 Shower Curtain Rods (SCR)
Provide Type 304 stainless steel shower curtain rods 1-1/4 inch OD by 0.049
inch minimum straight to meet installation conditions.
2.2.8 Soap Dispenser (SD)
Provide soap dispenser surface mounted, liquid type consisting of a
vertical Type 304 stainless steel tank with holding capacity of 40 fluid
ounces with a corrosion-resistant all-purpose valve that dispenses liquid
soaps, lotions, detergents and antiseptic soaps.
2.2.9 Towel Pin (TP)
Provide towel pin with concealed wall fastenings, and a pin integral with
or permanently fastened to wall flange with maximum projection of 4 inch.
SECTION 10 28 13 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Provide satin finish.
2.2.10 Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD)
Furnish Type II - surface mounted toilet tissue holder with two rolls of
standard tissue mounted horizontally. Provide stainless steel, satin
finish cabinet.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Provide the same finish for the surfaces of fastening devices exposed after
installation as the attached accessory. Provide oval exposed screw heads.
Install accessories at the location and height indicated. Protect exposed
surfaces of accessories with strippable plastic or by other means until the
installation is accepted. After acceptance of accessories, remove and
dispose of strippable plastic protection. Coordinate accessory
manufacturer's mounting details with other trades as their work
progresses. Use sealants for brackets, plates, anchoring devices and
similar items in showers (a silicone or polysulphide sealant) as they are
set to provide a watertight installation. After installation, thoroughly
clean exposed surfaces and restore damaged work to its original condition
or replace with new work.
3.1.1 Recessed Accessories
Fasten accessories with wood screws to studs, blocking or rough frame in
wood construction. Set anchors in mortar in masonry construction. Fasten
to metal studs or framing with sheet metal screws in metal construction.
3.1.2 Surface Mounted Accessories
Mount on concealed backplates, unless specified otherwise. Conceal
fasteners on accessories without backplates. Install accessories with
sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead-lined braided jute, teflon or
neoprene sleeves, or lead expansion shields, or with toggle bolts or other
approved fasteners as required by the construction. Install backplates in
the same manner, or provide with lugs or anchors set in mortar, as required
by the construction. Fasten accessories mounted on gypsum board and
plaster walls without solid backing into the metal or wood studs or to
solid wood blocking secured between wood studs, or to metal backplates
secured to metal studs.
3.2 CLEANING
Clean material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do mot
use alkaline or abrasive agents. Take precautions to avoid scratching or
marring exposed surfaces.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 10 28 13 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 10 44 13
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
05/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Manufacturer's Data for each type of required Extinguisher Cabinet
with all related details, accessories, and recommended operation
manuals.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit fabrication drawings for the following items consisting of
fabrication and assembly details performed in the factory. Submit
installation drawings for the following items in accordance with
the paragraph entitled, "Installation," of this section.
Cabinets
Wall Brackets
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Manufacturer's catalog and warranty data for the following
items:
Cabinets
Wall Brackets
Replacement Parts
SD-04 Samples
One full-sized sample of each type of Cabinet being installed
Three samples of Wall Brackets and Accessories of each type being
used
Approved samples may be used for installation, with proper
identification and storage.
1.2 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
Protect materials from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage,
and construction.
Deliver materials in their original packages, containers, or bundles
bearing the brand name and the name and type of the material.
SECTION 10 44 13 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINETS
2.1.1 Material
Provide enameled steel cabinets.
2.1.2 Type
Provide recessed type cabinets.
2.1.3 Size
Dimension cabinets to accommodate the government furnished fire
extinguishers.
2.2 WALL BRACKETS
Provide running-board fire extinguisher wall brackets.
Provide wall bracket and accessories as approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install Extinguisher Cabinets where indicated on the drawings. Verify
exact locations prior to installation.
Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for all installations.
3.2 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
3.2.1 Repairing
Remove and replace damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work with
new work at no additional cost to the Government.
Provide Replacement Parts list indicating specified items replacement part,
replacement cost, and name, address and contact for replacement parts
distributor.
3.2.2 Cleaning
Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces which are soiled as a
result of the work. Remove from the site all construction equipment,
tools, surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the work.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 10 44 13 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 10 51 13
METAL LOCKERS
07/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel,
Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened
ASTM A 653/A 653M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 924/A 924M (2010) Standard Specification for General
Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM D 2092 (1995; R 2001e1) Standard Guide for
Preparation of Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Steel Surfaces for Painting
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL-PRF-22750 (Rev F) Coating, Epoxy, High Solids
MIL-PRF-23377 (Rev J; Am 1; Am 2) Primer Coatings:
Epoxy, High Solids
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS AA-L-00486 (Rev J) Lockers, Clothing, Steel
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Types G
Location;
SECTION 10 51 13 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Installation
Numbering system
SD-03 Product Data
Material
Handles
Finish
Locker components
Assembly instructions
SD-04 Samples
Color chips;
1.3 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
Deliver lockers and associated materials in their original packages,
containers, or bundles bearing the manufacturer's name and the name of the
material. Protect from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage,
and construction.
1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
To ensure proper fits, make field measurements prior to the preparation of
drawings and fabrication. Verify correct location.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Color Chips
Provide a minimum of three color chips, not less than 3 inches square, of
each color indicated.
Government may request performance-characteristic tests on assembled
lockers. Tests and results must conform to FS AA-L-00486. Lockers not
conforming will be rejected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPES
Locker must have the following type and size in the location and quantities
indicated. Locker finish colors will be as indicated.
2.1.1 Single-tier Lockers
Single-tier lockers must be as follows:
Type L-2: Single-tier locker 12 inches wide, 12 inches deep, and 72
inches high, attached to 6-inch closed base
SECTION 10 51 13 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.2 Double-Tier
Double-tier lockers must be as follows:
Type L-1: Double-tier locker 15 inches wide, 18 inches deep, and 72
inches high without base.
2.2 MATERIAL
2.2.1 Galvanized Steel Sheet
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial quality, minimized spangle material.
Prepare material surfaces for baked enamel finishing in accordance with
FS AA-L-00486. Fabricate locker bodies from not less than 0.0239-inch
thick steel sheet.
ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M, commercial quality, minimized
spangle, galvanized steel sheet with not less than G60 zinc coating.
Prepare surface of sheet for painting in accordance with ASTM D 2092,
Method A. Minimum uncoated sheet thickness as specified.2.2.2 Finish
FS AA-L-00486.
Primer, MIL-PRF-23377; topcoat, MIL-PRF-22750
2.2.2.1 Color
Light gray, to be selected from manufacturer's standard and approved by the
government.
2.3 COMPONENTS
2.3.1 Built-In Locks
Built-in locks are not required.
2.3.1 Coat Hooks
FS AA-L-00486, zinc plated.
2.3.2 Hanger Rods
FS AA-L-00486.
2.3.3 Door Handles
FS AA-L-00486. Provide zinc alloy or steel handles with a chromium coating.
2.3.4 Doors
FS AA-L-00486, not less than 0.0598 inch thick steel sheet.
2.3.4.1 Hinges
In addition to the requirements of FS AA-L-00486, provide 5-knuckle hinges,
minimum 2 inches high. Fabricate knuckle hinges from not less than 0.0787
inch thick steel sheet. Weld or bolt hinges to the door frame. Weld,
bolt, or rivet hinges to the door.
SECTION 10 51 13 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.3.4.2 Latching Mechanisms
FS AA-L-00486.
2.3.5 Latch Strikes
FS AA-L-00486. Fabricate from not less than 0.0787 inch thick steel sheet,
except latch strike may be continuous from top to bottom and fabricated as
part of the door framing.
2.3.6 Silencers
FS AA-L-00486.
2.3.7 Back and Side Panels, Tops, and Bottoms
FS AA-L-00486, not less than 0.0474 inch thick steel sheet.
2.3.8 Sloping Locker Tops
Provide sloping locker tops in addition to the locker-section flat tops.
Sloping tops must be continuous in length. Provide fillers or closures at
the exposed end of sloping tops. Fabricate sloping tops from not less than
0.0478-inch thick steel sheet.
2.3.9 Shelves
FS AA-L-00486. Fabricate from not less than 0.0598 inch thick steel sheet.
2.3.10 Base Panels
FS AA-L-00486.
2.3.11 Number Plates
Number plates are not required.2.3.12 Fastening Devices
Provide bolts, nuts, and rivets as specified in FS AA-L-00486.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
Assemble lockers according to the locker manufacturer's instructions.
Align lockers horizontally and vertically. Secure lockers to wall and
basewith screws as indicated. Bolt adjacent lockers together. Adjust
doors to operate freely without sticking or binding and to ensure they
close tightly.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.2.1 Testing
Government may request performance-characteristic tests on assembled
lockers in accordance with FS AA-L-00486. Lockers not conforming will be
rejected.
SECTION 10 51 13 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.2.2 Repairing
Remove and replace damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work with
new.
3.2.3 Cleaning
Clean surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of the
work, in an approved manner. Remove equipment, surplus materials, and
rubbish from the site.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 10 51 13 Page 5
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 12 48 13.13
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS
05/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
40 CFR 247 Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for
Products Containing Recovered Materials
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SB-02 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings in sufficient detail showing layout of mat/grid and
frame specified including details indicating construction relative
to materials, direction of traffic, spline locations, profiles,
anchors and accessories.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Manufacturer's Data and indicate percentage of recycled
material content in protective flooring materials Entrance and
Floor Mats to verify affirmative procurement compliance.
Submit total weight and volume quantities of protective flooring
materials with recycle materials content.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
Flammability in accordance with ASTM E648, Class 1, Critical
Radiant Flux, minimum 0.45 watts/m2.
SD-04 Samples
Submit manufacturer's standard color charts for Entrance and Floor
Mats showing the manufacturer's recommended color and finish
selections.
Submit one sample 12 inch square, assembled sections of floor mat
to show corners, intersections, and other details of
construction. Provide any graphics in drawing for approval.
SECTION 12 48 13.13 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) for installed entrance and
floor mats.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT
The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has designated certain items
which must contain a specified percent range of recovered or recycled
materials. EPA designated products specified in this contract comply with
the stated policy and with the EPA guidelines. Make all reasonable efforts
to use recycled and recovered materials in providing the EPA designated
products and in otherwise utilizing recycled and recovered materials in the
execution of the work. These items, when incorporated into the work under
this contract, are to contain at least the specified percentage of recycled
or recovered materials unless adequate justification (non-availability)
for non-use is provided, per 40 CFR 247.
Mats are listed in the EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG ) at
http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/non-hw/procure/products/mats.htm.
EPA's recommended Recovered Materials Content Levels for Mats.
Product Material Percent Of Post Percent Of Total
Consumer Materials Recovered Materials
Mats Rubber 75 - 100 85 - 100
Plastic 10 - 100 100
Rubber/ 100 100
Plastic composite
The recommended recovered materials content levels are based on the dry
weight of the raw materials, exclusive of any additives such as adhesives,
binders, or coloring agents. EPA's recommendation does not preclude
procuring agencies from purchasing mats manufactured from another material.
It simply recommends that procuring agencies, when purchasing mats made
from rubber or plastic, purchase these items made from recovered materials.
For informational purposes, a list of known sources for mats using recycled
material is provided in the EPA/CPG Supplier database at
http://www.ergweb2.com/cpg4review/user/cpg_search.cfm.
Note that the Contractor is not limited to these sources. A product
meeting CPG recycle requirements from other sources may be submitted for
the Government's approval.
2.2 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
2.2.1 Materials
2.2.1.1 Aluminum
ASTM B 221, alloy 6105-T5, 6105-T6 for extrusions.
SECTION 12 48 13.13 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.1.2 Flexible and prime EPDM extrusions
2.2.2 Floor Mats
Extruded 6105-T5 aluminum alloy with 3/4" deep tread rails joined by an
EPDM hinge and cushion to compromise the overall grid length (traffic
direction). The hinge shall be complete with perforations between each
tread rail for drainage. Rail finish to be standard mill. Unit must
withstand 1000 lb. wheel loads (load applied to a 5” x 2” wide polyurethane
wheel, 1000 passes without damage).
Level Base Frame shall be a 1" (25.4mm) deep recessed frame in
6063-T6 aluminum alloy with a 1/4"(6.4mm) wide exposed surface. Black
vinyl fillers shall be furnished as required, when standard 1 1/2"
(38.1mm) tread spacing cannot be maintained. Installer shall use
recommended latex screed to ensure level base. Frame color shall be
supplied in standard mill finish. Note: Mill finish frames in contact
with concrete to be primer coated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DELIVERY OF MATERIALS
Deliver materials to the project site in their original packages or
containers bearing labels clearly identifying the manufacturer, brand name,
and quality or grade.
Store materials in their original unbroken packages or containers in the
area in which they will be installed. Unwrap, inspect, and place mats at
indicated location.
Remove and dispose all excess packing materials.
3.2 EXAMINATION
Comply with manufacture's requirements of substrates and floor conditions
for location, sizes, and other conditions affecting installation of floor
mats and frames.
Field measurements: Check actual openings for mats/grids by accurate field
measurements before fabrication. Record actual measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delay of work.
For recess application coordinate frame installation with concrete
construction to ensure recess and frame anchorage are accurate and that the
base is level and flat. Defer frame installation until building enclosure
is complete and related interior finish work is in progress.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Install only in satisfactory conditions. Comply with manufacturer's
written printed instructions for recessed mat frames. Set mat tops at
height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action.
Coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats
to provide clearance between doors and mat.
Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at
SECTION 12 48 13.13 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
proper elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth
and level. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's
written printed instructions at locations indicated. Coordinate with other
trades, entrance locations and traffic patterns.
3.4 PROTECTION
After completing required frame installation and concrete work, provide
temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recess, and cover frames
with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction
traffic has ended and project is near time of substantial completion.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 12 48 13.13 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
10/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
UFC 3-310-04 (2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for
Buildings
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 General Requirements
Apply the requirements for seismic protection measures described in this
section to the mechanical equipment and systems listed below. Structural
requirements shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC
PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
1.2.2 Mechanical Equipment
Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected shall include the
following items to the extent required on the drawings or in other sections
of these specifications:
Boilers
Water Heaters
Expansion Air Separator Tanks
Water Chiller Units
Cooling Towers
1.2.3 Items Not Covered By This Section
1.2.3.1 Fire Protection Systems
Seismic protection of piping for fire protection systems shall be installed
as specified in Sections 21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE
PROTECTION, 21 13 18.00 10 PREACTION AND DELUGE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS, FIRE
PROTECTION.
1.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 Rigidly Mounted Equipment
The following specific items of equipment: Boilers, Chillers, Air-Handling
Units and Cooling Towers to be furnished under this contract shall be
constructed and assembled to withstand the seismic forces specified in
UFC 3-310-04. Each item of rigid equipment shall be entirely located and
rigidly attached on one side only of a building expansion joint. Piping,
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
duct, electrical conduit, etc., which cross the expansion joint shall be
provided with flexible joints that are capable of accommodating
displacements equal to the full width of the joint in both orthogonal
directions.
Boilers
Chillers
Air-Handling Units
Cooling Towers
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Coupling and Bracing.
Equipment Requirements.
Detail drawings along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection
and installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed.
Submittals shall be complete in detail; shall indicate thickness,
type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions; and shall show
construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation
with relation to the building construction.
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment Requirements; G.
Copies of the design calculations with the detail drawings.
Calculations shall be stamped by a registered engineer and shall
verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is
attached for carrying the load from the brace.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
-- End of Section --
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 12 21 00
*1 WINDOW BLINDS
08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
designation only.
GREENGUARD ENVIRONMENTAL INSTITUTE (GEI)
GEI Greenguard Standards for Low Emitting
Products
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 701 (2010) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for
Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)
SCS Scientific Certification Systems
(SCS)Indoor Advantage
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SD-02 Shop Drawings; G
Installation
Drawings showing fabrication and installation details. Show
layout and locations of track, direction of draw, mounting
heights, and details.
SD-03 Product Data
Window Blinds
Installation
Certification
SD-04 Samples
Window Blinds
Samples of each type and color of window treatment. Provide
aluminum horizontal louver blind slats 6 inch in length for each
SECTION 12 21 00 Page 1 (Added by Amendment No. 0001)
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
color. Provide 6 inch sample of horizontal blind slats in each
color specified.
SD-06 Test Reports
Window Blinds
Fire resistance, Flame Spread, and smoke contribution data.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Window Blinds
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Window Blinds
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide window treatment, conforming to NFPA 701, complete with necessary
brackets, fittings, and hardware. Each window treatment type shall be a
complete unit provided in accordance with paragraph WINDOW TREATMENT
PLACEMENT SCHEDULE. Mount and operate equipment in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Windows to receive a treatment shall be
completely covered.
1.4 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CERTIFICATION
Product shall be third party certified by GEI Greenguard Indoor Air Quality
Certified, SCS Scientific Certification Systems Indoor Advantage or equal.
Certification shall be performed annually and shall be current.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver components to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original packaging
with the brand or company name, item identification, and project reference
clearly marked. Store components in a dry location that is adequately
ventilated and free from dust, water, or other contaminants and has easy
access for inspection and handling. Store materials flat in a clean dry
area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F. Do not open
containers until needed for installation unless verification inspection is
required.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
extend beyond a 1 year period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WINDOW BLINDS
Provide each blind, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets
and fastenings, as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer. All parts
shall be one color, unless otherwise indicated, to match the color of the
blind slat. Treat steel features for corrosion resistance.
SECTION 12 21 00 Page 2 (Added by Amendment No. 0001)
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.1 Horizontal Blinds
Provide horizontal blinds with 1 inch slats. Blind units shall be capable
of nominally 180 degree partial tilting operation and full-height raising.
Blinds shall be inside mount. Tapes for 1 inch slats shall be braided
polyester or nylon.
2.1.1.1 Head Channel and Slats
Provide head channel made of steel or aluminum with corrosion-resistant
finish nominal 0.024 inch for 1 inch slats. Provide slats of aluminum, not
less than 0.006 inch thick, and of sufficient strength to prevent sag or
bow in the finished blind. Provide a sufficient amount of slats to assure
proper control, uniform spacing, and adequate overlap. Enclose all
hardware in the headrail.
2.1.1.2 Controls
The slats shall be tilted by a transparent tilting wand, hung vertically by
its own weight, and shall swivel for easy operation. Provide a tilter
control of enclosed construction. Provide moving parts and mechanical
drive made of compatible materials which do not require lubrication during
normal expected life. The tilter shall tilt the slats to any desired angle
and hold them at that angle so that any vibration or movement of ladders
and slats will not drive the tilter and change the angle of slats. Include
a mechanism to prevent over tightening. Provide a wand of sufficient
length to reach to within 5 feet of the floor.
2.1.1.3 Intermediate Brackets
Provide intermediate brackets for installation, as recommended by the
manufacturer, of blinds over 60 inch wide.
2.1.1.4 Bottom Rail
Provide bottom rail made of corrosion-resistant steel with factory applied
finish. Provide closed oval shaped bottom rail with double-lock seam for
maximum strength. Bottom rail and end caps to match slats in color.
2.1.1.5 Braided Ladders
Provide braided ladders of 100 percent polyester yarn, color to match the
slat color. Space ladders 15.2 slats per foot of drop in order to provide
a uniform overlap of the slats in a closed position.
2.2 COLOR
Provide color, pattern and texture selected from manufacturer's standard
colors, white. Color listed is not intended to limit the selection of
equal colors from other manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify all dimensions in
the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work.
SECTION 12 21 00 Page 3 (Added by Amendment No. 0001)
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.2 WINDOW TREATMENT PLACEMENT SCHEDULE
Provide window covering as follows:
Room Name/Number Window Covering Type Quantity
105 JNCC CONFERENCE HB-1 1
106 SSP CHIEF HB-1 1
108 OPS HB-1 1
110 SPECTRUM MGMT HB-1 2
112 JNCC CHIEF&NCO HB-1 1
117 JTEP CHIEF HB-1 1
113 VTC HB-1 3
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Horizontal
Perform installation of Horizontal Blinds in accordance with the approved
detail drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions. Install
units level, plumb, secure, and at proper height and location relative to
window units. Provide and install supplementary or miscellaneous items in
total, including clips, brackets, or anchorages incidental to or necessary
for a sound, secure, and complete installation. Do not start installation
until completion of room painting and finishing operations.
3.4 CLEAN-UP
Upon completion of the installation, free window treatments from soiling,
damage or blemishes; and adjust them for form and appearance and proper
operating condition. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by the
Contracting Officer. Isolate metal parts from direct contact with
concrete, mortar, or dissimilar metals. Ensure blinds installed in
recessed pockets can be removable without disturbing the pocket. The
entire blind, when retracted, shall be contained behind the pocket. For
blinds installed outside the jambs and mullions, overlap each jamb and
mullion 0.75 inch or more when the jamb and mullion sizes permit. Include
all hardware, brackets, anchors, fasteners, and accessories necessary for a
complete, finished installation.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 12 21 00 Page 4 (Added by Amendment No. 0001)
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 14 24 00
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
02/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME A17.1 (2007; Addenda 2008) Safety Code for
Elevators and Escalators
ASME A17.2 (2007) Guide for Inspection of Elevators,
Escalators, and Moving Walks
ASME B16.11 (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
Threaded
ASME B16.9 (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought
Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 106/A 106M (2008) Standard Specification for Seamless
Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service
ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM D 92 (2005a) Standard Test Method for Flash and
Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup Tester
ASTM D 97 (2009) Pour Point of Petroleum Products
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
ICC IBC (2009; Errata First Printing)
International Building Code
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA MG 1 (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors
and Generators
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2011) National Electrical Code
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.27 Fixed Ladders
36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide a pre-engineered elevator system, by manufacturer regularly engaged
in the manufacture of elevator systems, that complies with ASME A17.1 and
ASME A17.2 in their entirety, and additional requirements specified herein.
1.2.1 Miscellaneous Requirements
Submit one set of wiring diagrams, in plastic or glass cover, framed and
mounted in elevator machine room for revised building electrical system, if
needed, to make supplied elevator system function as specified. Deliver
other sets to Contracting Officer. Coded diagrams are not acceptable
unless adequately identified. Submit calculations for the Reaction Loads
imposed on the building by and Heat Loads generated by the elevator system.
1.2.2 Provisions for Earthquake Protection
The facility is located in a seismic zone 3, and shall comply with all
ASME A17.1, Part 8.4 requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings; G
Detail drawings, as specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Passenger Elevators;
Information on motor, pump, gages, piston and cylinder, piping
and valves, hall station, and buffer on elevators and
accessories. For elevator supporting systems, include information
on car control and emergency power systems. On data sheets,
provide document identification number or bulletin number,
published or copyrighted prior to the date of contract bid opening.
Field Quality Control
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
A plan detailing the testing procedures 60 days prior to
performing the elevator tests.
Logic Control
Microprocessor control system, including appropriate hardware
and software and other specified requirements.
SD-05 Design Data
Reaction Loads
Calculations of reaction loads imposed on building by elevator
system that comply with ASME A17.1. Calculations shall be
certified by a Registered Professional Engineer. Do not fabricate
materials nor perform construction until approved by Contracting
Officer.
Heat Loads
Calculations for total anticipated heat loads generated by all
the elevator machine room equipment. A Registered Professional
Engineer shall provide certified calculations. Do not fabricate
materials nor perform construction until approved by the
Contracting Officer.
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Tests Reports
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed
to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove
compliance with the specified performance criteria, within 14 days
after the successful completion of testing the installed system.
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications
A letter no later than 14 days after the Notice to Proceed
providing the name and Statement of Qualifications, including
ASME A17.1 Certificate and all required state and local licenses
of the individual who will perform the duties specified herein for
the Elevator Inspector. A letter of endorsement from the
elevator manufacturer certifying that the Elevator Specialist is
acceptable to manufacturer no later than 14 days after the Notice
to Proceed providing the name and Statement of Qualifications of
the individual who will perform the duties specified herein for
the Elevator Specialist. Copies of certified welders'
qualifications, demonstrating compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
Section 4; list welders' names with corresponding code marks.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Maintenance and Diagnostic Tools
Maintenance and Repair Action Plan
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Data package in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AMD
MAINNTENANCE DATA. Three Operation and Maintenance Manuals, 28
days prior to the Operation and Maintenance Training. Include a
list of phone numbers, personnel contacts, and all tools required
for operation and maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Training;
Proposed Onsite Training schedule, submitted concurrently with
the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Elevator Specialist
Perform work specified in this section under the direct guidance of the
Elevator Specialist who is regularly engaged in the installation and
maintenance of the type and complexity of elevator system specified in the
contract documents, and who served in a similar capacity for at least three
systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less
than 24 months. Provide endorsement letter from the elevator manufacturer
certifying that the Elevator Specialist is acceptable to manufacturer. The
Elevator Specialist oversees the acceptance inspections and tests, signs
and certifies the successful results. Provide the Elevator Specialist's
written certification that the installation is in accordance with the
contract requirements, after completion of the acceptance inspections and
tests. Bring any discrepancy to the attention of the Contracting Officer
in writing, no later than three working days after the discrepancy is
discovered.
1.4.2 Elevator Inspector
The Elevator Inspector will be provided by the Government to inspect the
installation of the elevator(s) to ensure that the installation conforms to
all contract requirements. The Elevator Inspector will witness the
acceptance inspections and tests, approve all results, and shall sign and
certify the successful results. The Elevator Inspector, after completion
of the acceptance inspections and tests, will provide written certification
that the installation is accordance with the contract requirements.
1.4.3 Welders' Qualifications
Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 4 Qualification. Provide certified
copies of welders' qualifications. List welders'names with corresponding
code marks to identify each welder's work.
1.4.4 Detail Drawings
Submit detail drawings, including dimensioned layouts in plan and elevation
showing the arrangement of elevator equipment, accessories, supporting
systems, anchorage of equipment, clearances for maintenance and operation;
and details on hoistway, doors and frames, operation and signal stations,
controllers, motors, guide rails and brackets, cylinder and plunge unit,
and points of interface with normal power fire alarm system HVAC or exhaust
systems and interface with emergency power systems. Provide drawings to
show any revised building electrical system required to make supplied
elevator system function as specified. Prepare drawings with complete
wiring diagrams showing electrical connections and other details required
to demonstrate sequence of operations and functions of system devices.
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Include the appropriate sizing of electrical protective devices on the
drawings, which are frequently different from National Electrical Code
standard sizes.
1.5 SCHEDULING
Every six months, test systems for Emergency Power Operation, Earthquake
Emergency Operations, and Firefighters' Service. Schedule to not interfere
with building operations. For Firefighters' Service, test monthly in
accordance with ASME A17.1, Section 8.6.10.1. Provide written results of
each test operation to the Contracting Officer. Document all inspection
and testing. Maintain copy of documentation in machine room.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide routine warranty service in accord with manufacturer's warranty
requirements, for a period of 12 months after the date of acceptance by
Contracting Officer. Perform work during regular working hours. During
the warranty service period, include 24-hour emergency service, with 1
hour response time, without additional cost to the Government. Include
adjustments, greasing, oiling, and cleaning. Provide routine inspection
and tests of elevators in accordance with ASME A17.1 Section 8.11.3 and
ASME A17.2. Provide supplies and parts to keep elevator system in
operation. Perform service only by factory trained personnel. Maintain a
maintenance log of all service orders performed during the warranty period
and submit it to the Contracting Officer 21 days prior to the end of the
warranty period.
1.7 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTION PLAN
Provide plan of action prepared by the Elevator Specialist for emergency
and routine maintenance in accordance with paragraph titled WARRANTY.
Provide a list of phone numbers, personnel contacts, and all maintenance
and diagnostic tools provided by paragraph "Maintenance and Diagnostic
Tools", to the Contracting Officer.
1.7.1 Maintenance and Diagnostic Tools
Provide all special tools and software necessary to service and maintain
each elevator delivered at time of final acceptance. Provide one of each
tool per group of elevators. Include solid state or microprocessor
diagnostic tools unavailable on the open market. Provide necessary
diagnostic software in cases where the solid state or microprocessor
diagnostic tools are available on the open market
1.7.2 Keys for Elevator Key Switches
Provide a minimum of twelve keys per unique cylinder used on all key
switches for single elevator. If there is more than one elevator,
additional keys are not required unless there are additional unique
cylinders. Provide keys with brass or fiberglass tags marked 'PROPERTY OF
THE U.S. GOVERNMENT' on one side with function of key or approved code
number on other side.
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PASSENGER ELEVATORS
2.1.1 Basic Requirements
a. Rated Load: 4000 lbs.
b. Rated Speed: 150 fpm.
c. Travel Length: 46'-0" ft..
d. Number of Stops: 4
e. Number of Hoist Way Openings: 4 Front
f. Car Inside Dimensions: 7'-8" ft.-in. wide, 5'-5" ft.-in. deep and
8'-6" ft.-in. high.
g. Car Cab Height: 9'-0" high
h. Car Door Types: Single-speed center opening 4'-0" (Front Door Only)
i. Type: Conventional car with a well hole drilled for the hydraulic
cylinder
j. Voltage/phase: 460 Volt, 3 phase
2.1.2 Cab Enclosures and Door Finishes
Provide finishes as indicated.
a. Floor; carpet CPT-1.
b. Walls; 5WL patterned stainless steel walls with brushed stainless
steel base at rear and side walls. Brushed stainless steel at front
wall with column type returns. Provide each cab wall with equally
spaced and equally sized wall panels. Conceal all fasteners. Wall
trim. Accessories; 1.5" Diameter hand rails with staight ends, brushed
stainless steel finish, at rear wall only.Protection Pads and Buttons
c. Interior face of door(s); brushed stainless steel.
d. Ceilings; island type brushed stainless steel panel with perimeter
flourescent cove type lighting and circular cutouts with (6)
translucent diffusers. Ceiling frame; concealed. Emergency Exit;
concealed
e. Hoistway Doors and Frame Finishes; provide finishes on exterior of
hoistway as follows:
(1) Frame; brushed stainless steel.
(2) Exterior face of door; brushed stainless steel.
2.2 SPECIAL OPERATION AND CONTROL
Provide all special operations and control systems in accordance with
ASME A17.1. Provide special operation key switches with 5 pin cylinder
locks with removable cores an a key control lock for each operation system.
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.1 Firefighters' Service
Provide equipment and signaling devices. The designated level for
Firefighters' key operated switch is the ground floor.
2.2.2 Smoke Detectors
Provide connections directly to elevator controls which will, when smoke is
detected by any smoke detector, actuate Firefighters' Service and send each
elevator to the correct floor as required by ASME A17.1. Provide
dual-contact smoke detectors located in the elevator lobbies and the
elevator machine room. Provide dual-contact smoke detector at top of
hoistway. Include only these smoke detectors with the circuit for elevator
controller actuation of Firefighters' Service. In lieu of dual-contact
smoke detectors, use an addressable fire alarm system with listed smoke
detectors in the above stated locations. Ensure that all smoke detectors
are mounted on finished ceiling.
2.2.3 Fire Sprinklers
For each elevator, provide control wiring connecting the flow switch to the
shunt trip equipped circuit breaker within the electrical panel serving the
main line disconnect. Upon flow of water, equip flow switch to
instantaneously send a signal to cause opening of shunt-trip equipped
mainline circuit breaker, in compliance with ASME A17.1, Section 2.8.2, and
send a signal to fire alarm control panel to indicate water flow
condition. Provide machine room sprinkler flow switch actuation to shunt
trip all elevator(s) served by the machine room. Provide hoistway
sprinkler flow switch actuation to shunt trip all elevator(s) in the
hoistway.
2.2.4 Top-of-Car Operating Device
Provide operating device mounted on or from car crosshead, to permit
operation of car at 150 fpm maximum for adjustment, maintenance, testing,
and repair. Include integral or remote safety device, continuous pressure
"UP" and "DOWN" switches or buttons, emergency stop switch, and inspection
switch.
2.2.5 Hoistway Access Switches
Provide key-operated hoistway access switch to permit limited movement of
car at terminal floors for car positioning, operative only when
"INSPECTION" switch in car operating panel is in the "INSPECTION"
position. Locate switch 6 feet above floor level, within 12 inches of
hoistway entrance frame.
2.2.6 Independent Service
Provide exposed key-operated switch in car operating panel to enable
independent service and simultaneously disable in-car signals and
landing-call responses. Provide indicator lights that automatically
illuminate during independent service.
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.2.7 Elevator Operation
2.2.7.1 Single, Two-Stop, Automatic Operation
Provide Single Two-Stop Automatic Operation. Provide illuminating push
buttons.
2.2.7.2 Selective Collective Automatic Operation
Provide Selective Collective Automatic Operation. Provide illuminating
push buttons.
2.2.8 Parking Switch
Provide two-position parking switch in car station service cabinet. One
position causes car to remain parked at floor landing where last used;
other position causes car to park at main floor.
2.3 ELEVATOR DRIVE SYSTEM
Provide hydraulic pump unit, piping, cylinder/plunger assembly, and rated
equipment in accordance with ASME A17.1, which will operate at a maximum
working pressure of less than 400 psig.
2.3.1 Hydraulic Pump Unit
Provide submersible power unit with 50 HP motor. Provide self-contained
unit including oil-hydraulic elevator pump, electric motor, drive assembly,
oil strainer in suction line, structural steel outer base with tank and
supports, oil-tight drip pan, and inner pump-mounting base. Limit acoustic
output of elevator machine to 80 dbA. Provide sound-insulating panels to
isolate airborne noise from non oil-immersed pump-motor assembly. Provide
ventilation to cool hydraulic pump unit. Finish ferrous surfaces with
rust-inhibiting paint. Provide tank capacity for full plunger displacement
plus at least 10 gallons.
2.3.2 Hydraulic Controls and Equipment
Provide electrically operated "UP" valve, constant velocity "DOWN" valve,
"UP" and "DOWN" leveling valves, "BYPASS UPON STARTING" valve, check valve,
vacuum relief valve, automatic shutoff (rupture) valve, safety relief
valve, manually operated lowering valve, and scavenger pump unit.
2.3.2.1 Manual Shutoff Valves
Provide 1/4 turn ball valve rated at 300 psi at elevator hydraulic pump
suction inlet if pump is mounted outside the oil reservoir and the suction
line exits the reservoir below the maximum oil level in the reservoir.
Provide 1/4 turn ball valve rated at 600 psi at elevator pump discharge
line in the machine room and in the oil supply line next to and on the pump
side of the automatic shutoff valve in the pit.
2.3.2.2 Manual Lowering Valve
Limit car descending speed under manual operation to 20 fpm. Provide rigid
plastic red tag for valve identification, inscribed "MANUAL LOWERING VALVE."
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.3.2.3 Pump Discharge Strainer
Provide strainer in pump discharge to prevent foreign materials from
entering control system and cylinder-plunger unit (jack).
2.3.2.4 Muffler
Provide blowout-proof muffler, containing pulsation-absorbing materials in
oil line between pump unit and jack.
2.3.2.5 Pressure Switch
Where cylinders are installed with top of cylinder above top of oil
reservoir, provide pressure switch in oil line between cylinder and
electric lowering valve(s) to prevent operation of lowering valve(s) unless
positive pressure exists at top of cylinder.
2.3.2.6 Scavenger Pump Unit
Provide a scavenge oil reservoir, an electrically operated oil transfer
pump, scavenge oil lines, a strainer, and pump controls. Connect the
scavenge oil reservoir to the elevator cylinder between the plunger packing
area and the plunger drip (wiper) ring, to capture the oil leaking by the
plunger pressure packing. Provide a vacuum relief valve. Connect the
scavenge oil pump suction to the scavenge oil reservoir and the strainer,
and the discharge to the elevator oil reservoir. Provide a scavenge oil
reservoir level switch to control the scavenge oil pump. Scavenger pump
shall operate independently of elevator hydraulic fluid pressure. Provide
a manual-reset pit flood switch to prevent pump operation if pit is
flooded. Anchor pump and oil reservoir to the pit floor.
2.3.2.7 Piping and Accessories
Provide ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Schedule 80, black steel
piping with ASME B16.9 and ASME B16.11 fittings. Extend Schedule 80 piping
from the pump control valve body, inside the pump unit, to the hydraulic
cylinder in the hoistway. Provide dielectric union at each end of the
"pump to cylinder" oil supply line. Provide hangers or supports for all
piping. Provide welded or threaded forged pipe fittings that are located
between the shut off valve and the cylinder inlet.
2.3.2.8 Low Oil Condition
Provide device for each elevator to protect pumping equipment in event oil
level is too low. When device is in operation, the pump and motor shall
stop, causing car to descend to lowest landing, open car doors and cease
elevator operation except for door control circuits. Provide illuminating
indicator on machine room control panel to alert upon a low oil condition.
2.3.2.9 Oil Characteristics
a. Viscosity, Saybolt Universal Seconds 145 to 160 at 100 degrees F.
b. Pour Point, ASTM D 97, -15 degrees F maximum.
c. American Petroleum Institute (API) Gravity 29 to 33 at 60 degrees F.
d. Flash Point, ASTM D 92, 375 degrees F minimum.
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.3.2.10 Oil Temperature Device
Provide means to maintain oil temperature between 60 and 100 degrees F
regardless of ambient temperature.
2.3.3 Cylinder-Plunger Unit
Provide a indirect plunger type hydraulic elevator. Provide a plunger of
single-piece seamless steel construction. Provide stop plate or ring
welded to bottom of the plunger. Provide packing and wiper (drip) ring
with outlet for connection to the scavenge oil reservoir to collect leakage
oil from cylinder for either inspecting for contamination or returning to
tank. Use only standard packing glands with bolts that compress packing.
Provide threaded 1/4 inch bleeder valve at top of cylinder just below
packing gland. Telescopic cylinder-plunger units are not acceptable.
2.3.4 Cylinder Protection
Protect the cylinder with a pipe-manufacturer applied "Applied Extruded
Coating." Include the following steps as a minimum for the AEC coating
application process: blast clean the bare pipe exterior surfaces to white
metal, apply a minimum of 0.010 inch undercoating of heated butyl rubber
adhesive; and apply a minimum of 0.040 inch thickness overcoating of
polyethylene, hot extruded over the undercoating. Free the overcoating of
surface blemishes, cracks, voids, and contamination from foreign
substances. Provide field pipe joints and coating repairs with field
applied coatings covered with heat-shrinkable pipe sleeves, following the
cylinder manufacturer's instructions. Protect the AEC coating from damage
until the cylinder is set into the cylinder well, plumbed, and aligned.
2.3.5 Automatic Shutoff Valve
Provide automatic shut-off valve in oil supply line as close to cylinder
inlet as possible. Provide threaded pipe connections to the valve. When
there is ten percent drop in NO-LOAD operating pressure, activate the
automatic shut-off valve. When activated, the device must immediately stop
descent of the elevator and hold the elevator until lowered by use of the
manual lowering feature of the valve. Configure the manual lowering
feature of the automatic shut-off valve to limit the descending speed of
the elevator to 20 fpm. Provide exposed adjustments of the automatic
shut-off valve with means of adjustment sealed by certified elevator
inspector after being set to correct position and tested in accordance with
Paragraph Automatic Shutoff Valve Tests.
2.3.6 Motors
Provide submersible power unit with 50 HP motor. Provide NEMA MG 1
induction motors with squirrel cage, motors with drip-proof enclosure,460
volt / 3 phase, continuous rated, maximum 1800 rpm, and Class F insulation
rated at 120 starts per hour.
2.3.6.1 Insulation Resistance and Motor Nameplate Data
Provide minimum of one megohm insulation resistance between conductors and
motor frame. Provide motor nameplate listing rated wattage (horsepower),
speed, and ampere, permanently mounted in position visible to viewer
without use of special tools, such as a mirror. Provide motor and pump
data on the outside of machine frame.
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.3.6.2 Maximum Allowable Motor Amperage
Do not exceed its own nameplate amperage when the motor is running and the
elevator is lifting rated load at rated speed.
2.4 CONTROL EQUIPMENT
NFPA 70 and ASME A17.1, Section 3.26. Provide elevator motor controller of
magnetic reduced-voltage resistance or wye-delta start with overload relays
in each line and reverse phase relay. Provide controls for sequential
starting, stopping, and speed of elevator and to give specified operation.
Enclose control equipment in factory-primed and baked-enamel coated
sheet-metal cabinets with removable or hinged doors and ventilation louvers.
2.4.1 Self-Leveling and Anti-Creep Device
Provide each elevator with two-way, automatic self-leveling device that
brings car floor to within 1/4 inch of level with floor landing regardless
of load, position of hoistway door, or direction of travel.
2.5 OPERATING PANELS, SIGNAL FIXTURES, AND COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS
2.5.1 Capacity and Data Plates
Attach faceplates with spanner security screws. On car panel, provide
stainless steel capacity and data plates, with name of elevator
manufacturer.
2.5.2 Car and Hall Buttons
Provide recessed tamper-proof push buttons of minimum 3/4 inch size
satin-finish stainless steel, with illuminating jewel center.
2.5.3 Hall Station Door Operating Buttons
Identical in size and design to hall call buttons, but not illuminating.
2.5.4 Passenger Car-Operating Panel
Provide each car with one car operating panel that contains operation
controls and communication devices. Provide exposed, flush mounted buttons
for the controls that must be passenger accessible. Provide service
cabinet or keyed switches for those switches that should not be passenger
accessible. Allow maximum 48 inch height between car floor and center line
of top operating buttons. Allow 35 inch height between car floor and
center line of bottom button. Use engraving and backfilling or photo
etching for button and switch designations. Do not use attached signs.
2.6 PASSENGER CONTROLS
2.6.1 Passenger Car-Operating Panel
a. Illuminating operating call buttons identified to correspond
to landings served by elevator car.
b. "DOOR OPEN" and "DOOR CLOSE" buttons.
c. Keyed "STOP" switch in accordance with ASME A17.1, rule 2.26.2.
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 11
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
d. "ALARM" button in compliance with UFAS, ADA, and ASME A17.1,
Rule 2.27.1. Furnish a red alarm button with engraved legend
"ALARM." Allow alarm button to illuminate when pushed. Locate
"ALARM" button at panel bottom.
e. "FIRE DEPARTMENT" key switch, with "OFF-HOLD-ON" positions, in
that order with key to be removable in all positions. Provide
fire sign or jewel, and audible signal device, in accordance with
ASME A17.1 Section 2.27.3. Both visual and audible signals are
activated when Phase I key switch in hall is activated or when
smoke detector activates return of elevator(s) to main fire
response floor. Keep visual and audible signal activated until
car has reached main or designated alternate fire response floor.
Upon arrival at fire response floor visual signal remains
illuminated and audible signal becomes silent.
f. Emergency two-way communication. Provide momentary pressure,
single illuminating pushbutton operated communication device that
complies with ASME A17.1, UFAS, and the Americans with
Disabilities Act.
2.6.1.1 Service Controls
a. Inspection switch that transfers car control to top-of-car
inspection operating controls and prevents car operation from
in-car control panel.
b. Independent service switch.
c. Fan switch, two-speed.
d. 120-volt ac 60 Hz single-phase duplex electrical outlet of
ground-fault-circuit-interrupt (GFCI) design.
2.6.1.2 Certificate Window
Provide 4 inch high by 6 inch wide certificate window in car operating
panel for elevator inspection certificate.
2.6.2 Switches and Devices
Provide elevator manufacturer's standard grade for switches and devices on
car operating panel. Legibly and indelibly identify each device and its
operating positions. Locate car dispatching buttons in identical positions
in car operating panels for corresponding floors.
2.6.3 In-Car Position and Direction Indicator and Signal
Include in-car direction indicator in the in-car position indicator fixture.
2.6.3.1 In-Car Position Indicator and Signal
Provide horizontal electrical or electronic digital position indicator
located minimum of 84 inch above car floor. Arrange indicator to show
floor position of car in hoistway and its traveling direction. Indicate
position by illuminating of numeral or letter corresponding to landing at
which car is passing or stopping. Provide audible signal to alert
passenger that elevator is passing or stopping at a floor. Provide audible
signals exceeding ambient noise level by at least 20 dbA with frequency not
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 12
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
higher than 1500 Hz.
2.6.3.2 In-Car Direction Indicator and Signal
Provide visual and audible car direction indicators in car, indicating car
traveling direction. For visual directional signal, provide arrow of
minimum 2-1/2 inch in size. Use equilateral triangles for arrows, green
for upward direction and red for downward direction. Provide audible
signal that sounds once for upward direction and twice for downward
direction.
2.6.4 Landing Position and Direction Indicator and Signal
Provide a single fixture containing the landing position and direction
indicator.
2.7 HOISTWAY AND CAR EQUIPMENT
2.7.1 Guide Rails and Fastenings
Paint rail shanks with one coat black enamel. Only T-section type rail is
acceptable.
2.7.2 Car Buffers
Provide buffer data plate on each buffer.
2.7.3 Pit Equipment
2.7.3.1 Pit "STOP" Switch
Provide push/pull type pit "STOP" switch for stopping elevator motor,
independent of regular operating device. Locate on same side of hoistway
as ladder.
2.7.3.2 Ladders
Provide galvanized steel ladder conforming to 29 CFR 1910.27 with minimum 7
inch distance between rung and wall. Locate ladder on hoistway side wall
closest to hoistway door opening.
2.7.3.3 Lighting of Pits
Locate pit light not less than 6 feet above pit floor. Locate switch on
same side of hoistway as ladder. Provide GFCI duplex receptacle in each
pit.
2.8 TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES
Provide each elevator with a terminal stopping device.
2.8.1 Wiring and Traveling Cables
Suspend traveling cables by means of self-tightening webbed devices.
2.8.2 Emergency Signaling Device
Provide audible signaling device, operable from Car Operating Panel button
marked "ALARM". Mount the audible signaling device in hoistway.
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 13
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.9 PASSENGER CAR AND HOISTWAY DOOR ACCESSORIES
ASME A17.1, Sections 2.12, 2.13, 2.14, and 3. Provide infra-red curtain
unit (ICU) with multiple infra-red beams that protect to the full height of
the door opening. Extend minimum coverage from 2 inchs off the floor to 70
inch above floor level. Door operation must meet the requirements of
ASME A17.1 Rule 2.27.1 and 2.13.5. Provide high-speed electric operator,
safety interlocks for car and hoistway doors, and electric safety contact
to prevent car operation unless doors are closed.
2.10 PASSENGER ELEVATOR GUIDES, FRAME, PLATFORM, AND ENCLOSURE
2.10.1 Roller Guides
Provide roller guide assemblies in adjustable mountings on each side of car
in accurate alignment at top and bottom of car frame.
2.10.2 Car Enclosure, Car Door, and Car Illumination
Provide natural and forced ventilation, stainless steel hooks, with fire
retardant pads.
2.10.2.1 Return Panels, Entrance Columns, Cove Base, and Transom
Provide 14 gauge minimum non perforated steel. Apply sound-deadening
mastic on car shell and all exterior components.
2.10.2.2 Car Top
Provide reinforced 12 gauge minimum steel with hinged emergency exit
openable by hand from car top only. Provide electrical contact which
prevents operation of elevator when emergency exit is open. Provide
sound-deadening mastic on all exterior components.
2.10.2.3 Car Door
Provide 16 gauge minimum steel, sandwich construction without binder
angles. Provide a minimum of 2 door guide assembles per door panel, one
guide at leading and one at trailing door edge with guides in the sill
groove their entire length of travel.
2.10.2.4 Car Entrance Sill
Provide one piece cast solid nickel silver entrance sill. Set sills level
and flush with floor finish. Use same material for hoistway and car
entrance sills.
2.11 PASSENGER ELEVATOR HOISTWAY DOORS AND ENTRANCES
Provide hoistway entrance assemblies which have a minimum 1-1/2 hour fire
rating.
2.11.1 Hoistway Entrance Frames
Frame of 14 gauge thick prefinished carbon sheet steel. Solidly grout
uprights of entrances to height of 5 feet.
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 14
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.11.2 Hoistway Entrance Sills
Provide one-piece cast solidnickel silver entrance sills. After sill is
set level and flush with finished floor height, solidly grout under full
length of sill. Use same material for hoistway and car door sills.
2.11.3 Hoistway Entrance Doors
Provide hoistway entrance door constructed with hollow metal non-vision
construction with flush surfaces on car and landing sides. Provide a
minimum of 2 door guide assembles per door panel, one guide at leading edge
and one at trailing door edge with guides in the sill groove the entire
length of travel.
2.11.4 Entrance Fascias and Dust Covers
Provide sheet metal hoistway door track dust covers at each landing. Dust
covers must cover door locks and door roller tracks and extend the full
width of the door track and associated hardware.
2.11.5 Hoistway Ventilation
Provide hoistway ventilation directly to outside air by fixed louver
through top of hoistway or through side wall of hoistway at top of
hoistway. The net size of the louver shall be a minimum of 3'x3' or 3.5
percent of the cross section of each hoistway.
2.12 HANDICAPPED AND MEDICAL SERVICES ACCESS
2.12.1 Provision For Handicapped
Refer to 36 CFR 1191, Sections 4.10 for Elevators, 4.30 for Signage, and
4.31 for Telephones.
2.12.2 Emergency Medical Service
ICC IBC - Chapter 30, for elevators and signage
2.13 EMERGENCY POWER OPERATION
Upon outage of normal power and initiation of emergency power, provide
circuitry and wiring to operate elevator telephone to accomplish operation
sequences. For single elevator system, elevator travels automatically to
main floor, opens doors, and automatically places itself in regular
service. During emergency power operation, provide a sign reading
"EMERGENCY POWER" flashing in each car station. At the same time, provide
operable Firefighters' Service.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, ASME A17.1,
36 CFR 1191, and NFPA 70.
3.1.1 Automatic Shutoff Valve
Locate in supply-return line, as close as possible to cylinder-plunger unit.
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 15
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.1.2 Structural Members
Do not cut or alter. Restore any damaged or defaced work to original
condition.
3.1.3 Safety Guards
Completely enclose selector cables or tapes exposed to possibility of
accidental contact in machine room with 16 gage thick sheet metal or
expanded metal guards, both horizontally and vertically. Protect exposed
gears, sprockets, and selector drums from accidental contact in accordance
with ASME A17.1.
3.1.4 Other Requirements
Include recesses, cutouts, slots, holes, patching, grouting, and
refinishing to accommodate elevator installation. Use core drilling to
drill all new holes in concrete. Finish work to be straight, level, and
plumb. During installation, protect machinery and equipment from dirt,
water, or mechanical damage. At completion, clean all work, and spot
paint. Completion of firefighters' service includes installation and
wiring of all smoke detectors in accordance with ASME A17.1, Section
2.27.3.2. Coordinate smoke detector installation for firefighters' service.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
a. After completing elevators system installation, notify Contracting
Officer that elevator system is ready for final inspection and
acceptance test.
b. Perform all required tests and demonstrate proper operation of each
elevator system and prove that each system complies with contract
requirements and ASME A17.1. Inspection procedures in ASME A17.2 form
a part of this inspection and acceptance testing. Conduct all testing
and inspections in the presence of both the Elevator Specialist and the
Elevator Inspector. Demonstrate the proper operation of all equipment
at various date settings, selected by the Elevator Inspector, ranging
from the date of contract award through 1 January 2099.
c. The Elevator Inspector shall complete, sign and post the results of
all tests and inspection results after successful completion of
inspection and testing. The Contractor is responsible for all costs
involved with reinspection and retesting required to correct
discrepancies discovered during testing and the subsequent retesting
required, including all costs and expenses incurred by the Government
Furnished Inspector.
3.2.1 Testing Materials and Instruments
Provide testing materials and instruments required for final inspection.
Include calibrated test weights, tachometer, 600-volt megohm meter, volt
meter and ammeter, three Celsius calibrated thermometers, door pressure
gage, spirit level, stop watch, hydraulic pressure test gauge, and a 100
foot tape measure.
3.2.2 Field Tests
Submit Field Tests Reports after completing each of the specified tests, as
required in the Submittals paragraph.
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 16
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.2.2.1 Endurance Tests
Test each elevator for a period of one hour continuous run, with specified
rated load in the car. Restart the one hour test period from beginning,
following any shutdown or failure. During the test run, stop car at each
floor in both directions of travel for standing period of 10 seconds per
floor. The requirements for Rated Speed, Leveling, Temperature Rise, and
Motor Amperes testing specified herein must be met throughout the duration
of the Endurance test.
3.2.2.2 Automatic Shutoff Valve Tests
Test the automatic shutoff valve twice. Once at beginning of acceptance
test and again at conclusion of one-hour Endurance test to ensure
consistent performance of shutoff valve, regardless of temperature of
equipment and oil.
3.2.2.3 Speed Tests
Determine actual speed of each elevator in both directions with rated load
and with no load in elevator car. Make Speed tests before and immediately
after Endurance test. Determine speed by tachometer reading, excluding
accelerating and slow-down zones in accordance with ASME A17.2, Section
2.22.4. Minimum acceptable speed is the Rated Speed as specified. Maximum
acceptable elevator speed is 110 percent of Rated Speed.
3.2.2.4 Leveling Tests
Test elevator car leveling devices for landing accuracy of plus or minus
1/4 inch at each floor with no load in car, symmetrical load in car, and
with rated load in car in both directions of travel. Determine accuracy of
floor landing both before and immediately after endurance tests.
3.2.2.5 Pressure Tests
Check operating pressure at pump and cylinder head under no load and rated
load. Test pressure at which relief valve operates.
3.2.2.6 Insulation Resistance Tests
Perform tests to ensure wiring systems free from short circuits and
grounds. Minimum acceptable insulation resistance for electrical
conductors is one megohm between each conductor and ground and between each
conductor and other conductors. Prior to megohm meter test, make provision
to prevent damage to the electronic devices.
3.2.2.7 Temperature Rise Tests
Determine the temperature rise of the hydraulic pump motor during the full
load test run for a minimum of one hour. Under these conditions, do not
exceed maximum acceptable temperature rise indicated on the manufacturer's
data plate. Start test only when equipment is within 5 degrees C of
ambient temperature.
3.2.2.8 Motor Ampere Tests
Measure and record motor amperage when motor is running and elevator is
lifting at rated load and speed. Measure and record motor amperage at the
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 17
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
beginning and the end of Endurance test.
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING
The Elevator Specialist shall instruct Government personnel in care,
adjustment, and maintenance of elevator equipment for a period of not less
than 5 working days immediately following acceptance of system. Submit
Operation and Maintenance Manuals as required in the Submittals paragraph.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 14 24 00 Page 18
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
05/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C104/A21.4 (2008) Cement-Mortar Lining for
Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water
AWWA C110/A21.10 (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings
for Water
AWWA C111/A21.11 (2000) Rubber-Gasket Joints for
Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
AWWA C151/A21.51 (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally
Cast, for Water
AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and
Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel
and Tape - Hot-Applied
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B16.1 (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.11 (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
Threaded
ASME B16.21 (2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
Flanges
ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,
Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.4 (2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.9 (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought
Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ASME B18.2.2 (1987; R 2005) Standard for Square and Hex
Nuts (Inch Series)
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 135/A 135M (2009) Standard Specification for
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe
ASTM A 183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
ASTM A 193/A 193M (2009) Standard Specification for
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High-Temperature Service
ASTM A 449 (2007b) Specification for Hex Cap Screws,
Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,
General Use
ASTM A 47/A 47M (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A 563 (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon
and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A 795/A 795M (2008) Standard Specification for Black
and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire
Protection Use
ASTM F 436 (2009) Hardened Steel Washers
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM P7825a (2009) Approval Guide Fire Protection
FM P7825b (2009) Approval Guide Electrical Equipment
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-71 (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check
Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 13 (2007) Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 14 (2010) Standard for the Installation of
Standpipe, Private Hydrants and Hose
Systems
NFPA 1963 (2009) Standard for Fire Hose Connections
NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of
Private Fire Service Mains and Their
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Appurtenances
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES
(NICET)
NICET 1014-7 (2003) Program Detail Manual for
Certification in the Field of Fire
Protection Engineering Technology (Field
Code 003) Subfield of Automatic Sprinkler
System Layout
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 668 (2004; Rev thru Aug 2008) Hose Valves for
Fire Protection Service
UL Bld Mat Dir (2009) Building Materials Directory
UL Fire Prot Dir (2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Furnish piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories as required to
provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other
construction. Install sprinkler system over and under ducts, piping and
platforms when such equipment can negatively effect or disrupt the
sprinkler discharge pattern and coverage. Provide wet pipe sprinkler and
standpipe system in all areas of the building except in areas with
preaction systems. Except as modified herein, the systems shall be
designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Rack
sprinklers shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. Pipe sizes which are not
indicated on drawings shall be determined by hydraulic calculation. Design
any portions of the sprinkler system that are not indicated on the drawings
including locating sprinklers, piping and equipment, and size piping and
equipment when this information is not indicated on the drawings or is not
specified herein. The design of the sprinkler system shall be based on
hydraulic calculations, and the other provisions specified herein.
1.2.1 Hydraulic Design
Hydraulically design the system to discharge a minimum density of 0.10 gpm
per 3,000 sq feet for light hazard, 0.15 gpm per 3,000 sq feet for ordinary
hazard group I and 0.20 gpm per 3,000 sq feet for ordinary hazard group II.
The minimum pipe size for branch lines in gridded systems shall be 1-1/4
inch. Hydraulic calculations shall be in accordance with the Area/Density
Method of NFPA 13. Water velocity in the piping shall not exceed 20 ft/s.
1.2.1.1 Hose Demand
Add an allowance for exterior hose streams of 250 gpm for light hazard and
500 gpm for ordinary hazardto the sprinkler system demand.
1.2.1.2 Basis for Calculations
The design of the system shall be based upon a water supply with a static
pressure, and a flow of at a residual pressure as determined by hydrant
flow tests performed by the sprinkler contractor in accordance with NFPA
291. Water supply shall be presumed available at the point of connection
to existing. Hydraulic calculations shall be based upon the Hazen-Williams
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
formula with a "C" value of 120 for steel piping, 150 for copper tubing,
140 for new cement-lined ductile-iron piping, and 100 for existing
underground piping. See drawings for preliminary hydrant flow test
information.
1.2.1.3 Hydraulic Calculations
Prepare hydraulic calculations as outlined in NFPA 13, except that
calculations shall be performed by computer using software intended
specifically for fire protection system design using the design data shown
on the drawings. Software that uses k-factors for typical branch lines is
not acceptable. Calculations shall be based on the water supply data
determined by hydrant flow tests to substantiate that the design area used
in the calculations is the most demanding hydraulically. Water supply
curves and system requirements shall be plotted on semi-logarithmic graph
paper so as to present a summary of the complete hydraulic calculation.
Provide a summary sheet listing sprinklers in the design area and their
respective hydraulic reference points, elevations, actual discharge
pressures and actual flows. Elevations of hydraulic reference points
(nodes) shall be indicated. Documentation shall identify each pipe
individually and the nodes connected thereto. Indicate the diameter,
length, flow, velocity, friction loss, number and type fittings, total
friction loss in the pipe, equivalent pipe length and Hazen-Williams
coefficient for each pipe. For gridded systems, calculations shall show
peaking of demand area friction loss to verify that the hydraulically most
demanding area is being used. Also for gridded systems, a flow diagram
indicating the quantity and direction of flows shall be included. A
drawing showing hydraulic reference points (nodes) and pipe designations
used in the calculations shall be included and shall be independent of shop
drawings.
1.2.2 Sprinkler Coverage
Sprinklers shall be uniformly spaced on branch lines. In buildings
protected by automatic sprinklers, sprinklers shall provide coverage
throughout 100 percent of the building. This includes, but is not limited
to, telephone rooms, electrical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear
rooms, transformer rooms, and other electrical and mechanical spaces.
Coverage per sprinkler shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, but shall not
exceed 100 square feet for extra hazard occupancies, 130 square feet for
ordinary hazard occupancies, and 225 square feet for light hazard
occupancies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies
the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the
following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings; G
Three copies of the Sprinkler System Shop Drawings, no later
than 21 days prior to the start of sprinkler system installation.
As-Built Drawings
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
As-built shop drawings, at least 14 days after completion of the
Final Tests, updated to reflect as-built conditions after all
related work is completed. Drawings shall be on reproducible
full-size mylar film.
SD-03 Product Data
Fire Protection Related Submittals
A list of the Fire Protection Related Submittals, no later than
7 days after the approval of the Fire Protection Specialist.
Materials and Equipment; G
Manufacturer's catalog data included with the Sprinkler System
Drawings for all items specified herein. The data shall be
highlighted to show model, size, options, etc., that are intended
for consideration. Data shall be adequate to demonstrate
compliance with all contract requirements. In addition, provide a
complete equipment list that includes equipment description, model
number and quantity.
Spare Parts
Spare parts data for each different item of material and
equipment specified.
Preliminary Tests; G
Proposed procedures for Preliminary Tests, no later than 14 days
prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and time
to begin the preliminary tests.
Final Acceptance Test; G
Proposed procedures for Final Acceptance Test, no later than 14
days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and
time to begin Final Acceptance Test, submitted with the Final
Acceptance Test Procedures. Notification shall be provided at
least 14 days prior to the proposed start of the test.
Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material &
Test Certificates.
Onsite Training; G
Proposed Onsite Training schedule, at least 14 days prior to
the start of related training.
Fire Protection Specialist; G
The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Fire
Protection Specialists, no later than 14 days after the Notice to
Proceed and prior to the submittal of the sprinkler system
drawings and hydraulic calculations.
Sprinkler System Installer; G
The name and documentation of certification of the proposed
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Sprinkler System Installer, concurrent with submittal of the Fire
Protection Specialist Qualifications.
SD-05 Design Data
Sway Bracing; G
Load calculations for sizing of sway bracing, for systems that
are required to be protected against damage from earthquakes.
Hydraulic Calculations; G
Hydraulic calculations, including a drawing showing hydraulic
reference points and pipe segments.
SD-06 Test Reports
Preliminary Test Report; G
Three copies of the completed Preliminary Test Report, no later
that 7 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The
Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the
Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground
Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed
by the Fire Protection Specialist.
Final Acceptance Test Report; G
Three copies of the completed Final Acceptance Tests Reports, no
later that 7 days after the completion of the Final Acceptance
Tests. All items in the Final Acceptance Report shall be signed
by the Fire Protection Specialist.
SD-07 Certificates
Inspection by Fire Protection Specialist; G
Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification
by the Fire Protection Specialist that the sprinkler system is
installed in accordance with the contract requirements, including
signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test
Reports.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
Six manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system
startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 14
days prior to field training. The manuals shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and
tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine
maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified
wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and
recommended service organization (including address and telephone
number) for each item of equipment.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Compliance with referenced NFPA standards is mandatory. This includes
advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such standards, as though
the word "shall" had been substituted for the word "should" wherever it
appears. In the event of a conflict between specific provisions of this
specification and applicable NFPA standards, this specification shall
govern. Reference to "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted
to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist
Perform work specified in this section under the supervision of and
certified by the Fire Protection Specialist who is an individual registered
professional engineer who has passed the fire protection engineering
written examination administered by the National Council of Examiners for
Engineering and Surveys (NCEES or who is certified as a Level III or IV
Technician by National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies (NICET) in the Automatic Sprinkler System Layout subfield of
Fire Protection Engineering Technology in accordance with NICET 1014-7.
The Fire Protection Specialist shall prepare a list of the fire protection
related submittals from the Contract Submittal Register that relate to the
successful installation of the sprinkler systems(s). The submittals
identified on this list shall be accompanied by a letter of approval signed
and dated by the Fire Protection Specialist when submitted to the
Government. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged in
the design and installation of the type and complexity of system specified
in the contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for
at least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a
period of not less than 6 months.
1.4.2 Sprinkler System Installer
Work specified in this section shall be performed by the Sprinkler System
Installer who is regularly engaged in the installation of the type and
complexity of system specified in the contract documents, and shall have
served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed
in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months.
1.4.3 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings shall conform to the requirements established for working
plans as prescribed in NFPA 13. Drawings shall include plan and elevation
views demonstrating that the equipment will fit the allotted spaces with
clearance for installation and maintenance. All submittals shall be signed
by the Fire Protection Specialist. Each set of drawings shall include the
following:
a. Descriptive index of drawings in the submittal with drawings listed
in sequence by drawing number. A legend identifying device symbols,
nomenclature, and conventions used.
b. Floor plans drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" which
clearly show locations of sprinklers, risers, pipe hangers, seismic
separation assemblies, sway bracing, inspector's test connections,
drains, and other applicable details necessary to clearly describe the
proposed arrangement. Each type of fitting used and the locations of
bushings, reducing couplings, and welded joints shall be indicated.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
c. Actual center-to-center dimensions between sprinklers on branch
lines and between branch lines; from end sprinklers to adjacent walls;
from walls to branch lines; from sprinkler feed mains, cross-mains and
branch lines to finished floor and roof or ceiling. A detail shall
show the dimension from the sprinkler and sprinkler deflector to the
ceiling in finished areas.
d. Longitudinal and transverse building sections showing typical
branch line and cross-main pipe routing as well as elevation of each
typical sprinkler above finished floor.
e. Details of each type of riser assembly; pipe hanger; sway bracing
for earthquake protection, and restraint of underground water main at
point-of-entry into the building, and electrical devices and
interconnecting wiring.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner
to preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes
shall either be capped or plugged until installed.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies,
with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of parts
recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of
service. A list of special tools and test equipment required for
maintenance and testing of the products supplied by the Contractor shall be
included.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that
essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
2 years prior to bid opening.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's
name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number.
2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE
Provide Materials and Equipment that have been tested by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. and are listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by
Factory Mutual and listed in FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Where the terms
"listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, such shall mean listed
in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.4 UNDERGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
2.4.1 Pipe
Piping from a point 6 inches above the floor to a point 5 feet outside the
building wall shall be ductile iron with a rated working pressure of 175 psi
conforming to AWWA C151/A21.51, with cement mortar lining conforming to
AWWA C104/A21.4. Piping more than 5 feet outside the building walls shall
comply with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION.
2.4.2 Fittings and Gaskets
Fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to AWWA C110/A21.10. Gaskets
shall be suitable in design and size for the pipe with which such gaskets
are to be used. Gaskets for ductile iron pipe joints shall conform to
AWWA C111/A21.11.
2.4.3 Gate Valve and Indicator Posts
Gate valves for underground installation shall be of the inside screw type
with counter-clockwise rotation to open. Where indicating type valves are
shown or required, indicating valves shall be gate valves with an approved
indicator post of a length to permit the top of the post to be located 3
feet above finished grade. Gate valves and indicator posts shall be listed
in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b.
2.5 ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
Aboveground piping shall be steel.
2.5.1 Steel Piping Components
2.5.1.1 Steel Pipe
Except as modified herein, steel pipe shall be black as permitted by NFPA 13
and shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM A 795/A 795M,
ASTM A 53/A 53M, or ASTM A 135/A 135M. Pipe in which threads or grooves
are cut or rolled formed shall be Schedule 40 or shall be listed by
Underwriters' Laboratories to have a corrosion resistance ratio (CRR) of
1.0 or greater after threads or grooves are cut or rolled formed. Pipe
shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer, kind of pipe, and ASTM
designation.
2.5.1.2 Fittings for Non-Grooved Steel Pipe
Fittings shall be cast iron conforming to ASME B16.4, steel conforming to
ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11, or malleable iron conforming to ASME B16.3.
Galvanized fittings shall be used for piping systems or portions of piping
systems utilizing galvanized piping. Fittings into which sprinklers, drop
nipples or riser nipples (sprigs) are screwed shall be threaded type.
Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings, fittings that use steel
gripping devices to bite into the pipe and segmented welded fittings shall
not be used.
2.5.1.3 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings
Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi service and
shall be the product of the same manufacturer;segmented welded fittings
shall not be used. Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to
ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be the flush type that fills the
entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and bolts shall be
heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A 183 and shall be cadmium plated or
zinc electroplated.
2.5.1.4 Flanges
Flanges shall conform to NFPA 13 and ASME B16.1. Gaskets shall be
non-asbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch
thick, and full face or self-centering flat ring type.
2.5.1.5 Bolts, Nut, and Washers
Bolts shall be conform to ASTM A 449, Type 1 and shall extend no less than
three full threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the required
torque. Nuts shall be hexagon type conforming to ASME B18.2.2 or
ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade 5 or ASTM A 563, Grade DH3. Washers shall meet
the requirements of ASTM F 436. Flat circular washers shall be provided
under all bolt heads and nuts.
2.5.2 Copper Tube Components
Not permitted.
2.5.3 Plastic Piping Components
Not permitted.
2.5.3.1 Plastic Pipe
Not permitted.
2.5.4 Pipe Hangers
Hangers shall be listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b and
of the type suitable for the application, construction, and pipe type and
sized to be supported.
2.5.5 Valves
2.5.5.1 Control Valve and Gate Valve
Manually operated sprinkler control valve and gate valve shall be outside
stem and yoke (OS&Y) type and shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or FM P7825a
and FM P7825b. Butterfly type valves are not permitted.
2.5.5.2 Check Valve
Check valve 2 inches and larger shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or
FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Check valves 4 inches and larger shall be of the
swing type with flanged cast iron body and flanged inspection plate, shall
have a clear waterway and shall meet the requirements of MSS SP-71, for
Type 3 or 4.
2.5.5.3 Hose Valve
Valve shall comply with UL 668 and shall have a minimum rating of 300 psi.
Valve shall be non-rising stem, all bronze, 90 degree angle type, with
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2-1/2 inch American National Standard Fire Hose Screw Thread (NH) male
outlet in accordance with NFPA 1963. Hose valve shall be provided with
2-1/2 to 1-1/2 inch reducer. Hose valves shall be equipped with lugged cap
with drip drain, cap gasket and chain. Valve finish shall be polished
brass.
2.6 RISER CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY
Assembly shall include a riser check valve, standard trim piping, pressure
gauges, testing valves, main drain, and other components as required for a
fully operational system.
2.7 WATERFLOW ALARM
Electrically operated, exterior-mounted, 10-inch waterflow alarm bell shall
be provided and installed in accordance with NFPA 13. Waterflow alarm bell
shall be rated 24 VDC and shall be connected to the Fire Alarm
ControlPanel(FACP) in accordance with Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM
AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS.
2.8 ALARM INITIATING AND SUPERVISORY DEVICES
2.8.1 Sprinkler Waterflow Indicator Switch, Vane Type
Switch shall be vane type with a pipe saddle and cast aluminum housing.
The electro-mechanical device shall include a flexible, low-density
polyethylene paddle conforming to the inside diameter of the fire
protection pipe. The device shall sense water movements and be capable of
detecting a sustained flow of 10 gpm or greater. The device shall contain
a retard device adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds to reduce the possibility
of false alarms caused by transient flow surges. The switch shall be
tamper resistant and contain two SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to
transfer upon removal of the housing cover, and shall be equipped with a
silicone rubber gasket to assure positive water seal and a dustproof cover
and gasket to seal the mechanism from dirt and moisture.
2.8.2 Sprinkler Pressure (Waterflow) Alarm Switch
Not required.
2.8.3 Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch
Switch shall be suitable for mounting to the type of control valve to be
supervised open. The switch shall be tamper resistant and contain one set
of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to transfer upon removal of the housing
cover or closure of the valve of more than two rotations of the valve stem.
2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
Fire department connection shall be projecting type with cast brass body,
matching wall escutcheon lettered "Auto Spkr" with a polished brass
finish. The connection shall have two inlets with individual self-closing
clappers, caps with drip drains and chains. Female inlets shall have 2-1/2
inch diameter American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Threads (NH) per
NFPA 1963.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 11
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.10 SPRINKLERS
2.10.1 Recessed Sprinkler
Recessed sprinkler shall be white polyester quick-response type and shall
have a nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice.
2.10.2 Pendent Sprinkler
Pendent sprinkler shall be of the fusible strut or glass bulb type,
recessed quick-response type with nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice.
Pendent sprinklers shall have a white polyester finish.
2.10.3 Upright Sprinkler
Upright sprinkler shall be brass quick-response type and shall have a
nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice.
2.10.4 Sidewall Sprinkler
Sidewall sprinkler shall have a nominal 1/2 inch orifice. Sidewall
sprinkler shall have a white polyester finish. Sidewall sprinkler shall be
the quick-response type.
2.10.5 Corrosion Resistant Sprinkler
Corrosion resistant sprinkler shall be the upright or pendent type
installed in locations per NFPA13. Corrosion resistant coatings shall be
factory-applied by the sprinkler manufacturer.
2.10.6 Dry Sprinkler Assembly
Dry sprinkler assembly shall be of the pendent, sidewall, or type.
Assembly shall include an integral escutcheon. Maximum length shall not
exceed maximum indicated in UL Fire Prot Dir. Sprinklers shall have a
white enamel finish.
2.11 DISINFECTING MATERIALS
Not required.
2.12 ACCESSORIES
2.12.1 Sprinkler Cabinet
Spare sprinklers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall be
packed in a suitable metal or plastic cabinet. Spare sprinklers shall be
representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and
temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. At least one wrench of
each type required shall be provided.
2.12.2 Pendent Sprinkler Escutcheon
Escutcheon shall be one-piece metallic type with a depth of less than 3/4
inch and suitable for installation on pendent sprinklers. The escutcheon
shall have a factory finish that matches the pendent sprinkler heads.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 12
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.12.3 Pipe Escutcheon
Escutcheon shall be polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished
chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or
split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set screw.
2.12.4 Sprinkler Guard
Guard shall be a steel wire cage designed to encase the sprinkler and
protect it from mechanical damage. Guards shall be provided on sprinklers
as required by NFPA 13.
2.12.5 Identification Sign
Valve identification sign shall be minimum 6 inches wide by 2 inches high
with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gauge steel or 0.024 inch aluminum
with red letters on a white background or white letters on red background.
Wording of sign shall include, but not be limited to "main drain,"
"auxiliary drain," "inspector's test," "alarm test," "alarm line," and
similar wording as required to identify operational components.
2.13 FIRE HOSE REEL ASSEMBLY
Not required.
2.14 DOUBLE-CHECK VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY
Provided by utility company.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
The installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
NFPA 13, NFPA 14, NFPA 24 and publications referenced therein.
Installation of in-rack sprinklers shall comply with applicable provisions
of NFPA 13.
3.3 INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST
The Fire Protection Specialist shall: 1) inspect the sprinkler system
(including the sway bracking) periodically during the installation to
assure that the sprinkler system is being provided and installed in
accordance with the contract requirements, 2) witness the preliminary and
final tests, and sign the test results, 3) after completion of the system
inspections and a successful final test, certify in writing that the system
has been installed in accordance with the contract requirements. Any
discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer in
writing, no later than three working days after the discrepancy is
discovered.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 13
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.4 ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
3.4.1 Protection of Piping Against Earthquake Damage
Seismically protect the system piping against damage from earthquakes.
This requirement is not subject to determination under NFPA 13. Install
the seismic protection of the system piping in accordance with UFC
3-310-04, NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and Annex A. Include the required features
identified therein (including sizing of pipe sleeves) that are applicable
to the specific piping system.
3.4.2 Piping in Exposed Areas
Install exposed piping without diminishing exit access widths, corridors or
equipment access. Exposed horizontal piping, including drain piping, shall
be installed to provide maximum headroom.
3.4.3 Piping in Finished Areas
In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed
spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping
shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and
similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed.
3.4.4 Pendent Sprinklers
Drop nipples to pendent sprinklers shall consist of minimum 1 inch pipe
with a reducing coupling into which the sprinkler shall be threaded.
Hangers shall be provided on arm-overs to drop nipples supplying pendent
sprinklers when the arm-over exceeds 12 inches for steel pipe. Where
sprinklers are installed below suspended or dropped ceilings, drop nipples
shall be cut such that sprinkler ceiling plates or escutcheons are of a
uniform depth throughout the finished space. The outlet of the reducing
coupling shall not extend more than 1 inch below the underside of the
ceiling. On pendent sprinklers installed below suspended or dropped
ceilings, the distance from the sprinkler deflector to the underside of the
ceiling shall not exceed 4 inches. Recessed pendent sprinklers shall be
installed such that the distance from the sprinkler deflector to the
underside of the ceiling shall not exceed the manufacturer's listed range
and shall be of uniform depth throughout the finished area. Pendent
sprinklers in suspended ceilings shall be a minimum of 6 inches from
ceiling grid.
3.4.5 Upright Sprinklers
Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings
between the branch line tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler.
Riser nipples exceeding 30 inches in length shall be individually supported.
3.4.6 Pipe Joints
Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Not more
than four threads shall show after joint is made up. Welded joints will be
permitted, only if welding operations are performed as required by NFPA 13
at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the project construction
site. Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated or required by
NFPA 13. Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with
the manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe
material, wall thickness and size. Grooved couplings, fittings and
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 14
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. The diameter of
grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge,
vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method
specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended
application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall
be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify
compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall
not be used in concealed locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings,
unless an access panel is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting
the joint.
3.4.7 Reducers
Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing
fittings. The use of grooved-end or rubber-gasketed reducing couplings
will not be permitted. When standard fittings of the required size are not
manufactured, single bushings of the face type will be permitted. Where
used, face bushings shall be installed with the outer face flush with the
face of the fitting opening being reduced. Bushings shall not be used in
elbow fittings, in more than one outlet of a tee, in more than two outlets
of a cross, or where the reduction in size is less than 1/2 inch.
3.4.8 Pipe Penetrations
Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger
fastenings will not be permitted. All penitratious shall be provided
sleeves. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or masonry walls or concrete
floors shall be core-drilled and provided with pipe sleeves. Each sleeve
shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile iron or cast iron pipe and
shall extend through its respective wall or floor and be cut flush with
each wall surface. Sleeves shall provide required clearance between the
pipe and the sleeve per NFPA 13 for earthquake protection. The space
between the sleeve and the pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral wool
insulation. Where pipes penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or floors,
pipes shall be fire stopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING. In penetrations that are not fire-rated or not a floor
penetration, the space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at
both ends with plastic waterproof cement that will dry to a firm but
pliable mass or with a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomer seal.
3.4.9 Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall be provided for pipe penetration of ceilings and walls.
Escutcheons shall be securely fastened to the pipe at surfaces through
which piping passes.
3.4.10 Inspector's Test Connection
Unless otherwise indicated, test connection shall consist of 1 inch pipe
connected at the riser as a combination test and drain valve; a test valve
located approximately 7 feet above the floor; a smooth bore brass outlet
equivalent to the smallest orifice sprinkler used in the system; and a
painted metal identification sign affixed to the valve with the words
"Inspector's Test." The discharge orifice shall be located outside the
building wall directed so as not to cause damage to adjacent construction
or landscaping during full flow discharge. Provide concrete splash blocks
at discharge unless discharge is to pavement.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 15
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.4.11 Drains
Main drain piping shall be provided to discharge at a safe point outside
the building. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA 13.
Provide concrete splash blocks at discharge unless discharge is to pavement.
3.4.12 Installation of Fire Department Connection
Connection shall be mounted on the exterior wall approximately 3 feet above
finished grade. The piping between the connection and the check valve
shall be provided with an automatic drip in accordance with NFPA 13 and
arranged to drain to the outside.
3.4.13 Identification Signs
Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main
drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as
required by NFPA 13. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be permanently
affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.
3.5 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
The fire protection water main shall be laid, and joints anchored, in
accordance with NFPA 24. Minimum depth of cover shall be 3 feet. The
supply line shall terminate inside the building with a flanged piece, the
bottom of which shall be set not less than 6 inches above the finished
floor. A blind flange shall be installed temporarily on top of the flanged
piece to prevent the entrance of foreign matter into the supply line. A
concrete thrust block shall be provided at the elbow where the pipe turns
up toward the floor. In addition, joints shall be anchored in accordance
with NFPA 24 using pipe clamps and steel rods from the elbow to the flange
above the floor and from the elbow to a pipe clamp in the horizontal run of
pipe. Buried steel components shall be provided with a corrosion
protective coating in accordance with AWWA C203. Piping more than 5 feet
outside the building walls shall meet the requirements of Section 33 11 00
WATER DISTRIBUTION.
3.6 EARTHWORK
Earthwork shall be performed in accordance with applicable provisions of
Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.7 ELECTRICAL WORK
Except as modified herein, electric equipment and wiring shall be in
accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Alarm
signal wiring connected to the building fire alarm control system shall be
in accordance with Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS
NOTIFICATION SYSTEM. All wiring for supervisory and alarm circuits shall be
#16 AWG solid copper installed in metallic tubing or conduit. Wiring color
code shall remain uniform throughout the system.
3.8 DISINFECTION
Not required.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 16
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.9 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.10 PRELIMINARY TESTS
The system, including the underground water mains, and the aboveground
piping and system components, shall be tested to assure that equipment and
components function as intended. The underground and aboveground interior
piping systems and attached appurtenances subjected to system working
pressure shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. Upon
completion of specified tests, complete certificates as specified in
paragraph SUBMITTALS.
3.10.1 Underground Piping
3.10.1.1 Flushing
Underground piping shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 24. This
includes the requirement to flush the lead-in connection to the fire
protection system at a flow rate not less that the calculated maximum water
demand rate of the system.
3.10.1.2 Hydrostatic Testing
New underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with
NFPA 24. The allowable leakage shall be measured at the specified test
pressure by pumping from a calibrated container. The amount of leakage at
the joints shall not exceed 2 quarts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints,
regardless of pipe diameter.
3.10.2 Aboveground Piping
3.10.2.1 Hydrostatic Testing
Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with
NFPA 13 at not less than 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of maximum system
operating pressure (which ever is greater) and shall maintain that pressure
without loss for 2 hours. There shall be no drop in gauge pressure or
visible leakage when the system is subjected to the hydrostatic test. The
test pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point
of the system or portion being tested.
3.10.2.2 Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test
Each backflow prevention assembly shall be tested at system flow demand,
including all applicable inside hose streams, as specified in NFPA 13.
Provide all equipment and instruments necessary to conduct a complete
forward flow test, including 2.5 inch diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles,
calibrated pressure gauges, pitot tube gauge, plus all necessary supports
to safely secure hoses and nozzles during the test. At the system demand
flow, the pressure readings and pressure drop (friction) across the
assembly shall be recorded. Provide a metal placard or tag on the backflow
prevention assembly that lists the pressure readings both upstream and
downstream of the assembly, total pressure drop, and the system test flow
rate. The pressure drop shall be compared to the manufacturer's data and
to that used in the hydraulic calculation.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 17
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.10.3 Testing of Alarm Devices
Each alarm switch shall be tested by flowing water through the inspector's
test connection. Each water-operated alarm devices shall be tested to
verify proper operation.
3.10.4 Main Drain Flow Test
Following flushing of the underground piping, a main drain test shall be
made to verify the adequacy of the water supply. Static and residual
pressures shall be recorded on the certificate specified in paragraph
SUBMITTALS. In addition, a main drain test shall be conducted each time
after a main control valve is shut and opened.
3.11 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST
Begin the Final Acceptance Test only when the Preliminary Test Report has
been approved. The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct the Final
Acceptance Test and shall provide a complete demonstration of the operation
of the system. This shall include operation of control valves and flowing
of inspector's test connections to verify operation of associated waterflow
alarm switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, the
main drain test shall be repeated to assure that control valves are in the
open position. In addition, the representative shall have available copies
of as-built drawings and certificates of tests previously conducted. The
installation shall not be considered accepted until identified
discrepancies have been corrected and test documentation is properly
completed and received. Submit the Final Acceptance Test Report as
specified in the Submittals paragraph.
3.12 ONSITE TRAINING
The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct a training course for
operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting
Officer. Training shall be provided for a period of 2 hours of normal
working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete and
after the Final Acceptance Test. The Onsite Training shall cover all of
the items contained in the approved Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 18
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10
PREACTION AND DELUGE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS, FIRE PROTECTION
05/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA B300 (2004) Hypochlorites
AWWA B301 (2004) Liquid Chlorine
AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for
Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C652 (2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage
Facilities
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B16.1 (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.11 (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
Threaded
ASME B16.21 (2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
Flanges
ASME B16.9 (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought
Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ASME B18.2.2 (1987; R 2005) Standard for Square and Hex
Nuts (Inch Series)
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 135/A 135M (2009) Standard Specification for
Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe
ASTM A 183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
ASTM A 193/A 193M (2009) Standard Specification for
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High-Temperature Service
ASTM A 449 (2007b) Specification for Hex Cap Screws,
Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
General Use
ASTM A 47/A 47M (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A 563 (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon
and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A 795/A 795M (2008) Standard Specification for Black
and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire
Protection Use
ASTM F 436 (2009) Hardened Steel Washers
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM P7825a (2009) Approval Guide Fire Protection
FM P7825b (2009) Approval Guide Electrical Equipment
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) IEEE Guide on the Surges
Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) IEEE Recommended Practice on
Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-71 (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check
Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 13 (2007) Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of
Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances
NFPA 70 (2011) National Electrical Code
NFPA 72 (2010) National Fire Alarm Code
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES
(NICET)
NICET 1014-7 (2003) Program Detail Manual for
Certification in the Field of Fire
Protection Engineering Technology (Field
Code 003) Subfield of Automatic Sprinkler
System Layout
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL Bld Mat Dir (2009) Building Materials Directory
UL Fire Prot Dir (2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
a. Furnish piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories as
required to provide a complete installation and to eliminate
interference with other construction. Install sprinkler over and under
ducts, piping and platforms when such equipment can negatively affect
or disrupt the sprinkler discharge pattern and coverage.
b. Provide preaction sprinkler system(s) in areas indicated on the
drawings. The sprinkler system shall provide fire sprinkler protection
for the entire area. Except as modified herein, the system shall meet
the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 72. The sprinkler system shall be
a single interlocked system that requires the actuation of an alarm
initiating device to open the water control (deluge) valve.
c. Design any portions of the sprinkler system that are not indicated
on the drawings or are not specified herein, including locating
sprinklers, piping, and equipment, and size piping and equipment.
Determine pipe sizes which are not indicated on the drawings by
hydraulic calculations.
1.2.1 Hydraulic Design
Hydraulically design the system to discharge a minimum density of 0.10
gpm/square foot over the room or the hydraulically most demanding 3,000
square feet of floor area which ever is larger. The minimum pipe size for
branch lines in gridded systems shall be 1-1/4 inch. Hydraulic
calculations shall be in accordance with the Area/Density Method of NFPA 13.
Water velocity in the piping shall not exceed 20 ft/s.
1.2.1.1 Hose Demand
Add an allowance for exterior hose streams of 250 gpm for light hazard and
500 gpm for ordinary hazard to the sprinkler system demand.Add an allowance
for exterior hose streams of 250 gpm for light hazard and 500 gpm for
ordinary hazard to the sprinkler system demand.
1.2.1.2 Basis for Calculations
Base the design of the system upon a water supply with a static pressure
and a flow at a residual pressure. Water supply shall be presumed
available at the point of connection to existing. Base hydraulic
calculations upon the Hazen-Williams formula with a "C" value of 120 for
galvanized steel piping, 140 for new cement-lined ductile-iron piping, and
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
AWWA C 900 plastic pipe and 100 for existing underground piping. The
sprinkler Contractor shall conduct hydrant water flow tests per NFPA 291.
See drawings for preliminary hyrant test information.
a. Outline hydraulic calculations as in NFPA 13, except that
calculations shall be performed by computer using software intended
specifically for fire protection system design using the design data
shown on the drawings. Software that uses k-factors for typical branch
lines is not acceptable. Calculations shall substantiate that the
design area used in the calculations is the most demanding
hydraulically.
b. Plot water supply curves and system requirements on
semi-logarithmic graph paper so as to present a summary of the complete
hydraulic calculation. Provide a summary sheet listing sprinklers in
the design area and their respective hydraulic reference points,
elevations, actual discharge pressures and actual flows. Indicate
elevations of hydraulic reference points (nodes). Documentation shall
identify each pipe individually and the nodes connected thereto.
Indicate for each pipe the diameter, length, flow, velocity, friction
loss, number and type fittings, total friction loss in the pipe,
equivalent pipe length and Hazen-Williams coefficient.
c. For gridded systems, calculations shall show peaking of demand area
friction loss to verify that the hydraulically most demanding area is
being used. Also for gridded systems, include a flow diagram
indicating the quantity and direction of flows. A drawing showing
hydraulic reference points (nodes) and pipe designations used in the
calculations shall be included and shall be independent of shop
drawings.
1.2.2 Sprinkler Coverage
Uniformly space sprinklers on branch lines. In buildings protected by
automatic sprinklers, provide coverage throughout 100 percent of the
building. This includes, but is not limited to, telephone rooms,
electrical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear rooms, transformer
rooms, and other electrical and mechanical spaces. Coverage per sprinkler
shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, but shall not exceed 225 square feet
for light hazard occupancies.
1.2.3 Control System
The control system shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72. The control
panel shall be listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b for
"Releasing Device Service". The control panel and the solenoid valve that
activates the water control valves shall be compatible with each other.
Compatibility shall be in accordance with specific UL listing or FM
approval of the control equipment.
1.2.3.1 Power Supply
Provide the primary operating power from two single-phase 120 VAC
circuits. Transfer from normal to backup power and restoration from backup
to normal power shall be fully automatic and shall not initiate a false
alarm. Loss of primary power shall not prevent actuation of the respective
automatic water control valve upon activation of any alarm initiating
device. Provide backup power through use of rechargeable, sealed, lead
calcium storage batteries.
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.2.3.2 Circuit Requirements
Connect to the Clean Agent Control panel with class A circuits.
1.2.4 System Operational Features
Include in the system supervisory and alarm switches, alarm notification
appliances as required, control panel and associated equipment. Provide
preaction sprinkler system piping with supervisory air pressure not to
exceed 30 psig.
1.2.4.1 System Actuation
Activation of any second smoke detector connected to the clean agent fire
suppressor control panel or a single manual actuation station shall actuate
alarm zone circuits of the control panel that, in turn, shall actuate the
corresponding automatic water control valve. Actuation of the automatic
water control valve shall cause water to fill the preaction system piping
and be discharged from fused sprinklers.
1.2.4.2 Supervisory Functions
The reduction of supervisory air pressure within the sprinkler system
piping to less than 10 psi or the occurrence of a single open or a single
ground fault in any alarm initiating device circuit, in the automatic water
control valve actuation circuit, in any alarm indicating appliance circuit
or in other electrically supervised circuit shall cause the individually
labelled control panel trouble light to be illuminated, the audible trouble
alarm to be activated, and a trouble alarm to be transmitted to the
building fire alarm control panel and to base-wide fire reporting system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government and Design Build Fire Protection Engineer approval is required
for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G"
designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a
designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will
review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings; G
Three copies of the Sprinkler System Drawings, no later than 21
days prior to the start of sprinkler system installation. The
drawings shall conform to the requirements established for working
plans as prescribed in NFPA 13. Drawings shall include plan and
elevation views demonstrating that the equipment will fit the
allotted spaces with clearance for installation and maintenance.
As-Built Drawings
As-built drawings, at least 14 days after completion of the
Final Tests.
SD-03 Product Data
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Fire Protection Specialist; G
The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Fire
Protection Specialists, no later than 14 days after the Notice to
Proceed and prior to the submittal of the sprinkler system shop
drawings and hydraulic calculations.
Installer Qualifications; G
The name and documentation of certification of the proposed
Sprinkler System Installer, concurrent with submittal of the Fire
Protection Specialist Qualifications.
List of the Submittals; G
A list of the Fire Protection Related Submittals, no later than
7 days after the approval of the Fire Protection Specialist.
Materials and Equipment; G
Manufacturer's catalog data included with the Sprinkler System
Drawings for all items specified herein. Highlight the data to
show model, size, options, etc., that are intended for
consideration. Data shall be adequate to demonstrate compliance
with all contract requirements. In addition, provide a complete
equipment list that includes equipment description, model number
and quantity.
Spare Parts
Spare parts data for each different item of material and
equipment specified.
OnSite Training; Government only
Proposed Onsite Training schedule, at least 14 days prior to the
start of related training.
SD-05 Design Data
Sway Bracing; G
Load calculations for sizing of sway bracing.
Hydraulic Calculations; G
Hydraulic calculations, including a drawing showing hydraulic
reference points and pipe segments.
Storage Batteries; G
Calculations to substantiate the total requirements for
supervisory and alarm power. Include ampere-hour requirements for
each system component and each control panel component or module,
under both normal and alarm conditions. The battery recharging
period shall be included with the calculations.
SD-06 Test Reports
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Preliminary Tests; G
Proposed procedures for Preliminary Tests, no later than 14 days
prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and time
to begin Preliminary Tests, submitted with the Preliminary Tests
Procedures.
Three copies of the completed Preliminary Tests Reports, no
later that 7 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests.
The Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the
Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground
Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed
by the Fire Protection Specialist.
Final Acceptance Tests; G
Proposed procedures for Final Acceptance Tests, no later than 14
days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and
time to begin Final Acceptance Tests, submitted with the Final
Acceptance Test Procedures. Notification shall be provided at
least 14 days prior to the proposed start of the test.
Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material &
Test Certificates.
Three copies of the completed Final Acceptance Tests Reports, no
later that 7 days after the completion of the Final Acceptance
Tests. All items in the Final Acceptance Report shall be signed
by the Fire Protection Specialist.
SD-07 Certificates
Inspection by Fire Protection Specialist; G
Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification
by the Fire Protection Specialist that the sprinkler system is
installed in accordance with the contract requirements, including
signed approval of the Preliminary, Detection and Control Systems,
and Final Acceptance Test Reports.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
Six manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system
startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 14
days prior to field training. The manuals shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and
tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine
maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified
wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and
recommended service organization (including address and telephone
number) for each item of equipment.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Compliance with referenced NFPA standards is mandatory. This includes
advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such standards, as though
the word "shall" had been substituted for the word "should" wherever it
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
appears. Applicable material and installation standards referenced in
Annex A of NFPA 13 and NFPA 24 shall be considered mandatory the same as if
such referenced standards were specifically listed in this specification.
In the event of a conflict between specific provisions of this
specification and applicable NFPA standards, this specification shall
govern. Incorporate all requirements that exceed the minimum requirements
of NFPA 13 into the design. Reference to "authority having jurisdiction"
shall be interpreted to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist
Perform the work specified in this section under the supervision of and
certified by the Fire Protection Specialist who is a registered
professional engineer and a Full Member of the Society of Fire Protection
Engineers or who is certified as a Level III or IV Technician by National
Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in the
Automatic Sprinkler System Layout subfield of Fire Protection Engineering
Technology in accordance with NICET 1014-7. The Fire Protection Specialist
shall prepare a list of the submittals from the Contract Submittal Register
that relate to the successful installation of the sprinkler systems(s).
The submittals identified on this list shall be accompanied by a letter of
approval signed and dated by the Fire Protection Specialist when submitted
to the Government.The Fire Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged
in the design and installation of the type and complexity of system
specified in the Contract documents, and shall have served in a similar
capacity for at least three systems that have performed in the manner
intended for a period of not less than 6 months. All submittals shall be
signed by the Fire Protection Specialist.
1.4.2 Installer Qualifications
Work specified in this section shall be performed by the Sprinkler System
Installer. The Installer shall be regularly engaged in the installation of
the type and complexity of system specified in the Contract documents, and
shall have served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that
have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6
months.
1.4.3 Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings, on reproducible full-size mylar film, as specified
herein and in the Submittals paragraph; update the Shop Drawings to reflect
as-built conditions after all related work is completed. All submittals
shall be signed by the Fire Protection Specialist. Each set of drawings
shall include the following:
a. Descriptive index of drawings in the submittal with drawings
listed in sequence by drawing number. A legend identifying device
symbols, nomenclature, and conventions used.
b. Floor plans drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" which
clearly show locations of sprinklers, risers, pipe hangers,
seismic separation assemblies, sway bracing, inspector's test
connections, drains, and other applicable details necessary to
clearly describe the proposed arrangement. Indicate each type of
fitting used and the locations of bushings, reducing couplings,
and welded joints.
c. Actual center-to-center dimensions between sprinklers on
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
branch lines and between branch lines; from end sprinklers to
adjacent walls; from walls to branch lines; from sprinkler feed
mains, cross-mains and branch lines to finished floor and roof or
ceiling. A detail shall show the dimension from the sprinkler and
sprinkler deflector to the ceiling in finished areas.
d. Longitudinal and transverse building sections showing typical
branch line and cross-main pipe routing as well as elevation of
each typical sprinkler above finished floor.
e. Details of each type of riser assembly; pipe hanger; sway
bracing for earthquake protection, and restraint of underground
water main at point-of-entry into the building, and electrical
devices and interconnecting wiring.
f. Complete point-to-point wiring diagram of the detection and
control system. Indicate the detailed interconnection of control
panel modules to the devices, the number and size of conductors in
each conduit, and size of conduit. Connection points shall be
indicated and coordinated with the terminal identification marked
on the devices. Provide complete internal wiring schematic of the
control panel and each electrical device. Detailed description of
the functions of the control panel and each module shall be
provided.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner
to preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes
shall either be capped or plugged until installed.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies,
with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of parts
recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of
service. A list of special tools and test equipment required for
maintenance and testing of the products supplied by the Contractor shall be
included.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that
essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
2 years prior to bid opening.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's
name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number.
2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE
Materials and equipment shall have been tested by Underwriters
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Laboratories, Inc. and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by Factory
Mutual and listed in FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Where the terms "listed" or
"approved" appear in this specification, such shall mean listed in
UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b.
2.4 UNDERGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
Connection shall be to the new wet-pipe sprinkler systesm on each floor.
2.5 ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
2.5.1 Pipe
Except as modified herein, steel pipe shall be galvanized steel as
permitted by NFPA 13 and shall conform to applicable provisions of
ASTM A 795/A 795M, ASTM A 53/A 53M, or ASTM A 135/A 135M. Pipe in which
threads or grooves are cut or rolled formed shall be Schedule 40 or shall
be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories to have a corrosion resistance
ratio (CRR) of 1.0 or greater after threads or grooves are cut or rolled
formed. Pipe shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer, kind of
pipe, and ASTM designation.
2.5.2 Fittings for Non-Grooved Steel Pipe
Fittings shall be galvanized steel conforming to ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11.
Fittings that sprinklers, drop nipples or riser nipples (sprigs) are
screwed into shall be threaded type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical
couplings, fittings that use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe
and segmented welded fittings shall not be used.
2.5.3 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings
Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi service and
shall be the product of the same manufacturer; segmented welded fittings
shall not be used. Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron
conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to
ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gaskets shall be of silicon compound and
approved for dry fire protection systems. Gasket shall be the flush type
that fills the entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and
bolts shall be heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A 183 and shall be
cadmium plated or zinc electroplated.
2.5.4 Flanges
Flanges shall conform to NFPA 13 and ASME B16.1. Gaskets shall be
non-asbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch
thick, and full face or self-centering flat ring type.
2.5.4.1 Bolts
Bolts shall be ASTM A 449, Type 1. Bolts shall extend no less than three
full threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the required torque.
2.5.4.2 Nuts
Nuts shall be hexagon type conforming to ASME B18.2.2, to ASTM A 193/A 193M,
Grade 5 or to ASTM A 563, Grade C3 or DH3.
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.5.4.3 Washers
Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 436. Flat circular washers
shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts.
2.5.5 Pipe Hangers
Hangers (including those provided for sway bracing) shall be listed in
UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b and of the type suitable for
the application, construction, and pipe type and size to be supported.
2.5.6 Valves
2.5.6.1 Control Valve and Gate Valve
Manually operated sprinkler control valve and gate valve shall be outside
stem and yoke (OS&Y) type and shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or FM P7825a
and FM P7825b.
2.5.6.2 Check Valves
Check valve 2 inches and larger shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or
FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Check valves 4 inches and larger shall be of the
swing type with flanged cast iron body and flanged inspection plate, shall
have a clear waterway and shall meet the requirements of MSS SP-71, for
Type 3 or 4.
2.6 AUTOMATIC WATER CONTROL VALVE (DELUGE VALVE)
Automatic water control valve (deluge valve) shall be electrically-actuated
and rated for a working pressure of 175 psi. Valve shall be capable of
being reset without opening the valve. Electrical solenoid valve used to
actuate the water control valve shall be an integral component of the valve
or shall be approved for use by the water control valve manufacturer.
Solenoid valve shall be rated at 24 volts direct current, and shall be
normally closed type that operates when energized. Solenoid valves shall
be rated for a maximum pressure differential of 175 psi. Water control
valve shall be equipped with a means to prevent the valve from returning to
the closed position until being manually reset. Assembly shall be complete
with the valve manufacturer's standard trim piping, drain and test valves,
pressure gauges, and other required appurtenances. Include with each
assembly an emergency release device for manually tripping the water
control valve in the event of a power or other system failure. Device
shall be a standard accessory component of the valve manufacturer and shall
be labeled as to its function and method of operation. Valves located in
hazardous locations shall be approved for the hazard classification of the
area where located.
2.7 SUPERVISORY AIR SYSTEM
Solenoid shall be UL listed or FM approved for connection to the deluge
valve and the releasing panel.
2.7.1 Air Compressor
Air compressor shall be single stage oil less type, air cooled,
electric-motor driven, equipped with a check valve, centrifugal pressure
and moisture unloader, pressure switch for automatic starting and
stopping. Pressure switch shall be set to start the compressor at 20 psi
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 11
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
and stop it at 30 psi. A safety relief valve, set to operate at 65 psi,
shall be provided. The compressor shall be sized to pressurize the system
to 30 psi within 30 minutes.
2.7.2 Air Pressure Maintenance Device
Device shall be a pressure regulator that automatically reduces supply air
pressure to the minimum pressure required to be maintained in the piping
system. The device shall have a cast bronze body and valve housing
complete with diaphragm assembly, spring, filter, ball check to prevent
backflow, 1/16 inch restriction to prevent rapid pressurization of the
system, and adjustment screw. The device shall be capable of reducing
maximum inlet pressure of 100 psi to a fixed outlet pressure adjustable to
10 psi.
2.7.3 Air Supply Piping System
Each preaction system shall be equipped with a separate pressure
maintenance device, shutoff valve, bypass valve and pressure gauge. Piping
shall be galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 795/A 795M or
ASTM A 53/A 53M.
2.7.4 Low Air Pressure Switch
Each preaction system shall be provided with an air pressure switch
connected to the control panel. Upon reduction of supervisory air pressure
to approximately 10 psi, the low air pressure switch shall actuate the
audible alarm device and a red low-air alarm light on the control panel
annunciator.
2.8 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
Preaction system to be connected ot the new wet-pipe sprinkler system at
each floor.
2.9 SPRINKLERS
Sprinklers for preaction systems shall be automatic, fusible solder or
glass bulb type. Sprinklers with internal O-rings shall not be used.
Sprinklers shall be used in accordance with their listed coverage
limitations. Temperature classification shall be ordinary. Sprinklers in
high heat areas including attic spaces or in close proximity to unit
heaters shall have temperature classification in accordance with NFPA 13.
Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used.
2.9.1 Pendent Sprinkler
Pendent sprinkler shall be of the fusible strut or glass bulb type,
recessed type with nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice. Pendent
sprinklers shall match the sprinkler finish for the wet pipe systems..
2.9.2 Upright Sprinkler
Upright sprinkler shall be brass and shall have a nominal 1/2 inch or
17/32 inch orifice.
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 12
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.10 DISINFECTING MATERIALS
2.10.1 Liquid Chlorine
Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA B301.
2.10.2 Hypochlorites
Calcium hypochlorite and sodium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
2.11.1 Sprinkler Cabinet
Spare sprinklers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall be
packed in a suitable metal or plastic cabinet. Spare sprinklers shall be
representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and
temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. At least one wrench of
each type required shall be provided. A sprinkler cabinet shall be located
in each preaction valve closet.
2.11.2 Pendent Sprinkler Escutcheon
Escutcheon shall be one-piece metallic type with a depth of less than 3/4
inch and suitable for installation on pendent sprinklers. The escutcheon
shall have a factory finish that matches the pendent sprinkler heads.
2.11.3 Pipe Escutcheon
Escutcheon shall be polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished
chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or
split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set screw.
2.11.4 Sprinkler Guard
Guard shall be a steel wire cage designed to encase the sprinkler and
protect it from mechanical damage. Guards shall be provided on sprinklers
per NFPA 13.
2.11.5 Identification Sign
Valve identification sign shall be minimum 6 inches wide by 2 inches high
with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gauge steel or 0.024 inch aluminum
with red letters on a white background or white letters on red background.
Wording of sign shall include, but not be limited to "main drain,"
"auxiliary drain," "inspector's test," "alarm test," "alarm line," and
similar wording as required to identify operational components.
2.12 DOUBLE-CHECK VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY
Connect to the new wet pipe sprinkler systems on each floor.
2.13 CONTROL PANEL
Panel shall be UL listed or FM approved for "Releasing Device Service" or
shall have modules approved for this purpose. Panel shall contain all
components and equipment required to provide the specified operational and
supervisory functions of the system. House components in a steel cabinet
with hinged door and cylinder lock. Control panel shall be a clean,
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 13
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
uncluttered, and orderly factory assembled and wired unit. Panel shall
include integral "power on," "alarm," and "trouble" lamps with annunciation
of each alarm, supervisory and trouble signal. The panel shall have
prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, zones,
controls, meters, fuses, and switches. Nameplates for fuses shall also
include ampere rating. Control panel switches shall be within the locked
cabinet. Provide a suitable means for testing the working condition and
accuracy of the control panel visual indicating devices (meter and lamps).
Meters and lamps shall be plainly visible when the cabinet door is closed.
Signals shall be provided to indicate by zone any alarm, supervisory or
trouble condition on the system. Upon restoration of power, startup shall
be automatic, and shall not require any manual operation. The loss of
primary power or the sequence of applying primary or emergency power shall
not affect the transmission of alarm, supervisory or trouble signals.
Control panel may also be the clean agent control panel if also UL listed
for this use and meet the requirements in this section.
2.13.1 Primary Power Supply
Primary power and trouble alarm power to the Control Panel shall be
supplied from two 120 VAC circuits. Power to the control panel shall be
two 20-amp circuit breakers for each control panel and with key lock.
Panel shall be permanently marked "PREACTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM".
2.13.2 Emergency Power Supply
Emergency power shall be provided for system operation in the event of
failure of the primary power supply and shall consist of rechargeable
storage battery system. Transfer from normal to emergency power or
restoration from emergency to normal power shall be automatic and shall not
cause transmission of a false alarm.
2.13.2.1 Storage Batteries
Storage Batteries shall be sealed, lead-calcium type requiring no
additional water. The batteries shall have ample capacity, with primary
power disconnected, to operate the system for a period of 90 hours.
Following this period of operation via batteries, the batteries shall have
ample capacity to operate all alarm indicating devices in the alarm mode
for a minimum period of 15 minutes. Battery cabinet shall be a separate
cabinet. The battery cabinet shall have adequate space for spare duplicate
storage batteries. Batteries shall be mounted on a noncorrosive and
nonconductive base or pad.
2.13.2.2 Battery Charger
Battery charger shall be completely automatic, with high/low charging rate,
capable of restoring the batteries from full discharge to full charge
within 24 hours using the high charging rate. A separate ammeter shall be
provided for indicating rate of charge. A separate voltmeter shall be
provided to indicate the state of the battery charge. A pilot light
indicating when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge
shall be provided as part of the unit assembly. The charger shall be
located in control panel cabinet.
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 14
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.14 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES
2.14.1 Smoke Detectors
Connected to the clean agent system. Second smoke detector activation shall
activate preaction sprinkler system.
2.14.2 Sprinkler Pressure Alarm Switch
Pressure switch shall include a metal housing with a neoprene diaphragm,
SPDT snap action switches. The switch shall have a service pressure rating
of 175 psi. There shall be two SPDT (Form C) contacts factory adjusted to
operate at 4 to 8 psi. The switch shall be capable of being mounted in any
position in the alarm line trim piping of the alarm check valve.
2.14.3 Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch
Switch shall be suitable for mounting to the type of control valve to be
supervised open. The switch shall be tamper resistant and contain one set
of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to transfer upon removal of the housing
cover or closure of the valve of more than two rotations of the valve stem.
2.15 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
Preaction system to be connected to the clean agent system.
2.16 WIRING
Wiring for alternating current (AC) circuits shall be 12 AWG minimum.
Wiring for low voltage direct current (DC) circuits shall be No. 16 AWG
minimum. Power wiring (over 28 volts) and control wiring shall be
isolated. Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70. System field wiring shall be
solid copper and installed in electrical metallic tubing or in metallic
conduit, except rigid plastic conduit may be used under slab-on-grade.
Conductors shall be color coded. Conductors used for the same function
shall be similarly color coded. Wiring color code shall remain uniform
throughout the circuit. Pigtail or T-tap connections to alarm initiating,
alarm indicating, supervisory, and actuation circuits are prohibited.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
The installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
publications referenced herein.
3.3 INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST
The Fire Protection Specialist shall inspect the sprinkler system
periodically during the installation to assure that the sprinkler system
installed in accordance with the contract requirements. The Fire
Protection Specialist shall witness the preliminary and final tests, and
shall sign the test results. The Fire Protection Specialist, after
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 15
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
completion of the system inspections and a successful final test, shall
certify in writing that the system has been installed in accordance with
the contract requirements. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the
attention of the Contracting Officer in writing, no later than three
working days after the discrepancy is discovered.
3.4 ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
3.4.1 Protection of Piping Against Earthquake Damage
Seismically protect the system piping for earthquake protection. This
requirement is not subject to determination under NFPA 13. Install the
seismic protection of the system piping, including sway bracing as
required, in accordance with UFC 3-310-04, NFPA 13 and Annex A. Include
the required features identified therein that are applicable to the
specific piping system.
3.4.2 Piping in Exposed Areas
Exposed piping shall be installed so as not diminish exit access widths,
corridors, or equipment access. Exposed horizontal piping, including drain
piping, shall be installed to provide maximum headroom.
3.4.3 Piping in Finished Areas
In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed
spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping
shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and
similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed.
3.4.4 Pendent Sprinklers Locations
Sprinklers installed in the pendent position shall be of the listed dry
pendent type, unless otherwise indicated or unless installed in area where
up oven and down arm over are provided in heated location (per NFPA 13).
Dry pendent sprinklers shall be of the required length to permit the
sprinkler to be threaded directly into a branch line tee. Hangers shall be
provided on arm-overs to drop nipples supplying pendent sprinklers when the
arm-over exceeds 12 inches for steel pipe or 6 inches for copper tubing.
Dry pendent sprinkler assemblies shall be such that sprinkler ceiling
plates or escutcheons are of the uniform depth throughout the finished
space. Pendent sprinklers in suspended ceilings shall be a minimum of 6
inches from ceiling grid. Recessed pendent sprinklers shall be installed
such that the distance from the sprinkler deflector to the underside of the
ceiling shall not exceed the manufacturer's listed range and shall be of
uniform depth throughout the finished area.
3.4.5 Upright Sprinklers
Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings
between the branch line tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler.
Riser nipples exceeding 30 inches in length shall be individually supported.
3.4.6 Pipe Joints
Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Not more
than four threads shall show after joint is made up. Welded joints will be
permitted, only if welding operations are performed as required by NFPA 13
at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the project construction
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 16
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
site. Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated or required by
NFPA 13. Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with
the manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe
material, wall thickness and size. Grooved couplings and fittings shall be
from the same manufacturer. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed
locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel
is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint.
3.4.7 Reducers
Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing
fittings. The use of grooved-end or rubber-gasketed reducing couplings
will not be permitted. When standard fittings of the required size are not
manufactured, single bushings of the face type will be permitted. Where
used, face bushings shall be installed with the outer face flush with the
face of the fitting opening being reduced. Bushings shall not be used in
elbow fittings, in more than one outlet of a tee, in more than two outlets
of a cross, or where the reduction in size is less than 1/2 inch.
3.4.8 Pipe Penetrations
Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger
fastenings will not be permitted. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or
masonry walls or concrete floors shall be core-drilled and provided with
pipe sleeves. Each sleeve shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile
iron or cast iron pipe and shall extend through its respective wall or
floor and be cut flush with each wall surface. Sleeves shall provide
required clearance between the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with
NFPA 13 (for siezmic protection). The space between the sleeve and the
pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation. Where pipes
penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or floors, pipes shall be fire
stopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. In penetrations
that are not fire-rated or not a floor penetration, the space between the
sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at both ends with plastic waterproof
cement that will dry to a firm but pliable mass or with a mechanically
adjustable segmented elastomer seal.
3.4.9 Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall be provided for pipe penetration of ceilings and walls.
Escutcheons shall be securely fastened to the pipe at surfaces through
which piping passes.
3.4.10 Inspector's Test Connection
Unless otherwise indicated, test connection shall consist of 1 inch pipe
connected to the remote branch line; a test valve located approximately 7
feet above the floor; a smooth bore brass outlet equivalent to the smallest
orifice sprinkler used in the system; and a painted metal identification
sign affixed to the valve with the words "Inspector's Test." The discharge
orifice shall be located outside the building wall directed so as not to
cause damage to adjacent construction or landscaping during full flow
discharge.
3.4.11 Drains
Provide main drain piping to discharge at a safe point outside the building
or to an adequate sized floor drain (sized for full flow). Auxiliary
drains shall be provided as indicated and as required by NFPA 13. When the
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 17
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
capacity of trapped sections of pipe is less than 3 gallons, the auxiliary
drain shall consist of a valve not smaller than 1/2 inch and a plug or
nipple and cap. When the capacity of trapped sections of piping is more
than 3 gallons, the auxiliary drain shall consist of two 1 inch valves and
one 2 x 12 inch condensate nipple or equivalent, located in an accessible
location. Tie-in drains shall be provided for multiple adjacent trapped
branch pipes and shall be a minimum of 1 inch in diameter. Tie-in drain
lines shall be pitched a minimum of 1/2 inch per 10 feet.
3.4.12 Identification Signs
Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main
drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as
required by NFPA 13. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be permanently
affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.
3.5 ELECTRICAL WORK
Unless otherwise specified herein, power supply equipment and wiring shall
be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
3.5.1 Overcurrent and Surge Protection
All equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be protected
from surges in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2 and NFPA 70.
Cables and conductors that serve as communications links, except fiber
optics, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end. Fuses
shall not be used for surge protection.
3.5.2 Grounding
Grounding shall be provided to building ground.
3.5.3 Wiring
System field wiring shall be installed in 3/4 inch minimum diameter
electrical metallic tubing or metallic conduit. Wiring for the sprinkler
system fire detection and control system shall be installed in tubing or
conduits dedicated for that use only and not installed in conduit, outlet
boxes or junction boxes which contain lighting and power wiring or
equipment. Circuit conductors entering or leaving any mounting box, outlet
box enclosure or cabinet shall be connected to screw terminals with each
terminal marked and labeled in accordance with the wiring diagram. No more
than one conductor shall be installed under any screw terminal.
Connections and splices shall be made using screw terminal blocks. The use
of wire nut type connectors is not permitted. Wiring within any control
equipment shall be readily accessible without removing any component
parts. Conductors shall be color-coded and shall be identified within each
enclosure where a connection or termination is made. Conductor
identification shall be by plastic-coated, self-sticking, printed markers
or by heat-shrink type sleeves. Circuits shall be wired to maintain
electrical supervision so that removal of any single wire from any device
shall cause a "trouble" condition on the control panel.
3.5.4 Control Panel
The control panel and its assorted components shall be mounted so that no
part of the enclosing cabinet is less than 24 inches and not more than 78
inches above the finished floor.
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 18
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.5.5 Detectors
Detectors shall be part of the clean agent fire suppression system and
shallbe ceiling-mounted or below access floor mounted in accordance with
NFPA 72 and shall be at least 12 inches from any part of any lighting
fixture. Detectors shall be located at least 3 feet from diffusers of air
handling systems. Each detector shall be provided with appropriate
mounting hardware as required by its mounting location.
3.5.6 Manual Actuation Stations
Manual actuation stations shall be mounted readily accessible and 42 inches
above the finished floor adjacent each preaction control valve..
3.5.7 Notification Appliances
Notification appliances shall be mounted a minimum of 8 feet above the
finished floor unless limited by ceiling height.
3.6 DISINFECTION
After all system components are installed and hydrostatic test(s) are
completed, the entire sprinkler system shall be disinfected. Flush all
sprinkler system piping with potable water until all entrained dirt and
other foreign materials have been removed before introducing chlorinating
material. Remove the flushing fitting of each cross main and of each grid
branch line, and then back-flush through the sprinkler main drain.
a. The ater chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with
AWWA C651 and AWWA C652. Feed either a hypochlorite solution (using a
hypochlorinator) or liquid chlorine (using a solution-fed chlorinator
and booster pump) into the system at a constant rate of 50 parts per
million (ppm) until the entire system is filled.
b. Monitor the chlorine residual level in the water at six hour
intervals for a period of 24 hours. If the residual chlorine is below
25 ppm in any interval sampled, flush all piping and repeat the
chlorination procedure. Open and close each valve in the system
several times during this 24 hour period to ensure its proper
disinfection. Following the 24-hour period, verify that no less than
25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the system. After the chlorine
residual level is successfully maintained at or above 25 ppm for a 24
hour period, flush the system with water from the distribution system
until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than one ppm.
c. Take additional samples of water at locations specified by the
Contracting Officer in disinfected containers for bacterial
examination. Test these samples in an approved laboratory for total
coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal,
and other bacteria) in accordance with EPA Standard Method SM9223,
Total Coliforms-PA Test.
d. Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of
coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in
two separate test samples taken 24 hours apart. The system will not be
accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 19
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.7 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.8 PRELIMINARY TESTS
The system, including the aboveground piping, detectors and control system
and system components shall be tested to assure that equipment and
components function as intended. The aboveground interior piping systems
and attached appurtenances subjected to system working pressure shall be
tested in accordance with NFPA 13. Upon completion of specified tests,
complete certificates as specified in paragraph SUBMITTALS.
3.8.1 Aboveground Piping
3.8.1.1 Hydrostatic Testing
Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with
NFPA 13 at not less than 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of maximum system
operating pressure and shall maintain that pressure without loss for 2
hours. There shall be no drop in gauge pressure or visible leakage when
the system is subjected to the hydrostatic test. The test pressure shall
be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of the system or
portion being tested.
3.8.1.2 Air Pressure Test
As specified in NFPA 13, an air pressure leakage test at 50 psi shall be
conducted for 24 hours. There shall be no drop in gauge pressure in excess
of 1.5 psi for the 24 hours. This air pressure test is in addition to the
required hydrostatic test.
3.8.2 Detection and Control System Tests
Upon completion of the installation, the detection and control system shall
be subjected to functional and operational performance tests including
tests of each installed initiating device, system actuation device and
notification appliance. The control system tests specified in paragraph
FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS shall be conducted to ensure that the system is
completely functional and that wiring has been properly connected. If
deficiencies are found, corrections shall be made and the system shall be
retested to assure that the systems have no deficiencies.
3.8.3 Automatic Water Control Valve Test
Each water control valve shall be independently trip-tested in accordance
with the manufacturer's published instructions. Each valve shall be
electrically trip-tested by actuating a respective heat detector and a
manual actuation station connected to the control panel and a manual
actuation device that is part of the valve trim. A full-flow main drain
test shall be made. For preaction systems with supervisory air, the air
pressure shall be reduced to verify proper operation of the air supply
system and associated supervisory alarm devices.
3.9 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
Final Acceptance Test shall begin only when the Preliminary Test Report has
been approved. The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct the Final
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 20
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Acceptance Test and shall provide a complete demonstration of the operation
of the system. This shall include operation of control valves and flowing
of inspector's test connections to verify operation of associated waterflow
alarm switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, the
main drain test shall be repeated to assure that control valves are in the
open position. Each system shall be completely drained after each trip
test. The system air supply system shall be tested to verify that system
pressure is restored in the specified time. In addition, the Fire
Protection Specialist shall have available copies of as-built drawings and
certificates of tests previously conducted. The installation shall not be
considered accepted until identified discrepancies have been corrected and
test documentation is properly completed and received. After the system
has been tested and drained, the system shall be drained periodically for
at least 2 weeks until it can be assured that water from the system has
been removed.
3.9.1 Control System Test
Testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72. The test shall include the
following:
a. Visual inspection of wiring connections.
b. Opening the circuit at each alarm initiating device, solenoid
valve, and notification appliance to test the wiring and supervisory
features.
c. Test of each function of the control panel.
d. Test of each circuit in the normal, open and ground fault modes.
e. Test of each initiating device in both normal and trouble
conditions.
f. Test of each control circuit and device.
g. Test of each alarm notification appliance.
h. Test of the battery charger and batteries.
i. Operational tests under emergency power supply, including
activation of connected alarm notification appliances for the specified
time period.
3.9.2 Trip-tests of Automatic Water Control Valves
Each water control valve shall be independently trip-tested in accordance
with the manufacturer's published instructions. Each valve shall be
electrically trip-tested by actuating a respective second smoke detector, a
manual actuation station connected to the system control panel and the
manual release which is part of the valve trim. Each valve shall be
returned to normal condition after each test. Prior to trip testing
precautionary steps shall be taken to prevent water damage to the building
and equipment from sprinkler discharge. Control valves on preaction
systems shall remain open until piping is filled with water.
3.9.3 Tests of Supervisory Air System
Preaction system supervisory air pressure shall be reduced from the normal
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 21
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
system pressure to the point at which a low-pressure alarm is sounded. Air
pressure shall be restored to verify trouble signal restoration. Automatic
start/stop features of air compressor shall be tested.
3.10 ONSITE TRAINING
The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct a training course for
operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting
Officer. Training shall be provided for a period of 16 hours of normal
working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete and
after the Final Acceptance Test. The Onsite Training shall cover all of
the items contained in the approved Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 21 13 18.00 10 Page 22
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20
CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING
04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B16.11 (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
Threaded
ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,
Classes 150 and 300
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 106/A 106M (2008) Standard Specification for Seamless
Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service
ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM P7825 (2009) Approval Guide
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-58 (2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and
Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture
MSS SP-69 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers
and Supports - Selection and Application
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 12A (2008) Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing
Systems
NFPA 2001 (2008) Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing
Systems
NFPA 70 (2011) National Electrical Code
NFPA 72 (2010) National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 75 (2009) Standard for the Protection of
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Information Technology Equipment
NFPA 90A (2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL-STD-101 (Rev B) Color Code for Pipelines & for
Compressed Gas Cylinders
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS A-A-2962 (Rev J) Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss, Low VOC
Content
FS A-A-58092 (Basic) Tape, Antiseize,
Polytetrafluoroethylene
FS TT-P-645 (Rev B) Primer, Paint, Zinc-Molybdate,
Alkyd Type
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL Fire Prot Dir (2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
1.2 DEFINITION
a. Year 2000 compliant - means computer controlled facility
components that accurately process date and time data (including,
but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from,
into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and
the years 1999 and 2000 and leap year calculations.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to
this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3.1 Description of Work
The work includes the designing and providing of approved Clean Agent
underfloor and room flooding extinguishing system(s) for protection of
designated rooms. The design, equipment, materials, installation and
workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory
provisions of NFPA 2001, except as modified herein. Each system shall
include all materials, accessories and equipment inside and outside the
building necessary to provide each system complete and ready for use.
Design and install each system to give full consideration to built-in
spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ductwork and all other construction
and equipment and to be free from operating and maintenance difficulties,
all in accordance with detailed drawings to be submitted to the Contracting
Officer for approval. Devices and equipment for fire protection service
shall be of a make and type listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.,
or approved by the Factory Mutual System. In the publications referred to
herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory, as
though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it
appears; reference to the "authority having jurisdiction" shall be
interpreted to mean the Savannah District Fire Protection Engineer.
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies
the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The
following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
The Fire Protection Engineer, Savannah District Engineering Command will
review any approve all submittals in this section requiring Government
approval.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Clean Agent system piping layout; G
Field wiring diagrams; G
SD-03 Product Data
Storage cylinders; G
Discharge heads; G
Manifolds; G
Valves; G
Discharge nozzles; G
Pipe; G
Pipe hangers and supports; G
Control panel; G
Manual actuation stations; G
Pressure switches; G
Storage batteries; G
Smoke detectors; G
Audible alarms; G
Visual alarms; G
Annunciator panels; G
Electromagnetic door holder release; G
Battery charger; G
Fittings; G
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Signs; G
SD-05 Design Data
Clean Agent discharge calculations; G
Battery capacity calculations; G
SD-07 Certificates
Record of Prior Installations; G
Clean Agent fire extinguishing system; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Clean Agent fire extinguishing system, Data Package 3; G
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Remote control station operating instructions; G
Record drawings; G
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Record of Prior Installations
Prior to installation, submit data showing installation of Clean Agent fire
extinguishing systems of the same type and design as specified herein. The
data shall include the names and locations of at least two locations where
the Contractor has installed such systems. The Contractor shall indicate
the type and design of these systems and certify that these systems have
performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less
than 18 months.
Qualifications of System Technician: Installation drawings, shop drawing
and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an
individual who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and
is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum
Level-III certification in Special Hazard System program. Contractor shall
submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved
individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings.
Contractor shall have successfully installed Clean Agent fire extinguishing
systems of the same type and design as specified herein.
1.5.2 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System
When preliminary field tests have been completed and all necessary
corrections made, submit to the Contracting Officer a signed and dated
letter attesting to the satisfactory completion of testing and stating that
the systems is in operating condition. The letter shall include a written
request for a formal inspection and test.
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.5.3 Manufacturer's Representative
Provide the services of a manufacturer's authorized representative or
technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of
system being provided to supervise the installation and testing, including
final testing, adjustment of the system and to provide instruction to
Government personnel.
1.6 DESIGN OF CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
Design and installation of Clean Agent fire extinguishing systems shall
conform to NFPA 70, NFPA 72, NFPA 75 and NFPA 2001 and to the requirements
as hereinafter specified.
1.6.1 Piping Layout and Wiring Diagrams
Annotate Clean Agent system piping layout with reference points for
design. In field wiring diagrams, show locations of devices and points of
the system. Prepare working drawings on sheets not smaller than 30 by 42
inches, in accordance with the requirements for "Plans" as specified in
NFPA 12A. Include data essential to the proper installation of each system.
1.6.2 Calculations
Submit Clean Agent discharge calculations verifying total storage
requirements, flooding concentrations, discharge times, flow through the
piping network, pipe sizes, and nozzle orifice sizes, in accordance with
the manufacturer's listed design manual and NFPA 2001. Submit
substantiating battery capacity calculations showing capacity, supervisory
and alarm power requirements.
1.6.3 Flooding Concentration
The system shall totally flood the protected area(s) providing a volumetric
concentration of Clean Agent of not less than 5 percent nor more than 7
percent at 70 degrees F.
1.6.3.1 Clean Agent Concentration
The Clean Agent concentration shall be based upon shutting down the
heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems at the time of
agent discharge. The required Clean Agent concentration shall be
maintained in the protected area(s) for a minimum of ten minutes.
1.6.4 Discharge Time
The maximum Clean Agent liquid discharge time shall be 10 seconds.
1.6.5 Reserve Supplies
Each system shall be provided with its own connected reserve supply of
Clean Agent. Each reserve supply shall contain an amount of Clean Agent
equal to the primary supply of the system to which it is connected.
1.6.6 Record Drawings
Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, submit a complete
set of as-built (record) working drawings, including complete as-built
circuit diagrams, of each Clean Agent system for record purposes. The
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
as-built working drawings shall be not smaller than 30 by 42 inches
reproducible drawings on mylar film with title block (8 by 4 inches)
similar to full size contract drawings. The as-built working drawings
shall be furnished in addition to the record drawings required by Section
01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
1.7 SYSTEM CONTROL
Provide all apparatus, accessories, components and associated materials
specified or necessary to furnish each system complete and ready for
operation. All equipment shall be the current products of their
manufacturers.
1.7.1 Controls
Detection and actuating control system shall be complete, Class A
electrically supervised combination automatic and manual. Automatic
actuation shall be accomplished by smoke detectors. Manual actuation shall
be accomplished by electrical manual actuation stations.
1.7.2 Sequence of Operation
Smoke detection system shall be cross-zoned, priority matrix, or have
common circuit individual detector verification capability. If a
cross-zoned system is used, each protected area shall contain two smoke
detection circuits (zones), with each circuit having an equal number of
detectors connected thereto and no two adjacent detectors connected to the
same zone. Upon activation of any smoke detector, the system shall
simultaneously activate pre-discharge alarms in the protected area(s),
signal the building fire alarm control panel(s) to activate the building
fire evacuation alarms, and send a signal to the base fire department via
the base fire alarm system. Upon activation of a second detector (on the
opposite zone of a cross-zoned system), the systems shall immediately shut
down computer equipment and air conditioning power, close all fire dampers
release all doors to permit closing activate the discharge alarms, and
initiate an adjustable 0-60 second time delay. At the end of the time
delay, Clean Agent shall discharge into the protected area and
post-discharge visual alarms shall activate.
1.7.2.1 Activation By Manual Station
Upon activation by a manual station, the system shall immediately perform
all the above listed alarm functions and shut-down functions, and initiate
the adjustable time delay. At the end of the delay, Clean Agent shall
discharge into the protected area.
1.7.2.2 Manual Activation of Inhibit (Abort) Switch
Upon manual activation of the inhibit (abort) switch, equipment shutdown
and agent discharge shall be delayed. All other functions shall continue
unimpeded. Upon release of inhibit switch, shutdown and discharge functions
shall resume. Time delay shall not reset and shall resume countdown to
discharge after release of switch.
1.7.3 Transfer to reserve supply
Transfer from system main supply to reserve supply shall be controlled by a
"main-reserve" switch at the system control panel.
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.7.4 Remote Control Station Operating Instructions
Submit the proposed legend for remote control station operating
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING
Conceal piping to the maximum extent possible. Piping shall be inspected,
tested and approved before being concealed. Provide fittings for changes
in direction of piping and for all connections. Make changes in piping
sizes through standard reducing pipe fittings; the use of bushings is not
permitted.
2.1.1 Pipe
ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, black or zinc-coated, threaded,
Schedule 40.
2.1.2 Fittings
ASME B16.11 or ASME B16.3, Class 300, zinc-coated, threaded, except Class
150 or 300 for pipe 3/4 inch or smaller.
2.1.3 Pipe Hangers and Supports
MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, adjustable type. Rods, hangers and supports shall
be zinc plated. Provide pipe hangers and supports as follows:
Nominal Pipe Maximum
Size (inches) Spacing (feet)
1 and under 7
1.25 8
1.5 9
2 10
2.5 11
3 12
3.5 13
4 14
5 15
6 16
2.1.4 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes through masonry or concrete walls, floors,
roofs and partitions. Sleeves in outside walls below and above grade, in
floor, and in roof slabs, shall be standard weight zinc coated steel pipe.
Sleeves in partitions shall be zinc coated sheet steel having a nominal
weight of not less than 0.90 pounds per square foot. Space between piping
and the sleeve, shall be not less than 0.5 inch. Sleeves shall be of
sufficient length to pass through the entire thickness of walls, partitions
and slabs. Extend sleeves in floor slabs 2 inches above the finished
floor. Pack space between the pipe and sleeve with asbestos free
insulation and calk at both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof
cement.
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.5 Escutcheon Plates
Provide piping passing through floors, walls and ceilings with one piece or
split type plates. Plates where pipe passes through finished ceilings
shall be chromium plated. Other plates shall be of steel or cast iron,
with aluminum paint finish. Securely anchor plates in place.
2.1.6 Discharge Nozzles
Fabricated of corrosion resistant materials. All nozzles shall be designed
so that the orifice piece is connected directly to the supply pipe. The
size of pipe and nozzles shall be determined from the calculated flow and
terminal pressures in accordance with established, recognized test data
contained in the manufacturer's listed design manual.
2.1.7 Storage Cylinders
Constructed of high strength alloy steel, conforming to all applicable
specifications of the Department of Transportation. Container design shall
permit on-site reconditioning and refilling when required. Safety valves,
manifolds, pressure gauges, and pressure switches shall be provided.
2.1.8 Jointing Compound
Tape conforming to FS A-A-58092.
2.2 CONTROL PANEL
Provide complete electrical supervision of all circuits. Install modular
type panel in a surface mounted steel cabinet with hinged door and cylinder
lock. Switches and other controls shall not be accessible without the use
of a key. The control panel shall be a neat, compact, factory-wired
assembly containing all parts and equipment required to provide specified
operating and supervisory functions of the system. Panel cabinet shall be
finished on the inside and outside with factory-applied enamel finish.
Provide separate alarm and trouble lamps located on the exterior of the
cabinet door or visible through the cabinet door for each zone initiating
circuit. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates
for all lamps and switches. A single open or ground fault condition in any
detection or actuation circuit shall not result in any loss of system
function, but shall cause the actuation of system trouble signals. A
ground fault condition or single break in any other circuit shall result in
the activation of the system trouble signals. Supervision of wiring
external to the control panel for mechanical equipment shutdown is not
required, provided a break in such wiring will cause the associated
mechanical equipment to shut down. Loss of AC power, a break in the
standby battery power circuits, or abnormally low battery voltage shall
also result in the operation of the system trouble signals. The abnormal
position of any system switch in the control panel shall also result in the
operation of the system trouble signals. Trouble signals shall operate
continuously until the system has been restored to normal at the control
panel. Panel shall be provided with the following switches:
1. Trouble silencing switch which transfers trouble signals to an
indicating lamp. Upon correction of the trouble condition,
audible signals will again sound until the switch is returned to
its normal position, or the trouble circuit shall be automatically
restored to normal upon correction of the trouble condition.
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2. Evacuation alarm silence switch which when activated will silence
all alarm devices and cause operation of system trouble signals.
3. Disconnect switch which when activated will disconnect the system
from the base fire alarm system and cause operation of the Clean
Agent system trouble signals.
System control panel shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825 approved
for extinguishing system control (releasing device service).
2.3 SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY
Supply shall include nickel cadmium, lead calcium or sealed lead acid
batteries and charger. Drycell batteries are not allowed. House batteries
in a well constructed steel cabinet with cylinder lock.
2.3.1 Storage Batteries
Provide batteries of adequate ampere-hour rating to operate the system
under supervisory conditions for 72 hours at the end of which time
batteries shall be capable of operating the entire system in a full alarm
condition for not less than 30 minutes. Provide calculations
substantiating the battery capacity. Provide reliable separation between
cells to prevent contact between terminals of adjacent cells and between
battery terminals and other metal parts.
2.3.2 Battery Charger
Provide completely automatic high/low charging rate type charger capable of
recovery of the batteries from full discharge to full charge in 24 hours or
less. Provide an ammeter for recording rate of charge and a voltmeter to
indicate the state of battery charge. Provide a red pilot light to
indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as
part of the unit assembly if a high-rate switch is provided.
2.4 MANUAL ACTUATION STATIONS
Provide actuation stations for systems at the exits from the protected
areas. Operation of a manual station shall cause the control panel to go
into full alarm condition and discharge Clean Agent into the protected area
following the adjustable time delay. Stations shall be of a type not
subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall have a dual
action release configuration to prevent accidental system discharge.
Break-glass-front stations are not permitted; however a pull lever
break-glass-rod type is acceptable. Station color shall be orange or other
approved color shall not be red. Warning signs shall be placed at each
station indicating that operation of the station will cause immediate Clean
Agent discharge. Where building fire alarm pull stations are also mounted
at the exits from the protected areas, they shall be separated from Clean
Agent actuation stations by at least 3 feet horizontally, labels shall be
provided to clearly distinguish building fire alarm stations from Clean
Agent stations and stations shall be of different colors.
2.5 SMOKE DETECTORS
Designed for detection of abnormal smoke densities by the photoelectric
principle. Necessary control and/or power modules required for operation
of the device shall be integral with the main control panel. Detectors
shall be compatible with main control panel provided and shall be suitable
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
for use in a supervised circuit. Detectors shall not draw power from the
initiating circuit. Operating power shall be taken from a separate
supervised power supply circuit. Malfunction of the electrical circuitry
to the detector or its control or power units shall result in the operation
of the system trouble devices. Detectors shall not be susceptible to
operation by changes in relative humidity. Each detector shall contain a
visible indicator lamp that shall show when the unit is activated. Each
detector shall be the plug-in type in which the detector base contains
screw terminals for making all wiring connections. Remote indicator lamp
(to be in a graphic display) shall be provided for each detector that is
located above suspended ceilings, beneath raised floors or otherwise
concealed from view.
2.5.1 Ionization Detectors
Not permitted.
2.5.2 Photoelectric Detectors
Operate on a multiple cell concept using a light-emitting diode (LED) light
source. Failure of the LED shall not cause an alarm condition but shall
operate the detector trouble indicating lamp.
2.5.3 Detector Spacing and Location
In accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72, the manufacturer's
recommendations and the requirements stated herein. Spacing and location
of detectors shall take into account the airflow into the room and supply
diffusers. Detectors shall not be placed closer than 5 feet from any
discharge grille. Spacing of detectors on room ceilings shall not exceed
450 square feet per detector. Spacing of detectors under raised floors
shall not exceed 250 square feet per detector. Detectors installed beneath
raised floors shall be mounted with the detector base within 2 inches of
the underside of the raised floor framing, with the detector facing
downward. Where the space under the raised floor is less than 12 inches in
height, detectors shall be mounted with their bases either horizontal or
vertical, with the detection chambers mounted in the upper half of the
underfloor space. Under no circumstances shall detectors be mounted facing
upward.
2.6 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
In accordance with the requirements of NFPA 90A, the manufacturer's
recommendations and the requirements stated herein. Detectors required in
ducts shall be photoelectric type and listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825
for duct installation. Provide duct detectors with an approved duct
housing, mounted exterior to the duct, with perforated sampling tubes
extending across the width of the duct. Activation of duct detectors shall
cause shut down of the associated air-handling unit, annunciation at the
control panel, tripping of the transmitter, and sounding of building fire
evacuation alarms. Detector shall have a test port or switch. Each
detector shall be provided a remote LED and test switch assembly.
2.7 INHIBIT (ABORT) SWITCH
Provide one switch where shown. Activation of switch shall delay only
equipment shutdown and agent discharge. Switch shall be guarded,
spring-loaded type which operates only when pressure is manually applied to
the switch. Upon release of manual pressure, switch shall de-activate
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
allowing delayed functions to resume. After start of agent discharge,
switch shall have no effect. Activation of switch during normal
(non-alarm) conditions shall cause activation of system trouble signals.
2.8 ALARM SIGNALLING DEVICES
Provide each protected area with audible and visual alarms located where
shown. All alarm circuits shall be electrically supervised. Provide
separate and distinct audible and visual pre-discharge and discharge
signals. Where the building is equipped with a separate fire evacuation
alarm system the discharge signals shall also be distinct from those used
by the building fire evacuation system. Each signal device shall be
provided with a rigid plastic or metal identification sign with lettering a
minimum of 1.5 inches high. The pre-discharge alarm shall be labelled
"FIRE" and the discharge alarm shall be labelled "CLEAN AGENT DISCHARGE."
Post-discharge visual alarms shall be located outside all entrances to the
protected areas, and shall be provided with signs reading "CLEAN AGENT
DISCHARGED WHEN FLASHING - DO NOT ENTER.
2.8.1 Audible Alarms
a. Alarm bells
10 inch recessed with matching mounting back box. Bells shall be of the
vibrating type suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit.
Bells shall be of the underdome type and produce a sound output rating of
at least 90 decibels at 10 feet.
b. Alarm horns
Recessed, vibrating type suitable for use in an electrically supervised
circuit and shall have a sound output rating of at least 90 decibels at 10
feet.
2.8.2 Visual Alarms
Flush lamp assembly suitable for use in an electrically supervised
circuit. Lamp shall be the flashing stroboscopic type and powered from the
control panel alarm circuit. Lamps shall provide a minimum of 50 candle
power. Flash rate shall be between 60 and 120 flashes per minute. Lamps
shall be protected by a thermo-plastic lens, red for pre-discharge alarms
and blue for discharge and post-discharge alarms. Visual alarms may be
part of an audio-visual alarm assembly.
2.9 MAIN ANNUNCIATOR
Annunciator shall be integral with the main control panel. Provide
separate alarm and trouble lamps for each zone alarm initiating circuit
located on the exterior of the cabinet door or visible through the cabinet
door. Supervision will not be required provided a fault in the annunciator
circuits results only in loss of annunciation and will not affect the
normal functional operation of the remainder of the system. Each lamp
shall provide specific identification of the device by means of a permanent
label. In no case shall zone identification consist of the words "Zone 1,"
"Zone 2," etc., but shall consist of the description of the device.
2.9.1 Annunciation Zones
Shall be arranged as appropriate to the room or space being protected.
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 11
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.9.2 Annunciator Panels
a. Remote annunicator panels
Panel shall duplicate all requirements specified for the main control panel
annunciator, except that in lieu of individual zone trouble lamps a single
common system trouble lamp may be provided. Panel shall have a lamp test
switch. Zone identification shall be by means of permanently attached
rigid plastic or metal plate(s). Panel shall be of the type, flush or
surface.
b. Graphic Annunciator Panel
Panel shall be of the interior type, flush or surface-mounted. Panel shall
be provided with the room floor plan, drawn to scale, with remote alarm
lamps mounted to represent the location of each alarm in initiating
device. Principal rooms and areas shown shall be labelled with their room
numbers or titles. The panel location shall be shown on the floor plan.
Detectors mounted above ceilings, on ceilings, and beneath raised floors
and different types of initiating devices shall have different symbols or
lamps of different colors for identification. Lamps shall illuminate upon
actuation of their corresponding device and shall remain illuminated until
the system is reset. Panel shall have a lamp test switch.
2.10 AUTOMATIC FIRE DAMPERS
Provide automatic control of fire dampers in air conditioning supply duct
work as specified on the drawings. Activation of fire dampers shall occur
upon second zone detection, or upon activation of Clean Agent discharge by
manual pull station. Fire dampers are specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR
SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS. Provide heaters
for fusible links.
2.11 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER RELEASE (IF ANY)
Provide where shown. The armature portion shall be mounted on the door and
shall have an adjusting screw for setting the angle of the contact plate.
The electro-magnetic release shall be wall mounted, with a total horizontal
projection not exceeding 4 inches. All doors shall release to close upon
first stage (pre-discharge) alarm. Electrical supervision of wiring
external of control panel for magnetic door holding circuits is not
required.
2.12 ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical work is specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM, except for control and fire alarm wiring.
2.12.1 Wiring
Control and fire alarm wiring, including connections to fire alarm systems,
shall be provided under this section and shall conform to NFPA 70. Wiring
for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 12 AWG minimum. Wiring for low voltage
DC circuits shall be No. 16 AWG minimum. All wiring shall be color coded.
Use rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit, except electrical
metallic tubing may be used in dry locations not enclosed in concrete and
where not subject to mechanical damage.
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 12
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.12.2 Operating Power
Power shall be 120 volts AC service, transformed through a two winding
isolation type transformer and rectified to 24 volts DC for operation of
all signal initiating, signal sounding, trouble signal and transmitter
tripping circuits. Provide secondary DC power supply for operation of
system in the event of failure of the AC supply. Transfer from normal to
emergency power or restoration from emergency to normal power shall be
fully automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm. Obtain
AC operating power to control panel and battery charger from the building
emergency panel.
2.12.3 Conductor Identification
All circuit conductors shall be identified within each enclosure where a
tap, splice or termination is made. Conductor identification shall be by
plastic coated self sticking printed markers or by heat-shrink type
sleeves. Attach the markers in a manner that will not permit accidental
detachment. Properly identify control circuit terminations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION
Cut screw-jointed pipe accurately and work into place without springing or
forcing. Ream pipe ends and free pipe and fittings from burrs. Clean with
solvent to remove all varnish and cutting oil prior to assembly. Make
screw joints with tetrafluoroethylene tape applied to male thread only.
3.2 FIELD PAINTING
Clean, pretreat, prime, and finish paint new Clean Agent fire extinguishing
systems, including piping, conduit, hangers and miscellaneous metalwork.
Apply coatings only to clean, dry, surfaces using clean brushes. Clean
surfaces to remove all dust, dirt, rust and loose mill scale. Immediately
after cleaning, the metal surfaces shall receive one coat of primer
conforming to FS TT-P-645 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one
mil. Exercise due care to avoid the painting of operating devices.
Materials which are used to protect devices, while painting is in process,
shall be removed upon the completion of painting. Remove all devices which
are painted and provide new clean devices of the proper type in lieu
thereof. Provide "Clean Agent" lettering (1-inch minimum lettering) at 20
foot intervals on all clean agent piping.
3.2.1 Systems in Unfinished Areas
Unfinished areas are defined as attic spaces, spaces above suspended
ceilings, spaces under raised floors, crawl spaces, pipe chases, and spaces
where walls or ceiling are not painted or not constructed of a prefinished
material. Primed surfaces shall receive one coat of red enamel conforming
to FS A-A-2962 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil and color
coded in accordance with MIL-STD-101.
3.2.2 Systems in All Other Areas
Primed surfaces shall receive two coats of paint to match adjacent
surfaces, except stop valves and accessories shall receive one coat of red
enamel conforming to FS A-A-2962 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of
one mil. Provide "Clean Agent" lettering (1-inch minimum lettering) at 20
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 13
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
foot intervals on all clean agent piping.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
Perform tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer to determine
conformance with the specified requirements.
3.3.1 Preliminary Tests
Each piping system shall be pneumatically tested at 40 psig and shall show
no leakage or reduction in gage pressure after 30 minutes. The contractor
shall conduct complete preliminary tests, which shall encompass all aspects
of system operation. Individually test all detectors, manual actuation
stations, alarms, control panels, and all other components and accessories
to demonstrate proper functioning.
3.3.2 Formal Inspection and Tests
The Savannah District, Fire Protection Engineer, will witness formal tests
and approve all systems before they are accepted. The system shall be
considered ready for such testing only after all necessary preliminary
tests have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected to the
satisfaction of the equipment manufacturer's technical representative and
the Contracting Officer.Submit the request for formal inspection at least
15 days prior to the date the inspection is to take place. The control
panel(s) and detection system(s) shall be in service for a "break-in"
period of at least 15 consecutive days prior to the formal inspection.
Experienced technicians regularly employed by the contractor in the
installation of both the mechanical and electrical portions of such systems
shall be present during the inspection and shall conduct the testing. All
Clean Agent, instruments, personnel, appliances and equipment for testing
shall be furnished by the contractor. All necessary tests encompassing all
aspects of system operation shall be made including the following, and any
deficiency found shall be corrected and the system retested at no cost to
the Government.
3.3.2.1 System Function Tests Without Clean Agent Discharge
The entire detection/alarm/actuation system shall be operated. As a
minimum, operation and supervision of the following functions and devices
shall be demonstrated.
a. All operational and supervisory functions of the control and
annunciator panels, including the cross-zoning, pre-discharge
alarm, discharge alarm, post-discharge alarm and time delay
features.
b. Each manual actuation station and associated circuit(s).
c. All smoke detectors and associated circuits.
d. All pre-discharge, discharge and post-discharge alarms and
associated circuits.
e. All actuator circuits and discharge heads (without Clean Agent
discharge).
f. Air handing and computer equipment shutdown.
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 14
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
g. Automatic fire dampers.
h. Activation of the building fire evacuation alarm system.
i. Activation of the Base fire alarm system (receipt of fire alarm at
alarm office).
j. Room integraty (fan)test
3.3.2.2 Clean Agent Discharge Tests
Not required.
3.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide operating instructions at each remote control station. Instructions
shall clearly indicate all necessary steps for the operation of the
system. Instructions shall be in raised or embossed white letters on red
rigid plastic or red enameled steel backgrounds and shall be of adequate
size to permit them to be easily read.
3.5 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide operation and
maintenance training to the Base Fire Department and Public Works, Civil
Engineering and Computer personnel. Each training session shall include
computer emergency procedures, and unique maintenance and safety
requirements. Training areas will be provided by the Government in the
same building as the protected areas. The training conducted shall use
operation and maintenance manuals called for in paragraph entitled
"Operation and Maintenance Instructions, Parts and Testing." Dates and
times of the training period shall be coordinated through the Contracting
Officer not less then two weeks prior to the session. Government shall be
provided with a simplified training manual providing a description of
operation and controls, possible hazards to personnel, and restart
procedures for computers and air handling units.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 15
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
AHRI 1010 (2002) Self-Contained, Mechanically
Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2007; Supplement 2008; Errata 2009;
Errata 2009; INT 1-3 2009) Energy Standard
for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings, I-P Edition
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
ASSE 1003 (2009) Performance Requirements for Water
Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic
Water Distribution Systems
ASSE 1005 (1999) Water Heater Drain Valves 3/4 Inch
Size
ASSE 1010 (2004) Water Hammer Arresters
ASSE 1018 (2001) Trap Seal Primer Valves - Potable,
Water Supplied
ASSE 1019 (2004; Errata 2005) Vacuum Breaker Wall
Hydrants, Freeze Resistant, Automatic
Draining Type
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Wastewater
AWWA B300 (2004) Hypochlorites
AWWA B301 (2004) Liquid Chlorine
AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and
Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel
and Tape - Hot-Applied
AWWA C606 (2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for
Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C652 (2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage
Facilities
AWWA D100 (2007) Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2004; Errata 2004) Specification for
Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
AWS B2.2 (1991) Brazing Procedure and Performance
Qualification
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME A112.14.1 (2003; R 2008) Backwater Valves
ASME A112.19.2 (2008) Standard for Vitreous China
Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic
Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals
ASME A112.19.3 (2008) Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures
ASME A112.36.2M (1991; R 2008) Cleanouts
ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2008) Floor Affixed Supports for
Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public
Use
ASME A112.6.3 (2001; R 2007) Standard for Floor and
Trench Drains
ASME A112.6.4 (2003: R 2008) Roof, Deck and Balcony
Drains
ASME B1.20.1 (1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General
Purpose (Inch)
ASME B16.12 (2009) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings
ASME B16.15 (2006) Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings
Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.18 (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder
Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.21 (2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
Flanges
ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper
and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
ASME B16.23 (2002; Errata 2003; R 2006) Cast Copper
Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
ASME B16.24 (2006) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600,
900, 1500, and 2500
ASME B16.29 (2007) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper
Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,
Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.34 (2009) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and
Welding End
ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron
Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250,
and 300
ASME B16.4 (2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.5 (2009) Standard for Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24
ASME B31.1 (2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) Power
Piping
ASME B31.5 (2006) Refrigeration Piping and Heat
Transfer Components
ASME B40.100 (2005) Pressure Gauges and Gauge
Attachments
ASME BPVC SEC IX (2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code; Section IX,
Welding and Brazing Qualifications
ASME CSD-1 (2009) Control and Safety Devices for
Automatically Fired Boilers
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 105/A 105M (2009) Standard Specification for Carbon
Steel Forgings for Piping Applications
ASTM A 183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
ASTM A 193/A 193M (2009) Standard Specification for
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High-Temperature Service
ASTM A 47/A 47M (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 515/A 515M (2003; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for
Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Service
ASTM A 516/A 516M (2006) Standard Specification for Pressure
Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate-
and Lower-Temperature Service
ASTM A 518/A 518M (1999; R 2008) Standard Specification for
Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron
Castings
ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A 733 (2003e1; R 2009) Standard Specification
for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples
ASTM A 74 (2009) Standard Specification for Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM A 888 (2009) Standard Specification for Hubless
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent
Piping Applications
ASTM B 117 (2009) Standing Practice for Operating
Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B 152/B 152M (2009) Standard Specification for Copper
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar
ASTM B 306 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper
Drainage Tube (DWV)
ASTM B 32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder
Metal
ASTM B 370 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper
Sheet and Strip for Building Construction
ASTM B 42 (2002e1) Standard Specification for
Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes
ASTM B 43 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes
ASTM B 584 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper
Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications
ASTM B 75 (2002) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Tube
ASTM B 813 (2000; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
ASTM B 828 (2002) Standard Practice for Making
Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper
and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings
ASTM B 88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube
ASTM B 88M (2005) Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Water Tube (Metric)
ASTM C 564 (2009) Standard Specification for Rubber
Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM C 920 (2010) Standard Specification for
Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D 1248 (2005) Standard Specification for
Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials
for Wire and Cable
ASTM D 2822 (2005) Asphalt Roof Cement
ASTM D 3139 (1998; R 2005) Joints for Plastic Pressure
Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D 3212 (2007) Standard Specification for Joints
for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D 3311 (2009a) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV)
Plastic Fittings Patterns
ASTM E 1 (2007) Standard Specification for ASTM
Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers
ASTM F 477 (2008) Standard Specification for
Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)
CISPI 301 (2004) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,
Waste, and Vent Piping Applications
CISPI 310 (2004) Coupling for Use in Connection with
Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and
Vent Piping Applications
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
CDA A4015 (1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
CSA STANDARDS
CSA/AM Z21.22 (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R
2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply
Systems
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS
(IAPMO)
IAPMO PS 117 (2005) Press Type Or Plain End Rub Gsktd
W/ Nail CU & CU Alloy Fittings for Install
On CU Tubing
UPC (2003) Uniform Plumbing Code
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
ICC A117.1 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Accessible and
Usable Buildings and Facilities
ICC IPC (2009) International Plumbing Code
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-110 (1996) Ball Valves Threaded,
Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends
MSS SP-25 (2008) Standard Marking System for Valves,
Fittings, Flanges and Unions
MSS SP-44 (2006) Steel Pipeline Flanges
MSS SP-58 (2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and
Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture
MSS SP-69 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers
and Supports - Selection and Application
MSS SP-70 (2006) Standard for Cast Iron Gate Valves,
Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-71 (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check
Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-72 (1999) Standard for Ball Valves with
Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General
Service
MSS SP-73 (2003) Brazing Joints for Copper and
Copper Alloy Pressure Fittings
MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check
Valves
MSS SP-83 (2006) Standard for Class 3000 Steel Pipe
Unions Socket Welding and Threaded
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)
NACE SP0169 (2007) Control of External Corrosion on
Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping
Systems
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA MG 1 (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors
and Generators
NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 90A (2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
NSF 14 (2008) Plastics Piping System Components
and Related Materials
NSF 61 (2009) Drinking Water System Components -
Health Effects
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)
PPFA-01 (1998) Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive
Construction
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)
PDI WH 201 (2006) Water Hammer Arresters Standard
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
SAE J1508 (2009) Hose Clamp Specifications
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA SM 9223 (2004) Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test
Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy
Efficiency Labeling System
PL 93-523 (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
Rating System for New Construction
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
(LEED-NC) v3.0
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
10 CFR 430 Energy Conservation Program for Consumer
Products
21 CFR 175 Indirect Food Additives: Adhesives and
Components of Coatings
40 CFR 50.12 National Primary and Secondary Ambient Air
Quality Standards for Lead
PL 109-58 Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct05)
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 174 (2004; Rev thru Apr 2009) Household
Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. The
following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Fixtures; (LEED)
List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow
rate.
Flush valve water closets; G
Wall hung lavatories; G
Countertop lavatories; G
Break room sinks; G
Service sinks; G
Drinking-water coolers; G
Water heaters; G
Pumps; G
Shower Faucets; G
Welding
A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and
identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators.
Vibration-Absorbing Features; G
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement,
foundation plan, dimensions and specifications.
Plumbing System
Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting.
Manufacturer's recommendations for the installation of bell and
spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe.
SD-06 Test Reports
Tests, Flushing and Disinfection
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed
to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove
compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and
testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate
the final position of controls.
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment
Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, the design, fabrication, and
installation shall conform to the code.
Bolts
Written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts
furnished comply with the specified requirements.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Plumbing System; G.
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
1.3 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products.
Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has
performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard
products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2
years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.
The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year
period.
1.3.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be
acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not
less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory
tests, can be shown.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
1.3.2 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a
certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.3.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.3.4 Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.3.4.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
"should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official"
shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned
property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the
"Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner"
shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit
holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."
1.3.4.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of
Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative
requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations
(FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer
in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project.
References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied
appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his
administrative cognizance and the FAR.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before
and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace
damaged or defective items.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1 Welding
Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and
welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding
procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified
by another employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. The
Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests, and the
tests shall be performed at the work site if practicable. Welders or
welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they
make as a permanent record. Structural members shall be welded in
accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL. Structural members
shall be welded in accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL.
1.5.2 Cathodic Protection and Pipe Joint Bonding
Cathodic protection and pipe joint bonding systems shall be in accordance
with the drawings.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with
ICC IPC. Energy consuming products and systems shall be in accordance with
PL 109-58 and ASHRAE 90.1 - IP
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify
dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
discrepancy before performing any work.
1.8 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent
instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel
in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained
in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the
equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for
regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction
furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than
4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time
for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the
equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are
made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.9 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,
maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves,
expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 11
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and
II. Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements. Pipe
fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Plastic
pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF 14 and shall be NSF
listed for the service intended. Pipe threads (except dry seal) shall
conform to ASME B1.20.1. Material or equipment containing lead shall not
be used in any potable water system. In line devices such as building
valves, check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings and back flow
preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSF 61, Section 8. End point
devices such as drinking water fountains, lavatory faucets, kitchen and bar
faucets, residential ice makers, supply stops and end point control valves
used to dispense water for drinking must meet the requirements of NSF 61,
Section 9. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed underground,
under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen floors.
2.1.1 Pipe Joint Materials
Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used under ground. Solder
containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Cast iron soil pipe
and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron
Soil Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall conform to the following:
a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A 74,
AWWA C606. For hubless type: CISPI 310
b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606.
c. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in
accordance with ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1/16 inch thick,
and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or
Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be the full face or self
centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall
be bonded with NBR.
d. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M,
BCuP-5.
e. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for
use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have
a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents;
contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.
f. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B 32.
g. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to
ASTM B 813, Standard Test 1.
h. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.
i. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot
type and hubless type): ASTM C 564.
j. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D 3139, ASTM D 3212 or ASTM F 477.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 12
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
k. Bolts and Nuts for Grooved Pipe Couplings: Heat-treated carbon steel,
ASTM A 183.
l. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc.,
shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the
manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange
material shall conform to ASTM A 105/A 105M. Blind flange material
shall conform to ASTM A 516/A 516M cold service and ASTM A 515/A 515M
for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength
with material conforming to ASTM A 193/A 193M.
m. Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings shall
conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or
ASME B16.22 and performance criteria of IAPMO PS 117. Sealing elements
for copper press fittings shall be EPDM, FKM or HNBR. Sealing elements
shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied fitting
manufacturer. Sealing element shall be selected based on
manufacturer's approved application guidelines.
n. Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88, Type K, L or M.
2.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials
Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:
a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. Water hammer arrester shall be
piston type.
b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B 370.
c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D 2822.
d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.
e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.
f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.
g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal
molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be
nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide watertight,
gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.
h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines:
AWWA C203.
i. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.
j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.
k. Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element:
ASME B40.100.
l. Thermometers: ASTM E 1. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.
2.1.3 Pipe Insulation Material
Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 13
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2.3 VALVES
Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves
2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and
solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 3 inches and larger shall have
flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon
the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer
certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable
MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards:
Description Standard
Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends MSS SP-70
Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends MSS SP-71
Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends
for General Service MSS SP-72
Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,
Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends MSS SP-110
Bronze Gate, and Check Valves MSS SP-80
Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends ASME B16.34
Backwater Valves ASME A112.14.1
Vacuum Relief Valves CSA/AM Z21.22
Water Pressure Reducing Valves ASSE 1003
Water Heater Drain Valves ASSE 1005
Trap Seal Primer Valves ASSE 1018
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves CSA/AM Z21.22
for Hot Water Supply Systems
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves ASME CSD-1
for Automatically Fired Hot
Water Boilers Safety Code No., Part CW,
Article 5
2.3.1 Wall Faucets
Wall faucets with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall be brass with 3/4
inch male inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 3/4 inch hose connection.
Faucet handle shall be securely attached to stem.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 14
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.3.2 Wall Hydrants (Frostproof)
ASSE 1019 with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall have a nickel-brass
or nickel-bronze wall plate or flange with nozzle and detachable key
handle. A brass or bronze operating rod shall be provided within a
galvanized iron casing of sufficient length to extend through the wall so
that the valve is inside the building, and the portion of the hydrant
between the outlet and valve is self-draining. A brass or bronze valve
with coupling and union elbow having metal-to-metal seat shall be
provided. Valve rod and seat washer shall be removable through the face of
the hydrant. The hydrant shall have 3/4 inch exposed hose thread on spout
and 3/4 inch male pipe thread on inlet.
2.3.3 Relief Valves
Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure
and temperature (P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element of a P&T
relief valve shall have adequate capacity to prevent excessive pressure
buildup in the system when the system is operating at the maximum rate of
heat input. The temperature element of a P&T relief valve shall have a
relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of the
heaters when operating at their maximum capacity. Relief valves shall be
rated according to CSA/AM Z21.22. Relief valves for systems where the
maximum rate of heat input is less than 200,000 Btuh shall have 3/4 inch
minimum inlets, and 3/4 inch outlets. Relief valves for systems where the
maximum rate of heat input is greater than 200,000 Btuh shall have 1 inch
minimum inlets, and 1 inch outlets. The discharge pipe from the relief
valve shall be the size of the valve outlet.
2.3.4 Thermostatic Mixing Valves
Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory faucets. Mixing valves,
thermostatic type, pressure-balanced or combination thermostatic and
pressure-balanced shall be line size and shall be constructed with rough or
finish bodies either with or without plating. Each valve shall be
constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver
water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature
changes. The control element shall be of an approved type. The body shall
be of heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass, bronze,
corrosion-resisting steel or copper. The valve shall be equipped with
necessary stops, check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the
inlets. Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within 5 degrees F
of any setting.
2.4 FIXTURES
Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC.
Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with
ICC A117.1. Vitreous China, nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified
throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have
specially selected, clear white, acid-resisting enamel coating evenly
applied on surfaces. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks,
crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped
with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain
fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the
drainage system, except grease interceptors, shall be equipped with a
trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be
provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and
fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 15
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers.
Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves,
shower head face plates, and pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drainsmay
contain acetal resin, fluorocarbon, nylon, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
(ABS) or other plastic material, if the material has provided satisfactory
service under actual commercial or industrial operating conditions for not
less than 2 years Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for
180 degrees F water temperature.
2.4.1 Lavatories
Enameled cast-iron lavatories shall be provided with two cast-iron or steel
brackets secured to the underside of the apron and drilled for bolting to
the wall in a manner similar to the hanger plate. Exposed brackets shall
be porcelain enameled. Vitreous china lavatories shall be provided with
two integral molded lugs on the back-underside of the fixture and drilled
for bolting to the wall in a manner similar to the hanger plate.
2.4.2 Flush Valve Water Closets
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, ASME A112.19.3 302 Stainless Steel
siphon jet, elongated bowl, floor-mounted, floor outlet. Top of toilet
seat height above floor shall be 14 to 15 inches, except 17 to 19 inches
for wheelchair water closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic
sleeve. Provide white solid plastic elongated open-front seat.
Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall
not exceed1.6 gallons per flush. Provide a dual-flush water closet and
flush valve combination that will also provide a second flushing water
volume not to exceed 1.28 gallons per flush.
Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve,
vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view
components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush
valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11
inches above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not
interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls. Provide solenoid-activated
flush valves including electrical-operated light-beam-sensor to energize
the solenoid.
2.4.3 Wall Hung Lavatories
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, ,straight back type, minimum
dimensions of 19 inches, wide by 17 inches front to rear, with supply
openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets, and openings for
concealed arm carrier installation. Provide aerator with faucet. Water
flow rate shall not exceed 0.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water
pressure of 60 psi. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with
vertical steel pipe supports and concealed arms for the lavatory. Mount
lavatory with the front rim 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches
minimum clearance from bottom of the front rim to floor. Provide top
mounted washerless centerset lavatory faucets.
2.4.4 Countertop Lavatories
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, self-rimming, minimum dimensions of
19 inches wide by 17 inches front to rear, with supply openings for use
with top mounted centerset faucets. Furnish template and mounting kit by
lavatory manufacturer. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate shall
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 16
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
not exceed 0.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi.
Mount counter with the top surface 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches
minimum clearance from bottom of the counter face to floor. Provide top
mounted washerless centerset lavatory faucets.
2.4.5 Break Room Sinks
ASME A112.19.3, 20 gage stainless steel with integral mounting rim for
flush installation, minimum dimensions of 33 inches wide by 21 inches front
to rear, two compartments, with undersides fully sound deadened, with
supply openings for use with top mounted washerless sink faucets with hose
spray, and with 3.5 inch drain outlet. Provide aerator with faucet. Water
flow rate shall not exceed 1.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water
pressure of 60 psi. Provide stainless steel drain outlets and stainless
steel cup strainers. Provide separate 1.5 inch P-trap and drain piping to
vertical vent piping from each compartment. Provide top mounted washerless
sink faucets with hose spray.
2.4.6 Service Sinks
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china with integral back and wall hanger
supports, minimum dimensions of 22 inches wide by 20 inches front to rear,
with two supply openings in 10 inch high back. Provide floor supported
wall outlet cast iron P-trap and stainless steel rim guards as recommended
by service sink manufacturer. Provide back mounted washerless service sink
faucets with vacuum breaker and 0.75 inch external hose threads.
2.4.7 Drinking-Water Coolers
AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable
water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style,
air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless steel
splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Bubblers shall be
controlled by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near
the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum
of 36 inches above floor and at front of unit basin. Spouts shall direct
water flow at least 4 inches above unit basin and trajectory parallel or
nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed
steel pipe chair carriers.
2.4.8 Wheelchair Drinking Water cooler
AHRI 1010, wall-mounted bubbler style with ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair
carrier, air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless
steel splash receptor, and all stainless steel cabinet, with 27 inch
minimum knee clearance from front bottom of unit to floor and 36 inch
maximum spout height above floor. Bubblers shall also be controlled by
push levers, by push bars, or touch pads one on each side or one on front
and both sides of the cabinet.
2.5 DRAINS
2.5.1 Floor and Shower Drains
Floor and shower drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral
seepage pan, and adjustable perforated or slotted chromium-plated bronze,
nickel-bronze, or nickel-brass strainer, consisting of grate and threaded
collar. Floor drains shall be cast iron except where metallic
waterproofing membrane is installed. Drains shall be of double drainage
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 17
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
pattern for embedding in the floor construction. The seepage pan shall
have weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The strainer
shall be adjustable to floor thickness. A clamping device for attaching
flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the
flashing or waterproofing membrane shall be provided when required. Drains
shall be provided with threaded connection. Between the drain outlet and
waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C 564 may be
installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber
gasket compression type joint. Floor and shower drains shall conform to
ASME A112.6.3.
2.5.1.1 Metallic Shower Pan Drains
Where metallic shower pan membrane is installed, polyethylene drain with
corrosion-resistant screws securing the clamping device shall be provided.
Polyethylene drains shall have fittings to adapt drain to waste piping.
Polyethylene for floor drains shall conform to ASTM D 1248. Drains shall
have separate cast-iron "P" trap, circular body, seepage pan, and strainer,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.5.2 Shower Faucets and Drain Fittings
Provide single control pressure equalizing shower faucets with body mounted
from behind the wall with threaded connections. Provide ball joint
self-cleaning shower heads. Provide shower heads which deliver a maximum of
2.2 GPM at 80 PSI per Energy Star requirements. Provide tubing mounted
from behind the wall between bathtub faucets and shower heads and bathtub
diverter spouts. Provide separate globe valves or angle valves with union
connections in each supply to faucet. Provide trip-lever pop-up drain
fittings for above-the-floor drain installations. The top of drain pop-ups,
drain outlets, tub overflow outlet, and; control handle for pop-up drain
shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Linkage between
drain pop-up and pop-up control handle at bathtub overflow outlet shall be
copper alloy or stainless steel. Provide 1.5 inch copper alloy adjustable
tubing with slip nuts and gaskets between bathtub overflow and drain
outlet; chromium-plated finish is not required.
2.5.3 Area Drains
Area drains shall be plain pattern with polished stainless steel perforated
or slotted grate and bottom outlet. The drain shall be circular or square
with a 12 inch nominal overall width or diameter and 10 inch nominal
overall depth. Drains shall be cast iron with manufacturer's standard
coating. Grate shall be easily lifted out for cleaning. Outlet shall be
suitable for inside caulked connection to drain pipe. Drains shall conform
to ASME A112.6.3.
2.5.4 Boiler Room Drains
Boiler room drains shall have combined drain and trap, hinged grate,
removable bucket, and threaded brass cleanout with brass backwater valve.
The removable galvanized cast-iron sediment bucket shall have rounded
corners to eliminate fouling and shall be equipped with hand grips. Drain
shall have a minimum water seal of 4 inches. The grate area shall be not
less than 100 square inches.
2.5.5 Sight Drains
Sight drains shall consist of body, integral seepage pan, and adjustable
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 18
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
strainer with perforated or slotted grate and funnel extension. The
strainer shall have a threaded collar to permit adjustment to floor
thickness. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern suitable for
embedding in the floor construction. A clamping device for attaching
flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the
flashing or membrane shall be provided for other than concrete
construction. Drains shall have a galvanized heavy cast-iron body and
seepage pan and chromium-plated bronze, nickel-bronze, or nickel-brass
strainer and funnel combination. Drains shall be provided with threaded
connection and with a separate cast-iron "P" trap, unless otherwise
indicated. Drains shall be circular, unless otherwise indicated. The
funnel shall be securely mounted over an opening in the center of the
strainer. Minimum dimensions shall be as follows:
Area of strainer and collar: 36 square inches
Height of funnel: 3-3/4 inches
Diameter of lower portion: 2 inches of funnel
Diameter of upper portion: 4 inches of funnel
2.5.6 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints
Roof drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.4, with dome and integral flange,
and shall have a device for making a watertight connection between roofing
and flashing. The whole assembly shall be galvanized heavy pattern cast
iron. For aggregate surface roofing, the drain shall be provided with a
gravel stop. On roofs other than concrete construction, roof drains shall
be complete with underdeck clamp, sump receiver, and an extension for the
insulation thickness where applicable. A clamping device for attaching
flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the
flashing or membrane shall be provided when required to suit the building
construction. Strainer openings shall have a combined area equal to twice
that of the drain outlet. The outlet shall be equipped to make a proper
connection to threaded pipe of the same size as the downspout. An
expansion joint of proper size to receive the conductor pipe shall be
provided. The expansion joint shall consist of a heavy cast-iron housing,
brass or bronze sleeve, brass or bronze fastening bolts and nuts, and
gaskets or packing. The sleeve shall have a nominal thickness of not less
than 0.134 inch. Gaskets and packing shall be close-cell neoprene, O-ring
packing shall be close-cell neoprene of 70 durometer. Packing shall be
held in place by a packing gland secured with bolts.
2.6 TRAPS
Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be copper-alloy adjustable tube
type with slip joint inlet and swivel. Traps shall be with a cleanout.
Provide traps with removable access panels for easy clean-out at sinks and
lavatories. Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0.032 inch
thick within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of bends where
the thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial
methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip
joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the
discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic type as
required for the application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip.
Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that when required for the
application, the outlets shall have sockets for solder-joint connections.
The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 2 inches. The interior
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 19
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch over or under the nominal size,
and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper
alloy "P" trap assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded
trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be provided for
lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may
have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint.
2.7 WATER HEATERS
Water heater types and capacities shall be as indicated. Each water heater
shall have replaceable anodes. Each gas-fired water heater and booster
water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes 120
to 180 degrees F. Hot water systems utilizing recirculation systems shall
be tied into building off-hour controls. The thermal efficiencies and
standby heat losses shall conform to TABLE III for each type of water
heater specified. The only exception is that storage water heaters and hot
water storage tanks having more than 500 gallons storage capacity need not
meet the standard loss requirement if the tank surface area is insulated to
R-12.5 and if a standing light is not used. Plastic materials
polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone (PES) are forbidden to be used
for vent piping of combustion gases. A factory pre-charged expansion tank
shall be installed on the cold water supply to each water heater.
Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use on potable water
systems and shall be rated for 200 degrees F water temperature and 150 psi
working pressure. The expansion tank size and acceptance volume shall be
as indicated.
2.7.1 Automatic Storage Type
Heaters shall be complete with control system, and shall have ASME rated
combination pressure and temperature relief valve.
2.7.1.1 Electric Type
Electric type water heaters shall conform to UL 174 with dual heating
elements. Each element shall be 4.5 KW. The elements shall be wired so
that only one element can operate at a time.
2.7.2 Phenolic Resin Coatings for Heater Tubes
The phenolic resin coating system shall be applied at either the coil or
coating manufacturer's factory in accordance with manufacturer's standard
proven production process. The coating system shall be a product
specifically intended for use on the material the water heating tubes/coils
are made of and shall be acceptable for use in potable water systems. The
coating system shall be capable of withstanding temperatures up to 400
degrees F dry bulb; and meet the requirements of 21 CFR 175.
The entire exterior surface and the first 5 to 8 inches inside the tubes of
each coil shall be coated with phenolic resin coating system.
2.7.2.1 Standard Product
Provide a phenolic resin coating system that is a standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are of
a similar material, design and workmanship.
Standard products are defined as components and equipment that have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use in similar applications of
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 20
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
similar size for at least two years before bid opening.
Prior to this two year period, these standard products were sold on the
commercial market using advertisements in manufacturers' catalogs or
brochures. These manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures shall have been
copyrighted documents or be identified with a manufacturer's document
number.
2.8 HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS
Hot-water storage tanks shall be constructed by one manufacturer, ASME
stamped for the working pressure, and shall have the National Board (ASME)
registration. The tank shall be cement-lined or glass-lined steel type in
accordance with AWWA D100. The heat loss shall conform to TABLE III as
determined by the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 -
IP. Each tank shall be equipped with a thermometer, conforming to ASTM E 1,
Type I, Class 3, Range C, style and form as required for the installation,
and with 7 inch scale. Thermometer shall have a separable socket suitable
for a 3/4 inch tapped opening. Tanks shall be equipped with a pressure
gauge 6 inch minimum diameter face. Insulation shall be as specified in
Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Storage tank
capacity shall be as shown.
2.9 PUMPS
2.9.1 Sump Pumps
Sump pumps shall be of capacities indicated. The pumps shall be of the
automatic, electric motor-driven, submerged type, complete with necessary
control equipment and with a split or solid cast-iron or steel cover plate.
The pumps shall be direct-connected by an approved flexible coupling to a
vertical electric motor having a continuous oiling device or packed
bearings sealed against dirt and moisture. Motors shall be totally
enclosed, fan-cooled of sizes as indicated and shall be equipped with an
across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure.
Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance
with NEMA MG 1. Each pump shall be fitted with a high-grade thrust bearing
mounted above the floor. Each shaft shall have an alignment bearing at
each end, and the suction inlet shall be between 3 and 6 inches above the
sump bottom. The suction side of each pump shall have a strainer of ample
capacity. A float switch assembly, with the switch completely enclosed in
a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure, shall start and stop each motor at
predetermined water levels. Duplex pumps shall be equipped with an
automatic alternator to change the lead operation from one pump to the
other, and for starting the second pump if the flow exceeds the capacity of
the first pump. The discharge line from each pump shall be provided with a
union or flange, a nonclog swing check valve, and a stop valve in an
accessible location near the pump.
2.9.2 Circulating Pumps
Domestic hot water circulating pumps shall be electrically driven,
single-stage, centrifugal, with mechanical seals, suitable for the intended
service. Pump and motor shall be integrally mounted on a cast-iron or steel
subbase, close-coupled with an overhung impeller, or supported by the
piping on which it is installed. The shaft shall be one-piece,
heat-treated, corrosion-resisting steel with impeller and smooth-surfaced
housing of bronze.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 21
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled and shall have sufficient
horsepower for the service required. Each pump motor shall be equipped
with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure
with "START-STOP" switch in cover.
Integral size motors shall be premium efficiency type in accordance with
NEMA MG 1. Pump motors smaller than 1 hp Fractional horsepower pump motors
shall have integral thermal overload protection in accordance with Section
26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Guards shall shield exposed moving
parts.
2.9.3 Booster Pumps
2.9.3.1 Centrifugal Pumps
Horizontal split-case centrifugal-type booster pumps shall be furnished.
The capacities shall be as shown, and the speed shall not exceed 1800 rpm.
Pumps shall have a casing of close-grained iron or steel with smooth water
passages. A gasket shall be provided between the upper and lower halves of
the casing. Suction and discharge connections shall be flanged. Impellers
shall be nonoverloading, bronze, balanced to eliminate vibration, and shall
be keyed to corrosion-resisting steel shafts. The casings shall be fitted
with bronze wearing or sealing rings. Bearings shall be cartridge type,
enabling the entire rotating element to be removed without disturbing
alignment or exposing the bearings to dirt, water, and other foreign
matter. Pumps shall be provided with mechanical seals. Seal boxes shall
be machined in the pump casing and at both sides of the pump, and shall be
of sufficient depth to include a conventional bronze seal ring and rows of
shaft packing. Bedplates shall be close-grain cast iron or steel with ribs
and lugs, complete with foundation bolts, and shall have a drip lip with
drain hole. Each pump shall be tested at the manufacturer's plant for
operating characteristics at the rated capacity and under specified
operating conditions. Test curves shall be furnished showing capacity in
gpm, head in feet, efficiency, brake horsepower, and operation in parallel
with similar pumps. Multiple pump installations shall have pump
characteristics compatible for operation in parallel with similar pumps.
The electric motor shall be sized for non-overload when operating at any
point along the characteristic curve of the pump. Guards shall shield
exposed belts and moving parts.
2.9.3.2 Controls
Each pump motor shall be provided with enclosed across-the-line-type
magnetic controller complete in a NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with three
position, "HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC," selector switch in cover. Pumps shall be
automatically started and stopped by float or pressure switches, as
indicated. The pumps shall start and stop at the levels and pressures
indicated. A multiposition sequence selector switch shall be provided so
that any two pumps may be operated simultaneously beeping a third pump as a
standby.
2.9.4 Flexible Connectors
Flexible connectors shall be provided at the suction and discharge of each
pump that is 1 hp or larger. Connectors shall be constructed of neoprene,
rubber, or braided bronze, with Class 150 standard flanges. Flexible
connectors shall be line size and suitable for the pressure and temperature
of the intended service.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 22
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.9.5 Sewage Pumps
Provide single type duplex type with automatic controls to alternate the
operation from one pump to the other pump and to start the second pump in
the event the first pump cannot handle the incoming flow. Provide high
water alarm and check valve.
2.10 WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM
2.10.1 Constant Speed Pumping System
Constant speed pumping system with pressure-regulating valves shall employ
one lead pump for low flows, and one or more lag pumps for higher flows.
Pressure-regulating valves shall be provided with nonslam check feature.
The factory prepiped and prewired assembly shall be mounted on a steel
frame, complete with pumps, motors, and automatic controls. The system
capacity and capacity of individual pumps shall be as indicated. Current
sensing relays shall provide staging of the pumps. The pumps shall be
protected from thermal buildup, when running at no-flow, by a common
thermal relief valve. Pressure gauges shall be mounted on the suction and
discharge headers. The control panel shall bear the UL listing label for
industrial control panels and shall be in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
The control panel shall include the following: No-flow shutdown; 7-day
time clock; audiovisual alarm; external resets; manual alternation;
magnetic motor controllers; time delays; transformer; current relays;
"HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC" switches for each pump; minimum run timers; low
suction pressure cutout; and indicating lights for power on, individual
motor overload, and low suction pressure. The control circuit shall be
interlocked so that the failure of any controller shall energize the
succeeding controller.
2.10.2 Hydro-Pneumatic Water Pressure System
An ASME code constructed tank stamped for 125 psig water working pressure
shall be provided. The tank shall have a flexible diaphragm made of
material conforming to FDA requirements for use with potable water and
shall be factory precharged to meet required system pressure.
2.10.3 Variable Speed Pumping System
Variable speed pumping system shall provide system pressure by varying
speed and number of operating pumps. The factory prepiped and prewired
assembly shall be mounted on a steel frame complete with pumps, variable
speed drives, motors, and controls. The variable speed drives shall be the
oil-filled type capable of power transmission throughout their complete
speed range without vibration, noise, or shock loading. Each variable
speed drive shall be run-tested by the manufacturer for rated performance,
and the manufacturer shall furnish written performance certification.
System shall have suppressors to prevent noise transmission over electric
feed lines. Required electrical control circuitry and system function
sensors shall be supplied by the variable speed drive manufacturer. The
primary power controls and magnetic motor controllers shall be installed in
the controls supplied by the drive manufacturer. The sensors shall be
located in the system to control drive speed as a function of constant pump
discharge pressure. Connection between the sensors and the variable speed
drive controls shall be accomplished with hydraulic sensing copper
wiring. Controls shall be in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 23
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.11 ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors,
motor starters, and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of
packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide high
efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current
motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to the
applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. In addition to the
requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, provide
polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings,
including motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency
ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive
the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating
of the motor.
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified.
Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop
operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor
torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20
seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals
during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease
supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the
controls provided. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal
devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring
required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be
provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide
controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart.
Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided
under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS
2.12.1 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors,
walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper
alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces.
Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.
2.12.2 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and
floors. Sleeves are not required where supply drain, waste, and vent (DWV)
piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade, except where
penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.
2.12.2.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete
Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes
through concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry
and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the
core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 24
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.12.2.2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
2.12.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports)
Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support
rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists
with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S
beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and
vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel
adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole
on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18
insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation protection
shield for insulated piping.
2.12.4 Nameplates
Provide 0.125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte
finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and
valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates.
Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
1.0 by 2.5 inches. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system.
Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each
system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements.
Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air
ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. Installation of
plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance
with PPFA-01. The plumbing system shall be installed complete with
necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Water and
drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building, unless
otherwise indicated. A gate valve and drain shall be installed on the
water service line inside the building approximately 6 inches above the
floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the exterior
service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in
place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except
when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 12
inches below the average local frost depth or as indicated on the
drawings. If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before
being connected to the service lines, the location of the end of each
plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means.
Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body.
3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections
3.1.1.1 Utilities
The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The
hot-water and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to
permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture,
except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 25
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable
isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with
operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures,
faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to
prevent movement.
3.1.1.2 Cutting and Repairing
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of
construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or
equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in
the trade involved.
3.1.1.3 Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment
Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation.
Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt,
water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the
fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted,
and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating
equipment.
3.1.1.4 Mains, Branches, and Runouts
Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and
worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the
building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with
the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from
service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using
crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions.
Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from
other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between
finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water
lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to
transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the
lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless
specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made
with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for
use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are
furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change
in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4
inches and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and
wide sweep bends are formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not
less than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles,
flattening, or other malformations will not be acceptable.
3.1.1.5 Pipe Drains
Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 3/4 inch hose bibb with renewable
seat and full port ball valve ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 3/4
inch brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection of the supply
piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain.
3.1.1.6 Expansion and Contraction of Piping
Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water
pipe. Each hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion
loops or other provisions such as offsets, changes in direction, etc.,
where indicated and/or required. Risers shall be securely anchored as
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 26
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
required or where indicated to force expansion to loops. Branch
connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid
undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe
over 50 feet in length shall be anchored to the wall or the supporting
construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided,
toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch
runouts from mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of
piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in
the line so that piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without
straining. If mechanical grooved pipe coupling systems are provided, the
deviation from design requirements for expansion and contraction may be
allowed pending approval of Contracting Officer.
3.1.1.7 Thrust Restraint
Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more,
either vertically or horizontally, in waterlines 4 inches in diameter or
larger shall be provided with thrust blocks, where indicated, to prevent
movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1
cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less
than 2000 psi after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground
and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed,
the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured
against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not subject to
thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as
shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are
accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or
by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down
bends into gravity thrust blocks.
3.1.1.8 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters
Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and
cold-water supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with
precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water
hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access
doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall
conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted.
3.1.2 Joints
Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching
of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be
made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific
purpose intended.
3.1.2.1 Threaded
Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming
to ASME B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or
with an approved graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or
shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied.
3.1.2.2 Unions and Flanges
Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls,
ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches
and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 27
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.1.2.3 Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe
Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil,
waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1.2.4 Copper Tube and Pipe
a. Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2,
MSS SP-73, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe
sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of
copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without
flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall
include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorus,
copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.
b. Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only
acceptable for piping 2 inches and smaller. Soldered joints shall
conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall not be used
in compressed air piping between the air compressor and the receiver.
c. Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be
made in accordance with ICC IPC.
d. Press connection. Copper press connections shall be made in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions for
manufactured rated size. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s)
approved by the manufacturer of that joint. Minimum distance between
fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
3.1.2.5 Other Joint Methods
3.1.3 Dissimilar Pipe Materials
Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made
with dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall
have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that
specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal
connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric
waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed
to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges
shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric
waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be
made with transition fitting for the specific purpose.
3.1.4 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings
Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a
protective coating. Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel
pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection system and joint bonding.
The cathodic protection system, protective coating system, and joint
bonding for cathodically protected pipe shall be in accordance with the
drawings. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance
with NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and
the coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and
fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe
tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to
AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 28
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape
manufacturer.
3.1.5 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing
Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent
location.
3.1.5.1 Sleeve Requirements
Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following
requirements:
Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide
sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls,
ceilings, roofs, and floors.
A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a
waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space
between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe
and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The
links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber
belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each
nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve,
tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand
and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal
assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe
and sleeve involved.
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where
indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as
detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof,
and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special circumstances.
Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical
equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas
shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a
minimum of one inch clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside
of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing
walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron
pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron
pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or plastic.
Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve,
or between jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated
with sealants conforming to ASTM C 920 and with a primer, backstop material
and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
The annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and
sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for
interior walls which are not designated as fire rated.
Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed
1/2 inch from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and
sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint
between the pipe and concrete wall as specified above. Sealant selected
for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with
dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 29
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the
requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.5.2 Flashing Requirements
Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper
flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be
suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches
from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a solid
coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a
minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down
into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through
pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an
adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 8 inches
from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a
watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe
or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be
sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the
pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 10 inches in
diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be
installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs,
flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield
shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through
wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A
waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.
3.1.5.3 Waterproofing
Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by
forming a flashing guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of
the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 1-1/2 inches to
fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter
of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of the
flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately
1-1/2 inches; then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level
between the flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet
copper shall extend not less than 8 inches from the drainpipe and shall be
lapped between the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement.
If cast-iron water closet floor flanges are used, the space between the
pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing
guard shall be upturned approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit the outside
diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor
flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the floor flange
shall be sealed.
3.1.5.4 Optional Counterflashing
Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and
sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or
metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be
accomplished by utilizing the following:
a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in diameter.
b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.
3.1.5.5 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors
Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 30
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with
waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and
Waterproofing, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep shall
be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled
with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.1.5.6 Pipe Penetrations
Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be
sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.
3.1.6 Fire Seal
Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase
walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in
Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.7 Supports
3.1.7.1 General
Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to
permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load.
Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate
alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling,
swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when
operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by
variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In
the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp
shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of
the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing
required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded
sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.
3.1.7.2 Pipe Supports and Structural Bracing, Seismic Requirements
Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic
loads as specified in Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. Structural steel required for reinforcement to
properly support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be
provided. Material used for supports shall be as specified in Section
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
3.1.7.3 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to
MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein.
a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.
b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.
c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is
placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if
they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.
d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall have
both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 31
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.
e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with
an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
f. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated
frames.
g. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger
when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 39
saddles shall be welded to the pipe.
h. Type 40 shields shall:
(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.
(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature
of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.
(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density
inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.
i. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and
a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting
joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall
be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Operating temperatures in
determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F
for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include
allowances for expansion and contraction.
j. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at
slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8
feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe
risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.
k. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe
movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating
temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.
Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do
not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:
(1) On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is
60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may
freely rest on a steel plate.
(2) On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe
or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.
(3) On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60 degrees F
a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely
rest on a steel plate.
l. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the
outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be continuous
through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.
m. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not
desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 32
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be
separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an amount
adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.
n. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut
or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except
where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction.
3.1.7.4 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in
concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and
anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports
shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to
the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless
approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead
applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.
3.1.8 Welded Installation
Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of
piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe
to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be
permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or
forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged,
flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced
against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and
inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be
removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely
removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from its
original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its
characteristics or welding properties are not affected. Electrodes that
have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.
3.1.9 Pipe Cleanouts
Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout
plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. A cleanout installed in
connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend
or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy
cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug
shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the
floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be
T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs,
except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be
the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee
branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste
stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building
storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building
drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks
in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less than
18 inches of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe
concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze,
nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover
plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with
securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames,
anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have
access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts
installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 33
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to
the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of
fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where
cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron.
3.2 WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS
3.2.1 Relief Valves
No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or
storage tank. The P&T relief valve shall be installed where the valve
actuator comes in contact with the hottest water in the heater. Whenever
possible, the relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the
tank or heater; otherwise, the P&T valve shall be installed in the
hot-water outlet piping. A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on the
cold water supply line to the hot-water storage tank or water heater and
mounted above and within 6 inches above the top of the tank or water heater.
3.2.2 Heat Traps
Piping to and from each water heater and hot water storage tank shall be
routed horizontally and downward a minimum of 2 feet before turning in an
upward direction.
3.2.3 Connections to Water Heaters
Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric
unions or flanges.
3.2.4 Expansion Tank
A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply
between the water heater inlet and the cold water supply shut-off valve.
The Contractor shall adjust the expansion tank air pressure, as recommended
by the tank manufacturer, to match incoming water pressure.
3.3 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where
exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the
faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops for
supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and
installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and
faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be
used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting.
Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be
connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise
specified under the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as
specified. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped
personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish.
Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown.
3.3.1 Fixture Connections
Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the
cast-iron floor flange, special short-radius fittings shall be provided.
Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be
made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene
gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 34
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance
from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting
compound or gasket and fixture used.
3.3.2 Flushometer Valves
Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the
long finished top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with
approved metal bracket. Flushometer valves for water closets shall be
installed 39 inches above the floor, except at water closets intended for
use by the physically handicapped where flushometer valves shall be mounted
at approximately 30 inches above the floor and arranged to avoid
interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for
handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side of
the enclosure. Bumpers for water closet seats shall be installed on the
flushometer stop.
3.3.3 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor
Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 31 inches above finished floor.
Wall-hung drinking fountains and water coolers shall be installed with rim
42 inches above floor. Wall-hung service sinks shall be mounted with rim
28 inches above the floor. Installation of fixtures for use by the
physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1.
3.3.4 Fixture Supports
Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and
other fixtures of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the
chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of
mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the
floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the
desired height and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu
of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is
not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab.
3.3.4.1 Support for Solid Masonry Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored
chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in
the masonry wall.
3.3.4.2 Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored
chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to
the concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate.
3.3.4.3 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions
Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be
of the heavy duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a
square or rectangular steel tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of
floor-anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if adjoining steel
partition studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to
these studs.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 35
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
3.3.4.4 Support for Wood Stud Construction
Where floor is a concrete slab, a floor-anchored chair carrier shall be
used. Where entire construction is wood, wood crosspieces shall be
installed. Fixture hanger plates, supports, brackets, or mounting lugs
shall be fastened with not less than No. 10 wood screws, 1/4 inch thick
minimum steel hanger, or toggle bolts with nut. The wood crosspieces shall
extend the full width of the fixture and shall be securely supported.
3.3.5 Backflow Prevention Devices
Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect
or interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable
water. Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in
accordance with UPC at all other locations necessary to preclude a
cross-connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any
nonpotable substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed
at all locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of
the equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be located below the
level of the nonpotable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so
that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be
of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment,
and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable
water system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow
preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each
device shall be a standard commercial unit.
3.3.6 Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any
item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of
sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced,
maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section
05 51 00 METAL STAIRS.
3.3.7 Sight Drains
Sight drains shall be installed so that the indirect waste will terminate 2
inches above the flood rim of the funnel to provide an acceptable air gap.
3.3.8 Traps
Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture
shall be double-trapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be
cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be
recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic
pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D 3311. Traps for acid-resisting
waste shall be of the same material as the pipe.
3.3.9 Shower Pans
Before installing shower pan, subfloor shall be free of projections such as
nail heads or rough edges of aggregate. Drain shall be a bolt-down,
clamping-ring type with weepholes, installed so the lip of the subdrain is
flush with subfloor.
3.3.9.1 General
The floor of each individual shower, the shower-area portion of combination
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 36
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
shower and drying room, and the entire shower and drying room where the two
are not separated by curb or partition, shall be made watertight with a
shower pan fabricated in place. The shower pan material shall be cut to
size and shape of the area indicated, in one piece to the maximum extent
practicable, allowing a minimum of 6 inches for turnup on walls or
partitions, and shall be folded over the curb with an approximate return of
1/4 of curb height. The upstands shall be placed behind any wall or
partition finish. Subflooring shall be smooth and clean, with nailheads
driven flush with surface, and shall be sloped to drain. Shower pans shall
be clamped to drains with the drain clamping ring.
3.3.9.2 Metal Shower Pans
When a shower pan of required size cannot be furnished in one piece, metal
pieces shall be joined with a flintlock seam and soldered or burned. The
corners shall be folded, not cut, and the corner seam shall be soldered or
burned. Pans, including upstands, shall be coated on all surfaces with one
brush coat of asphalt. Asphalt shall be applied evenly at not less than 1
gallon per 50 square feet. A layer of felt covered with building paper
shall be placed between shower pans and wood floors. The joining surfaces
of metal pan and drain shall be given a brush coat of asphalt after the pan
is connected to the drain.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
3.4.1 Identification Tags
Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved
anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed
on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures.
Tags shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or
engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be
attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded
chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.4.2 Pipe Color Code Marking
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.4.3 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components
Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The
color coding scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and
operation of operable components which are not visible from the finished
space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid ceiling.
The operable components shall include valves, dampers, switches, linkages
and thermostats. The color coding scheme shall consist of a color code
board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall be
approximately 3/8 inch in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels
with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so
that the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners shall be
manually removable without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling
panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height. Installation of
colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on
which the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the
approximate dimensions of 3 foot width, 30 inches height, and 1/2 inch
thickness. The board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under
glass or 1/16 inch transparent plastic cover. Unless otherwise directed,
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 37
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
the color code symbols shall be approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the
related lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters. The color code board
shall be mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room. The
color code system shall be as indicated below:
Color System Item Location
Green Potable Domestic Water Valves Above Ceiling
Yellow Potable Hot Water Valves Above Ceiling
3.5 ESCUTCHEONS
Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated
piping, exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except
in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened
securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish,
corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished
chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or
split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew.
3.6 PAINTING
Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in
concealed spaces or exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS
AND COATINGS.
3.6.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall
be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.
3.6.1.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to
certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125
hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors
shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test
shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance
criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test,
the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no
loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage
beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.
The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment
shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If
manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use
on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory
painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.
3.6.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces
subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare
metal.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 38
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and
retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be
aluminum or light gray.
a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the
metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall
receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry
film thickness of one mil per coat.
b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to
temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum
thickness of 2 mils.
c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to
temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600
degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils.
3.7 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION
3.7.1 Plumbing System
The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance
with UPC, except that the drainage and vent system final test shall include
the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a peppermint test
in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen, the Contractor
must submit a testing procedure to the Contracting Officer for approval.
a. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke
test.
b. Building Sewers Tests.
c. Water Supply Systems Tests.
3.7.1.1 Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies
Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically
designed for the testing of backflow prevention assemblies.
Backflow prevention assembly test gauges shall be tested annually for
accuracy in accordance with the requirements of State or local regulatory
agencies. If there is no State or local regulatory agency requirements,
gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the
requirements of University of Southern California's Foundation of Cross
Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water Works
Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M-14), or any other approved
testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and
field evaluation of backflow prevention assembly test gauges.. Report form
for each assembly shall include, as a minimum, the following:
Data on Device Data on Testing Firm
Type of Assembly Name
Manufacturer Address
Model Number Certified Tester
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 39
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Serial Number Certified Tester No.
Size Date of Test
Location
Test Pressure Readings Serial Number and Test Data of
Gauges
If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be
repaired and retested.
3.7.1.2 Shower Pans
After installation of the pan and finished floor, the drain shall be
temporarily plugged below the weep holes. The floor area shall be flooded
with water to a minimum depth of 1 inch for a period of 24 hours. Any drop
in the water level during test, except for evaporation, will be reason for
rejection, repair, and retest.
3.7.2 Defective Work
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall
be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be
repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of
screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.
3.7.3 System Flushing
3.7.3.1 During Flushing
Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall
be flushed with potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to produce a
water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris in all
portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation of all
fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing velocity
of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the piping system. In the
event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting
Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of
fixtures to be operated during flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate
personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines
are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor
shall be responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the
system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign
materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no
discoloration. All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any
device considered as an end point device by NSF 61, Section 9, shall be
flushed a minimum of 0.25 gallons per 24 hour period, ten times over a 14
day period.
3.7.3.2 After Flushing
System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed,
cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be
prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh
potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish,
furnishings, or parts of the building due to the Contractor's failure to
properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the Contractor. When
the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for
uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall
be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions.
Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP for minimum efficiency requirements. Unless
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 40
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
more stringent local requirements exist, lead levels shall not exceed
limits established by 40 CFR 50.12 Part 141.80(c)(1). The water supply to
the building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead
contamination found during potable water system testing is due to work
being performed inside the building.
3.7.4 Operational Test
Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the
Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to
demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and
functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a
period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the
following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the
system:
a. Time, date, and duration of test.
b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.
c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
d. Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.
e. Pump suction and discharge pressures.
f. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.
g. Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water.
h. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.
i. Complete operation of each water pressure booster system, including
pump start pressure and stop pressure.
3.7.5 Disinfection
After all system components are provided and operational tests are
complete, the entire domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system shall
be disinfected. Before introducing disinfecting chlorination material,
entire system shall be flushed with potable water until any entrained dirt
and other foreign materials have been removed.
Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and
AWWA C652 as modified and supplemented by this specification. The
chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The
chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a
constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per
million (ppm). Feed a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected
into the system with a hypochlorinator, or inject liquid chlorine into
the system through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump until
the entire system is completely filled.
Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a
continuous period of 24 hours. If at the end of a 6 hour interval, the
chlorine residual has dropped to less than 25 ppm, flush the piping
including tanks with potable water, and repeat the above chlorination
procedures. During the chlorination period, each valve and faucet
shall be opened and closed several times.
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 41
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm
chlorine residual remains in the treated system. The 24 hour
chlorination procedure must be repeated until no less than 25 ppm
chlorine residual remains in the treated system.
Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be
flushed with potable water until the residual chlorine level is reduced
to less than one part per million. During the flushing period, each
valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.
Take addition samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial
examination, at locations specified by the Contracting Officer
Test these samples for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria,
fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with
EPA SM 9223 or AWWA 10084. The testing method used shall be EPA
approved for drinking water systems and shall comply with applicable
local and state requirements.
Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the absence
of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters)
in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be
accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
3.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated
containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery
and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used
sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated,
fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive
tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate
copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan
and place in designated areas for reuse.
3.9 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring
and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system,
shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions
explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the
system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and
stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified
above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams.
The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the
systems.
3.10 PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
Standard rating condition terms are as follows:
EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.
ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 70 degrees F delta T.
SL = Standby loss is maximum (Btu/h) based on a 70 degrees F
temperature difference between stored water and ambient requirements.
V = Rated volume in gallons
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 42
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Q = Nameplate input rate in kW (Btu/h)
3.10.1 Storage Water Heaters
3.10.1.1 Electric
a. Storage capacity of 60 gallons shall have a minimum energy factor (EF)
of 0.93 or higher per FEMP requirements.
b. Storage capacity of 60 gallons or more shall have a minimum energy
factor (EF) of 0.91 or higher per FEMP requirements.
3.11 TABLES
TABLE I
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR
DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D E F
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, hub X X X X X
and spigot, ASTM A 74 with
compression gaskets. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with the
CISPI trademark.
2 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings hubless, X X X X
CISPI 301 and ASTM A 888. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with
the CISPI trademark.
3 Cast iron drainage fittings, threaded, X X X
ASME B16.12 for use with Item 10
4 Cast iron screwed fittings (threaded) X X
ASME B16.4 for use with Item 10
7 Bronze sand casting grooved joint X X X X
pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe
ASTM B 584, for use with Item 5
8 Wrought copper grooved joint pressure X X
pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe
ASTM B 75 C12200,
ASTM B 152/B 152M, C11000,
ASME B16.22
ASME B16.22 for use with Item 5
9 Malleable-iron threaded fittings, X X
galvanized ASME B16.3
for use with Item 10
10 Steel pipe, seamless galvanized, X X X
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 43
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
TABLE I
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR
DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D E F
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 Seamless red brass pipe, ASTM B 43 X X
12 Bronzed flanged fittings, X X
ASME B16.24 for use
with Items 11 and 14
13 Cast copper alloy solder joint X X
pressure fittings, ASME B16.18
for use with Item 14
14 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42 X
15 Cast bronze threaded fittings, X X
ASME B16.15
16 Copper drainage tube, (DWV), X* X X* X X
ASTM B 306
17 Wrought copper and wrought X X X X X
alloy solder-joint drainage
fittings. ASME B16.29
18 Cast copper alloy solder joint X X X X X
drainage fittings, DWV,
ASME B16.23
22 High-silicon content cast iron pipe X X X
and fittings (hub and spigot, and
mechanical joint), ASTM A 518/A 518M
SERVICE:
A - Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain
B - Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings
C - Underground Vent
D - Aboveground Vent
E - Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground
F - Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground
* - Hard Temper
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 44
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Malleable-iron threaded fittings, X X X X
a. Galvanized, ASME B16.3
for use with Item 4a
b. Same as "a" but not galvanized X
for use with Item 4b
2 Ductile iron grooved joint fittings X X X
for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536
and ASTM A 47/A 47M, for use
with Item 2
3 Steel pipe: X X X X
a. Seamless, galvanized,
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B
b. Seamless, black, X
ASTM A 53/A 53M,
Type S, Grade B
4 Seamless red brass pipe, X X X
ASTM B 43
5 Bronze flanged fittings, X X X
ASME B16.24 for use with
Items 5 and 7
6 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42 X X X
7 Seamless copper water tube, X** X** X** X***
ASTM B 88, ASTM B 88M
8 Cast bronze threaded fittings, X X X
ASME B16.15 for use
with Items 5 and 7
9 Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint X X X X
pressure fittings,
ASME B16.22 for
use with Items 5, 7 and 8
10 Cast copper alloy solder-joint X X X X
pressure fittings,
ASME B16.18
for use with Item 8
11 Bronze and sand castings grooved X X X
joint pressure fittings for non-
ferrous pipe ASTM B 584,
for use with Item 2
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 45
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 Steel pipeline flanges, MSS SP-44 X X
13 Fittings: brass or bronze; X X
ASME B16.15, and ASME B16.18
ASTM B 828
14 Carbon steel pipe unions, X X X
socket-welding and threaded,
MSS SP-83
15 Malleable-iron threaded pipe X X
unions ASME B16.39
16 Nipples, pipe threaded ASTM A 733 X X X
17 Press Fittings X X
A - Cold Water Service Aboveground
B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum
Aboveground
C - Compressed Air Lubricated
D - Cold Water Service Belowground
Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses.
** - Type L - Hard
*** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper
without joints in or under floors
**** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints
TABLE III
STANDARD RATING CONDITIONS AND MINIMUM PERFORMANCE RATINGS FOR WATER HEATING
EQUIPMENT (I-P)
A. STORAGE WATER HEATERS
STORAGE
CAPACITY INPUT
FUEL GALLONS RATING TEST PROCEDURE REQUIRED
PERFORMANCE
Elect. 60 min. 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.91
B. Unfired Hot Water Storage R-12.5 min.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 22 00 00 Page 46
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 167 (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip
ASTM A 240/A 240M (2009c) Standard Specification for
Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
Vessels and for General Applications
ASTM B 209 (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM C 1136 (2010) Standard Specification for
Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders
for Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 195 (2007) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement
ASTM C 449 (2007) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement
ASTM C 547 (2008e1) Standard Specification for
Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
ASTM C 592 (2008a) Standard Specification for Mineral
Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type
Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered)
(Industrial Type)
ASTM C 795 (2008) Standard Specification for Thermal
Insulation for Use in Contact with
Austenitic Stainless Steel
ASTM C 916 (1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 920 (2010) Standard Specification for
Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C 921 (2009) Standard Practice for Determining
SECTION 22 07 19 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
the Properties of Jacketing Materials for
Thermal Insulation
ASTM D 226 (2006) Standard Specification for
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D 579 (2009) Standard Specification for Greige
Woven Glass Fabrics
ASTM E 96/E 96M (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water
Vapor Transmission of Materials
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 220 (2008) Standard on Types of Building
Construction
NFPA 255 (2006) Standard Method of Test of Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
SAE AMS 3779 (1990; Rev A; R 1994) Tape Adhesive,
Pressure Sensitive Thermal Radiation
Resistant, Aluminum Foil/Glass Cloth
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FED-STD-595 (Rev C) Colors Used in Government
Procurement
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS applies to
work specified in this section.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Provide noncombustible thermal-insulation system materials, as defined by
NFPA 220. Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and
thermal-insulation materials, except cellular elastomers, with a
flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25 or less , and a smoke-developed
classification (SDC) of 50 or less . Determine these maximum values in
accordance with NFPA 255. Provide coatings and sealants that are
nonflammable in their wet state.
Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall have published or certified
temperature ratings suitable for the entire range of working temperatures
normal for the surfaces to which they are to be applied.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Submit
the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SECTION 22 07 19 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Adhesives; G
Coatings; G
Insulating Cement; G
Insulation Materials; G
Jacketing; G
Tape; G
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Installation manual for Insulation Materials
1.5 RECYCLED MATERIALS
Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent
practicable, provided that the material meets all other requirements of
this section. The minimum recycled material content of he following
insulation are:
Fiberglass - 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Materials shall be compatible and not contribute to corrosion, soften, or
otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either the wet or dry state.
Meet ASTM C 795 requirements for materials to be used on stainless steel
surfaces. Provide materials that are asbestos free and conform to the
following.
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
Insulation conductances shall be maximum values, as tested at any point,
not an average. Replace or augment insulation conductance found by test to
exceed the specified maximum by an additional thickness to bring it to the
required maximum conductance and a complete finishing system.
2.1.1 Mineral Fiber Insulation
Conform to ASTM C 592 for Mineral Fiber Insulation and be suitable for
surface temperatures up to 370 degrees F, and not less than 4-pound per
cubic foot density with thermal conductivity not greater than 0.26 Btu per
hour per square foot square per degree F at 150 degrees F mean.
Mineral fiber pipe wrap insulation having an insulating efficiency not less
than that of the specified thickness of fibrous glass pipe insulation may
be provided in lieu of fibrous glass pipe insulation for pipe sizes 10
inches and larger.
2.1.2 Fiberglass Insulation
Conform to ASTM C 547. Ensure the apparent thermal conductivity does not
exceed 0.54 Btu-inch per hour per square foot per degree F at 200 degrees F
mean.
Fiber glass pipe insulation having an insulating efficiency not less than
that of the specified thickness of mineral fiber pipe insulation may be
SECTION 22 07 19 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
provided in lieu of mineral fiber pipe insulation for aboveground piping.
2.1.3 Pipe Barrel
Pipe barrel insulation shall be Type II, Molded, Grade A or Type III,
Precision V-Groove, Grade A for use at temperatures up to and including
1200 degrees F.
2.1.4 Pipe Fittings
Provide molding pipe fitting insulation covering for use at temperatures up
to and including 1200 degrees F.
2.2 ADHESIVES
2.2.1 Cloth Adhesives
Adhesives for adhering, sizing, and finishing lagging cloth, canvas, and
open-weave glass cloth shall be a pigmented polyvinyl acetate emulsion and
conform to the requirements of ASTM C 916, Type I.
2.2.2 Vapor-Barrier Material Adhesives
Adhesives for attaching laps of vapor-barrier materials and presized glass
cloth and for attaching insulation to itself, to metal, and to various
other substrates, must be solvent-base, synthetic-rubber type and conform
to the requirements of ASTM C 916, Type I, for attaching fibrous-glass
insulation to metal surfaces. Solvent shall be nonflammable.
2.3 INSULATING CEMENT
2.3.1 General Purpose Insulating Cement
General purpose insulating cement shall be diatomaceous silica and conform
to ASTM C 195. Composite shall be rated for 1800 degrees F service and
have a thermal-conductivity maximum of 0.85 Btu by inch per hour per
square foot for each degree F temperature differential at 200 degrees F
mean temperature for 1 inch thickness.
2.3.2 Finishing Insulating Cement
Finishing insulating cement shall be mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting type
conforming to ASTM C 449.
2.4 CALKING
Calking used with specified insulation materials shall be an elastomeric
joint sealant in accordance with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use A.
2.5 CORNER ANGLES
Corner angle piping insulation shall be nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1
inch with factory applied kraft backing. Aluminum shall be in accordance
with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003.
SECTION 22 07 19 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.6 JACKETING
2.6.1 Aluminum Jacket
ASTM B 209, Temper H14, minimum thickness of 0.016 inch, with
factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside
surface. Provide smooth surface jackets for jacket outside diameters less
than 8 inches. Provide corrugated surface jackets for jacket outside
diameters 8 inches and larger. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum
width of 0.5 inch. Provide factory prefabricated aluminum covers for
insulation on fittings, valves, and flanges. Aboveground jackets and bands
shall have factory-applied baked-on semigloss brown color conforming to
Federal Standard FED-STD-595, "Colors," color chip number 20062.
2.6.2 Asphalt-Saturated Felt
ASTM D 226, without perforations, minimum weight of 10 pounds per 100
square feet.
2.6.3 Stainless Steel Jacket
ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M; Type 304, minimum thickness of 0.010 inch,
smooth surface with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture
barrier on inside surface. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of
0.5 inch. Provide factory prefabricated stainless steel covers for
insulation on fittings, valves, and flanges.
2.6.4 Glass Cloth Jacket
Provide plain-weave glass cloth conforming to ASTM D 579, Style 141 and
weigh not less than 7.23 ounces per square yard before sizing. Factory
apply cloth wherever possible.
Provide leno weave glass reinforcing cloth, 26-end and 12-pick thread
conservation, with a warp and fill tensile strength of 45 and 30 pounds per
inch of width, respectively, and with a weight of not less than 1.5 ounces
per square yard.
2.6.5 PVC Jacket
Provide 0.010 inch thick, factory-premolded, one-piece fitting pipe-barrel
sheeting vapor-barrier jacketing polyvinylchloride that is
self-extinguishing, high-impact strength, moderate chemical resistance with
a permeability rating of 0.01 grain per hour per square foot per inch of
mercury pressure difference, determined in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M.
Provide manufacturer's standard solvent-weld type vapor-barrier joint
adhesive.
Conform to ASTM C 1136 for, Type I, low-vapor transmission, high-puncture
resistance vapor barrier for use on insulation for piping, ducts, and
equipment.
2.7 COATINGS
2.7.1 Outdoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing
Coatings for outdoor vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces such as
fittings and elbows shall be a nonasphaltic, hydrocarbon polymer,
solvent-base mastic containing a blend of nonflammable solvents. Conform
SECTION 22 07 19 Page 5
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
to the requirements of ASTM C 1136 and ASTM C 921 for coatings.
2.7.2 Indoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing
Provide pigmented resin and solvent compound coatings for indoor
vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces and conform to ASTM C 1136,
Type II.
2.7.3 Outdoor and Indoor Nonvapor-Barrier Finishing
Provide pigmented polymer-emulsion type recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer for outdoor and indoor nonvapor-barrier finish
coating of insulation surfaces for the surface to be coated and applied to
specified dry-film thickness.
2.7.4 Coating Color
Conform to the color code specified.
2.8 TAPE
Provide a knitted elastic cloth glass lagging specifically suitable for
continuous spiral wrapping of insulated pipe bends and fittings and produce
a smooth, tight, wrinkle-free surface. Conform to requirements of
SAE AMS 3779, SAE AMS 3779, ASTM D 579, and ASTM C 921 for tape, and weigh
not less than 10 ounces per square yard.
2.9 HOT-WATER, AND HOT WATER-RETURN PIPING
Provide mineral fiber insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2, with a
thickness of not less than 1". Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies,
fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous surfaces.
2.10 COLD-WATER AND CONDENSATE-DRAIN PIPING
Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and
miscellaneous surfaces shall be insulated
Provide 3/8 inch mineral fiber insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type
T-2, with a thickness of not less than 1".
Cold-water piping insulation shall be flexible unicellular-elastomeric
thermal insulation, Type T-3, with a thickness of 1/2 inch per
calculation. Use expanded, closed-cell pipe insulation only aboveground,
not for underground piping.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION SYSTEMS
Install smooth and continuous contours on exposed work. Smoothly and
securely paste down cemented laps, flaps, bands, and tapes. Apply
adhesives on a full-coverage basis.
Apply insulation only to system or component surfaces that have been tested
and approved.
Install insulation lengths tightly butted against each other at joints.
Where lengths are cut, provide smooth and square and without breakage of
SECTION 22 07 19 Page 6
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
end surfaces. Where insulation terminates, neatly taper and effectively
seal ends, or finish as specified. Direct longitudinal seams of exposed
insulation away from normal view.
Apply materials in conformance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
Clean surfaces free of oil and grease before insulation adhesives or
mastics are applied. Provide solvent cleaning required to bring metal
surfaces to such condition.
Installation Drawings for pipe insulation shall be in accordance with the
adhesive manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3.2 SYSTEM TYPES
3.2.1 Type T-1, Mineral Fiber with Vapor-Barrier Jacket
Cover piping with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-and
field-attached vapor-barrier jacket. Maintain vapor seal. Securely cement
jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with vapor-barrier
adhesive. Provide jacket overlaps not less than 1-1/2 inches and
jacketing bands for butt joints 3 inches wide.
Cover exposed-to-view fittings and valve bodies with preformed
mineral-fiber pipe-fitting insulation of the same thickness as the
pipe-barrel insulation. Temporarily secure fitting insulation in place
with light cord ties. Apply a 60-mil coating of white indoor vapor-barrier
coating and, while still wet, wrap with glass lagging tape with 50 percent
overlap, and smoothly blend into the adjacent jacketing. Apply additional
coating as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillet or contour coating,
then allowed to fully cure before the finish coating is applied.
On-the-job fabricated insulation for concealed fittings and special
configurations, build up from mineral fiber and a special mastic consisting
of a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts
water. Where standard vapor-barrier jacketing cannot be used, make the
surfaces vapor tight by using coating and glass lagging cloth or tape as
previously specified.
In lieu of materials and methods previously specified, fittings may be
wrapped with a twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required
thickness and covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Make seams
vapor tight with a double bead of manufacturer's standard vapor-barrier
adhesive applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Hold
all jacket ends in place with AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel
straps, 15 mils thick by 1/2 inch wide.
Set pipe insulation into an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of
6 inches at maximum 12-foot spacing and the ends of the insulation sealed
to the jacketing with the same material to provide an effective
vapor-barrier stop.
Do not use staples in applying insulation. Install continuous
vapor-barrier materials over all surfaces, including areas inside pipe
sleeves, hangers, and other concealments.
Piping insulation at hangers shall consist of 13-pounds per cubic foot
density, fibrous-glass inserts or expanded, rigid, closed-cell,
polyvinylchloride. Seal junctions with vapor-barrier jacket where
required, glass-cloth mesh tape, and vapor-barrier coating.
SECTION 22 07 19 Page 7
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Expose white-bleached kraft paper side of the jacketing to view.
Finish exposed-to-view insulation with not less than a 6-mil dry-film
thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.
3.2.2 Type T-2, Mineral Fiber with Glass Cloth Jacket
Cover piping with a mineral-fiber, pipe insulation with factory-attached,
presized, white, glass cloth. Securely cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps,
and bands in place with vapor-barrier adhesive with jacket overlap not less
than 1-1/2 inches and jacketing bands for butt joints 3 inches wide.
Cover exposed-to-view fittings with preformed mineral-fiber fitting
insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation and temporarily
secured in place with light cord ties. Install impregnated glass lagging
tape with indoor vapor-barrier on 50 percent overlap basis and the blend
tape smoothly into the adjacent jacketing. Apply additional coating as
needed, and rubber gloved to a smooth contour. tape ends of insulation to
the pipe at valves 2 inches and smaller. Build up on-the-job fabricated
insulation for concealed fittings and special configurations from mineral
fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive, diluted with
3 parts water. Finish surfaces with glass cloth or tape lagging.
Cover all valves 2-1/2 inches and larger and all flanges with preformed
insulation of the same thickness as the adjacent insulation.
Finish exposed-to-view insulation with a minimum 6-mil dry-film thickness
of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.
In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped
with a twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness and
covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Hold all jacket ends in
place with AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel straps, 15 mils thick
by 1/2 inch wide. Provide fitting insulation, thermally equivalent to
pipe-barrel insulation to preclude surface temperatures detrimental to
polyvinylchloride.
3.2.3 Type T-3, Cellular Elastomer
Cover piping-system surfaces with flexible cellular-elastomer sheet or
preformed insulation. Maintain vapor seal. Cement insulation into
continuous material with a solvent cutback chloroprene adhesive recommended
by the manufacturer for the specific purpose. Apply adhesive to both of
the surfaces on a 100-percent coverage basis to a minimum thickness of 10
mils wet or approximately 150 square feet per gallon of undiluted adhesive.
Seal insulation on cold water piping to the pipe for a minimum of 6 inches
at maximum intervals of 12 feet to form an effective vapor barrier. At
piping supports, insulation shall be continuous through using
outside-carrying type clevis hangers with insulation shield. Install Wood
dowel load-bearing inserts between the pipe and insulation shields to
prevent insulation compression.
Insulate hot-water, cold-water, and condensate drain pipes to the extent
shown with nominal 1/2 inch thick, fire retardant (FR), cellular elastomer,
preformed pipe insulation. Seal joints with adhesive.
At pipe hangers or supports where the insulation rests on the pipe hanger
SECTION 22 07 19 Page 8
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
strap, cut the insulation with a brass cork borer and a No. 3 superior
grade cork inserted. Seal seams with approved adhesive. Insulate sweat
fitting with miter-cut pieces of cellular elastomer insulation of the same
nominal pipe size and thickness as the insulation on the adjacent piping or
tubing. Joint miter-cut pieces with approved adhesive. Slit and snap
covers over the fitting, and seal joints with approved adhesive.
Insulate screwed fittings with sleeve-type covers formed from miter-cut
pieces of cellular elastomer thermal insulation having an inside diameter
large enough to overlap adjacent pipe insulation. Butt pipe insulation
against fittings. Overlap shall be not less than 1 inch . Use adhesive to
join cover pieces and cement the cover to the pipe insulation.
Finish surfaces exposed to view or ultraviolet light with a 2-mil minimum
dry-film thickness application of a polyvinylchloride lacquer recommended
by the manufacturer, and applied in not less than two coats.
3.2.4 Type T-6, Mineral Fiber with Aluminum Jacket
Cover piping with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-attached or
field-applied aluminum jacketing.
Cover fittings and valve bodies with preformed mineral-fiber pipe-fitting
insulation of the same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation.
Temporarily secure fitting insulation in place with light cord ties. Apply
a 60-mil coating of vapor-barrier mastic, and while still tacky, wrapped
with glass lagging tape.
Apply additional mastic as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillets or
contours. Build up on-the-job fabricated insulation for special
configurations from mineral fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and
lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts water. Only where standard aluminum
jacketing cannot be used, make the surfaces vapor-tight by using mastic and
glass lagging cloth or tape as specified above with an added finish coat of
mastic.
Set pipe insulation into outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of 6
inches at maximum 12-foot spacing. Seal ends of the insulation to the
jacketing with the same material to provide effective vapor barrier stops.
Install continuous vapor barrier over all surfaces, including areas inside
pipe sleeves, hangers, and other concealment.
Apply piping insulation to both sides of pipe hangers. Insulate junctions
with a special mastic mixture, glass cloth mesh tape, and mastic as
previously specified.
Securely cement jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with aluminum jacket
sealant. Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be 6 inches wide.
Lap joints, wherever possible, against the weather so that the water will
run off the lower edge and in accordance with the pipe drainage pitch.
Locate longitudinal laps on horizontal lines 45 degrees below the
horizontal centerline and alternately staggered 1 inch. Lap jacketing
material a minimum of 2 inches , circumferentially sealed with mastic, and
strapped to provide a waterproof covering throughout. Locate straps 8
inches on center and pull up tight to hold jacketing securely in place.
Use screws in addition to straps when necessary to obtain a waterproof
covering. Place extra straps on each side of supporting devices and at
SECTION 22 07 19 Page 9
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
openings. Where flanging access occurs, strap a chamfer sheet to the pipe
at jacketing.
Stiffen exposed longitudinal edges of aluminum jacketing by bending a 1 inch
hem on one edge.
Provide expansion joints for maximum and minimum dimensional fluctuations.
To prevent corrosion, do not allow the aluminum jacketing to come in direct
contact with other types of metal.
At openings in jacket, apply an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for 2 inches
in all directions. Apply jacketing while waterproofing is tacky.
Use screws at each corner of each sheet, at fitting jackets, and as
necessary for the service. Place number 7, 3/8 inch long, binding-head
aluminum sheet metal screws through the mastic seal.
3.2.5 Type T-9, Cellular Elastomer
Clean pump surfaces with solvent. Apply not less than 1 inch of general
purpose insulating cement, mixed with nonvapor-barrier adhesive diluted
with 3 parts water, to achieve smooth surface and configuration contours.
After all water has been removed, cover surfaces with 1/2 inch thick
cellular elastomer insulation attached and joined into a continuous sheet
with an outdoor vapor-barrier coating recommended by the insulation
manufacturer for the specific purpose. Apply coating to both of the
surfaces on a 100-percent coverage basis with a minimum thickness of 10
mils wet, or approximately 150 square feet per gallon of undiluted
coating. Blend coating into the adjacent flange insulation and the joint
covered with a band of cellular elastomer equal to the flange assembly
width. Use same coating to seal insulation to the casing at penetrations
and terminations. Insulate pumps in a manner that will permit insulation
to be removed to repair or replace pumps.
Finish insulation with a 2-mil minimum dry-film application of a
polyvinylchloride lacquer coating recommended by the manufacturer and
applied in not less than two coats.
3.2.6 Type T-10, Mineral-Fiber Fill
Pack voids surrounding pipe with mineral-fiber fill.
3.2.7 Type T-17, Calcium Silicate Weatherproof Jacket
Cover piping system surfaces with calcium silicate insulation. Cover
fittings and valve bodies with preformed insulation of the same material
and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation.
3.3 ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance will depend upon providing construction (Record Drawings)
details to the Contracting Officer. Include construction details, by
building area, the insulation material type, amount, and installation
method. An illustration or map of the duct routing locations may serve
SECTION 22 07 19 Page 10
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
this purpose. With data provide a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with
the system name, date, and the words "Record Drawings
insulation/material." Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring
Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."
-- End of Section --
SECTION 22 07 19 Page 11
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
SECTION 22 14 29
SUMP PUMPS
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI)
HI M100 (2005) Complete Set of Centrifugal,
Reciprocating, Rotary and Vertical
Centrifugal/Vertical Pump Standards
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
ISO 1940-1 (2003; Corrigendum 2005) Mechanical
Vibration - Balance Quality Requirements
for Rotors in a Constant (Rigid) State -
Part 1: Specification and Verification of
Balance Tolerance - International
Restrictions
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA MG 1 (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors
and Generators
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Submit
the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Manufacturer's Catalog Data in accordance with paragraph
entitled, "General Requirements," of this section.
Materials and Equipment; G
Pump Performance Curve; G
Pump and Motor Specifications; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports for the following tests in accordance with the
paragraph entitled, "Tests," of this section.
Hydrostatic Leak
Static Heads
SECTION 22 14 29 Page 1
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
Pump Flow Capacity
SD-07 Certificates
Listing of product installations for the following items shall
identify at least five installed units similar to those proposed
for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum of
five years. List shall include purchaser, address of
installation, service organization, and date of installation.
Submersible Pumps
Submit certificates for the following items showing conformance
with the referenced standards contained in this section.
Submersible Pumps
Accessories
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Submit the following in accordance with paragraph entitled,
"General Requirements," of this section.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
Vibration Specifications
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Connection Diagrams for sump pumps shall show details of connection of
cables and pump motors.
Submit Control Diagrams for sump pumps showing motor starters, relays, or
any other component necessary for safe operation.
Fabrication Drawings for sump pumps shall indicate size, type, and
efficiency rating.
Installation Drawings for sump pumps shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended instructions.
Submit Manufacturer's Catalog Data for sump pumps showing equipment
foundation data and equipment and performance data including performance
curves and indicating brake horsepower, head (gpm), and NPSH.
Provide Manufacturer's Installation Instructions and Vibration
Specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Pump and Motor vibration levels shall conform to ISO 1940-1 unless
otherwise noted. Motor vibration levels shall conform to NEMA MG 1, Motors
and Generators, Part 7 unless otherwise noted.
2.1 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
Construct and furnish pumps and accessories in accordance with the
requirements of HI M100 standards and those specified herein.
Simplex pump unit shall include a submersible pump with an integral
SECTION 22 14 29 Page 2
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
diaphragm or float-switch automatic level-control mechanism.
Failure of operating switch shall not require breaking of pump-motor seals
for repairs.
Requirements for each material designation shall be in accordance with the
applicable definition listed in the centrifugal pump section of HI M100
standards. Materials for components and accessories not covered by these
definitions shall be as specified herein.
Avoid contact between dissimilar metals. Where such contact cannot be
avoided, protect joints between dissimilar metals against galvanic
corrosion by plating, organic insulation coatings, gaskets, or other
suitable means.
2.1.1 Pump Selection
Select pumps for the service within 4 percent of maximum efficiency for a
given casing and impeller series.
Pump duty conditions shall be as indicated.
Pump seals, lubricant, and electrical insulation shall be suitable for
service in liquids up to 140 degrees F.
2.1.2 Pump Housing
Pump housing shall enclose the pump motor and volute with its integrally
cast feet. Pump housing shall be cast iron, watertight under all heads
normal to the service, and constructed to permit inspection and repair.
Volute shall be designed to withstand a hydrostatic pressure of not less
than 1-1/2 times the design shutoff head of the pump.
2.1.3 Impeller
Impeller shall be the cast-iron nonclogging type with design features to
provide maximum freedom from clogging when liquid containing rags and
stringy material is handled. Impeller shall be dynamically balanced and
shall have a minimum size solid-sphere handling capability of 1-1/2 inches.
2.1.4 Pump Shaft
Pump shaft shall be an extension of the motor shaft and constructed of
ground and polished AISI Type 300 or 400 series corrosion-resistant steel
with hard wearing surfaces (over 300 Brinell).
2.1.5 Mechanical Seal
Pump shaft seal shall be manufacturer's standard mechanical type
specifically constructed for the service duty temperature and resistance to
pumped fluid.
2.1.6 Bearings and Lubrication
Furnish antifriction ball or roller bearings with full provision for the
mechanical and hydraulic, radial, and thrust loads imposed. Bearings shall
be sealed and permanently grease- or oil-lubricated.
SECTION 22 14 29 Page 3
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
2.1.7 Motor and Power Cord
Motor shall be manufacturer's standard construction for the service and
permanently sealed, oil-filled, and watertight. Fit the motor space with
watertight expansion provisions to accommodate temperature normal to
specified duty. Motor seals shall remain watertight under any pressure
developed in the volute and under a sump-level static head of not less than
30 feet of water; shop drawings shall so certify. Motor control for
three-phase motor shall provide overload protection.
Single-phase motors shall have automatic-reset thermal-overload protection.
Power cord shall be of indicated length, waterproof, internally grounded,
oil-resistant, Type SO chloroprene, with three-prong plug.
2.1.8 Liquid-Level Control
Simplex unit shall have a float-operated switch mechanism to provide
automatic operation of the pump unit when the liquid in the sump rises to a
predetermined level. Switch shall be cover-mounted, and enclosure shall be
NEMA 250, Type 1, general purpose. Provide means of adjustment such as
float-rod stops to allow for variation in the start and stop level-control
points. Float and stem shall be AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant
steel; all other wetted parts of the fluid-level sensing mechanism shall be
bronze, brass, or material of equivalent resistance to the corrosive
effects of pumped fluid.
Mount the controls on the discharge pipe below the basin cover. Enclosures
shall be NEMA 250, Type 6, submersible, watertight, dusttight, and sleet
(ice) resistant.
Control shall be pedestal mounted above the coverplate, and the enclosures
shall be NEMA 250, Type 1, general purpose.
Provide stilling tubes where indicated.
Floatless electrode level controls may be submitted for approval provided
the electrodes are isolated from the fluid being sensed.
2.1.9 High-Water Alarm
Provide a high-water alarm switch complete with actuating mechanism for
operation on an electrical circuit other than the motor circuit. Design
the switch to operate indicated alarm device(s) whenever a predetermined
high-water level is reached in the sump because of failure of either pump
or a fluid inflow that exceeds the capacity of both pumps. Switch
enclosure shall be the same as that for the level-control switch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.1 Alignment
Before attempting alignment, the contractor will demonstrate that the pump
does not have any load/force imposed by the piping system. Minimum
alignment values (below) are for pump and driver at normal running
SECTION 22 14 29 Page 4
SOF C4 Facility W912HN-11-R-0022
temperatures. Values shall be compensated for thermal growth. Limited
movement of the pump or driver (commonly known as bolt-bound) shall be
corrected to ensure alignment capability. Hold down bolts shall not be
undercut in order to perform adjustment.
Shims shall be commercially die-cut, without seams or folds, and be made
of corrosion resistant stainless steel. Do not use more than four shims at
any single point.
Units with drive motor over 7.5 hp shall have alignment jack bolts
installed.
Pump and driver may have an intermediate shaft, spacer, or spool piece
(sometimes called a jackshaft) Based on the motor nominal operating speed,
the Pump and driver shall be aligned to the following minimum
specifications:
Speed(RPM) close-coupled close-coupled spool piece angle
offset (mils) angle(mils/in.) (mils/in. @ coupling pt.)
600 6.0 2.0 3.0
900 5.0 1.5 2.0
1200 4.0 1.0 1.5
1800 3.0 0.5 1.0
3600 1.5 0.4 0.5
7200 1.0 0.3 0.4
Provide final alignment settings as part of the final test data.
3.2 TESTS
3.2.1 Vibration Analyzer
Contractor shall use an FFT analyzer to measure vibration levels. It shall
have the following characteristics: A dynamic range greater than 70 dB; a
minimum of 400 line resolution; a frequency response range of 5 Hz-10
KHz(300-600000 cpm); the capacity to perform ensemble averaging, the
capability to use a Hanning window; auto-ranging frequency amplitude; a
minimum amplitude accuracy over the selected frequency range of plus or
minus 20 percent or plus or minus 1.5 dB.
An accelerometer, either stud-mounted or mounted using a rare earth, low
mass magnet and sound disk(or finished surface) shall be used with the FFT
analyzer to collect data. The mass of the accelerometer and its mounting
shall have minimal influence on the frequency response of the system over
the selected measurement range.
3.2.2 Pump Acceptance
Vibration analysis shall verify pump conformance to specifications.
Vibration levels shall not be more than .075 in/sec at 1 times run speed
and at pump frequency, and .04 in/sec at other multiples of run speed.
Perform tests, including Hydrostatic Leak checking of piping and operation
of equipment, in accordance with